HomeMy WebLinkAbout1502 Bldg C E Lauridsen Blvd - Faculty Administration Technical - Building
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R~~ lc\i:3 ~ c
- APPENDIX -
PROJECT NUMBER 2002-006 H (1-2.)
NOVEMBER 2004
-,-.' -";i "" "".
.' -, ;"""~'\'."'\"'" ;,.
[n III
GOOD-FAITH ASBESTOS SURVEY
ORIGINAL SURVEY COMPLETED 03/18/03
- al0119 with -
SUBSEQUENT SUPPLEMENTS
.-23
I' .'
. --. -~
1 .)
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
I
I
I
1
1
I
I
..: \
")
peninsula eollege
1502 East Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, W A 98362
Asbestos Report
3/18/2003
..
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
. huggybear@olympus.net
Peninsula College
Campus Facilities
To:
Joan Ethier
Senior Vice PresIdent, Administrative Services
Wayne Rush
Dean, Institutional Support Services
Regards To:
1)
Survey, Inspection and Testing
Port Angeles Campus
1502 E. Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
2)
Survey, Inspection and Testing
Forks Campus
390 S. Forks Ave.
Forks, WA 98331
i
I
Inspector:
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
3/18/2003
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, WA 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
. i
To whom this may concern,
Asbestos can be maintained in an encapsulated form and should not be
disturbed with out using extreme cautlon and proper handling.
All materials with a reading of 1 % or greater is considered to be a
hazardous material if disturbed.
This report is not a guarantee that all suspect of ACBM were found. The
possibility of concealed material exist and may be found during a
demolition or remodel.
Feel free to contact Northwest Asbestos Consultants for further assistance,
Sincerely,
Bob uJ~
Bob Wltheridge, EFM
I.U'
I~
It
I~
I
I
.
I.
I
."'/ ".
.(I~i~~:
I i~'141;
~i.~;';'.'
w/ ,,\
,:11;."6'"
. '''',Pi''''
~'~{'}
,.,;. '-,.,.
;' , :~:
t~,~t.~\
I",.,,';';.,'
~~, f;I
I
,~
~,!-'~:~f
1"'Ji'l;;;,'
[~q~
f~;,
I~
I
I"i~;'
~'<'
~. . i'-
I~,.,::~
$iilL
~~f"
4:
WASHINGTON
ASSOCIATION of
MAINTENANCE and
OPERATIONS
APMINISTRATORS
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT
Bob Witheridge
Participated in the
EPA AHERA
. BUILDING INSPECTION I MANAGEMENT
PLANNER
Refresher course offered by the
,,'.;, ~
i~'.i~:~<j
-''tl''<:~\
".'~"';>I\','
'~'rffJ!/j~
<" ",,"'-jii
i_.,.g. <. J,~{;.'t~'
,.l:'~~,y:
t:.:}.",,>cfb.'\.-~
~~~{~I'''~''
~,~~~~1 '
;ff.~~;.'1~.~:
.;,'i# "I'''1!/~W
rt:'. -: "ifif%tl)
'.'. .,"$...:...;~.....Y.
" ''''''''7
~'4~ ,....~\"~~
i<fj.),
".,,,,,.\rf.
f!i:;:;g~{!,::;~~
'~<.,-~,.
~":l;;\WiJ~
:'~;ijl!t~~;
'<'<.,.~
~.i.:'1~}I~~:~
:~>':f'.<.,.%%.
"-.' "/.'~'"
:~~~~:
~'t~'if"1l!7.".
~""'"" .:-:"~
'. .-';-,
~ :f"d.
y/
WASHINGTON ASSOCIATION of MAINTENANCE
and OPERATIONS ADMINISTRATORS
The full day training program
covered all topics specified in the
Model Accreditation Plan under
Section 206 of Title" of TSCA
"
,
The refresher course was taken on November 1,2002
In Silverdale, Washington,
In combination with the Individual's initial certification, this certificate extends
accreditation for the above named person through 11/01/03
~.~~
Colin MacRae Course Administrator
WAMOA-0042--02
Certificate Number
I;,,,.; J{{i[~:rt(';,\l"'~' "~k;'ArCii,^r:i;~^~1,1t.~;'i~Jf,Jtr^~''i:rA~j~~''~''~kt.X~X~;":"";"
~;~~(~~;f.~~~~l&~T~~'~~;iif~;}fl~~~>>~;~:~~~~:W~~~~~:~~~';~~1-~~1~i\~~~~~~~~~1;~\~~lriifJf.{~
'~.:f ~f.,...:..;~l.i.~ '" 'vit~ "'.~9.~s.~*~~:~mf~~~::,,'~~' '~~;':~':;&~.'" '::~'~~}~.::' . ~.r~':o.~' .-:r~w .J".... ~~~/J~)!: ..~~.;..:.~~ ",r1..<.ilJ;;"S'; .~~.~.>=tlilf'~~~'
"'A."". "<""'......"'"',:<"/.....=xv"'''-..,-,vA..'0,>'v.....''''''~'''Y....'''''>',..YA>.''''.7-''.7Ao.'''''_7~''''<::'~..+.'<~.;;I"'...:<"w~....."""r."VA."":_
I n",-",=<---.",,=--.---=~..<:.>. ~'~~''=> - ~.~."",~ -~.~~. ~.~
Index of College Buildings Identified. Port Angeles
) Building- A, Conference Center
Building- A-N, ITV Complex
Building- B, Library
Building- C, Administration
Building- F, Humani ties
Building- G, Sciences
Building- H, Sciences
Building- I, Lecture Hall
Building- J, Western Half Student Union
Building- J, Eastern Half Performing Arts
Building- K, Fisheries
Building- L, Computer Labs and Nursing
Building- LE, Nursing Addition
Building- M, MA Dormitory and Upper Dormitory
Building- N, Gymnasium and Child Care Center
Building- P, Fine Arts
Building- Q, Diesel and Automotive Shop
Building- R,S Storage
Building- T, Maintenance I Facilities
Building- U, V Computer Learning Center
Building- W, LW Lab Buildings
Miscellaneous Information
Short Term Worker
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Index of Bunding Identification:
Building- A
Conference .
Center
No suspect of asbestos containing building material
(ACBM). .
Building- AlN
ITV Complex
No suspect of ACBM.
Building- B
Li brary
Green floor tile. Homogeneous to these areas, B-Ol,
B-Ola, B-20. Mastic negative, tile was 3% chrysotile
asbestos. Sample #1
Building- C
Administration
Off white floor tile. Homogeneous to building and
under carpeted areas. 3% chrysotile asbestos. Sample #2
C-32 bathroom had tan floor tile. This was 2% chrysotile
asbestos. Sample #3
Building- 0
N/A
Building- E
N/A
Building- F
Humanities
Green floor tile. Homogeneous to all rooms. Same
match to sample #1 from building B. It is 3% chrysotile
asbestos.
Building- G
Sciences
Samples taken - 9
Samples positive for asbestos:
#4, Room G-8, Tan floor tile, 4% chrysotile asbestos.
#5, Room G-9, Mastic under tile, 3% tremolite asbestos.
#8, Room G-15, Tan floor tile, 3% chrysotile asbestos.
#9, Room G-16, Tan floor tile, 2% chrysotile asbestos,
Building- H
Sciences
Samples taken - 5
Samples positive for asbestos:
#1, Room H-12, Blue floor tile, 3% chrysotile asbestos.
#2, Room H-19, 20, Green floor tile, 3% chrysotile asbestos.
#5, Room H-18, Green floor tile, 3% chrysotile asbestos.
Building- I
Lecture Hall
No suspect of ACBM.
Building- J
Western Half
Student Union
Building- J
Eastern Half
Performing Arts
Building- K
Fisheries
Building- L
Computer Labs
and Nursing
Building- LE
Nursing
Building- M
M /MA Dormitory,
Building- N
Gymnasium
Building- N
Child Care Center
Building- P
Fine Arts
Building- Q
Diesel Auto
Shop
Buildings- R &S
Storage
Sample #1, Brown floor tile matched building "N" at
2% chrysotile asbestos.
Sample #2, Green floor tile matched building "F" at
3% chrysotile asbestos.
Brown floor tile matches to sample #1 in building "N"
at 296 chrysotile asbestos.
No suspect of ACBM.
Samples taken- 4
Samples positive for asbestos:
#2, L -04, Tan floor tile 2% chrysotile asbestos and mastic
at 2% chrysotile asbestos.
#3, L -18, Multi colored tan floor tile negative for asbestos.
The mastic had a reading of 5% chrysotile asbestos.
No suspect of ACBM.
Sample #1, Black floor tile with colored flecks
Homogeneous to all rooms. 4% chrysotile asbestos.
Sample #2, Commons area. Popcorn ceiling was 6% chrysotil
asbestos.
Brown floor tile with mastic. 2% chrysotile asbestos.
Same as building- J.
No suspect of ACBM.
No suspect of ACBM.
Sample #1, pipe wrap on hot water system.
8% chrysotile asbestos.
Sample #2, tan with green floor tile from the entrance
and office areas to shop. 3% chrysotile asbestos.
No suspect of ACBM.
..
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. I
Building- T
Maintenance
\
Building- U&V
Computer Learning
Center
Building- L,W
Building- W
Samples taken- 4
Samples positive for asbestos:
#1, room T-206, Tan marble pattern floor tile at 2%
chrysotile asbestos and mastic at 4% chrysotile asbestos.
#3, room T-lOS, Tan pebble pattern floor tile at 15%
chrysotile asbestos.
#4, room T-lOO, beige pebble pattern floor tile. 18%
chrysotile asbestos.
No suspect of ACBM.
Portable unit. No suspect of ACBM.
Portable unit. No suspect of ACBM.
Peninsula College. Forks Branch
Samples taken- 3
Sample #1, upper floor storage rooms. Floor tile, multi colored tan with brown and
cream flecks. 2% chrysotile asbestos.
Sample #2, roofing material on west side, less than 1% chrysotile asbestos.
Sample #3, roofing material on east side, 5% chrysotile asbestos.
Date:
2/17/03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
\
)
\
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed 8t.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 21S
Seattle, WA 98134
Contact
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Owner:
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
j
Location:
Peninsula College, building "A"
Sample #1:
Floor tile, 12"x12" with mastic. Light gray, with white and
dark gray flecks. A-8 '
Sample #2:
Floor tile, 12"x12" with mastic. Pink color. A-5 & 6.
Inspector:
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector I Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Please call with test results when completed.
Thank you,
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
I.
I..
I
'.
. .i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
]nspector:
Bob Witherldge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Please call with test results when completed.
Thank you,
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
I'
,
'. ~"Cla,1fnn ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
, t~~ 'J UJ' NVLAPLABCODE#IOl106-O
G R 0 UPS E R V ICE S ' Accredlled Laboratory
.46361;L M.p,J Wq So. Suite 215
. Sc:attJo, WA9SI34
(206) 763-7364
Log#:
Priority:
Project #:
Number of Samples:
33478
Regular B
~)
... \
C. '..J.t Name: Northwest Asbestos Consultants Contact: Bob Witheridge
rob Location: Peninsula College, Building A PO/Job#:
LAYERED SAMPLE: NESHAP and AHERA regulations require layers be analyzed and reported separately. '
SAMPLE #: (1 ) LAYER 1 RESULTS: OTHER FIBERS
Cellulose
Ull 33478,IA
SOURCE: 12 "X12" Floor Tile
LOCATION: A-8
2
No Asbestos Detected
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
OTIIER MATERIALS
Aggregate
Vinyl Filler and Binder
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Light gray with gray and white streak pattern vinyl .
Note: I2'X12"flQOrlile
SAMPLE #: (1
LAB #: 33478, I B
SOURCE: Mastic
LOCATION: A-8
)
LAYER 2 RESULTS:
OTIIER FIBERS
Cellulose
No Asbestos Detected
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
OTIIER MATERIALS
Filler & Binder
MATERIAL DESCRJPTION:
Yellow soft mastic
Note: Mastic
I
SAMPLE #: (1
LAB #: 33478,IC
SOURCE: Not Noted
LOCATION: A-8
)
LAYER 3 RESULTS:
0TIIER FlBERS
%
Cellulose
2
I
No Asbestos Detected
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
Aggregate
Filler & Binder
13
85
I
OTIIER MATERIALS
%
MA TERJAL DESCRJPllON:
White powder on gray gritty material
I
Noll': Underlayment
I
SAMPLED BY: Bob Witheridge
DATE: 2/17/2003
AN0.DBY: Rachel
DATE: 3/6/2003
I
COMPANY: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
,CElVED BY: Phyllis Thompson
DATE: 2/28/2003
I
113 Perki or 0 r N A roved Si alo
O.aytOn is KCTedited by NlSTINYUI. Accreditation by NVLAP does noc indicate mOorscmc:nl by NYLAP OC" rmy ahcr lOYanmml agency. All bulk samp es we Inalyzed in ae<:otdanee with method
EPAl6OOIM4-!2-020(Decr:mbc:r 1982). Analyses arccrc:a-dJcd.cd throu&h illlcJandilllr.llaboraloryqualityas.suran<:e~ fOf'vcrifiCllkll. The perc.entVllluelreporled above we based on ealibnleolvisual
estil1UlleJ by volume U111Q3 vcrilio;zriaj by Point COWInn, isindicaled. T~ ruWllIl"l'JX."U'd relate only to the sampleJsubrnitted by the dierrtlOOayton, Trace amounu ofasbe:sIOlcoaldposribly bemU:sedby PlM.
therefore nea:;J!iYC~ts cannot be ~teed. Thil rqxrtdllll noc be n-prochx:ed aeq:c in itJ entird)', ~idlOut C1l1ytonGroup Services pc:nni.mon. Erra- Rates:: auy,oti1e. Amosittand Crocidolite asbestos:
Qualitative-.OJ, Quantitative..2<4 { TmnoIite, Actinolilc ZDd Anlhophyllitc ubcstot: Qualitative-.05. Quantitativc-.04 A IIxe imOWll of as1x:slol is defined as one to flro fibers fOllJld in three slide IOO\lllU. Nbc:;nOdl
Cound in this amtJ\Illt .....ill be rep::rtcd .Ira<:e~.
I
1'~Clayton
I ~ GROUP SERVICES
4636 B. Mqin.J W., So: Suite 21'
Saale, WA9II34
I. (200)763-_
1c..1t Naine: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
fob Location: Peninsula College, Building A
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
ragcJ.01 J.
Accredited Laborntory .
Log#:
Priority:
Project #:
Number of Samples:
. 33478
NVLAP LAB CODE #1011 06-0 .
Regular B
2
Contact:Bob Witheridge
PO/Job#:
I
LAYERED SAl\1PLE: NESHAP and AHERA regulations. require layers be analyzed and reported separately.
SAMPLE #: (2 ) LAYER 1 RESULTS: OTIIER FIBERS %
Cellulose Trace
U!!1i; 33478.2A
SOURCE: 12 "X12" Floor Tile No Asbestos Detected
LOCATION: A-Sto A-6 ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
OTHER MA 1ERIALS %
Aggregate 25
Vinyl Filler and Binder 75
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Light pillk with pink alld white streak partern vinyl
Note: 12'XJ2"floortiJe
SAMPLE #: (2 ) LAYER 2 RESULTS: OTHER FIBERS %
Cellulose 20
LAB #: 33478.2B Synthetic 5
SOURCE: Mastic No Asbestos Detected
LOCATION: A-S toA-6 ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
i OTHER MATERIALS %
Filler & Binder 75
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
White and gray soft mastic with fibers
Note: Mastic - extremely small sample she.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I SAMPLED BY:
COMPANY:
Bob Wi theridge
DATE: 2/1712003
ANALYZED BY: Rachel Mel za
'-1
DATE: 3/6/2003
CEIVED BY: Phyllis Thompson
DATE: 2/28/2003
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
I Tra Perlci s or 0 r VlAP A roved Si ata
CJa)1ofl it aca-edited by NlSTINVLAP. Accreditatim by NYLAP doefllOl indicate endorxmenl by NVLAP <<my other gOVemmell'l '1eney. All bWlSllnples lITe analyzed in llttCII'dmcc with method
EPA/(,()(l,If.#.82-OZ0 (December 1982). Analysa an: ~-chc<;ked 1hrouch inler and intra labonlory quality as:noncc progr.;un3 for verification. The pc:rmrt vaJua repor1cd above arc: ba$cd 011 calibrated m~
CSl;m;l'es by voIllITIe Ul>JeJvl'rifiearion by Point Counting is indicated. TafresultJ' reported relate only 10 lheJamples submitledby~dient to Oay101l. Trxe amounts olasbestos could possibly be mUsed by PLM,
thcn:{on: DeJWVC Jesuits annal: be gUaf1IlIteotd. nil ~ shall nO( be rcpm::luctd nctpt in ilS entirety, wilhout a~on Group Services pamission. em:.- bles: Cbrysodle, Amosite and Crocidolitc asbestos:
I Quali~ve-.03. Quantitative-.24I Turnolite, ActilloIite and AnulOpbyllilc asbc:nos: Qualitalive-.05. Quanlibtivc-.04 A trace amountcl cbenos is deimcd" 0IIe to two fiben found in three slide mount!. AsbatCl'l
found ill lhiJ arnaunl will bertported as MTr;occ".
.-
I
,
. .I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, WA 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Date:
Contact
Owner:
Location:
Sample #1:
Inspector:
2/17/03
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Peninsula College, building "B"
Floor tile, 9"x9" with mastic. Olive green.
Homogeneous to building "B-la, B-1 & H20,",
,
Bob Witheridge
AHERA-- Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03 .
Please call with test results when completed.
Thank you,
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
..~~!~~~
rage.l 01 .I
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
33479
Log#:
Prlority:
Project N:
Number of Samples:
Regular B
NVLAP LAB CODE #1011~
A<<redlted Laboratory
4S6 B. Ma:rJinaI WrJ So. Suite 2U
Seaule, WA98I3..
(206)763-7364
'. \
( . ,it Name: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
Job Location: Peninsula College, Bu!Iding B
Contact:Bob Witheridge
POIJob#:
LAYERED SAMPLE: NESHAP and AHERA regulations require layers be analyzed and reported separately.
LAYERl RESULTS: OTIIERFlBERS
SAMPLE #: (l
LMUt 33479.IA
SOURCE: 9"X9" Floor Tile
)
Cellulose
Asbestos Containing Material (ACM)
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
Chrysotile 3
OlliER MATERIALS
LOCATION: Homogeneons to Building "B-Ia, B-t
and B20"
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Olive green };iilyl
Aggregate
Vinyl Filler and Binder
Nou: 9"X9" Floor Tile
SAMPLE #: (1
LAB #: 33479.18
SOURCE: Mastic
T,OCA TION: Homogeneous to Building "B-Ia, B-1
and 820"
OlliER FIBERS
)
LAYER 2 RESULTS:
Cellulose
S)11thetic
No Asbestos Detected
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
OlliER MATERIALS
Asphalt Filler & Binder
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Black asphaltic mastic
Note: Mastic - extremely small sllmple size.
\
,
SAMPLED BY: Bob Witheridge
a
DATE: 31612003
DATE: 2/1712003
COMPANY: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
PlIVED BY: Phyllis Thompson
DATE: 2/28/2003
Tra Perkins or other NVLAP A ved Si ata
CII)1Oa is ac.cn:ditcd by NlSTINYLAP. Aca-edilation by NYlAP docs not indicate mdorsement by NVUP ot any other IOYCtllmC:lJt agency. All bulk smnples C'C ~ in lI(;O:ll"dan(:c.mb method
EPAJ6OOIM4-82-020(Dcumbcr 1982). AM/yJc3are ~edthrough intcrandiDlnllaboratoryqualilJ&S$UI'"UlCCproenmI forvnificatiOll. T'hepen:c:nl valUCSrqlOl1ed above arcb8scdOll ~ibratedTisu>J
CSlimues by 'Vol\llJle IIIlIC$l verification by Poinl Countine ill indiealcd. Test I"C$IlksrepMed reJIltc: only to lbe samples submitltdby the c1ienIIOOayton. T~ an>oIIIItJ o(asbestos couldpaaibly be missed by I'LM.
!benfon: negalive reJUttJ cannot be eu..._ Thi, repol1 Jhall DOC be reproduced accpl in iu entirel)', without OaytOl'l Grnup Sa-vices permi$sioa. Error Ratc:r: Olrysoble, Amosilc and Ctocidolile asbcslox:
QuaJitative-.03, Quantitaive..24/ TmnoIile,Actil'lolilc and Antbopbyllite asbestc-. Qualitativc_.O$, QuanIiul:ive-.04 A tr.Icc IIOOUIlI of asbcslot iJdcfined as one 10 two fibc:rJ found in Utmllide mounu. AJbcsttt
fOUlld in this amount WIll be reported .l'r-..e",
1
I
I
I
%
2
I
%
25 I
70
I
% I
5
Trace I
% I
95
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Date:
2/12/03
I
I
I
I
I
, I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
)
1
J
ASBFSTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Contact
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA98363
Owner:
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Location:
Peninsula College, building "e"
Sample #1:
Cove base with mastic. Homogeneous to building "C".
Sample #2:
Floor tile, 9"x9" with mastic. Off white witl,1 gray tones.
Homogeneous to building "C". '
Sample #3:
Bathroom floor tile, 12"xI2". Tan color with mastic.
Inspector:
Bob Witherid~e
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Please can with test results when completed.
Thank you,
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
I~~!~~~
I 4636B.MarginalWrySo.Suite2l'
". Sc:auJe, WA 9813.4
. . (206)763-7364
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
33422
Log#:
Priority:
Prolect #:
Number of Samples:
NYLAP LAB CODE #101106-11
Accredited Laboratory
Regular B
C.:lt Naine: Northwest Asbestos Consultants Contact:Bob Witheridge
lob Location: .Peninsula College, 1502 Lauridseu Blvd., Port Angeles, WA PO/Job#:
LAYERED SAMPLE: NESHAP and AHERA regulations require layers be aualyzed and reported separately.
LAYER 1 RESULTS: OTIIERFIBERS
I SAMPLE #: (1
)
Cellulose
LAB#: 33422.IA
I SOURCE: Cove Base
No Asbestos Detected
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
LOCATION: Building C
OTHER MATERIALS
I MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Black cove base vinyl
I
Vinyl Filler and Binder
Note:
SAMPLE #: (1
I LAB #: 33422.1 B
SOURCE:' Cove Base Mastic
LOCATION: Building C
)
LAYER 2 RESULTS:
OTHER FIBERS
No Asbestos Detected
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
Cellulose
Synthetic
OTHER MATERIALS
I
Filler & Binder
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
I White mastic
Note:
LAYERED SAMPLE: NESHAP and AHERA regulations require layers be analyzed and reported separately.
SAMPLE#:(2 ) LAYER! RESULTS: 'OTHER FIBERS
I Cellulose
LAB #: 33422.2A
SOURCE: 9"X9" Floor Tile Asbestos Contain in}! Material (ACM)
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
I LOCATION: Building C
Chrysntile 3
OTHER MA TERlALS
Aggregate
Vinyl Filler and Binder
I MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Off-white vinyl
Note:
DATE: 2/25/2003
I SAMPLED BY: Bob Witheridge DATE: 2112/2003
COMPANY: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
',rElVEDBY: GinniePsachos. DATE: 2/21/2003 Tra P.,k;n or~ihi:f NVLAPA rovedSi ,to
I OaytOQ iI KCrCdikd by NISTINYLAP. Act:reditatim b)' NYLAP doc:s not indicate mdonemenl by NVl.AP or Il:II}' other govcmmmt qeocy. All bulk samples IIR analyzed in ~cc with method
EPA/6OOIM4-82-O:ro (December 1982). AnaJysct Ire cross..ched:ed through inlCl" BlId inlrllaboralory qualify lI$$IlI"aIIce: proerams for vc:rificalion. The: pcunt values reponed above: are: based on Q.]W.-atc:d visual
. "''''''~ by ..]_ oo]m ."'",,"00 by '.M Coootio.;. ;""""" T.. 'co," ".""",,,1., ooly ,.." "o.]~ ~"""",,, by "" cl;oO 000""00 T~~" ofu""'~ =Id pooi"y" mi..'" by PLM.
Ihc:rc:rorc: nc:pt.ive resultsunnot be: guanntecd. This rc:port$ha.ll not be rq:lfOduced accpt in its entirety, wilhwt Oayton Group Sc:rviCd pennisJion. Enu Ratc:s: Ouylotile, Amosit.c: and Crocidolile asbcs101J:
Qu.alitarivc:-.-.OJ, Quanliblivc:-.2"I Trc:molile, Actinolile and Anthophyllite asbeslos: Qu.alitative-.OS, Quantila!ivo-.().4 A trace amount or asbczlOlJ is defined as one 10 two fibers found in thue slide 1nOlDlt$.. Asbestos
I found in this amount wiD be reported as Irxe-.
3
%
Trace
%
100
"%
3
I
%
96
%
2
%
30
65
..~~~~
J<l.l$"'" VI. ~
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
33422
Log#:
Priority:
Project #:
NumberoC Samples:
3
I
NVLAl' LAB CODE #101106-0
Regular B
Accredited Laboratory
4636 B. MqlnaI Wzy So. SuilC21S
SeartJe,WA98U4
(206) 76J..7364
c
" \
.!It Name: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
Coutact:Bob Witheridge
PO/Job#:
Job Location: Peninsula COllege, 1502 Lauridsen Blvd~ Port Angeles, W A
SAMPLE #: (2
LAB #: 33422.2B
SOURCE: Mastic
LOCATION: Building C
LAYER 2 RESULTS:
OlliER FIBERS
)
Cellulose
No Asbestos Detected
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
OlliER MATERIALS
Asphalt Filler & Binder
Filler & Binder
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Black asphaltic mastic with white thin material
Note:
SAMPLE #: (3
LAB #: 33422.3
SOURCE: 12"X12" Floor Tile
LOCATION: Building C
OlliER FIBERS
)
RESULTS:
Cellulose
Layers Homogenized for Analysis
Asbestos Containing Material (ACM)
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
Chrysotile 2
OlliER MATERIALS
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION: LAYERED
Tan vinyl with clear mastic
Aggregate
Filler & Binder
Vinyl Filler and Binder
Note:
SAMPLED BY: Bob Witheridge
.,
DATE: 2/12/2003
'ngs
DATE: 2/25/2003
COMPANY: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
t.....-
'~r' EIVED BY: Ginnie Psachos DATE: 2/21/2003
Tra Perki S o(tther NVLAP A roved Si ala
Clayton w accredited by NlSTtNVLAP. Acac:d.itmion by NYLAP does nOl: indicate mdonc:mc:nl by NVLAP <<I:IlY Olba- covemmmt qc::ocy. ^II bulk.samplc:s arr; an~ in accordancr; with method
EP^'6OCVM....82~20(Dece:rnber 1982). Afl31ysesare aoss-checked throuah inlcrand intnllaboratoly qu.a.liry BS$UTMIce programs for vcrificmon. The percent vall1es reported above Ol:l"e based on calibr.ued visuili
estirmtcs bY vo/mnr; W1ic:ss vmfi~oo. by Point CouIItinC is indicaled Tc:sIl"e$\Ilu repof1ed relatecnly to the sampJes 'lIbrnin~ by the client 10 C1aytOll. T~ iIDlI\IlIlJ ofasbes1os could possibly be missed by PLM,
Illcrefore neptive Te$\IIIJ nnnOl: be Jll3rWlteed This report shall not be reprOO\Iccd except in its mtirdy, without C13)1on Group Services pcnnimoo. Error Ratc:s: Chrysorilc. ^mosilC and Crocidolilc asbeslOS.
Q.Wiblivc-.OJ. Quantitativc-.2-4/ Tremolile, Actinolite and Anlhophyllile asbcslos: QualilaUvc-.05, Quantilative__Ool A IrKC amounl of ltSl>esIas is defined as one to two fibers found in Ibm: slide 1TIOOlIt$. ....sbestos
fOUlldinlhis~lwillbereporlcdas"T~~.
I
I
%
2
I
%
78
20
I
I
%
I
I
%
I
25
2
70
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
.}
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
. 406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
I
..
I
I
I
I
I
.
.
.
o
D
I
I
o
D
.
I
I
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Date:
Contact
Owner:
Location:
Sample #1:
Sample #2:
Sample #3:
Sample #4:
Sample #5:
Sample #6:
Sample #7:
Sample #8:
Sample #9:
2/8/03
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Peninsula College, building "G"
Floor Tile with mastic. Off white with gray. Room G- 2
Cove base with mastic. Dark Blue. Room G-2
Acoustic ceiling tile, 12"x12". Room G-4
"
\
Brown floor tile with mastic. Room G~8
Black cove base with mastic. Room G-9
Wall insulation. Room G-9
Floor tile with mastic, "12x12", Mauve with brown flecks.
Room G-lO
Floor tile with mastic. Tan with red and brown flecks.
Room G-15
Floor tile with mastic. Off white with brown streaks.
Room G16
1
I !damn LOrOUD 1iemces
, Client: Northwest Asbestos Consultlmu
Location: Pen.lllsula College, Building ]Y' ~
1.-( SAMPLEfll1 . ItsrtiA SAMPLELOCATlON,a;;;;G:2
\SOtJRCE " Floor TIle
JAYERED SAMl'LE, NESHAl' and AHEM regulatiolU requite layers be analyzed an~ ~7P?~ed separately.
No Asbestos Detected LAYERl
LA.UJfAA
~ AlleDtlOn: .1)00 V1' IlBenug"
J
Log # 33513
Job/PO#
I
I
Asbestos
Asbestos %
non.asbesto.
I r
,% other
fibers
nonflbrous %
2S
7$
I
Descrlptlon, OIl-white with lan llDd gray struks vinyl
I
I Note,
I
,
r--
, SAMPLE #; 1
SOURCE: Masdc
LAIl#:
.lHiJ.ill
3.ii;AP::"i; .t,~CXno~\.:l\!u.::Ui. G-2
I
----<
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
No Asbestos Detected
LAYER 2
Asbestos %
i
I
,
! Cellulose
fSYJiHi~i;jJ:
(om oneTl'~
{ill'. ~ '"i~1er --.--
j
,
Donflbrou$ %
9g
I -~~-b'~~t'~.~'.- !
I. _.__._-~
.' I
!
l~"'IH~fbestos
. -- ._.-Y~-otbel."
fibers
~
'i":-:;\r,e
at'!!!!tJrl)!!!
11.-.
I
I i Not.:
r LABII:
I' SAMl'LEII,2 JJ513.ZA SAMPLE LOCATION: Room G-2
SOURCE: Cove Base
I LAYERED SAMl'LE, NESHAP and AHEM regulations require layers be analyzed anli reported 5epfnlo);y.
I NG Asbestos Dt;tc;;t'id'----'.Ti."YItR t
...._J..
Asbestos %
..A~_.'.__-_..__._____~___'___'__~._l.~_~.~~.I.~_
De-sUlptlon:
Yellow soft mastic
\
I
I
i
1% other '----- .... ~no.n.fjb....;il;-.
fiutn t:'Irn _1I~nt!__.
Trac~ Fine Grains
i
!
i
Alibestos
nQD'asbesto~
fiber
CelluloGe-----
i.h~t.J:brou.s %
I
I
I
I
I
IQ
I
I
r ._.-1
Description:
i
Vinyl Filler and Binder
.. -~-
,
i
I
L...__u_
'>0
;
-L.;..u..._
Dark blue vinyl malerl.l
Note:
PRELlMINARY REPORT
Lab6ratDry Data Sheells far lab USI ami fax!nf only. The final report will follow in tho ma(~
Verified hy: ' tz.-t"'- 0 3..(;",. c~:,
'""'-'0' ..."..
ANALYZED BY,
Rachel Mel80La
ON ';;,'1 krl~ i..;~
(,;Iayton t:>rOUD ~eTVlces LAIU'AA
ClIent: Northwest Ashestos Cou$ultal!t$
Location: Peninsula College, Building Y b .~_
l Attentiun: DUD'" nUI:'Hul:I:'
Log # 33513
Job/POll
J
I
(~;~LEII::Z
. SOURCE I Martic
.}
LAJl.lI:
33S13,ZB
SAMl'LE LOCATION, Room G-Z
I
i'---.--..
1'0 Asbe;slC~ DetU:led
I LAYEKl
I
I
;
I
,
i
I Note:
I
';~ - ~... ~...~,..~.~~ '-~~""_.i.AB#.u.,-,,,,-,-,,,, ._........."""""r".
I' SAMPLE #:3 J3"J.i SAMPLE LOCA T10N:RO<lm G-4
SOURCE,. 12"X12" Acoustic Ceiling Tile
I
,
I"-'---~~--'-'
I No Asbestos Detected
I. _..Asbestos - 'r~'bestos %
i
,
I Cellulose
I
I
,
I
I
!
,
I
I
Brown brittle mastic
% olber
Iiben
2
DDDfibroUJ
COmDOllellU
,Filler & Binder
IW""~;"
DonfibroUI %
,,-
9S
3
I
I
Asbestos
Asbestos %
;;;'-.irl;"'estot
rlb_..
Layers Homogenized for An:llyBls
I
! I
I
i ,.
I I
.{
I
I
I Description:
I
...o.o.-.o'._",-_'_.~._ __.__.__~~....._,,__,. ..'~_
I
~
I
I
I
I Cellulos.
Miner.l Wool with B,ads
llon-asbestl>>'
fib....
LAYERED
I.Afi.beOthn~r I non fibrous
, ) com onents
15 IFiJler & Binder
. 30 'Foam
I .
(.mt
I
i
,
-.------j
nonflbNm %
rl ...L--r----' ..
j .Oescrlptlou: \Vblte paint QD tAJI riiJl.vt1,; ,;;;;;:;:~!:~~ri mate-l1al
1__, ____...:..
Il~Gt~; _.. _
k LAilII'
SAMPLE #:4 ;~~: ~;,... SAB.l'LE LOCh nON: Room C-S
SOURCE: Floor iii!
LA y!RED ,~,-!l'IPiLE; Nl'.t>;"iM_l"" A~R~reg'~aIiOI~.! require layers be analyze,1 and reported slpara'"Iy. _ ------'
f' Asbestl! Corntainitlg M;;feriall LA)1:R 1 i
= ;~b"!m (ACj"""IM j~i~:::",,= I;':;;" i _-:,:::~;~_+~;;...;i
, ChrJS"lile i ~ I C"UulO/~ . T I lASHrell<lt' 30:
I I S)'b:!;etic . ! Trace Yir,yl Filler and Binder I 6S ,
! Ii' !
.--- -.----...------,-1___..__.__---L_.l.....___ ..__~___
1__ ~__.. .. ___ __~:':n~~;:~~~~~~~_P.llYtllo"'ltrt~~_~'YI
N~fe:
30
13
12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
:=---::::=======.~=====::=:=
PRELIM (NARY REPORT
Lr:!1Crat~J:~ ~:!" Sr."ff I J Ii" id uu oml fa:dnK only. '[he filial report ",in fol/'ow In the maiL
I? ' ,.( '1-"...-,'
V<rifledb) ~..!:EL~:::':':"'____
J~YLUJui'.
R1cbel Melgot I
o'~ 3/1 V2003
I
I
I.
I
,I
, ')
I
I
I
I
I
I ,',
I
I
I
"
\,
I
I r
I
.'
I
SAMPLE #,5
SOURCE: 1\.fastle
Asbestos Coutaiuing Material
(ACM)
Asbestos
TremoUte
i Asbestos %
I 3
I
i
I
:,
"
"
.;.,.
LAB!t:
3JS13~B
....-.-'
SAMPLE LOCATlON:Room G-9
.i.
I
LAYER 2
"-.'
'I
I
1
i
non:;;besto!J
. fiberJ
Ei'iuiOso
'Fibrous Talc
I
I
1'/' otber i'
lfiberl
I 1
1
DeserlptloD:
Brown brittle mastic
I
I Note:
nonfibrous
comnODents
tiller & Binder
INon.Fibrous Trnnoli,e
I
I
I
,..,--.-....
I PREUMlNARY REPORT
lllhol''''''''ryDntn ShBellsfi" -. ~..O( .. ,-' _'. I'_~.-- ___J'.. '?"L. A.._t "'~_...._ ...:rr I'_n__.:.. fL.. _n;1
. U6-V.... .,._....,..._..-J-.!i......". ...~.../...'--.;-r'-._....-..._--_..----_....- .,~.
~ ,;oJ.
I V.rifletlby: - '" ..l.;?:-:l7~(JJ ----
nQnnbrous %
93
I
L
2
I
....J
ANALYZED BY:
Jhr.hel Mel.p'on
ON .'111212(03
t,;lllvtOD' t.;rOUD ~erV1Ces
CUent: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
Location: Peninsula College, Building Ji6
,..---;;;;;-.- LAIl#
I _~LE 1117 33S13.~C
. SOURCE I Mutic
LAUl"A2l.
l t\.U"DUUU: DUll '" IW"lIUl;;"
Log # 33513
Job I PO#
)
I
-J
I
I
SAMPLE LOCATION,RIlOIll G-IO
i
DonnbroUl %
32
I
I
t
I
i
65
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~M1PL'! ~ ;;..:;
IABI/:
3;"1~.$11
SAMPLE L()i~ATI()NIR.om GH
[-..- --.------,--.. ----. ._.-.._..,-~------._~-~--.
I N I Allb'1StJ)S J)ete('~ul. I LAYER 2
I
A b --:----f .....:...----;-r---".n.iSD...1,;r- rnbicr-,--nOnl1llrOQ. - I -- -
__~I..~l{~___.1 J-U~stos Yo _---1!brL_ Hbtf) _-L_----:~oni~.'neDts_-t-_~b~~;.,
! I Q,I1ul"~c . ~ I~"pha!t.'iller & Binder I 9)
I I SynthlJ'hc . Z I \"fUlIlD'UIUHC .', I
. I I,
~ ! I I: [
.-----1 .------.1~-------L____---L___.._..J
i D<'9<;rlptlOD: Blatk RBJlb.lt1e m"$IIC '
i-.-.....-----L.--,........______________._..-j
I ;~~te:
I
.
I
'I
~;)URCE: M2!.tJc
I
I
,.. - --~---- -------~ .......-...-"'----.--------------... ...-
I
._,
I
I
rmlll'ihi,\llYI:EPOP'!
LRlJDNlI/J ]I . ~'''''' .,~..t 's /r'" III > IL",!! .mli fcorin;; 1/lI1y. Tire final lepon' ,,;11.f1J1ow it: :.~~ ~'41i~
1. '., "":l.' "I ^""
Verlnt:db1., ,--./v,," 1J.;:.1-, ""V-".,
. ---------
"'NAL~~ZEDf,Y.
Rachel Mclg", "
eN' 3/1l1200~
I.
!d!!!lJn ",~"I!l!..;:!E!..!!!=--_,___---!:!!:"~f.!.!:.~'
CUent: N( rJuWI!St Ashestr:. Cou!:ultallta
1 ocatllOD: r~:ii~~'la (;oilegl, :uui~dinllf --6'.
, .l1."~IlIUU"" .LIUU'It" 'IU&~.&IIY.&"" J
,----------"--------
Log: # 33513
.:;~ / ~'C t!
~ .
I
I
\
.J
I
I
.~.k1Jh(., ;.(t.~
'. ._-~_..
.it '~'O.:t \"tr
[ft~;;RED
.-:;;;;;:;;:;.~".:'''---... - '% other -:- " --;:.,,,fiblDU""
L -1ll!l ~ I ~~~,1\} .. :~ _.;~ ;,......J.~,
" --_.~--_..._-
.. -. -- --_. - -.'
1._..
I ~ .:'~ :';.ri~' ..:;. .'.. ") ~ .
I
I
. ._..___..____w.__..... ._______ ._ ....._.. .__.. ._._."..~ _ _._.-1._.__..
Di::5-:r:ptkn: 1'011 on ~~dt. ASp'l1a':t1c: l;i.-:wrl,l)l~ d1r!: ,::-~l.i in flh-.-.')1.:1:. >u~yi~.;
, 'it",;.; ~:~t ::...~r
I'
i
.-'.,....,.."'
'- '
~ .. "".
...,..,.. ..-.....
I
. ..--- --._~.. . ...-. "..-.. -
I. I ~,;~: .' -----.".. ____._i
- ..~_..~~--,..........,._-.-----=---_._- -,'.----.------
r-: - -----,:All." ------
I ~A..~PL ;#l~ . . XIS!VA ~:i.~~~LE!A>CATIOl'l'.~(olnG-lO
I I ~0URCE, h~HIC .
LAYEREl 1 SJu'\1.PI..lI'*l" --_....~ . ~ ..~... ~ "___I_"'J__.. _..._..J_.. ............"...0 ........h'""'~ ........1 ........nr!prl i...nu"':'f,,.Jv~
----....~ _._ ,_~~'=-~ iiUJU M...cU:!.tl~;t.U41."~~,: ._"".~~~_~:::::!..:":'_=~ --r':........::..:...'...~.. ~-- -- i
I. N t .-\Sb'lStl}S I )etectl ~j LAl~::".~.",. -;--~, othe,;--.-- .OnnDroas . -'-~- _ _'1
AsbtStu Asbeltos % 1._ "--fi:~~ 'fib.... -b~:ompon.nts __.__ u~~~~'~
I -..- . I ,;.lIu1,.$O ----r 2 !FiJI.r & Binder 9<, i
1- ,c . I - I
::tjDtuchc ! ,t .
, I I 1
I ~- ---------. r.L;;,,;;; ,..;;.;;;.k;;,~,;;~;"------ --.- -- --.,
I F-"- ---'------------~------..l
. I ____________'---____ _,_,J
I 'SS(-)AUMl'R' ,LEI. I . :~\B ~:Al\1P;~ELC.cATIOl'l,ROOmC~I;,--,--------'
:: ~ ~:' .,"li1or.r THe
I
"""[ .,
,
...j
I Asbes'''.
1----
.i
I
II Note:
.
I
I~u 1;:;'-;;. ;;;; (}",;,~tecJ"[UI'ER :;-----.. ... ....... .-..
1
--- ..-_.~_._._~ -~-----------r.::_------ ~---- -
'I nelH.sl><"O! 1% ot:'~'r! nn~ll.rou. I
_ i ;"sb,~st(,S oh. n_:__.. ,.". .JHteI!L-_----1 nb~~ _ ~. .__ COIl."JL'tlDeots _--1.. DODJ~:':O&J %
" : CeD"I= I' Tt"f.e I.~g~'e,je 1;5
. IVinyl Filh:r IUd Binder 1 : 5
I 11...__ I ,
"-"."n, TU."'_~.,."."___ ___oj
PRELIMINARY REPORT
LaboraJo.,. Da/a Sheet ufot lab un antI fa.Ting only.
. V.rUled by: ~ "^ 6:?' "'1"2 -{)3
Tlte /llIal repOrll"iJJfol1ol" in Ihe maiL
ANALYZ8DBY:
Rachel Melgoza
ON 311 2/2003
Donllbrolll
........_ e:omponents
Aggregate
Vinyl filler aod Binder
,
J' I
I
I
nonfibrout A/. I
30 !
68
I
~AAII""U'" _.v....,~"...".....~
~r1U....~..
\..- ....-----.. _..- ..-~---_..u.
Client: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
Loeatiou: Peninsula College, Building JI G
( SAMI'LE#:9 Mf!~A
: SOURCE: Floor TUe
'. ,
,~YERED SAMPLE: NESHAl' and AHEM regulations require layers be lUlalyzed and reported separately.
! Asbestos Containing Material LAYER I ..- -- .-
J (ACM)
Log # 33513
Job/POll
SAMPLE LOCATION:Room G-16
Asbestos
Chrysotile
Asbestos %
2
DOD-asbettos
fibers
%otller" I
flben
Trace
Cellulose
I ' I
I I I I I
1-' - - --_....--~--- -r--'~;;.r!Pt1;!I: 'Tu: wit:. i)~~~;::k;vb.;;'----~~-'--
1 .
!..- -~--._-----_._--,."'--------~ .~----- .--....
; l\:1lti:
I
---- ------~_._-_._----------~.-----...,.---,~. -- --.-.--
/- ---------.------r::l,C~: ----.~.....-------~-----.- ____._.r__
Sn,l;-lE #:9 3J~!3.9B SM'lPL.~LOC^Tl(JN:Ro)m G.16
SOiJR;:/:: FlXlr T'1.
I
I
"
;--'-NOAsbesws iJetecteri--.-i LAi'i:li., ----...----,--- ..---.. -~-1
r
,r ;
;.~.,~ ;---T-----:-1--.-~~~~',~b~1t~S-----m, (fiber ---~-liOnflb rous I
1__ A,,~estos _-L!\sbe:;t!'~~~" ! "'___ m!l:CI'....___-!J!ben -l----.!~mPJrlenf,__._,._'~,~~u.% I
: .! Cellulose I 3 iF!He:;;' i'.i: HiDder ). 5 I
' I I I :
I I :;:;;;~"e:i" ,I 2 I:~c~;~:us I 'ert.jes II I I
, I I . I~:ir.t 5 i
"_-' ._____----L__.--1__...._____1__.._._, L,_,""_"-j
,___, ____.. ._____~'CrlPtlDn: T.Dmaslicv~I~~'~rlsa"dP..bt'PD,=___ _'_.___...-. ._-.~
; l;c~: 1 Dable to seplllnte mastIc [~t. ~DJ[\1~u~1 ~'.laJy.'il~.
,
J_..___ _...._...M ,.....____~____________~__.______~~__~.._.________
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
p'^tE~ ,J MINJlRY ltEPORT
Tllbfl'lloryD.ta SA'eet h for lab u.# am!fir:r.i.'g or-!.v. T,~,j.'nal "'Port lI'il1/o~.", lit rhe maiL
verilldloy, ~~(\. O.?":I-~L-___
ANALYlhl BY:
I.achel Me18 ':<:3
eN :11J 2/~'):3
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
Peninsula College
Campus Facilities
Contact
Regards TQ:.
Contractor.
Insoector:
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
Wayne Rush
Dean, Institutional Support Services
Survey, Inspection and Testing
Port Angeles Campus Bldgs. G-15, G-19A, H-18
1502 E. Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Bob Withe ridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
4) Copies for Vision Builders and Wayne Rush.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SC01)e of work
1) Building survey and inspection to inspect for asbestos
containing building materials (ACBM).
2) Survey, sample and record suspect materials.
3) Report to Wayne Rush, results of testing by Clayton
Services testing labs.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspection Report
Samples were taken upon request from Vision Builders Construction
Company. The following samples were taken:
Sample #1;
From building "G". ASB wall board. GI9-A of chemistry storage
room.
Sample #2:
From building "G". ASB wall board. Classroom GIS, south
end of room.
Sample #1:
From building "H". ASB wall board. NE corner of storage
room. H18
All samples were sent to lab for testing.
Date:
7/31/03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Contact
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Owner:
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Location:
Peninsula College, building "G" continuing.
Sample #1:
ASB wall board. G 19-A of chemistry storage room.
Sample #2:
ASB wall board. Classroom GIS, south end of room.
Inspector:
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11101103
Please call with test results when completed.
Thank you,
13~~
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r~ ~. ~~ ~~-~~
..........,. '-'" -,~_. -~,.._~-
~
\. ~...._....&"",.. --.... -. "'----e.-
~.&.---
'l..-lillyl.Uq '--.U..... ~'Cl" "pj~
Log 1# 34561
Job/PO'
SAMPLI< LQCATION:GI9A 0' CbomiJ1rY
CU~t: Nortbwest Asbestos Consultants
Location: Peninsula Conege - Building G
l.AJlI,
J.4Sli1.1
.'
Slo"'1" llDom
... '"
aodiibroas nonlibrollJ %
compulltll.lI .. ....-
fill.,. a: Binder 17
. "
.' ....
.,. . , .. ..
5, Soulll EIld of_
-" ..
nOldJ1>rou' -
COII!I!!l~tI DOIlfibrou %
Fillt:l' 11 Bindtr 80
..
----
- -- -.'
(,
SAMPLE-,l
I SOURCE: Wallboard
"-.. .. .
ASbmOll ConUiDiD, Material
(ACM) HOMOG
-_.....~-.. .- --- -
Asbestoli Asbestos % u01hl1b<<b>l
_____u_ ___ ... Dba"
Cbryl!Otile 20 eenu"t0s4
---
ENEOUS
~~r
3 . Minerti
I DoKrlJJllo-: Gray IIbronl _titioul lD2urW
Note:
1..,- _.., ."
SAMl'LX#:2
SOURCf: : . Wallboard
.=
-.. i.AilII:
34561.1
SAMPLE LOCATIOI'i:CIusroom Gl
AsbestOs Containing Material
(ACM)
HOMOGENEOUS
non~ ,- otller
lib...
Cellulose" Z Minernl
Asbestos %
- --- ~---'-
18
Asbestos
CbrysotiJe
D..<ripllon: Gray 1lb1'01l' _1l~1IS IlUltoW
NOlie:
PRELlMINARY REPORT
LlJb4Nl"", Dam SIo_ ufDr Cab 1I,. mulftaing OII/y. TIu:j/R4I rep.'" willf6l/DWin 0.. ",oil.
Verified by: \(..nr-. {)'\~f'S"'-O ~
AN^L Y'ZEO BY:
Rachd Mols=
ON &1512003
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Date:
7/31/03
Contact
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Owner:
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Location:
Peninsula College, building "H" continuing.
Sample #] :
ASB wall board. NE corner of storage room. HI8
lnsoector:
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Please call with test results when completed.
Thank you,
t3~~
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
nuu WI Cw~J ~~'~W
'-I~YWJJ. V~UUIJ ~ta vn;:t::~
L~.l'n.Ll.
\.. ~"",.u.L.lVll_ LOU..., .,., ..LLII...... .'-&6"
PREUMlNARY REPORT
Labor4tory Dllta Sheet isfor /4b use 4"d ffIXllfg O/Ily. The fUl4/ reporr wiU folio", IIf the ",.iL
Vertfledby' ; \2...\rv\ \)~-O')-D~
ANAL\'ZED BY,
Rw:hel Melgoza
ON S/512003
JI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Client: Northwest Asbestos Consultants Log # 34562
Location: Peninsula College - Building H J<>b I PO #
LAB#: C
SAMPLE #,1 ~%.1 SAl'oIl'LE LOCATlON:NortheJlSt orne
SOURCE: . Wallboard
-
r of Storage: Room R18
.- -.. -,
ofibnJuS ""
nDDDenls DOufib.-ous %
er oft Binder 80---
"--- --
-, -..-
--
Asbestos Containing Material
(ACM)
Asbes~os
Chrys.otile
Asbestos %
18
HOMOGENEOUS
_noll-asbestos . - .~ ot'ber DO
. " _ _ ,.fu"Dn fib... com
Cellulos. 2 Mina1J Fill
D....riptio.: Gny fibrous UllIOIItltlDUS material
Note:
TnTQI
p en I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Summary of Insoection:
The lab reports give a positive reading for asbestos material.
All material with a reading of 1 % or greater is considered a hazardous
material if disturbed. Asbestos can be maintained in an encapsulated form
and should not be disturbed with out using extreme caution and proper
handling.
If further assistance is needed please contact Northwest Asbestos
Consultants.
Sarno Ie #1:
From building "G". ASH wall board. G 19-A of chemistry storage
room exhaust unit. 200;6 Chrysotlle asbestos,
Sample #2:
From building "G". ASB wall board. Classroom GIS, south
end of room exhaust unit. 18% Chrysotlle asbestos.
* Other exhaust units in this building were homogeneous in material.
Sample #1:
From building "H". ASB wall board. NE corner of storage
room H18. 18% Chrysotile asbestos.
Sincerely,
~ob . .
Bob W~F.M,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
Peninsula College
Campus Facilities
Wayne Rush
Dean, Institutional Support Services
Procedure for drilling holes in asbestos board.
1) Place duct or masking tape over entire area to be drilled.
2) Cover taped area with vaseline or shaving cream, Apply more as needed to
keep most during drilling.
3) Before drilling, use protective equipment. Latex gloves, half face resperator
with approved hepa filters for asbestos.
4) Use a drill bit sized for hole needed. Drill at a slow speed.
5) Wipe all areas after drilling and removing debri.
6) plastic bag and label as to what contents.
7) Contact Northwest Asbestos for disposal.
8) Enter the information in the management planning report document book
as to date and disposal.
Insoector:
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
I
Iii,
)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Date:
3/03/03
Contact
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Owner:
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Location:
Peninsula College, building "H".
Sample #1:
Floor tile, 9"x 9" with mastic. Blue
H12- Also homogeneous to 13,14,15,16 & 8.
Sample #2:
Floor tile, 12"xI2" with mastic. Green
H19- Homogeneous to 20.
Sample #3:
Floor vinyl with mastic. Green with yellow flecks.
H-21
Sample #4:
Floor tile, 12"xI2" with mastic. Light brown and dark brown
flecks. H-l
Sample #5:
Floor tile, 9"x 9" with mastic. Grayish green.
H-18
Inspector:
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
- )
Please caIl with test results when completed.
Thank you,
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
LlanO" ,-,roup <:>ervlces
J...,",.D.I"j~
~~~.~.~.uu. .u';'u '0' llL&.:\.a:'V.5':.o
Log # 33529
)
Client: Nortbwest A"beEtus Consultants
Location: Pe:llJl(ill.ia (,dj(~~e, Building "Hit
I r SAMPLE#:l -.. ".... .-'--}!!,yl~\-. SAM1'LgO-:."TI;:",;IP~
- .', :!OIJRCE:' 9"X," Floor Tile
I
Jobl PO#
I
. 'l~' Asbestos CODtiiin-iiig Alaterial
. .~ ~.:!-""~'..'n
,-- -- -, i
-.....A;b~i~~._. -"TA;il'~!;-~~- 'f'''---llon-a,l,cnii. -
_' .._.~ ".~ I In_ liber.,
Chry50tile : 3 I '-'e!!UIOse
1 i
! I
i___ __..._~-~~.-~~~==l~~-=-_~:;;;.~.n:
j NQte: Unable to sepante mastIc 'for hltllvidual illUj)'~js..
i
,
1
i
i
I
... . . - .. ----.--1
Lll,yt.'J'1; HOlllut;lt"uUoCU fur .\>>i1:,.;:; I
I
Ln.l' "1!;:.-{:t~
--r-- ""'-
. Mnflbrou. %
I -- 30
65
I
L_
I
I
I
'----1
I
...i~~~t\.
I ,lUg,.
I 2
I
I
I
ilbnfibroQs
i components
lAggregllte
I Vinyll'iller and Binder
I
l__
I
Bl~~ ~!~y! ~!t!! ~~!~~~ brown mastic
I
--,'" .."., --,-', ~,_..
i
,
;
,
. .~-' ....,
I
I
I
i
/.
SAMYlE #:1
LAl.;":
33519.2
liA,\lP~t,-OCA 1'J(I!J:,H 9
~'C\}.~:('t: lz"Xt2"- Fl~1l)!" TH~
I
I
,
,
r
I
~-
As bestos
i ,'''.,-1':< ';--:111.11',.;", '.'f,i,,['(',,/
.:-,..,1...:__._ '-.J . _ _..,1....:."1.....1....... :&_
l~..r'!\n
-~- -- .. - - i
;'.'.l:'lr~ H'I'l~: p'J.1.IH'1:'[ ~~r- l\!\ltysts
1 . .......,.......T"TI.
L1nJ.l:,.~.v
n_ _ ..._ .___P ....__j t
t\_sbesto~ ~/~ i non~fi5b~to$ n. "~--:,?J., otber 1 Donfibrous . ,. \- ~:::,'t': ~-i
J i Cel:;jJos~,-f.ih~r." ---- . :~,~n-t~-g~g,i~"'j!~~.n.ts_-----+-- ~~__../;hr.o_:.::. i
I , J lny; f"."er and: ,)I j .r
i
"I
,
I
,
i
II
Ii
I
I
,
,
j---...
I I Note:
( SAMPLE #:3
I I S.:>UkE: l~,or Vinyl
t-- . "NO Asbestos Detected
i
I
I
1._- _ .__ _ ., _
,
::L:::~-~;'j~tile
,
,
I
--L..-____________..
I
I
...!
I Description:
", _ ,.L_ '...
Uoable to separ:ltt masfic rot indivjdual 'Inalysis.
Green vinyl with bro,",'B mastic re.'iJduc:
,
.i
LAJl#:
3;}~;9,J
SANP!.E LOCAT!O!'!: !ql
La)',,., Homogenlzecl for Anily.I'
I
I LAYERED
L...._~~_____
,\ h O!. I nOon-asbEstos -1% I)thcJ" I nonflbroui
~...~.....e~tcs ,,a , flh,"r~ . fihrn; ~r.l~n".~:,;ntS
-., .,., "'^... -. --I CC1lulo~---' -, "'-'-'''--'--r-'''f--IFiilcr'&!f,;~i~-""-' .
, ','
I ,iFo81n
i !Vi;..)'! :~';Ecr -and Bi~dtr
I I
, ,I
-- ---I - D~~C~-i~Uo~; - -G;~-n~i~l~i~;-f-;2;;;J ~~~utit
,
. ....u...-.._.._. .____L.._.__...uu..___.n _"<nnn___. "_"'''_''''_'''_'__'__' _._ ..._._......._
) ~'Y'\."'; Un.1blt t<.r se;>,;u\e ~~st:c for individual allr;-':d.T.
I-~--
Ad,leslos
I
'l~nnbl1lt;; of.
t.,
I' s.
2,
_....L_____!
!
,
"
____I
I
I
r.Jli:i.-:.}-JJ.F;.\RY ~EFf:RT
LiWv,."I;1'J'];olllJ Shut Is for lab u'" andfa:.c;"J,'nly. The;inal report willfollow ill the maiL
Venil.a by: \ '" I, '; I 0.3
,
~~;'l.\1.Y7.?n Il~(:
Jude Currmings
ON 3/17/2003
I
L.:~:Y;:on \.rrou~ u~rVIC~S
L.f"-D.r t\A
l r\.,,~.ul-"V.l..l. "':'vv .., .1;1,...1\...1'...5.....
--.--.-.--,-"----
Lag #33529
Job/PO #
'I' - -, u--:.ontibro'ill'-.. .
I
I .. .., ~C!!!!I!,"ents
IAggregate
! ~1;l';",,1 .~ilIer and Binder
I -,--
) I
..---..." I
. i
I I
---1
i
I
,
~~:':"u~ I
" I
I
!
I I
"'-j I
'\
Client: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
Lcc~tioD:Pe:nIt1~:I.la CoUege, Building "B"
LAR#I
3')Sl!~.~_4
. r SAMl'LE#:4
, 50lJRCi 1 i2!'X1Z'! Fluor Tll~
,
,LA TIRED SAMPLE: NES1IA1' and AHERA regulations requir~ layen txl an21yzed ~nd rep~rted sep'!attly,
i ~.-.. No Asbestos Detected' .. i LAYER l' ..-
r---~-'-"'''' , LI' --:;';n-uil!.1'~~i _" 'l~b:~~'
i.__...~~i'tto=-_ _....1 Asbestos % '. fib.f!.. . ..
i I J Ce::u:".. '1'"".
I ~riptio~;-;-i.dium broWll ~ktd V'.~l' ... ---
,
~_... _______~__._____.___.___ I
1 Note: lJ"x12" Ugbtbrown tIoortilewhh d,rkbrown neck,
I
I
i
!
I !-:CvJJ:r1~ '. ~~~~~!!:
S"l1!'LF.I<QC~TlON:}!-1
'-I
r
1
I
1.,
ri.:C.h
- .--.--.-.. ---.
--_.... ..
:ii".r,iTL~ :;';':
;.:;:;;::;,';;.fl.ii
- ---. ,- - - - .----. .......
.... "~"'.n .. " .... ........ ....,. ~_.
.....r~.'.... ....<1..1 ....................... .......1 _.' __ _
j,.--,_...,-,.. ,.,.." ,-,.._--
! Nli/jSfJc~'~IJS Dt:t.:;~...ted
I
!"A~YE~l ;,:
i
1- __
I nQn-U~r'iti}j1
A5bestos 6. ohpstos 0/.. .
..'-.--"..t C.:C.-;.:_~.. ~.y '-~C:llulose -..1i~,"L
I
,
r'-'-'
1% other ilQnfibrfJ:.:..!'.
! f!';t.:!:~__~_ '.n~':'~~f.l'l~
( 3 (Filler &. B!~1~r
'17
I
J_
,
I
'-
!
I
Uiesc:nptIOl1!
T.in rnll,stlc
I
I Note; Tlln masUc
i
( ~AMPLE thS
! k.:::t'll~'l.:: ~.I".x9" 1:0(01.- '.file
i....:C)..)~:Tirl15,~r.'i)Dr."lf; j\!iL5:a:Lf' l~l'J .\I:URA tfg,lll~tio{\S r~q\\1r~ l~ytr~ be 11l:it!yzed 3'/'V. repon~ft, s€parately.
1 _~_'"_ _,...~
, Asb~t()s Containing Materill.i LAYER I
fJ,'~~~'i)
I
LAO_:
3~~1~",5A.
h~--""::
'I
I
I
J{
i
i
,
I
I
uvijntr01:ii'% :
I
SAMPLE LOC.:\T!QN:H-l~
Cl:I)'w':'d1e
.-1..______ __,_ ___..
A iE'h~t^C! 0/_ i non-asbestos
............"'''''.........." I n~"T1!
J Cellulose' .. ",'CO."...,
j
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.,_.......
,
i Nole:
1--- -.
Asb~~t[lS
!% oCher
'r.c
i!~!-,~f
,
I .~
I
I
I
I
nonflbrou$
I
,---,~
I
,....., '-.---------...-.... --..... ''''-,
,
i
,
i
I -;-r;mjJi'j;'!n'ts;
IA g".
\ ggre ".,
;-";;<;1; nner and Binder
I
I
70
I
Oescr1ptlQn'
Gm. l'lnyl
I
9"x9" Grayi'b green noor me
fRELij;.jIHARY REPORT
La;'''I.I~.-} voliu Slteetls/or lall uu andfaxl;rg ~nly. IheJinal reporlwW/ollow in the maiL
Verlileli by, ~ L3 {.1 ( l,) ~
A.~^LYZED 6'1'
Jude Cummings
ON )/17/2003
I
I
_14~'WtA .._,;!!'.'U'.....~ ~...."," "'J".'t,,':l..'1'
A.r'.v....r-,...l"J\;.
" ......._"""".....,"'.. ._-- ...._.._._..~.
---_.~,~-_...--
Log #- J35Z9
,.
,
I C!!etit: Ncr+..!n~e:t J,A..f,be~!~~ 'C~!::;~;lh.u.t:i
Ulcation: Peninsuia ;Sollege, Building "Ii"
"6b I JJQ ~j
L.\!jo~;;
.:'i;:~:t~-:;i?,
n~~!.: "t:r-~~"(~ .r.:..:io;
---
)
I
~
,
i
. ''Y', O';~~<f j .'mfibrous ..------ll-~~~l
I:, fibe7 . - componenu ,- ~9 rou
IFiller & Binder I r7 I
! i!
J j!
- !
I ( SAMPLE 1'/,5
.ir -. ~ SOl.TRC~ ~ M"'-tie
)
Ir
I f~=':~~~~S!~S
I~
I !.-...-,-.---..-- ---.
I i'iou: M,,!u~
:
I'
S,\"\fP!.E I.OCATIC'N: tr.,1tJ
No Asbestos Detected
~CD.JiteJ.tw
! .~~~!.~~ _~ "be... .
: ~...ltnl^....
I i-'''-''''
. .
I
I
..._......._ .1.._,. ....._.._.
",. . ~
i LAYER2
I
I
!
J.
I n..._....l~.:......
. .________ _ L_.=:~':.."=--"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I PRELlJrDr-.;.ARY RE:CORT
Laboratory Data So,,, is for lob liSt! and filXilIg on(v. The final report will follow in the Inal~
VerifltdbYI ~,
I
.,31,,'o~
ANALYZED BY:
Jude Cum.>nmgJ
ON 3117/2003
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, WA 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Date:
Contact
Owner:
Location:
Sample #1:
Sample #2:
Sample #3:
Sample #4:
Inspector:
3/03/03
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Peninsula College, building "L".
Floor tile, 12"xI2" with mastic. Off white with gray flecks.
L-Ol
Floor tile, 12"x12" with mastic. Tan with white and purple flecks.
L-04
Floor tile, 12"xI2" with mastic. Multi colored tan tile.
L-18
Floor tile, 12"xI2" with mastic. White with dark gray flecks.
L-20
Bob Witheridge
Al'IERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Please call with test results when completed.
Thank you,
. " ~, ..., ...................
"-;;;:'~= ~ -::: -... ~~_: ~___. .. ! ~a.._ .. .~.~::"
.......... .. ........." ....... ,......1':_""'.'1;"; A A......~~
I AttentIOn: HnbWjtheridge
'-
!
-------1
I
!
l
. ,
;
!
) I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
,.
I
Client: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
Location: Peninsula College, Building "L"
'---"h
i SAMPLE #: I
) SOURCt: 12 "X12" Floor Tile
. ',-LA YERED S~":!J'LE: !\'E."iH..U ODd AHEM reeulations require layen be ll.ni\lyzed and "ported separate)}', .{
L No 'ASb~;ios rieiect~-- i rXiER i -.----. - .. I
~. .^'.~"" ^"~!" % I ""';~~' I~~"; ,::::;. :G;;"~" !
IjCCIlU!O,.--------. ! bt~ ~~::;;~:;~r3t.dBmder -.- i :: -'---1
L.J I L ..--L.j
Description: Off-white vlo~'1 with gray alld 1&0 ,treaks
Log # 33527
Job/l'OIl
LAB~:
JJSl7.1A
-~ -----....
SAMPLE LOCA nON, trOI
LAlliI,
JJ527,lD
SAMl'LE LOCATION: L.Ol
~l.i".U-U \.iruuu ~~rVICeS
LAIH<'AX
l Attention:
Bob Withp-rlrlall
.....--a
Log # 33527
-.-J
I
Client: N'jrlli'I'~J1 AS!;"J::O~ t:onsuI:taOii3
Location:. Peninsula College. Building "L"
Lrn,
335~i olD
.f9h!i'O#
I
SAMPLi. ;;:).
SOURCE: 12"X12" F100rTUe
1
)
r
.)i\MPLE LOCATiQN:L-\:':
I
I
Asbestos Containing Material . I LAYER 1
~_.. A.>lJ~ius ,~AClV7 ~bestos % - f .--' r.O=fi~;';--~:;
ChrysotJle r-' '2 --fceuurose
. I
I I I
I i I
L-.. I I
\
I boufiurous
~ ... components
. A g~cga1e
[Vinyl Fmcr and Binder
;
I
i
I
:~ ~'ther
..ilibe7
i
,
I
I
I
..!
I
1- '.'__
...-
I SAMPLl #,~
SOURC);;: M.stlc
,
f- Asbestos Con/lllli/ng Material' " LAc:':.R 3
, (ACM)
t~;b~~~S'~'! Asbestos .~---k::.. oon~~s~stos
Ct"".-t'Jo I 2 IC<""'tfO
'.) ,~, , '. I .
I
,
LAB#:
JJ327.1C
"---'''--'--.-,
. . j- nonnb~u. %
-~I
I ;
, 67 I
, .
.....~
I
-~
i
I
"
I
!
i
.oj
,
I
Descr!"d~ll:
fan vInyl witb brown streaks
No~~:
."--'.
!~"~lZII i~ii ;~ul-: nilt wiiiie and purple tleck~
SAMPLE LOCAfION:L.Q4
I
I
I
,
, '.~"'-n'%'
1 d L1UV'", :
I
I
I
!
.I
96
I
10/0 ()th~r~ -~ nOlJfibTIlUS.....-
I. I
___I rtv~;::~u-----L-- ~~~ componentS
:2 'A5phaJl Filler & Binder
,
i
i
I
1-
."~I' .-'-'
I Description: 8J2d; ...sptlaltie !I)astir.
'___.._... ..t~,_,___.______
-----'----. ..
j
-i
~
I
I~._.".,-
Note' AI..,.I/' ...........~:-
I I. ._'~_.. ...-"...
r ~M,IPlF 1;?
I $OtlRCf,: n"~u" "lr", T!I"
[LAYERED SAMPLE, N~SHAP ar:1 AHr:,'J;. ;'>Jgu~.tiO;13 ,'.quifo "yefs be .n.lyzed and n;po;'to;" 5eparatel~_.,
_.. ..'."..-'-__'.__.....__'m__ -... 'r --. , "____ , ._.
I! N~ A~b~~t0S D"tE('t~d : LA",,'ER 1
! A~~~~t,~s_,--T~;.~~s-% 1-~'--' nonr.~:~;sto,
I ! !,:;(:;'.-,-lyl:
LAB#::
J3~2L'.:.
-,_._-- .~.
. ~ -- - -.
------~, ~-;...==:;:;:;
Jii)lYLE LOCATION: L-l<:
I
i
I
~--{
I
-,I
,-,,,_c..-"O~;o~
I 69 I
!
i% other
! tlbers
I
nOn fibrous
J. .____~c~~P..onents
:Aibr~6di.;
IVinyl Filler;md Binder
I
i
I
. ,__.1........ ,_. _
I .
j--.-..--'
I
-1
!
,,_I
I
I
f)
IN;;t.: l2"xl2" Multi .olored vinyl tile
D~tliption:
T.. vInyl
I
PRELIMINARY REPORT
L4boratory D~(a Shell ij for tab use !!,u! fe.ing or.!y. The Fmal report will joi/ow in the maiL
I
Verlt'Jed by: y
-31 , 1/ 6-3
ANALYZED BY:
Jude Cumm-iIlgs
0:>1 Jil7/200J
client: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
--_.::......- -.. ....-", ........& .""'~(J LfiD~~"
\. AUeUUOn: 110b Wilheridge
LGg # 33527
) I
I
r--...-...
I
i Nol.~; M"!Io----..-~---.--- ....---,--, ..___'.,____ .
r:i '~A~~lP'~J:'II':4"". =c.-~='=~=-.-~[t:i\~', .. '~,-;-;.p"..~.,..C'~~Tl(-.~: ;-:20 -~~--==~-==~~==-:
... l~ ~. ,J]!;l;}.<:A ~'fUll ,...,!;J...J 1\.....:. ; :...... i
' SilURC, , D".UZ"'loor 'fie i
lL.<-YERli,1) SA1'HPLE: '1ESHAP .m~ AHf;RA ngU/a:.lODS /'e'lu;,,, 1,,1"'. !>o O~o!~!eoJ "'ld r'!'orter separat(:h, J
'-"-'--"~---' ..---.--.--. .---,..--'--......--..-~.. --I
I r; 0 Ashes.tos J);;tc~led J.L\:ER 1
i I
j' . '~slesto;'-- T~sbesto~-~-I" non.a'besi~.---ly. ofiJif--I----..."onfbr>Jus .-;- ..; -', ,;/
,~-_.., -- ---',.-- ,.~~:"__r:bJ:~._ --_~_J1QI2'!"!_---L__...,__ ~']r!:~o~.e~.h. _-------i._,.__~aD _..rou:.~
I J l..:ew.: IV.:)\:; Ti3ce !/\t)tr'2gate ) 3:: !
, I I !'finyl I'iller and Binier 'If I
Iii i I
.--.--.-._--.L__ ~-r- ._-1-_ -~.. --~1.~____-1___..____ '-'-~--"-'---'-----i
I h~~r!ntion: mitt! vl~,'J wHh hl(Jrll- -0....,., ...~.. ..........,.,,,, I
L-~"'~tic... D4~:......."la '"'...11'..._.. ~nn.'H;l;i7 ".... "
..,,," ....... .. t,.-LUU"U..I ""'VJll;.!;~,. -DUu~.r! '...1
r-"
i SAMPLE #:3
.. SOURCE: Motlle
---..... --- -,--:-... .
A.!bestos .."ajntllgMaterllll I .'L,LlTR2
r .'~M)' .
t--.'...~~_b~_t~,- - J ~~~;~s%I---=n.n~~;~:';:o;--- !~,)~~erT __.;,~~:;::~, --I'
el1 iiI r ~ jr.c,:lulo/.e ,- 1 INFhalt Filler &: Bjnd~, !
' ., ,ryso . e I 'I i: I
, I I I
I I' j ,
' I I !,
- ....,......, -'. ..--....- .L___,_._..,__.,,___.___ "__ __._..., __---L ..,____...;
Dmrlpti.}u: Illtck asphalllc ma/tle
"'.1IJ',
J';S.n..!B
J.h f PO #
SAMl"L<: LOCATION:L-lt
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Date:
3/03/03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Contact
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Owner.
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Location:
Peninsula College, building "M-MA" (Dorms).
Sample #1:
Floor tile, 12"xI2" with mastic. Black with colored flecks.
Sample #2:
Popcorn ceiling located only in the commons.
Inspector:
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Please call with test results when completed.
Thank you,
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
~~-..::''''''". "'''''.'''1''' ".\-t.".-<y..'
L..'"lD.l' fL'\.
I- AllennOn: >>00 Wltbenllge
Ciient: Northwfst Asb~stcs Consultants
LC~;lb(/!l: Peninsula CoUege, Buildiug ;, M-MA" (Dorms)
r "~~~~~;';::":'~~1" _, - -~.. I3~\ SAMPLE LOCATION, None Given
[I ~v,~ _~ :', ~:~' .~ ~=-l~'e
... rhlultiUi1 rnnfCJ';ft;nh ')\'1-1...--:..., I
r:....,.....,... y... ......y..,,_~..'"' 0:. '_" ..-'''~'1'~ J
jio.C"'l) I
,~ t. HOMOG!."1E\J'!iS
I, Asbes' tOB I
non.asb,stos % other-
Asbestos % fib", libm
Chrysotile 4 Cellulose - -- - I
I
T ., # ....._....
L;;g j"':>"''''
)
I
Job! PO#
I
I
I
1
I
f"---
I Note: No ,ma.tic pr"'"l
.----- M_
(' S~1i'I.r. f.:~
I SOVHCK I :~vp':':'nl Ccijiug
t,
I
l_
.---;.
,
_.L__.._.....
!" nnntlbrous .", ~
i . LQh1p.onents' ~~~brous %
IA3grr.gal~ I' 2S
IVinYI FiJler and Binder 70
I I
1 !
. I
I
I
-..==1
I
n,.. "'_~j
I
,---1
I
':J~t:.".~~~l\JiI;
In'1i'!tD ~tlt'i\k~d yira)'.
~.XBf,'.
JJ!.J.i",2
[C1lo1PLE LOCATION:Jl1lbe commons
I
Asbesto's'Containfrig Materl~1 -r--'
(.~C!V1)
Layers Homogenized for Analysis
I
LA...Ei.2D
,. -1% other[- nODfibnH,.!s.'
,.~~ .. -1r\:1ln " ;~m-?_c~~nts
I ;J Illln::r ~Dm'J(:r
I ipsint
I :
I ~
,
-'--rf)e;~~;r:-~;_~;:;~:~~~~;Wblte f1brou; I~mpy mattrls'
I
. J' '; non.l!sbestQ~
;__...!:~~!-,?S___J :.\sbe~{)s ~:~n,'.._n' ,Nw~__
t.uf)'soiiJe ! 6 ; ~elluiosr.
I
i
--j. .._~ODm:.rl,/US %,,/'
, 01
! 30 I
j
I
I
I
, ---____.J
I
;
I
1
I
~,---
I
1--;;. ote:
!
I
POpcorn Ceiling
I
I
I
I
I
I
P!lli'.LIMIN.A_RY P-EPORT
LabOT(.'~f-'I-:' n Itr:: Shed is fOf h!; U.ii rnJlaxing only. Tk~.'JJral report wiil'/)~'OW ill/he Mail
VerIfied by: ''1- 3/,7 J () ;,
ANALYZI!b BY:
JlJ~e Cummings
ON 3117/2003
I
'\....I;?tl'IOU '!o..Tt.VU!! \.,t:l w'~'S'f;~_~-!:-~
l nu."~l"'VU. _uu T' ~"J.n... aw.l:;'"
Log # 33533
Job! PO #
}
I
I
Client: NOl'thw~st A3bestos CllllSultants
Location: Peninsula College, Building "M-MA" (Dorms)
(-.--... LABII"
. SAMPLE #:1 3J533,j
, . SOURCE' 12"X12" Floor rUe
--''''-J
-~....'"
SAMPLE LOCATlON,Nooe Given
l!.
"!
I
I
.
~...- - --- I -~-- - .. ". ..-
Asbestos Containing Material
(ACM) 1 HOMOGtNEOUS
.., ~ , , - ".~, ~,- ._- 110 other " -. no.Obrou.
Asbestos non.asbestos
Asbestos % fi~LL ... Obers <olll'onen
-.'--
ChrySotile 4 Cellulose I Aggregate
Vinyl Fillet llIld Bin
I ....!-.-
I Des.rJptlODl Brown streaked vI.yl
, .--- ',.., ' _..~
nonflbrool %
25
.
der
i
I
1__. ....__
I
70
I
I Note: No m..tir present
,
l~ .___
(. '--- -, .. --..... ....".
, - .\.M 'LE-.~
Layers Homo.~."lled for Analysis
_........_1
--I
!
i
q_....A
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
~ ..'h ~ ~~,._.""". ',_. ~'.' _'_' ...........__,._..
LA~'
3353J.l
-_,."-'."'~'-~
. .- - -
SAi-l.llLE, Lo.:ATiCi'.,:~ii a.~ ~(;lllmOnS
SOI'KE: POP''''D Ceiling
I
r-ASb2stn9-co';taining Material
.................... !
l V~1......l't'.I.J I
__~~____._____ __.__._.__ ___ - "_._ __ I
I Asbe to i \: b U ...;---i.u-'-u-noD.asbestas t% orl1.r I nOD fibrous I
l----'rh:<~;ii~.u--)..::,,~-es~os 0 !ceilulo'e-.1iberL.-__.-+~be~--~Filler & ~~~~;~~~f3- -u---'-i'-~~~brou' %
I . . ' ,. , ...., - I .
I IPamt
1
I
I
L
LAYERED
30
I'~-'
,
I
_______J__
i
___~ ___J
I
i Description:
,
_._' _....._______-L_....
\\'hite paint on ",'bite ilbrotlslurnpl m3teri:a1
;
!
... -"',
!
I
I
I
I
1._~.Dte:
.. """:.'0 ~..l'lo~
PRELIMIN'ARY REPORT
^NAL YZED BY:
I
I
..
I
I
L~h1:!'z!~.",;' D::-.!~ ~~:;:~ :.~ (:.' :":1; .~~~;' ,.,~:;;.f;~.~.;;~, ;:... ,:
: '-~!.; .'
.' _....... ....::: ..;._J:.._.:... .t... _",;:'
. ....-- -.- .. U-J ~"~_.. ... r.__ ...__.
;-.,.;.. ?"'--;---
,low.. ....................6.
V,rified by: '~,_
.
c.31,-j,',<,.3.
0:-1 3d //2003
Sample #1, Black floor tile with colored flecks.
Homogeneous to all rooms. 4% chrysotile asbestos.
Sample #2, Commons area. Popcorn ceiling was 6%
chrysotile asbestos.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
~ 2/17/03
Contact Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Owner: Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Location: Peninsula College, building "M, M-MA"
Inspector: Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Date:
3/03/03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, WA 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Contact
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Pon Angeles, WA 98363
Owner:
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Location:
Peninsula College, building "N/Gym"
Homo. in various locations.
Sample #1:
9"x 9" floor tile with mastic. Light brown with dark brown
flecks.
Inspector:
Eob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector 1 Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Please call with test results when completed.
Thank you,
Bob Witherldge, E.F.M.
Client: Northwest Asbestos Consultants Log # 33528
Location:. Peninsula College, Building "N/Gym" Job/PO#
I r~~~LE #:1 ..... . - lifz':.~A - SAMPLE LOCATION: NOD' Glvcnl
SOURCE: 9"X9" Floor TUe
'. ~ LAYERED SAMPLE: ~SHAP and:'"IERA regubtlolU re'luirelaxers be analyzed and reported 5eparalelY.:~
I Asbestos Containing MaterIal 1 LAYER 1 I
. (ACM) .- ,~r. I
I ..b...... J "'b..I~:;::C'''~''. ;:":::"j ~=::~ r;~ro.. , i
I Chrysotile I 2 I Cellulose J i~~n~le:~l:' and Binder I ~:
Description: TaD vinyl with brown and whit. streaks
i__NOle~'~X9" L1oh, brown 1100";, ";;:. ~;~~ :,.,,-~ "",I:>' I
I (-:~~#~ ~~=--=~~ }{lr:'lo SA'~;~'L'n.OC~TJ~l":N.IIIG~,;~ ,--==---==~ _. \
I SOURCE: 1'L....
I )--- Nl" _~oj,..tns I'etec.'ed
I
I ,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
"--.- '--. .,.. '---.-
I LAYER 2
I
---..------. -------'-1.'__ _____.
Asbl !'')S ' A 1 t HI j :'''ti~lS~''I''
-----. --------!~~~~- ,--, Wlli:L_,.
'~ellulc se
.___..._1
." 1% !lH:el" "'-----,;"onflbrons --... .~_. d._ -;
J f I donfh..:.us" V I
--r~crf--!A;PhSJt-;M;l'~~:'~,~;' .--t---'i--- ,
. i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, WA 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Date:
3/03/03
Contact
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Owner:
Peninsula College
1502 L1.uridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Location:
Peninsula College, building "N-G" (Pre School).
Sample #1:
Floor tile, 12"xI2" with mastic. Brown with flecks.
Inspector:
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Please call with test results when completed.
Thank you,
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
\..AUY\Ull \JIUUU Q~ln\;c.;,
L""UA.'l"'l..t'-
\.. .&'"1....."'1111..1....,..... _..,~ .. .."........&.....".....
)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
Client: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
Location: Peninsula College, Building "N-G"( Pre-School)
_H ..~.___
LAIl#:
335.11.1A
Log # 33532
Job/PO#
(
\
I
., \SOURCE"J:Z"XU"FloorTile J
. \..~ YERED SAMl'LE: NESHAP and AHEM regul3tions require laym be analyzed and reported separately. 1
I: N'~.~~~'~'~_L~;::'~~_:_~?di"____ ";""W'--~T---;:!
ft ~:~t(l~___~~htS(')S % I fibe" __ !1l!m.. _ com DenIS . ~~l!.'!~~
I I I Cellulo," I Aggregate 30 I
Vinyl Fill.T ,nd 11;;l'l.,- 6\1 i
I i I ,I, I
r I Dtscriptlonl TSDvlnyl I
! Note: 1l";I1!Z" !!r~W!! ~~~,. !!!~ ",1!h ~:~!<'..! -. . -- , -- -. I
I
I
1
I
... I'" -....---1
nont1broos ~
87 I
I
I
, , .-.....1
SAMPLE #: l'
SAMPLE LOCATION, NODe Given
( SAi\1i'LE #: 1
i SOURCE: Maslfc
'I'
I
,
f------~------------I.--... ~-. ,
i A,beslos ~~_S.!l.eS.lo..s%
I I
, I
I
i
'..,,, .___..--.L___
LAB#:
3m1.lB
SAMPLll. LOCATION: None Given
No Asbestos Detected
LAYER 2
I
,
,
~__n____
" ". ... --~~D-:;Bbestos .------1% other
., cciiuios~"l)ll.tn___~',?
I
i 10
I
I
I - nolifil;rous----'..-M ..
components
IAsonalt Filler & Binder
I '
,
i
I
i
SY\"libc:tic
!)~j(r.ptjon:
DJ.2ck 3sph:i.Jtic m.iitic
l-~~_...,._
: N6te: Bl1cl;Jtu;!tir:
I
PIU:LL'InN:AR Y REPORT
Laboratory Data Sheet iJf(lr Jab us, and f4xi11g' ~.':!y. T!::{::::! :::p::n ~;'i!!f:;!!:;-;;.';,. :!:~ :::ll;!..
Verln~ by, ~ .,/1716'\
AN'AL YZBD BY:
Jude Cununings
ON 3/17/200J
I
I'.
..
)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Date:
Contact
Owner:
Location:
Inspector:
; -, . . ~<:.;\:.":.
. . "~ . - -, ~,""t' .' ",~:-, ~. -. .~. ,~;.
. . ~'., -.", ." .' . ::l .;' 't..~')-A,'.;' .'" " :.>.;:~.~~:;. -,...:"t,.:.'. .
Northwest Asbestcl's Co~sultants .
406 Reed 81. .
Port Townsend, WA 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
'--.. -
:; !:~/ ~ :. .~~.
2/17/03
VIsion Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Peninsula College
. 1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Peninsula College, building "N- Child Care Center"
Survey found no suspect of ACBM
Bob Wltheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
I
I')
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
~
3/03/03
Contact
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Owner:
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Location:
Peninsula College, building "Q' (Automotive).
Sample #1:
Pipe wrap from hot water system.
Sample #2:
Floor tile, 12"x12" with mastic. Tan with greenish flecks.
Inspector:
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building Inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Please call with test results when completed.
Thank you,
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
i
1-... ___.n''
i NQ~e~ p!.........I< M:'\rt:r
,------,~.........., "_'n...
';"":'olI:'"-:":::'~~' I~t'{"'r" "'wi? .\A,;, L...'"\.D.l"AA l AttenUon: .uOO Witberidge
cilent: NQrt.hwest Asbestes COllsultant! Log # 33534
L()O=J~"'.l1: l'enlnsula College, BuiJding"Q" (AlitOl11otive) Job/PO'
~AMPLE#'l J.:5!1.1 ~.....t'.~).~ 1"C.".'T}. ):~:;J.:.~ ~':Je-:SfI.I~~
SOL~~:~iP~-=~~ ---.. lAH"
, A.best(l~-CO!lt!!lnl'1g Materiel -r .----- --. L.,or; P.NnG~eniud rot A:.lrol.
I . ( .
: ACM).; L).YlF.m; d
K" ] .. "', nOD...beslo. T%'oiber I . -iiollfibrnns . r~-' I
-, Asbestos _ ' Asb~~tos % .'.. fib... '. ~_. 'I' ,_ '."'PDDeD". __,I DDnllbro.~s %
Amosite ~ sEllulo.. I 10 ,Filler & Binder 70 !
I ! 1M"'" W"'... ,.... i " : . I II
I I I I I I I
I-------~ .. n___) ~,~;;;o;;,-"",;-;.~,,;;;~ ;.~ ..,,, '.'h;~~;_" "..,'.":~ I
Note~ lJ\~~ '\'n.'~J I _
r ........., ," !i:il" "M'.. '-"''''O"N... G~c . '" , _ .. - i I
i SO\JR:::E: "::":!12" Ficer Til;t . 0 ("r .. '." 'I, I I
~~~R>i::u. :;Ai~ULE, NESHAl' and AHE'!A ~eguJationHequjre layers be analyzed aDd re!>o.rted sePDratel[,,--------I
I Asbestos Containing Material r' LA fiR 1 I
I.--.~.- ~AC~I ..-___:~_L.__~ -...._ .....~ ..."""" . _ _I " I
I!..~__~sb~~~o~____ ,Asb~t')~J"_.L__.t,p_".:<__._ G,.... CDmpDnent~ i _~(J.n~~r~ I
C!J~J_lln!i~p . .~ ! AIlgre2ate }(l j
Ii . . ...-.. i -; I IV;;,l ~mel "';'; b,nde, I 67 ,r'
, I' . I I.
I .1 ,______ ..m_~L_~.~! . i I
i r:'l"';':'"~IJ-::i.l'''l: ()l"-wnj?1," -.L'11' with gr~n streaks ~
I .. _____H --1; I
Note: lZ"aI2" Tn floor tile with grun tle<:~.
,
1_.__..-.--........--,-... __...___.
( SAM;lE #:2 - . . M!:'~B SA\1PLI: LOC._'fI'')N:NoDe Gh'e. l, I
i SOURCE: Mastic
l . . 1
J No Asbestos Detected ! LA lTR 2 ./ I
I-A''':-'('-''- '''\: X 1 'or.'.~~:'h; . r~'b;e'~:~-:'.: "...~.'o:'i:;;:.Ill,' ~
I~IJ};~' ;~s _', AS'es'I!&~~ i_ _.-.n~."'____' t i 8.ntloro..% I
I ' +':,1',);,." ,. i...........Eo,mpOll.eD.L .....r.....nii.n.. I
1 I I ~. .. - . - ! .; ,....,J;;h:ii: i'j',l~r & ihuCie. .I
i i I I I i I I
I ..---L-...l i I J j
r" "," Dts~-~);i~~':--Bl~~k as;h~i~k~~~fC--"-.~." -..__.--~_. .. ~.'. I
__L. _... '''__'"
I
"----- . ---..-' I
ANAl. YZEO BY,
Jude Cummi}J~!f
ON 3/17/2003
J.
'1'
-''''-,
I
-------- ..----. .-----.
PRELL'tlINARY REPORT
Lab.,utory nutu S"~et is for lab I!!.' ,,,-:!j'lO;int, <nly. t::'J;rllli '~port ../ll/Q[[ow In 11:. mail,
v.rII1ed by,
1(-
,',I, '7 I 0"">
I
ClieiJt: ND.;i:~,.~;,L~L'.Jt.;~ (;..:':&~~A:ltJ &:.Dgi# 33:;J4
I Lllcat1on: ;'i;JIl!l$;jtn College, Bb.~~!~.l: ;;.~', (.Au~or:'llt've) _-----.!ob 1,~'1
r ,...~. - .-... ...-.." .~.' '.
~ SAMPLEI~:j ;~::..;.;.. ,),,";.'ll",... ........:..10 IV."'rl:~t .... ";.~~ .,7$1....11
SOURCE: ~ ,:<- ',o-i'
, \
)
....,...~-~_....... . "'" ..-""""'-'
J
'I
I
- ----1
I
As'bi:st~~ (;uJjtaiJ)"jl\~ M..~er!('i
( .""
AL.l,
. . ... -- .----.,--- .-.'-- .- ~
L.yen :aoIll6tall;;~~ for AnaJyrll
I
I
I I
LAYERED
Description,
- -.I%...viSsr--II----;.v;;::;;;~-i.. . ... I
1;1..._ ......_......j,ot,....... : P<t)!lttbr,l)1J1 %
,--- i .--~.~-- .. ~
I 10-' t;na~ lli.'lder r---7Q I
I 12 I : I
I I i
I' .L
Whitt fibrous woven and whIte fibrous compressed powtle..., material
As"j . . .. . , . non".ub'l.io.
oes G':; f ASu~.itus ~'o I r.:L__
AmG~it;-- ---',-'" .-.-8-......;. -ici!!~I~e 11.,,~..;f_._._
! ! Mlne~1 Wool wi,h Beads
i i
I
'-' - -~on~-ait;esto$ '--'-" . % otber' .-!-. ,-- nonfibTous--
ASbes;os % ftb.e.rL,__.._...___ DbeD. -IAgg,e~eOln onenu
Vinyl Filler and Binder
: ~---- -___J ,h,;,,;;;o;;;;;;;;;.;;-.;;-.;;;.;;L, --
, Noee;JZ.;xlZ;" T~g'll~o';;)~-~.ith green tl~k... --- "--- - -..- - ~-.- '-'-'--
I
I r SAJl.IPLE #:1
. SOURCE: Mastic
Il.. .... No Asbestos Detected
II
I
I
I
-"'-"'--~"-- .---
N ole: Pipe Wrop
SAMPLE #:1
LAB#:
JJS34,ZA
---'-'--'. .._~.~...,.. .--.
I
I
" ., ------' .
I
I
I
SAMPLE LOCA TION:None Clven
SOURCE: I2"XI2" Floor Tile
LAYERED SAMPLE: NESHAP and AHERA regulations require J.~'p.r.1;N> 'n~lrze(!:lnd reported separately.
'-Asbestos Containing Material I LAYER 1 '--..,-
(ACM)
Asbestos
Ch rysotile
nonfibroU5 %
)0
61
;
--- ..---..----...-----.....
;
LAB#:
335~~.:U
. ..'-.. --
SAMPLE LOCATlON:~oD. G,,'e.
I
I
A.b6!M_ - r;""IM %
,
j
1%' other
fib....
I 5
r
,
!
Donfi'Jl'i!!.o'J
components
A,phall Filler & Bin4er
i
i
1
,
I nontlhrour 0/... j
---..--,.. "9S''''':'';
I
i .
-- ---.-..--... .~....._- -----1
I
~,..~_.....
I LAYER 2
I
I ..
I non.ashestos
I .Jitters
Ceilul",.
I
-1 ;
l. ~~C~~I;~~;-.-BI~~k.;;~b-~itl~-ml.tic
I
I
~_.
'.---'-..-..-..-
j
.__1
Note: Blatk mastic
I
..... ....-----.---------.-.-.--- ----....
t'RELIMINARY REPORT
I LabDratory Data Sheet islor lab use andfax;"'J ..'"~"
V,rified by: .' '. ~ ' C'"
~.----_..l_....-.-.l,..--..-.... ..
T!!~ fl.'!!!! ~~;f:~ ~/:!! f~!!~:~' in the ma~'L
A.";AL'rZit: BY:
lude Curruning'
.)~~ ':,:7'2:v)
I~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed S1.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Date:
Contact
Owner:
Location:
Sample #1:
Sample #2:
Sample #3:
Sample #4:
Inspector:
3/03/03
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd,
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Peninsula College, building "T".
Floor tile, 12"x 12" with mastic. Brown pebble floor tile.
T-206
Floor tile, 12"xI2" with mastic. Brown with tan and gray flecks.
T -106
Floor vinyl with mastic. Yellow pebble pattern.
T-I05
Floor vinyl with mastic. Off white pebble pattern.
T-I00
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Please call with test results when completed.
Thank you,
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
,
no~r~.~;: % ,
^' ,
'. I
II
.1
-~ I
I
,
I
,
i
I
-i
i
;
,
r.cn!1brou, % I
..~
91 ,
i
i
I
i
"~-l
i
I
..__..-._~
I
;
, . j
...,,----...,
I
J
-~. -'I
-,~.-=-;:'- --- -~,:!...:..=.._:.:_.:"_......____.__._......_*1~...'n.n.. \... ~LLl:UUUll: DUl) l'Yltoerloge
Cllent: . Northwest Asbestos Consultants Lo1i! # 33530
Lo!:atll)l1: Peninsula College, 1502 L1<iurl.dseaZi1illiev?;:.rcl, Port A~~vlt;S Jobl PO 1/
!:A:lU'LE ,,~1 E~iA SA]I.lPL~ LQCATION:Bulldlng "T", Room T-206
SOtJ'ltCE, 12"X11" FloorTUe
) LAYEn:l1> ;)JJli'::'LE: W!.$W' and AHEM l'egal~1I0ns require 13yers be analyzed and reported separately.
.,~ - . - . --- .. - - . ..
Asbestos Containing Material LAYER 1
L... (A~k .
"_A,-sbe'Stos _.~ Asbes!os %
Chrvsoti!e ' 2
I . i
! I
I
...0..-__.1,'
. '---'-'.
nOD-asbtStos
Iibel1- .
. '% IttbU;- . - 1H:!lflbtoU~;
fibe... 1....____~!"poDen~
:'h!lylF'!H~:m::! 2!~~~
i
I
j
L
i
I...
10'
: DClCel1pti.", Tan marble flO<)r tile
I
i
, Nu~: ~~r llie, u:: :;;. il.\ brown pf"ulilc nOor Hie
(" ~'~~.~~l:;;~~;'=='~~~" .=-
. i ~Oj)rH:;p...! IH.'l:.t't
\
r----- -, - -_ .
I Asbestv. COlitliining iHateriai
L____ __. (An~
Ashejt'H j
(:h;";;-I'tih --,,, !
- !
I
I-AIlIi:
3j!:jt.l IJ
S.J~lPLI. VC:CA110:'J:u.';.laci~'d r:1", lCDom "/-206
, LAYER2
I
.... ~...+- ,';o."two, . 1% olb;,: I" ..-, Dan(broU$
Asbestos _~~n_~__ . __'n_nJlli".: ..... ..-l.!l!>~_~.. " ..campou..,'-_"
4 i Ccliulos~ i 5 ~a1l Filler & Birc!.:<;r
! '
I
,i
'j
, i
f----~ .L TD"~~,ip,iO-;;;--;I~~k .~;;h;j;;-e"';'~stJ; -.. ..1...n.. ..... ... "- ..
1_.......____. ...-.- .. I
I ",-.:~:_::~.~..~ ;,'., '. ," :' :;", br",.,"" i'.~..:" ..u'" ,,'r
(-;:,"~;i;~~;..-._"c-="~'q:~.~~J~~~:-,.";~;fPLE~~TI~N7Bulldlng "T", Roanl T-l06
SOURCE: U"Xtl" Fioo.Tile
i
~LAYf,~~ ~~~:; ri~~:;~~d'lI:! AHE~~1~i1~~i r"~llit' 11):e~s i)~ ~o"r.m<: "f"j uf'or.ted sepuately,
I
,
.n .,' '__., ".1 _ ..
I--..-:\sbestllf_......J .~bestos ~ ----=r.~.~~$l.'
I I '
I I
II I
I ! I
I !
~._--- . --- -... __J__. _____,_., .uJ___.
I
'~----, ----- ------.
- ... ..... ".,- ....-i
l ~~~~~~.r~~4s_ f' n~nfih!"~!!$ %'1 I.
I ;!;Y'Ut'\~,.
jVh'}li fiil:,':.'~!d 13i!l:Jer 100
. . I
! I I
. "
;
.~
j
l~~ other
I f1h...
r-".-'n
!
- ----- .------ ..~
..------.--.,..-.-..,
!l::-ri.:-';ptj:':i1:
I
--.
T~n mar"'!,: PO)( tUe
i Note: F](ltlr tile, 12H x ]211, brown with tan and gray {lttks
. /...,----,,, ....,_n_ .,,___ __.. ___.. .nn__..
. --~~--. .-.-
PF"HM!NAR'i' REPORT
,laboratory v.."ta Sit~ f' f"!'~~ u," an<lflIXilIg only, Th"f;H~( report wlltfoilo", lit the mall.
v,,;!!~ ~j" \ t (\7 to >_......._
M^L.YitLJH.Y:
I"ta.;.")' Peridl'!
ON 3/1712003
)
I
"-.'---'
II
I
./
._,
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"
I
I
I
I
I
I
...~.-.......;;-~.;:r...o;:..::;:"""'~'~":':::~._._.___..._.__.....~~"'':~
l... anc:DIllml >>00 1'ltnerJdge
hg #. 33530
J
I
CHent: Northwest Asbestos CousulWlts
Loeatlllu: Pen.insula. Ccllege,1502l..~:~rid!;f.!1 F,)111eV!m!, I'ori Angl!lllS
UI!/PO/f.
I
( t:.o_~!l'LE II.:!
J SOURCE, Mastic
)L
I .
!.AlIi.
3J53iUB .
SAMPLE LOCAnON:lluildlng "'1'". Room '1'.106
I'
~~ ASbestosDetecte.~_~YiR~-'
Asbestos __~bestos % ~ Qonfj~::ol. ~~.r j- -. :'oc;~~:::~=t-. -DO!lnbfOUI%1
--1-' ,Cellulose 10 !FilIi!t&Bi!lder 90
i. I i I
! I
--.---. . b_--..L--,.
I DtfcripHon, Tan m.sII, J
I N,'" "", '" ". , "". .,,~ "~ ~ ... .., ,.~ I
~ (~:~I'~:;E;:;;:~:~=V~'~:'I'" .. MfC1 S)'M1'~t LGi:.HlO,~:l!~ilti.3& ,71-, L<oom T-105 '1
, ~", ....< _ . _ ..w. ~, I
I r--- &b,,';; C....~;'. M",<iilT - - ~"" H.;"'..,," ., '"'"'---1
I __---.5~~~-u -----~---;,~~.:-"'b;tc,~.n:~?,;lbT___: .. oonlihr.i,,-----r ---r
- I----'-\.sbegto~ .____f-/-is!?':~!?~ ~/.--t~.. __ .Jio",.., .____ i !'~P'" _ L c . <"m~v~g~' ,--, 'f-~'-"-"!~~!."~~~.J
CJ::~,~~~ti~r.' . 15 ! Cellu1o.c.e ; U , /myl fdJer and ihilOe1 .cif! i
I i If;l1~- /). ~L ,', '~"r ",-,!
I . i' "",',~ LO ..~'" .. i
. , i !. iA,ph'll EII,,,~' :",'.0,," "J i
' ,
r-- ..---.! '-' TD~~r!;!!." '-T:~~~;~:;~~;;;~;a-;b..;~~~i::;;b bD 'lIbrous 'b~~klng a~d black asphaltlc]
I-N~t,;;'Y-;iJ~;;p;i,bl"p~lt'TDfiI ti~~r ,Lyt' !:'~,h!. ~; S'P:'~~~."ijC iro; "'b"'ION~~I,jDjDg VI~~I b~tklng ro~indhld..! en~~
I (' S~:I~~;~~~"-' ~'.~~='~"~'~-~-- 3\if:'~s~~~O~.,'jJON:~~Jl'Un: ,,;~: Room ~-IOO '.====0=1
I SOUKCJ:<;: ~Ioor vlnvl ,
. . !
1---.-,,'------, ..-.--....---.----- ..--...-.. ._ ,__.. ____.. _..-{
~AJibe~tGS CGl1taining Material. : L.y~l': n"IDogenized fnr Anol)'.,i, i
(ACM) i LAYEfU:D I
. ----.-.'.-r--- '~o. T- - Don-asbe~.- ;~othtr!-. ~:;::~r~::;;u.~-. 'r----..-;
Asbestos .~h.~~~~.y.~ .~.;~______. __l;;t'~..._.+_ . ,"'u"~!!<!!!L_n I~~~~l;.....~.:~..l
! Chl}"softh; ! 18 ; C~!Il~l.~.~:, ; \; IV:"Y; Fj;iu ;;,r.~ ".O~JldEl ~Ij j
I ::":ll<::~ 3:t,~~, ., I
l--- --- ~''''"... '''';;."';;;~;.-.;L.;;-.;.; .;;,.;;;.."." ~.i..;~;;;;--I
1---.-.-.--.....-----..-.--..- _ wllbwhl1epowde~_ no ,_. " . i
! Note: Off-wbJte gehMe ,~rt..t!""lP,c'. floor vir.~;t ~~pb'~ t, t.P.pf'7g:~ mrntjc [filllJ 1'1.~),.,H~;.~~J!.JJt.~.:g \,j:1Y~ :':~~J..d:* ibr iudjvidu.aJ Imlly~"j
1._. --_. .---..... '."'.' -'- ..___ ..._. "_" .._ __.__....__ _ _.I
I'
I
I
.'
I
I
.'
I
I
PRELIMiNARY REPORT
LaO"raiory iJ4~~ Sheet is or Iph U~B and fa.xi"R on~.,. .!hL" /7w:; ~rpr.-; k';'./f~"~/;}"1' in: the maiL
.,. ~ '7II'F-
V::-:n~bj"; ( ~I
/' -~-
AN^L Y.(~'::n ";Ii":
Tracy PerkiJ~
ON 3/1712003
I.
Ip
1\ .,
)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I' )
I
I
I
.'
I
I
I
,
-
I
':,
Date:
Contact
Owner:
Location:
Inspector:
':~;:~~1~~"i!j:":(;:;~~~~rv:i:
. -.~ :' , . . ~".,:.~:.:' '.:' .
<'.;
" ::'..~
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed Sl .
Port Townsend, WA 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
2/17/03
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Peninsula College, building "D,Y"
Survey found no suspect of ACBM
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building Inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
I
I'
"
rl
I
j
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
,."
I,
I
~
I
I
r
I
~
I
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed 81.
Port Townsend, WA 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Date:
Contact
Owner.
Location:
Sample #1:
Insvector:
3/03/03
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Peninsula College, building "Y" room 5.
Also homogeneous to building "U".
Floor tile, 12"x12" with mastic. Grayish blue.
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Manage'merit Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Please call with test results when completed,
Thank you,
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
" "~,i~a:i.!.'l~i!.~i!.ll~._...__.._.."__....~JUJ.ttAA
Cllent: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
LC4:lIti')D: :r~n!nsu~a College, 15021.Qllridsen Bhrl!.,l,')tt Allg6Ii:&
l AUennon: uob WitheJ1l1ge
Log # 33531
) I
Job I 1'0#
'"" " SA:\~LE ~:1' .Mrt\~ SA~PLE ;~.\'r!o.NE8UUding "V", room 5 . p , -~.11
' '. SOORe!!:, U"XlZ" F1l)l)r Ti!~
. . t LA ~ liAi,\IiLt:1 i~~SilAi' aDd 4RA reglllatiODS. ~equlre layers be lIDl.,Ip:ed and report~ ~~l'~!~!~!Y.'.____J '.--.
No Asbestos Detected I LAYER i I
I !
, Asb~t~~---I !_~hestcs % i' ~:. DOD;;:':..~~'__ I~b~~e~. T_____~;;;,;::~_ ....__ 1- "onllilroUJ % I
Cellulose Troce lVinyl Piller .nd Rin1er !Il'l
ill I I"
L I . I
. I ..~.. '.., J ,I I
I.. ___.____. .__.____. _ I D_~~~_on: _~:)' ~~~It l~:: ~'__ _ ..___ n, ..._
t ~:~~_~':~~.~:o_':'~~:Il~ Abo homog.4~m tv b"ild;ng'U". 1 I
r -;~::~:~:~:D"ttkd ... I::' ~'''.m;~''o','_"' ,;Vo, ,-, l '.
r/- _Asbestos _.__-1 A~~es~o'.s. oe,v,o_ 11 .---=:nfi~~e~~to. I%'otiler I nOilnbreu.-, Ii
~ -- -- Jtiben"!-. tompol2"e.O!~____t-~~~.~rOiJs% I
i j :c:!!~:~_: ! I j;;::':.~~:d~ i:~ I I
~_. ...----.., i . iiLi;;\on: Gold .,aslic i I. I
1 . I
I 'I
------ ---- -----
Nott; AI$() homogentous to buUdiDg "V".
I
I
'.
I
I'REUMI:-VUH..RF.wwr
[,,:t!JIJrrl(l')' ""~"'I~.!,_.p.1utt 1.sforltib V.!f' (!11I..flJXl'n~ only.
~J""J ,
VerJn.d by: \ 0" ':>117/~
Heflnal report ~.mf;;J!o'" In the mc:/!.
ANAL YZEO BY'
Tl'1cy Perlc:mc
ON 3/1 7/2003
I
I
I
I
I'
..-)
Date:
Contact
Owner:
Location:
Inspector:
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, WA 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
"'J
"-f," _
,": .
"
J
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
:1
I
I
-,'
I
I
I
I
~'
I
2/17/03
VisIon Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Peninsula College, building "W"
Portable Unit, survey found no suspect of ACBM
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
"i"
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos .Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, WA 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Date:
2/24/03
Contact
Zenovic and Associates, Ine.
Tracy Gudgel, P.E.
519 South Peabody St. Suite 4
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Owner:
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Location:
Peninsula College, Forks Branch
P.O. Box 1635
Forks, WA 98331
Sample #1:
Floor tile with mastic, 12"xI2". Tan with brown and cream
flecks.
Sample #2:
Roofing material on west side of building. Darker silver gray.
Sample #3:
Roofing material on east side of building. Newer silver gray.
Inspector:
. Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01103
Please call with test results when completed.
Thank you,
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Portable Unit, survey found no suspect of ACBM
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
~ 2/17/03
Contact Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Owner: Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Location: Peninsula College, building "L,W'
InsDector: Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
4636 E. M#JiaI W-q So. Suite 21S
S=de. WA 98134
(206)763-1364
.Log#:
PriOrity:
projett #:
Number of Samples:
33477
Regular B
3
Contact:Bob Witheridge
PO/Job#:
I
SAMPLE #: (1 ) RESULTS: alliER FIBERS %
Layers Homogenized for Analysis Cellulose 2
LAB #: 33477.1 Fibrous Talc 3
SOURCE: 12"X12" Floor Tile Asbestos Containing Material (ACM)
LOCATION: Campus Storage ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
Chrysolile 2 alliER MATERIALS %
Aggregate 25
Vinyl Filler and Binder 68
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION: LAYERED
Ton with brown n"d cream specks.vinyl with
soaked-in dark brown mastic residue
Note: /2ffX/2ff fl-lih ",ish mQStil:.llnllbk". $qHlrllu,"asMrci4uefrum fUbts1~nrajnjnK l'itt:,lfSlrlndiv.:411s! tulll/yJb..
SAMPLE #: (2 ) RESULTS: alliER FIBERS %
Layers Homogenized for Analysis Cellulose 2
LAB #: 33477.2 Fibrous Talc 3
SOURCE: Roofing Material Low Asbestos Contellt
LOCATION: Roof, West Side of Building ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
Chrysotile Less than 1 alliER MATERIALS %
Filler & Binder 85
Paint 7
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION: LAYERED Wollastonite 3
Silver paint (thin layer) on black 50ft rubbery
material
Note: Roofing material- darker sUI'er gray
SAMPLE #: (3 ) RESULTS: alliER FIBERS %
Layers Homogenized for Analysis Cellulose Trace
LAB #: 33477.3
SOURCE: Roofing Material Asbestos Containi';!! Material (ACM)
LOCATION: Rouf, East Side of Building ASBESTOS TYP PERCENT
Chrysotile 5 OTHER MATERIALS %
Asphalt Filler & Binder 70 .
Paint 20
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION: LAYERED Wollastonite 5
Silver paint (thick layer) on black asphaltic material
Note: Roofing trlolerial- newer silver gray
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SAMPLED BY: Bob Witheridge
DATE: 2/24/2003
ANALYZED Y: Rachel Melgoza
DA TE: 3/6/2003
I
COMPANY: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
I
i
Tra Perkins or !her VLAP A roved Si alo
Cl3yton i~ ;u;.credjted by NTSTfNVlAP. Accreditation by NVlAP does not indiem rndonemrnl by N\'UP ~ ....y otha- ;ovcrnment agency. All bulk samplC3 malyze:d in acconlance ....ith mcthod
EPN6001M4-82-020 (December 1982). Analyses 3fC CfOSS-chc:cked thfO\lgll inta md ,ntr.l bbonlCO)' quality 3SSUtdllce prograrrt' f~ vmfiuti"". The: pc:rcrnt vall>tS rtportcd aboye: iIl"l: based on calibrate'll vis~
estimates by volume: unless vc:rificalioo by Point COlUlling is indicate:d. Tes1 rault:s rt:porte:d .date only to the: sarnplc::lsubmilled by !he: diem to Dayton. Trace mKmIllI of ",,\>0101 rouIdpo:;sibly be missed by PLM,
therefore: negative result! C3lInot be: guarmteed nis report :;hill not be: rq;>rodvced orc"pt in its entirety, without 03)1011 Groop Sc:rvicc::l pamillion. ErrOl" R.3tc:s: Ou)'sO{ile, AmosilC and Crocidol,le: ...bc:st0ll:
Qu",)\i\atlv<:_.cn-, Qu3ntilati...c-,1411"rc:moIile:, Actinolile: ..wAnlhophyllill: asbc:stCll": Qualitativc-,05, Quantitative:-.04 A tracc 3m<)lInl of ",bc:slOI;S defined as one loiWO fibers found in Ihrttslidc mOun1'l. A>bc:stM
found in this 3mounlwill !x rc:p<.>l"tcd as Jratc..
CElVED BY: Phyllis Thompsou
DATE:
2/28/2003
I
... , ~ .
Location:
Peninsula College, building "0"
'" I
" ~'.
" I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Northwest Asbestos Consultants".'::'.
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, WA 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
1/11/03
Olympic Air Pollution Control Authority
Attention: Dean Nguyen, AIr Quality Specialist 1
Reference
Contact
Zenovic and Associates, Inc.
Tracy Gudgel, P.E.
519 South Peabody St. Suite 4
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Owner:
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Subiect:
Demolition
Regards to re-insoectlon:
All areas of asbestos containing building material that were noted on the
inspection of 1/08/03 have been abated by KD & S Environmental and
Vision Builders. I find this area ready for demolition as according to the
regulations of EPA and OlympIc Air Pollution Control Authority. A job well
done.
Inspector:
~ch~
Bob Witheridge
EPA-AHERA - Building Inspector
Management Planner
WAMOA-0042-02
Expires- 11/1/03
....
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
> "
1/11/03
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
Olympic Air Pollution Control Authority
Attention: Dean Nguyen, Air Quality Specialist 1 V
Reference
Contact
Owner.
Location:
Subject:
Inspector:
Zenovic and Associates, Inc.
Tracy Gudgel, P.E
519 South Peabody St. Suite 4
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Peninsula College, building "D"
Demolition
Bob Withe ridge
EPA-AHERA-Building Inspector
Management Planner
ID# WAMOA-0042-02
Expiration Date- 11/01/03
WASHINGTON
ASSOCIATION of
MAINTENANCE and
OPERATIONS
AOMINISTRATORS
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT
Bob Witheridge
Participated in the
EPA AHERA
BUILDING INSPECTION I MANAGEMENT
PLANNER
Refresher course offered by the
WASHINGTON ASSOCIATION of MAINTENANCE
and OPERATIONS ADMINISTRATORS
The full day training program
covered all topics specified in the
Model Accreditation Plan under
Section 206 of Title II of TSCA
The refresher course was taken on November 1, 2002
In Silverdale, Washington.
In combination with the individual's initial certification, this certificate extends
, . . , accreditation for the above named person through 11/01/03
::~~~;1 / /?, ~A ..D
"~",. ~~
I\~ ~':j:::~g~, Colio MooR.. C",,~ Admjoj""'I~ . ..
""iZ~. ,.. .\
frfi:;j:~:~ ;~':I' ~)
{\%t'f'4,:... ~ ~
f~Y)i ;<1',\:
1;~~~~~~~~~$~~~~~~.1;
.'.i....':;';':. .~...\..>>;&..". ~,;~'.>>~o; '!:~.~.....~~~!r'..;~i)i:;liN~~!;~';;~!s:-e:>.r.;.;:tl...i.~::&..>~~!:f^~~~~~;~s"ll:- o:.'.~..*.:...:. ...~..'.:-.~:~. ~:'~':;~':.... ~.,:.:'~.:..~ '~i',.'..'$,~. "I::A""'.'';J$ ~f) ~~~".'
!"...~~:~:~~::.::~.::~-:~~.~~~~:~:::.~.~.~:1-:.~~....:.~-:".
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Summary of Inspection:
The lab reports give a positive reading for asbestos material.
Sample #1 had a reading of 7% chrysotlle asbestos and a mastic of 2%.
Sample #2 floor tile was 3% chrysotile asbestos.
Sample #3 was taken of the ceiling tile. No asbestos detected.
Sample #4, in-fill for windows with paint had a reading of 12% chrysotile
asbestos.
Sample #5, in-fill for windows without paint had a reading of 12%
chrysotile
asbestos.
The debris piles will need to be handled as asbestos containing building
materials as it can not be separated properly.
The tiles on the concrete area will need to be abated by an abatement
contractor. Approx. 2,500 sq. ft.
Identifiable materials like brick, lumber and metal items on the floor tiles
will need to be removed prior to removal. This will need to be done with
care as not to disturb the tile. Avoid heavy equipment use while clearing all
debris.
This report is not a guarantee that ail suspect of ACB.M. were found. The
possibility of concealed material exist and may be found during demolition.
After the facility is completely cleaned out a walk through and inspection
is required by the original AHERA building inspector (NW Asbestos) after
abatement, then a copy of the letter certifying that abatement has been
completed needs to be receIved by the City of Port Angeles and Olympic Air
Pollution Control Authority.
Sincerely,
J3~uJ~
Bob Witherldge, E.F.M.
NVLAP LAO CODE #101l06-ll
A...edlted Laboralory
Log#:
Priority:
Project #: .
Number of Samples:
page j ot J
32965
,~~!~~
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Regular B
~lb E. MM)inaJ Wl1y So. Suite ~u
SeoIllIc.WA98IJol
(206)76)-7J~
5
Client Name: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
Job Location: Peninsula CoIlege
Contact: Bob Witheridge
PO/Job#:
I
Mineral Filler & Binder
88
, SAMPLE #: (4
!.A!U; 32965.40
SOURCE: In-fill Window Panels
LOCATION: Not Noted
)
LAYER 2 RESULTS:
OTHER FIBERS
%
No Asbestos Detected
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
OTHER MATERIALS
%
Foam
100
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Gold-coJored brittle foam-like mater;al
NOle:
LAYERED SA;\IPLE: NESHAP and AHERA regulations reqnire layen be analyzed and reported separately.
SAMPLE#:(S ) LAYER I RESULTS: OTHER FIBERS
LAD #: 11965.5A
SOURCE: Siding Fills
LOCATION: Not Noted
.,
,.
Asbestos Containing Material (ACM)
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
Cbrysotlle 12
OTHER MA TERlALS
%
MA TERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Gra)' cememlit;ous fibrous material
NQle:
SAMPLE #: (S
!.A!U; 32965.58
SOURCE: Backing
LOCATION: Not Noted
)
LAYER 2 RESULTS:
OTHER FIBERS
%
No Asbestos Detected
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
Foam
%
100
OTHER MA TERlALS
:viA TERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Gold-colored brtttlefoam-like mater;al
ll,'ote:
RECEIVED BY: Ginnie Psachos
Trac PerkinS or her AP A roved Si nato
ClJ~lon il il::;redued by :-':IS1/N'IlAP. ^eaeditadon by NV!...AP docs nO! tnl1icllt enC.Cnc::r.':l\1 by NVL"P or any Oll:er lover.lIne"t ~tncy. AU h;Ik Sll/1lplcs 1ft u.a!;ned ill)l..~ wilh met.'lod
EP....;()()(;w:--l~.$:-92'J rDa:~ 19i~), AnalYIe$ .a.r<: .;r.JU,~h~lr.c(! IhtCl\:ib intn' ttd ir.:nt laboratory qt.:.Li:}' llS.>1Jnr.C~ ~I ror "cdk.l:io.'l. The percent nlu~ TqlO11e<! above ~bacd(lO calibrlled \.illl'"
cstimalN "." ,'olulT,c I..nlel~ "er;fi~ion by POlr.: Cou:ui'lil:;1 i:H.li;:aled Tnt res<:111 ro:p.xIed ,eLm ~'(\ly to the samplellUt:mined t:) Ihe c1iemlO Clay1.,n. TrKc o.:nounu of oub:sws cOlIJdpccllil:;ly be misld b~ PD.:,
:hc,do,( r,egJli,c ;{,:.d:s c;mr,OI be i:I..Jratlleeo. TI:;. repOt1s\lBllllot be ro:p;!Xuced e~cePl ill ill er.::leI;. ":lhaul C~a)!or. v,O<.p ~cnitel pe~;s,:oo_ Er.m Ral'" ChrpOlik. Amos;:: ilJ1d Crt>eij,,:itc ~bcl'~
QI....d,uui,c. 03. (lu.ulti:a::'.e-14 I 7rcmo....li,t. A.:t;nolil~ and Ar.l~r:wl'ilt ~:C'J: 'J\lalitJti~e.C5. Q;ar-,:ira:i-e. 0.\ ^ (J...C 1l.1l'JUllI cfasb05:DS i, <-klint':.r..l :'mt 10 rwo fibcn ft:\~nJ in lnlec l:ide '7lo~nt> ),.bMlO~
fOti"Jinlll'I:l.'lC>I.:~l..illber(~edllo-r:1lCC.
DATE:
1/6/2003
DATE: l!7l2003
SAMPLED BY: Bob Witheridge
DATE: I/3/2003
COMPANY: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
I
II~g~
(206) 763-1364
YBgCi.Cr j
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Accredited Laboratory
Log#:
Priority:
Project #:
Number of Sampl..:
32965
NVLAP LAB CODE #101106..()
Regular B
5
I Job Location: Peninsula College
Client Name: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
Contact:Bob Witheridge
PO/Job#:
I
SAMPLE #: (2 ) LAYER 2 RESULTS: OTHER FIBERS %
l.6Jl.!t 32965.28
SOURCE: Mastic No Asbestos Detected
LOCATION: Not Noted' ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
OTHER 1.1A TERJALS %
Filler & Binder 100
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Tan mastic
Nole:
SAMPLE #: (3 ) RESUL TS: OTHER FIBERS %
~ 32965.3 Layers Homogenized for Analysis Cellulose 87
SOURCE: Ceiling TlIe No Asbestos Detected
LOCATION: Not Noted ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
OTHER MA TERJALS %
Filler & Binder 3
Paint 10
MATERIAL DESCRIPTiON: LAYERED
Whitt paint on light brown compre.Jsed fibers (wet) I
Note: Sample dried at room Itmperilture,
LA YERED SAl'l1PLE: NESHAP and AHERA regulations require layers be analyzed and reported separately.
SAMPLE #: (4 ) LAYER I RESULTS: OTHER FIBERS %
l..6..6..1f.; 329(15.4A'
SOURCE: In-fill Window Panels Asbestos Containi'lf Material r:CM)
LOCATION: Not Noted ASBESTOS TYP PERC NT
Chrysotile 12 OTHER MA TERJALS %
Mineral Filler & Binder 83
Paint 5
MATERIAL DESCRJIT!illi:
Brow" and blue paint on gray fibrous cement;ous
mater",/
Note:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SAMPLED BY: Bob Witheridge
DATE: 1/3/2003
Trac Perkins r oth , LAP A rand Si n&IO
Clay1(Alll at"cre>:l.ilcd b)' :-;'ISTiNVLAP. Accroliution by ,,"'VLAP dl::cs nOl indica:e r:ndoncmtr.l by l\"\.'LAP I}f "'yothc:r iovemmnlt ~cncy All bulk samplu.ue analyzed in .c~rdante WIU!:neIbod
EPA/6OO,'M4.'2-020 (D<<m'.ln 19P2) A~a1YKJ iltf tToss-checked thro;..~!i in:rrlsnc iOln 1~:i:'I)' queJil)' Il$t.nll<< prngrams fOf verifkllio., The il=CI1I values reported above a:c b<l>ed on c.ali~le,j ~'j~ull
e1:ilNlCI Ily ~;)lume "nleu Vi:rilieation by Poiru CJ\Jl',:ir'll il indica~ Tetl fesu:1S :epted rel.,c only 1:1 the sqltt ,'JbrT!;t:cd ':ly thc diet! t.:l Cay:oo. Tract ImOl.:nl:i or asl:ntos could ~iblJ be rrincd by fL."!.
Ihad," Hgalivc ;C5U:~ cannOl be 11ll,UOlmcec. Ir.is rc-port dl.:::l1 n01 be reproducrO ncc;tl in its C:J:;rcIY. I'iti\vw Cla.VlOtI Gt-oup SCn.iCC5 ptrmi,~ion Erra- RaIn: Ch:j10!-ile, Amoo;jlc an.:! CrOo..iJohlt ube~IOS
Qu!ii\ali~c. ':;3. Qu~~ti:atj'c..~4' 7rcmdil(, .l.,~::ncli:c illld ^r.lho?h~:lilc a.!;::'C!l~ Qu~!itlli,c. O~. Q'Jdrll;ta:ivc. 04 ^ tr;u:c zmO;!I:: of .ub::'IN i~ CCfillCd ~ ,II',C 10 two ril>cn fr~:!~ in tbee 5~ide t:'C'I.:i", Al'bolO'1
f()l;nd ,n l~i\ ~mount ',;11 be r."mcd '" 'Irat~'
1/6/2003
ANALYZED BY: Tracy Perkins
'1/\
DATE: 1/7/2003
I
RECEIVED BY: Ginnie Psacbos
DATE:
COMPANY: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
I
.~~~~
Pago I of 3
32965
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Log#:
Priority:
Project #:
Number of Samples:
. Regular B
iWLAP LAB CODE #101106-6
Accredited Laboratory
"6~6 E.MVllinal Way So SoIitc2:'
SlC:UIc, U/A9U:W
(:!06) 1(;J-7J64
I
5
I
Client Name: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
Job Location: Peninsula College
Contact: Bob Witheridge
PO/Job#:
LA YERED SAMPLE: NESHAP and AHERA regulations require layers be anal)'Zed and reported separately,
SAMPLE#:(l ) LAYER 1 RESULTS: OTHER FIBERS
~ 3296l.IA
SOURCE: Floor Tile
LOCATION: Throughout
Asbestos Containing Material (ACM)
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
Chrysotile 7
OTHER MATERIALS
Vinyl Filler and Binder
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Light briJ~'11 marbled floor tile
No"-: BrOH'n slizu color
SAMPLE #: (I
LAB #: 32%5.\ B
SOURCE: Mastic
LOCATION: Throughoul
LAYER 2 RESULTS:
OTHER FIBERS
)
Asbestos Containing ll.faterial (ACM)
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
Chrysotile 2
OTHER MA fERL-\LS
Asphalt Filler & Binder
MA TERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Black asphaltic mastic
.^10ft:
LAYERED SAMPLE: NESHAP and AHERA regulations require layers be analyzed and reported separately.
LAYER I RESULTS: OTHER FIBERS
SAMPLE #: (2
)
LAB .: 3196l.2A
SOURCE: Floor Tile
LOCATION: Not Noted
Asbestos Contain in/[ Material fACl!)
ASBESTOS TYPE PERCENT
Chrysotile 3
OTHER MATERIALS
Vinyl Filler and Binder
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION:
Beige floor tile with brown and white marbling
Nort: Gray start c%r
SAMPLED BY: Bub Withe ridge
DATE: 1/3i2003
DATE: J!7i2003
COMPANY: Northwest Asbestos Consultants
RECEIVED BY: Ginnie Psachos
DATE:
1i6i2003
CliylO;-" \1 ou:crfC.i1ed ~ SIST.'NVLAP. Actn::rliUllirn irj NVLAP COeI "Cl indicae e<1~;.emen1 hy S\'LAP 0:" 41\)' otheJ 1O~ur.mell! ~en.::t. All ~1r; wn;lles:m ll)'zcd in E1;.}I\i.zrn:C WiLl, :nell:;)(j
EPA;""1OfM':.~~.(j2C ';Dec~rr,bc; 1932) Analy'~ aa CJO\I.cb,ccl.ed thTOOah in\t:lll>d in:rl. 1~"""'rl.1~ qUalil) ;U~"Jan~e prorams foo '<:'1ificlUOI'I The pcTCc,,: \a1ut1leponed ~.e art: ~d':JI1 cal:~atcd ~in3.,
e'SUrn3ltl b)' '-oi..:nc 1.lnkM \"rr.r'~:ll:on by Po;n! ('",",nlin! ;, ir..!ic:llcd T ett rtsulu ro:pone'C r~l:llC onl} to l~oC samples ~..bmined by ,he client In ClI)-!OQ, True L7lOUntl of a;;bolOl ~ld pcnibl~ ':>e rlil~ ~ PLM.
t"~'efCH .'Ki:il:~C resuh. c.lnnOI ~ g"lI1ll.Med 1'1il ,cpcr. ~lIail nOl be rcp~uced UCcpl ;.':11 cnli,C1)'. ....ilhoul C.yl(r. Grocp Scr\'ic<:~ ;ler:'r.:13iun Errol il4!.C'S ChrylOlilc. Ar:IVSllC lJIj Cro:"Cido,i:c 1lii~106
0:.2.:,:a1l'0,,' 0), O"ant:L:lti',e- ~4 I TJcmo1:tc, Ac!;"o:i:c lr.d "'n!h~p/1y;lil. ;ub~llo;;' o..i.l'!3t;\C. !)~. Qu;mlila:i.'c. 1).4 A :r..:. L"I\(\"n\ ('f il.lbc.ICS il dcfin~,j .11; on. {U I....? (,b." fl'Jnd i~ thlee ~:io::~ n~cUl:ts ^1b<:~WS
ro"nd ir. l~'S a.~:;r~nl .....i;! te ff':)Cl"I.td ~ .'Tral:~h
I
%
%
93
%
I
% I
98
I
I
%
I
% I
97
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'.
ASBFSTOS BULK SAMPLE DATA
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed 8t.
Port Townsend, WA 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
To Clayton Services
4636 E. Marginal Way South, Suite 215
Seattle, WA 98134
Date:
1/08/03
Contact
Zenovic and Associates, Inc.
Tracy Gudgel, P.E.
519 South Peabody St. Suite 4
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Owner:
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Peninsula College, building "0" C Of3-tIv?o Lt'Vt+Jzo '2 CD::')
Light brown marbled floor tile with mastic throughout.
Location:
Sample #1:
Sample #2:
Beige floor tile with brown and white marbling throughout.
Sample #3:
Ceiling tile. White paint on light brown compressed fibers.
Sample #4:
In-fIll window panels. Painted.
Sample #5:
In-fill window panels.
Inspector:
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
Please call with test results when completed,
Thank you,
0ot~
Bob Witheridge, E.F.M.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspection Re1)ort
A walk was made around and throughout the demolition debris finding the
following to confirm items on listing.
Met with contractor and Tracy from Zenovic & Associates on site.
The building had been demolished and was in various piles with a mixture
of construction debris. Not all areas were accessible due to the compactness.
The following samples were taken:
Sample #1: Light brown marbled floor tile with mastic throughout.
Sam1)le #2:
Beige floor tile with brown and white marbling throughout.
Sample #3:
Ceiling tile. White paint on light brown compressed fibers.
Samole #4:
In-fill window panels. Painted.
Sam1)le #5:
In-fill window panels.
All samples were sent to lab for testing.
4) Copies for City of Port Angeles, Vision Builders, KD&S
Environmental Abatement Contractors and Zenovic & Associates.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Scope of work
1) Building survey and inspection to inspect for asbestos
containing building materials (ACBM).
2) Survey, sample and record suspect materials.
3) Report to owner, results of testing by Clayton
Services testing labs.
I .-
_.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Northwest Asbestos Consultants
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
. huggybear@olympus.net
Date: 1/08/03
Contact Zenovic and Associates, Inc.
Tracy Gudgel, P.E.
S 19 South Peabody St. Suite 4
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Owner: Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
Location: Peninsula College, building "0" C~D L.-t?~ 1'2-Oo"'t:>)
Inspector: Bob Withe ridge
EPA-AHERA-Building Inspector
Management Planner
ID# WAMOA-0042-02
Expiration Date- 1 1/01/03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"J
~,,- .' . ".. .
. ':~~if~:f., :'<j~)~~::';:,
Northwest Asbestos Consultants'
406 Reed St.
Port Townsend, W A 98368
360-385-0584
huggybear@olympus.net
Other Concerns'
~
Contact
Owner:
Location:
Inspector:
2/17/03
Vision Builders
Craig Heckman
3075 S. Critchfield Rd.
Port Angeles, WA 98363
Peninsula College
1502 Lauridsen Blvd.
Port Angeles, WA 98362
'"
. ..:~.~r,}'1~~>. ~:',
~ '.;;...~,,- '.-+t~";;'~:r::'I' ,', .
:',;~'\~i?;:'~~~:::"',: '. ".
" "-'..,
In-fill for window panels are of asbestos board. This has been
found to be homogeneous throughout many buildings.
In-fill for windows without paint had a reading of12%
chrysotile asbestos.
Bob Witheridge
AHERA - Building inspector / Management Planner
WAMOA - 0042-02
Expires - 11/01/03
1
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
I
I
1
1
I
.1
.. :- ~
. .' ..
BID AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
SPACE RENOV A TIONS- BUILDING ICI
PROJECT NUMBER 2002-006- H (1-2)
.,
. _-1
",.'", ~
'.','0" .."...."..'.'"',,. -
n D~D
PENINSULA COLLEGE
AND THE
,
WASHINGTON STATE DIVISION OF ENGINEERING ani)
ARCHITECTURAL SERVICES
NOVEMBER 2.004
pref1are3 ~
t23
r~.';~(;'~(' ,. ,.
f]~;1+:..'. ~
~~ : OLYMPIC DESIGN WORKS, INC. PS
FAX NO.
--
Nov. 29 2004 01:59PM. P2
.
. OLYMPIC DESIGN WORKS, INC. PS
9'5 HEA TKBR P AR.K ROAD, l'ORT ANGELES, W A. 98361. phone: (3601417-2.777 tax: l36oIW-1.888
~~~~_?_;J-_.- IID..9/0.2
To the Contract Documents for:
Peninsula College - Space Renovations - Building 'C
Washington State Division of E/A Services, Project #2002-006- H (1-2)
You are hereby notified of the following revisions, deletions and/or additions to the Contract
Documents for this Project. . .
This addendum will apply to any or all Contracts or Subcontracts.
General Clarifications
1)" A clarification regarding Fire Alarm Scope was requested during the pre-bid walk-
through. There is no Fire Alarm Scope in this project.
Architectural and Civil Drawing Revisions
1) Sheet A-OS, Room Finish Schedule, Room 109, Office, shows both '2x4 ACOUSTIC v
TILE' and 'EXT'G ACT (NO WORK)'. Delete Indicator-Dot at '2104 ACOUSTIC
TILE'. Schedule should read 'EXT'G ACT (NO WORK)'.
Mechanical Revisions
1)
Plumbing ReCluirements:
Providc two (2) additional floor drains. aile (1) each at the Men's and Women's
Restroom. Drains to be located proximate to the water closet in each restroom, Provide
required cDlmectian to waste line, Provide OnC (1) trap primer to service both floor
drains. Locate primer valve in control box at plumbing wall, to be accessible from the
Men's Restroom. Floor drain and tTap primer per specification,
,/
Specification Revision
Revise Division 09 Finishes, Section 09 025 paint on interior wood, GENERAL, as
~~ /
DELETE paragraph l,a.2) in its entirety
Substitution Reauests
The following Substitution Requests were received on time and have been reviewed.
Those not included were received beyond the limit of 10 days prior to the Bid Date.
. 15-410 Plumbing Fixtures-
The following requests were made:
At paragraph 2.2, Sink Faucets, substitute Zurn Aquaspec in lieu of Chicago Faucets,
At paragraph 2.3, Flushomete5s, substitute Zum Aquavantage in lieu of Sloan, and
At paragraph 2.10, Commercial Sinks. ,ubstitute Just in lieu of Elkay -
This request has been rejected due to agency request to remain within existing
product lines on campus.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
November 2004
OI)9mpic Design works,xnc. PS
wm'eMXq'MMM aas lUawaaJ6\1 SUO!I!PUO::) a6esn JO~ 'oul '\IM)O \,6ue4ox~ sJapl!na 0] paPliio.lcl
~# PP\I ~ a6~c
OLYMPIC DESIGN WORKS} INC. PS
95 HEATHER PARK ROAD, PORT ANGELES} WA. 98362 phone: !360)4I7-2m fax: !360)417-2888
ADDENDUM .#L___._________
_ .nn II/241m
. c-
.l.?d
Notice to Bidders:
To the Contract Documents for:
Peninsula College - Space Renovations - Building 'C
Washington State Division ofE/A Services, Project #2002-006- H (1-2)
You are hereby notified of the following revisions, deletions and/or additions to the Contract
Documents for this Project. This addendnm will apply to any or all Contracts or Subcontracts.
A Pre.bid Site walk.thru and Meeting was held at 12:00Plvi until 12:40PM, Tuesday, November 23'".
2004. The meeting was not mandatory.
The following people attended:
Name
Matt Graves
Stuart J. Bonney, AlA
Steve Carter, Asc. AlA
Rick Hoch
Kyle Priest
Dan Fischer
Walt Dalrymple
Bill Dedrick
Andy Simpson
Doug MaITapodi
Bruce Berkimer
J an Thadem
Dean Schmitt
Drew Entrekin
Tom Shook
Roger Daignault
Reoresenting
Peninsula College
Olympic Design Works, Inc PS
Olympic Design Works, Inc PS
Hoch Construction, Inc.
Hoch Construction, Inc.
Fischer General Contracting, Inc.
A1dergrove Construction
Aldergrove Construction
Simpson Electric
Nuprecon
James Robinson Company Inc.
Primo Construction
Schmitt's Sheet Metal
Angele's Communication
Regional Council of Carpenters
Carpenter Local 1303 Representative
Phone/Fax #
(360) 417.6550 I (360) 417.6560
(360) 417-2777 I (360) 417.2888
(360) 417-2777 I (360) 417.2888
(360) 452-5381/ (360) 452.5382
(360) 452.5381/ (360) 452.5382
(360) 697-5402 / (360) 779-4373
(360) 457.2067 / (360) 457.6765
(360) 457.2067 / (360) 457.6765
(360) 457.9270 I (360) 457.9270
(425) 881.0263 / (425) 881.5935
(360) 377-0066/ (360) 377-9609
(360) 683-5447 / (360) 683.6475
(360) 457-6452 / (360) 457-0883
(360) 457-4375 / (360) 457.0212
(360) 581-2730 / (360) 533.0914
(360) 265-0379 / (360) 352.5232
. );d
ll::d
..
,
Potential Bidders were given a brief overview of the Project and a site tour to orient them to Job
conditions and unique Project requirements. Special emphasis was placed on the nature of the Project
as a central-campus-site project, and site access for equipment and materials. A question and answer
period followed. The Architect's representative remained on.site until I :OOPM. The College will
make other inspections available upon request, contact Matt Graves.
"."J-f
,-"';r;;
The following is a summary of the information provided to the attendees:
Bid PraDo sa I
Bids are to be delivered to Building 'C'-Business Office, Room C-34 (Attn: Evelyn Boyd).
prior to 12:00 Noon PST, Tuesday, November 30, 2004.
Time of completion: 120 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed.
Liquidated Damages have been set at $500.00/Calendar Day.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
November 2004
O[:9It!I'ic Design WOl'ks, IIlC. PS~ \D
~ 1. \
ww'eMXq'MMM aas lUaWaaJo\l SUOilipuo::l aoesn JO~ 'oul '\1M jO i'OUB40X:J SJaplina 01 pap'M"d
GaD",'
General Conditions
Refer to A-OO, General Conditions Site Plan, for unique site conditions and access
requirements. Note location of northern handicap parking spaces. These spaces are to remain
accessible at all times.
Pedestrian protection is required at the designated exit gate when traffic is present.
Site perimeter to be completely fenced & gated as shown on drawings. No equipment is
permitted south of Building 'C', refer to specifications.
Clarification was requested regarding the use of an 'Installation Floater' in lieu of Builder's
Risk Insurance. This is not acceptable. Adhere to requirements set forth in General
Conditions for Washington State Facility Construction, paragraph 2.06 Builder's Risk.
Building Demo
Take special note that no equipment will be allowed on the Plaza concrete, south of the
project. Refer to established project boundaries on Sheet A.OO. General Conditions Site Plan.
Selective demolition at Building 'C': two (2) ADA Actuators and one (I) exterior light
fixture.
General Construction
Clarification was requested regarding Fire Alarm Systems scope. Information to be provided
when available.
Further questions during bidding are to be directed to Olympic Design Works, Inc PS at telephone
(360) 417.2777 or fax (360) 417.2888. Responses will be compiled into the final Addendum and
distributed to all Plan Holders.
Clarifications
I)
General ContractoA, Drywall and Painting Sub-Contractors refer to Structural Drawings
Sheet S-02, NoteL..0,. for additional selective demolition scope,
At those areas where new roofing is to join existing, remove/step back sufficient existing
shingles to ensure visually seamless installation between existing and new construction,
All existing floor finishes, where not previously removed by building demolition, are to be
removed. Prepare existing concrete slab and new slab on grade to receive specified floor
finish in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Note: The Owner will remove
existing floor tile and mastic at bathroom area.
Existing waste line is to be preserved and used for new plumbing. Exercise extreme caution
during concrete demolition.
Linoleum Flooring Layout Plan is provided as attachment to this document. Use in
conjunction with Specification Section 09 667, Resilient Sheet Linoleum, General, Scope,
',.
2)
3)
4)
5)
Drawing Revisions
I) General:
Change all reference to "ALUMINUM GUTTER" or "NEW ALUMINUM GUTTER"
to read:
CONTINUOUS ROLLED GUTTER, PER SPECIFICATION.
2) Sheet A-II, Reflected Ceiling Plan:
Add 'Soffit Lighting' as shown on the attached Partial Reflected Ceiling Plan.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
November 2004
ol;'91ffl1ic Desii1" wDrks, I11C. PS
wOTeMXq.MMM aas juawaaJB\I SUO!I!PUO:) aBesn JO~ .0ul '\IM)O .aBue40x'] sJapllna 0) pap!^O,'d
c aBed
3) Sheet S.03, Structural Details:
Revise Detail 12/S-03 as noted on attached detail.
Soecification Revisions
I) Revise Specification Section 02 070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, as follows:
Add the following line at GENERAL I.a.
-"".
~:.:(':'
3) Remove existing floor finishes. Including, but not limited to all wall base,
glue.down carpet and residual adhesives. Expose 100% of existing concrete
slab substrate.
Add the following line at GENERAL I.b.
2) Floor Finish work specified in Sections 09 667 Resilient Sheet Linoleum and
09 680 Carpet.
2) Revise Specification Section 09 667 Resilient Sheet Linoleum, as follows:
Revise the following line:
GENERAL 2.a.l) Homogeneous linoleum sheet flooring, adhesive and heat welded seams
installation. See Sheet A-24 for patterning.
To read:
GENERAL 2.a.l) Homogeneous linoleum sheet flooring, adhesive and heat welded seams
installation. See Linoleum Flooring Layout Plan.
Revise the following line:
EXECUTION 2.a. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have
been previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in
accordance with manufacturers instructions. .
To read:
EXECUTION 2.a. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that the substrate condition of
both new and existing concrete are acceptable for product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
Substitution Reauests
I) Substitution Request by GAF Materials. Corp. for Specification Section 07 312, Lammated
Shingles. Request is NOT ACCEPTED. due to requirement to match existing shingles for all
patches and new construction.
2) Substitution Request by Northwest Door, Inc, for Specification Section 08 353, Accordion
Folding Grilles. Request to add National DAGENDOR to paragraph 6. Approved
Manufacturers, is ACCEPTED AS NOTED. No intermediate post. Refer to Specification
for requirements.
3) Substitution Request by Reid Pacific Company, for Specification Section 15410, Plumbing
Fixtures; Paragraph 2.8 Water Closet and 2.9 Lavatories. Request to provide fixtures
manufactured by Crane Plumbing in lieu of specified Kohler Co. is NOT ACCEPTED, due
to Owner's requirement for continuity of maintenance and support of existing fixtures.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
November 2004
ol;91to/ic De.sif1ll works} lite. PS
'.;-".
x.> '
COLOR 'B'
;.:~0~~'-
COLOR 'B'
~
~
o
-'
o
u
:'I
~
o
-'
o
u
Z
<l:
IL-,
~Il
,~
llw
-'Il
<l:
31-
<l:
I:
COLOR 'A'
I"~ ~.:.~
\',,'.
,.....,.
I
"
~------~r------~
I II I
I II I
I II I
I II I
L~~_~~~~L~___~~-'
I'
~~~~~~~~r~~~~~~: ~
..~Jrr-- .~
'-r'l'
~' I J
,-l",.~1
I
I
I
I
I
COLOR 'B'
!Il
~
o
-'
o
u
~
I I
I I
L, I~
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
I II
COLOR 'B'
I COLOR 'A' r
L~
Page 4
Provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com
;.-.;;
~'.,.t
~
~
o
-'
o
u
C,
COLOR 'B'
COLOR 'A'
COLOR 'B'
~
~
o
-'
o
u
~
~
o
-'
o
u
<t:
'--
&
,,0-,9 9 ant;)
()
I
()
I
IQ
"
IQ
.
&
/.
~
/.
/.
Page 5
Pcovided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com
;.:3~.'
i-jrU.
z
-<{
~
~~?:
.~(:~"""""""'''''''''''''''''~~
~;.~.
~~~~:,:..
U)
<(
rf\
o
I
U)
..........
C"!
---l
<(
t-
W
Q
w .
"U)Z
W-3
t->O
Ow]:
Z~cJ)
<.I)
~Ill
It! 3W z ~
'I
0 !O !O<.I) 9<.1)
w --' '<( 1-1- Q
lL \::l ~3 <(:::J
0 --'0 ~
--' -'"'~ --' .
<.I) Q :'!&
~ x "l <.I)w
-' -'"'''' ~~ IU
~X U\ ~Ill~ ~
U\
~X w--'
I-:::J d)
-'"'''' LL<(
'" <(0
3 3
0
wO I
I-I <.I)
<(<.I) <.I)
--'<.I)
It! lL<( <(
&x x
...-
W~... x
~It! -'"'~
It!
..,.
{""
'"
X
-]f
U\
!O
--'
\::l
--'0
\::lZ
-.\>0 I ()
x }---1 I
.::::.,QW- -
U\ !O'<{ .
-
1-..
WIU
Q~
~~
Lf\
r-
t;tt
Page 6
Provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com
COLOR '6'
:'t
ll:'
o
-'
o
u
in
ll:'
o
-'
o
u
l':i.
,
"
"
,
t~_~~
;"-~
'V'"
!
AYOUT PLAN
'I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NOVEMBER 2.004
PENINSULA COLLEGE
SPACE RENOV A nONS - BUILDING IC'
WASHINGTON STATE DIVISION OF B/A SERVICES
PRO)l3CT NUMBER 2.002.-000 H (1-2.)
DATE:
1/. /1' 0/
AUTHORIZED SIGNA TUR.ES:
j I. ~
// ~d/1 '>
/ BARBARA MARTIN
VICE PRESIDENT, PENINSULA COLLEGE
~MO'MC=" W"':N"ATIO~'ONm~,",~Q,
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
Sealed proposals will be received for the following project:
PROJECT NO.:
2002-006 H (1-2)
TITLE:
Space Renovations - Building "c"
AGENCY:
. Peninsula College
PROJECT MANAGER:
James Copland
ESTIMATED BASE BID COST RANGE:
$ 520,000.00 to $ 550,000.00
TIMEIDA Y IDA TE:
Bid Proposals Must Be Received Prior To 12 Noon PST,
Tuesday, November 30th, 2004
BIDS WILL BE RECEIVED AT:
Peninsula College
Building "c" Business Office, Room C-34, Attn: Evelyn Boyd
BID OPENING WILL BE HELD AT:
12 Noon PST, Tuesday, November 30th, 2004
BY:
Department of General Administration
Division of Engineering & Architecturlal Services
LOCATION OF BID OPENING:
Student Services Building "D", Room 220, Peninsula College,
1502 East Lauridsen Blvd., Port Angeles, W A 98362
PRE-BID WALK-THROUGH:
12 Noon, Tuesday, November 23'd, 2004 at the project site on
the main Plaza. For directions to the site of the pre-bid walk-
through, please contact the Consultant listed below.
Contractors may obtain plans and specifications beginning at 8:00A.M., Monday, November II th, 2004, from
the office of the Consultant, Olympic Design Works, Inc. PS, 110 Lake Dawn Road (physical address) or 95
Heather Park Road. (mailing address), Port Angeles, W A 98362, Attn: Stuart J, Bonney AIA, telephone: (360)
417-2777, fax (360) 417-2888 upon the deposit of $100.00 in the form of check or money order made out to
"Olympic Design Works". No cash deposits will be accepted. Plans must be returned in good condition within
seven (7) days following bid date to obtain a refund of deposit. After seven days no refunds will be made. To
view drawings and specifications on the internet, go to www.ga.wa.gov/servletlEASBldCalSv. Plans may also
be viewed at the following locations: ....-Associated Sub-Contractors, Tacoma; Nalley Plan Center, Kent;
.,Builders Exchange of Washington, Everett; /C"nstruction Data Plan Center, ~ellevue; .Gonstruction Data Plan
Center, Seattle; ,Gonstruction Data Plan Center, Tacoma; Construction Mark~t Data, ~nton; .Olympia Plan
Service, Olympia; .Olympic Peninsula Plan Center, Bremerton; Weekly Co?struction Reporter, Bellingham.
Please direct all questions regarding this project to the Office of the Consultant. Responses to questions will be
compiled into an Addendum to be available at the Pre-bid Walk-through and otherwise distributed to all plan
holders. No questions will be addressed less than 72 hours from bid opening. Final clarifications may be made
via FAX only no later than 48 hours prior to bid opening. 24 hours following the bid opening, results will be
made available on E&A Services' web site at www.ga.wa.gov/eas/eas.htm. or by comtacting E&A Services at
(360) 902-7272 to receive a fax copy.
I
I
I
I
I
Voluntary numerical MWBE goals of 10% MBE and 6% WBE have been established for this project.
Achievement of the goals is encouraged. However no minimum level of MWBE participation shall be required
as a condition of contract award. Bids will not be rejected or considered nonresponsive if they do not include
MWBE participation. Bidders may contact the Office of Minority and Womens Business Enterprise to obtain
information on certified firms.
The State reserves the right to accept or reject any or all proposals and to waive informalities.
STATE OF WASHINGTON
DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL ADMINISTRATION
DIVISION OF ENGINEERING & ARCHITECTURAL SERVICES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Project Name: Space Renovations - Buildin!! C Project No.: 2002-006 H 0-2)
Name of Firm:
STATE OF WASHINGTON
DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL ADMINISTRATION
DIVISION OF ENGINEERING & ARCHITECTURAL SERVICES
206 GENERAL ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
OLYMPIA, WASHINGTON, 98504
I ", .
,~~ :'. -'. ..,{'"
"-' i " :' <. ~ - " ,," .~
. ,! "0 B"ID;PR op.d S A:L '~,'!Fl'
<,.-.J;. .'
-~~:t'.l".";:'_'
In compliance with the contract documents, the following bid proposal is submitted:
I) BASE BID (Including Trench Excavation Safety Provisions)
$
(Please print dollar amount in space above)
(do Dot include Washington State Sales Tax)
TRENCH EXCA V AnON SAFETY PROVISIONS I $
(Included also in Base 8id)
If the bid amount contains any work which requires trenching exceeding a depth of four feet, all costs for trench safety shall be included in
the Base Bid and indicated above for adequate trench safety systems in compliance with Chapter 39.04 RCW. 49.17 RCW and WAC 296-
155-650. Bidder must include a lump sum dollar amount in blank above (even if the value is SO.OO) to be responsive.
2) BID ALTERNATES (Specify whether additive or deductive)
(I)
$
(2)
$
(3)
$
(4)
$
(5)
$
(6)
$
Do not include Washington State Sales Tax in alternate amounts.
The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bid prices within sixty (60) days of the bid
date,
Time for Completion
The undersigned hereby agrees to complete all the work under the Base Bid (and accepted altematcs)
within 120 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed,
Page I of3
03/20/2003
I
I
I
Project Name: Space Renovations - Building C
Name of Firm:
Project No.: 2002-006 H (1-2)
UNIT PRICES (Where applicable) (Do not include Washington State Sales Tax)
I
I
Unit
Item No. Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Estimated
Quantities
Additive
Unit Price
$
$
$
$
$
Deductive
Unit Price
$
$
$
$
$
Per
Measurement
I
The above unit prices shall be for any additive and deductive work within 15% of the above estimated quantities.
The unit price shall include full compensation for the cost of labor, materials, equipment, overhead, profit and
any additional costs associated with the unit bid.
I
The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all unit prices within sixty (60) days of the bid date.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Subcontractor Listing - RCW 39.30.060
If the base bid and the sum of the additive alternates is one million dollars or more the bidder shall provide names
of the subcontractors with whom the bidder will directly subcontract for performance of the following work. If
the bidder intends to perform the work, the bidder must enter its name for that category of work.
The bidder shall not list more than one subcontractor for each category of work identified UNLESS
subcontractors vary with bid alternates, in which case the bidder must indicate which subcontractor will
be used for which alternate.
Failure of the bidder to submit the NAMES of such subcontractors or to name itself to perform such work
shall render the bidder's bid nonresponsive and, therefore, void.
I
Desil!nated Work Firm Name
1. Heating Ventilation
Air Conditioning (HV AC)
l.a. HV AC Alternate Bid #_
(if applicable)
2. Plumbing
2.a. Plumbing Alternate Bid #_
(if applicable)
3. Electrical
3.a. Electrical Alternate Bid #_
(if applicable)
I
I
Bidder may attach a separate sheet for additional alternate bid subcontractors.
Page 2 of3
03/20/2003
I
I
I
I
Project Name: Space Renovations - Buildinl! C
Name of Firm:
Project No.: 2002-006 H (1-2)
Apprenticeship Requirements
I
I
I
The apprentice labor hours required for this project are N/A % of the total labor hours. The undersigned agrees
to utilize this level of apprentice participation. Voluntary workforce diversity goals for this apprentice
participation are identified in the Instructions To Bidders and Supplemental Conditions.
Liquidated Darnal!es
The undersigned agrees to pay the Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $500.00 for each consecutive
calendar day that is in default after the Contract Time. Liquidated damages shall be deducted from the contract
by change order.
Receipt of Addenda
I
I
I
I
I
I
Receipt of the following addenda is acknowledged:
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Name of Firm
NOTE: Ifbidder is a cmporalioll, write State of Incorporation; if a partnership, give full names and addresses of all parties below.
Signed by
, Official Capacity
Print Name
Address
I
I
I
City
State
Zip Code
Date
Telephone
FAX
State of Washington Contractor's License No.
Federal Tax LD #
e-mail address:
I
Page 3 of3
03/20/2003
I
I
I
\
I
Form
S.F. 500 A
(7/2192)
State of Washington
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY.
THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND. EXTEND OR ALTER THE
COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
I
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
I
INSURED (Legal name and business address)
CERTIFICATE HOLDER'
STATE OF WASHINGTON
CONTRACT NUMBER
I
DEPT. OF GENERAL ADMINISTRATION
DIVISION OF E&A SERVICES
206 GENERAL ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
OLYMPIA, WASHINGTON 98504.1012
PROJECT DESCRIPTION I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I RESTRlCTlONS I SPECIAL ITEMS,
DA TE ISSUED,
I
I
CO TYPE OF INSURANCE
LTR
I
GENERAL LIABILITY
Commercial General Liability
Claims Made 0 Occurrence
Owner's & Contractors Protection
General Ag egate
Products Com I sA e ate
Personal & Advertisin In'u
Each Occurrence
Fire Dama e An One Fire
Medical Ex ense An One Person)
$
$
$
$
$
$
I
I
Deductible $
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
Any Auto
A II Owned Autos
Scheduled Autos
Hired AUIOS
Non-Owned Autos
Garage Liability
Deductible $
EXCESS LIABILITY
CSL $
Bodily Injury
(per person) S
Bodily Injury
(per accident) S
Property
Damage $
Each Occurrence
I
I
Other Than Umbrella Fonn
$
STATUTORY
$
$
$
(Each Accident)
(Disease Policy Limit)
(Disease-Each Em 10 ee)
I
WORKERS COMPENSATION
AND
EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY
OTHER
I
ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS
I
The State or Washington is included as additional insured as related to the above mentioned project.
Should any of the above described policies be cancelled before the expiration date thereof, the issuing Company must deliver or mail not less than a 45 days written notice
to the above Certificate Holder, per RCW 48.18.290
I
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
ISSUING COMPANY, AGENT OR REPRESENTATIVE
NOTE: Attach a separate sheet to this certificate giving
all the company names and their percentage of coverage, if
clarification is needed,
NAME,
I
A
ADDRESS,
I
- B
"
"
"
--l
'" C
"
a
E D
0
U
E
Authorized Signature
Title
Signature Date
Signee Name
Telephone No.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Instructions to Bidders/
General Conditions/
Supplemental Conditions
For State Facility Construction
Effective March 20, 2003
Approved By
John W. Lynch, Assistant Director
Mary Ellen Combo, Assistant Attorney General
~ Washington State Department of
~ General Administration
Division of Engineering and Architectural Services
PO Box 41012
Olympia, WA 98504-1012
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION
PART 0 - GENERAL CONDITIQNS
0.01 EXPLANATION TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS
A, Any prospective bidder desiring an explanation or interpretation of the
solicitation, drawings, specifications, etc., must submit a request in writing to the
Architect/Engineer (AlE) 7 calendar days before the bid due date. Oral
explanations or instructions given before the award of a contract will not be
binding. Any information given a prospective bidder concerning a solicitation
will be furnished promptly to all other prospective bidders by addendum to the
solicitation, if that information is necessary in submitting bids or if the lack of it
would be prejudicial to other prospective bidders.
B. In accordance with the legislative [mdings and policies set forth in Chapter 39.19
RCW the State of Washington encourages participation in all of its contracts by
MWBE firms certified by the Office of Minority and Women's Business
Enterprises (OMWBE), Participation may be either on a direct basis in response
to this invitation or as a subcontractor to a bidder. However, unless required by
federal statutes, regulations, grants, or contract terms referenced in the contract
documents, no preference will be included in the evaluation of bids, no minimum
level of MWBE participation shall be required as a condition for receiving an
award, and bids will not be rejected or considered non-responsive on that basis.
Any affirmative action requirements set forth in federal regulations or statutes
included or referenced in the contract documents will apply.
C. In accordance with Executive Order 00-01 the State of Washington may require
Apprenticeship Participation for projects of a certain cost. On applicable
projects the bid advertisement and Bid'Proposal form shall establish a minimum
required percentage of apprentice labor hours compared to the total labor hours.
V oluntary workforce diversity goals havc been established for the apprentice
hours, These goals are that one-fifth (1/5) of the apprentice hours be performed by
minorities, and one-sixth (1/6) of the apprentice hours be performed by women,
Bidders may contact the Department of Labor and Industries, Specialty
Compliance Services Division, Apprenticeship Section, P,O. Box 44530, Olympia,
W A 98504-4530, by phone (360) 902-5320, and e-mail at thurn235@lni.wa.gov,
to obtain information on available apprenticeship programs.
Instructions to Bidders
Page I - March 20, 2003
0.02
0,03
PREPARATION OF BIDS - CONSTRUCTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Bids must be: (1) submitted on the bid proposal forms, or copies of forms, furnished
by the Owner or the Owner's agent, and (2) signed in ink, The person signing a bid
must initial each change appearing on any bid form, If the bid is made by a
corporation, it shall be signed by the corporation's authorized designee. The address
of the bidder shall be typed or printed on the bid form in the space provided.
B. The bid form may requirl;: bidders to submit bid prices for one or more items on
various bases, including: (1) lump sum base bid; (2) lump sum bid alternate
prices; (3) unit prices; or (4) any combination of items (I) through (3) above.
C. If the solicitation includes alternate bid items, failure to bid on the alternates may
disqualify the bid, If bidding on all items is not required, bidders should insert the
words "no bid" in the space provided for any item on which no price is submitted.
D. Substitute bid proposals will not be considered unless this solicitation authorizes
their submission.
BID GUARANTEE
A. When the sum of the base bid plus all additive bid alternates is $35,000.00 or less,
bid security is not required.
When the sum of the base bid plus all additive alternates is greater than
$35,000,00, a bid guarantee in the amount of 5% of the base bid amount is
required. Failure of the bidder to provide bid guarantee when required shall
render the bid non-responsive.
B. Acceptable forms of bid guarantee are: A bid bond or postal money order, or
certified check or cashier's check made payable to, the Washington State
Treasurer.
The Owner will return bid guarantees (other than bid bond) to unsuccessful
bidders as soon as practicable, but not sooner than the execution of a contract with
the successful bidder. The successful bidder's bid guarantee will be returned to
the successful bidder with its official notice to proceed with the work of the
contract.
C. The bidder will allow 60 days from bid opening date for acceptance of its bid by
the Owner.
The bidder will return to the Owner a signed contract, insurance certificate and
bond or bond waiver within 15 days after receipt of the contract. If the apparent
successful bidder fails to sign all contractual documents or provide the bond and
'Insurance as required or return the documents within 15 days after receipt of the
contract, the Owner may terminate'the award of the contract.
Instructions to Bidders
Page 2 - March 20, 2003
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0.04
0.05
0.06
D. In the event a bidder discovers an error in its bid following the bid opening, the
bidder may request to withdraw its bid under the following conditions:
I. Written notification is received by the Owner within 24 hours following
bid opening.
2. The bidder provides written documentation of the claimed error to the
satisfaction of the Owner within 72 hours following the bid opening.
The Owner will approve or disapprove the request for withdrawal of the bid in
writing. If the bidder's request for withdrawal of its bid is approved, the bidder
will be released from further obligation to the Owner without penalty. If it is
disapproved, the Owner may retain the bidder's bid guarantee,
ADDITIVE OR DEDUCTIVE BID ITEMS
The low bidder, for purposes of award, shall be the responsive bidder offering the low
aggregate amount for the base bid item, plus additive or deductive bid alternates selected
by the Owner, and within funds available for the project.
The bidder agrees to hold all bid alternate prices for sixty (60) days from date of bid
opemng.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA
Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda to this solicitation by identifying the
addenda numbers in the space provided for this purpose on the bid proposal form.
Failure to do so may result in the bid being declared non-responsive.
SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK
The bidder acknowledges that it has taken steps necessary to ascertain the nature and
location of the work, and that it has investigated and satisfied itself as to the general and
local conditions which can affect the work or its cost, including but not limited to (I)
conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling, and storage of materials; (2)
the availability of labor, water, electric power, and road; (3) uncertainties of weather,
river stages, tides, or similar physical conditions at the site; (4) the conformation and
conditions of the ground; and (5) the character of equipment and facilities needed
preliminary to and during the work. The bidder also acknowledges that it has satisfied
itself as to character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or
obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from
an inspection of the site, including exploratory work done by the Owner, as well as from
the drawings and specifications made a part of this contract. Any failure of the bidder to
take the actions described and acknowledged in this paragraph will not relieve the bidder
from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty and cost of successfully
performing the work.
Instructions to Bidders
Page 3 - March 20, 2003
0.07
0.08
0.09
BID AMOUNTS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. The bid prices shown for each item on the bid proposal shall include all labor,
material, equipment, overhead and compensation to complete all of the work for
that item.
B. The actual cost of building permit (only) and the public utility hookup fees will be
a direct reimbursement to the Contractor or paid directly to the permitting agency
by the Owner. Fees for these permits should not be included by the Bidder in the
bid amount.
C. The Bidder agrees to hold the base bid prices for sixty (60) days from date of bid
opemng.
TAXES
The bid amounts shall not include Washington State Sales Tax (WSST). All other taxes
imposed by law shall be included in the bid amount. The Owner will include WSST in
progress payments. The Contractor shall pay the WSST to the Department of Revenue
and shall furnish proof of payment to the Owner if requested,
[NOTE: Contractor must bond for contract amount plus the WSST,]
SUBMISSION OF BIDS
A. Bid Proposals must be submitted on or before the time specified III the
Advertisement for Bids.
B. If the base bid and the sum of the additive alternates is one million dollars or
more, the Bid Proposal shall comply with the following requirements:
I. Pursuant to RCW 39,30,060, if the base bid and the sum of the additive
alternates is one million dollars or more, the Bidder shall provide names of
the Subcontractors with whom the Bidder will subcontract for
performance of heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HV AC),
plumbing, and electrical.
2. The Bidder can name itself for the performance of the work.
3. The Bidder shall not list more than one Subcontractor for each category of
work identified UNLESS Subcontractors vary with bid alternates, in
which case the Bidder must indicate which Subcontractor will be used for
which alternate.
4. Failure of the Bidder to submit as part of the bid the NAMES of such
Subcontractors or to name itself to perform such work shall render the
Bidder's bid nonresponsive and, therefore, void.
Instructions to Bidders
Page 4 - March 20, 2003
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0.10
0.11
C. The Bid Proposal shall be submitted in a sealed envelope addressed to the office
specified in the Advertisement for Bids. The envelope shall have printed on the
outside:
I. The project number and description,
2. The name and address of the bidder.
3. Identification as Bid Proposal.
D. Prior to the bid opening, the Owner's representative will designate the official bid
clock. Any part of the bid proposal or bid modification not received prior to the
times specified, per the designated bid clock, will not be considered and the bid
will be returned to the bidder unopened.
E, A bid may be withdrawn in person by a bidder's authorized representative before
the opening of the bids. Bidder(s) representative will be required to show ID and
sign on bid summary sheet before it will be released,
F. People with disabilities who wish to request special accommodation, (e.g" sign
language interpreters, Braille, etc.) need to contact the Owner ten (10) working
days prior to the scheduled bid opening.
BID RESULTS
After the Bid Opening, Bidders may obtain bid results from the office of E&AS by calling
(360) 902-7272 or by logging on to E&AS' web site: http://www.ga.wa.gov/eas/easvend.htrn.
Bid results may also be obtained from the AlE.
LOW RESPONSffiLE BIDDER
If applicable, it is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the low responsible
bidder. In determining the bidder's responsibility, the Owner shall consider an overall
accounting of the attached "DIVISION 00 RESPONSIBILITY CRITERIA".
Upon Owner's request, the apparent low bidder must supply the requested information
within two (2) business days of request by Owner. Withholding information or failure to
submit all the information requested within the time provided shall render the bid non-
responsIve.
If the Owner determines that the apparent low bidder is not responsible, the Owner will
notify the bidder of its preliminary determination in writing, Within three (3) days after
receipt ofthe preliminary determination, the bidder may withdraw its bid or request a
hearing. The Owner will schedule a hearing within three (3) working days ofreceipt of
the bidder's request. The hearing members will include the Client Agency
Representative, EAS Assistant Director, Deputy Assistant DireCtor, and Project Manager.
The Owner will issue a Final Determination after reviewing information presented at the
hearing. The Owner's Final Determination is specific to this project, and will have no
effect on other or future projects,
Instructions to Bidders
Page 5 - March 20, 2003
0.12 CONTRACT AWARD
A, The Owner will evaluate bids responsiveness and responsibility,
I, A bid will be considered responsive if it meets the following requirements:
a) It is received at th~ proper time and place.
b) It meets the stated requirements of the bid proposal.
c) It is submitted by a licensed/registered contractor within the State of
Washington at the time of bid opening and is not banned from bidding by
the Department of Labor and Industries.
d) It is accompanied by a bid guarantee, ifrequired.
2, A bid will be considered responsible if it meets the following requirements:
a) It meets an overall accounting of the responsibility criteria established for
the project.
B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bid proposals and to
waive informalities,
C. The Owner may negotiate bid price adjustments with the low responsive bidder,
including changes in the contract documents, to bring the bid within the available
funding per RCW 39.04.015.
D. The apparent low bidder, for purpose of award, shall be the responsive bidder
offering the low aggregate amount for the base bid plus selected additive or
deductive bid alternates and meeting all other bid submittal requirements.
E, The Contract will only become effective when signed by the Owner. Prior to the
Owner's signature, any and all costs incurred shall be the sole responsibility of the
bidder.
0.13 DOCUMENTS (ATTACHED)
A. Advertisement for Bids
B. Responsibility Criteria (if applicable)
C. Sid Proposal
D. Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates
E. Certificate oflnsurance form
Note: AlA l'ayment Bond and Performance Bond forms (A312) are required. These
forms will not be provided by the Owner.
Instructions To Bidders/GENCONDfWORDHOLD
Instructions to Bidders
Page 6 - March 20, 2003
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
Part 1
Part Page Part Page
PART I GENERAL PROVISIONS 5.14 Availability and Use of Utility
1.01 Definitions 2 Services 18
1.02 Order of Precedence 3 5.15 Tests and Inspection 18
1.03 Execution and Intent 3 5.16 Correction ofNonconfonning Work 19
5.17 Clean Up 20
PART 2 INSURANCE AND BONDS 5.18 Access to Wark 20
2.0t Contraclor's Liability Insurance 5 5.19 Other Contracts 20
2.02 Coverage Limits 5 5.20 Subcontractors and Suppliers 20
2.03 Insurance Coverage Certificates 5 5.21 Warranty ofConstruclion 21
2.04 Paymenl and Performance Bonds 5 5.22 Indemnification 21
2.05 Additional Bond Security 6
2.06 Builder's Risk 6 PART 6 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
6.01 Contract Sum 22
PART 3 TIME AND SCHEDULE 6.02 Schedule of Values 22
3,01 Progress and Completion 7 6.03 Application for Payment 22
3.02 Construction Schedule 7 6.04 Progress Payments 22
3.03 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work for 6.05 Payments Withheld 23
Convenience 7 6.06 Retainage and Bond Claim Rights 23
3,04 Owner's Right to Stop the Work for Cause 8 6.07 Substantial Completion 23
3.05 Delay 8 6.08 Prior Occupancy 23
3.06 Notice to Owner of Labor Dispules 8 6.09 Final Completion) Acceptance,
3.07 Damages for Failure to Achieve Timely and Payment 24
Completion 9
PART 7 CHANGES
PART 4 SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND 7.01 Changes in the Work 25
OTHER DOCUMENTS 7.02 Change in the Contract Sum 25
4.01 Discrepancies and Contract Document 7.03 Change in the Contract Time 31
Review 10
4.02 Project Record 10 PART 8 CLAtMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION
4.03 Shop Drawings to 8.01 Claims Procedure 33
4.04 Organization of Specifications II 8.02 Arbitration 34
4.05 Ownership and Use of Drawings, 8.03 Claims Audits 34
Specifications, and Other Documents II
PART 9 TERMINATION OF THE WORK
PART 5 PERFORMANCE 9.01 Tennination by Owner for Cause 36
5.01 Contractor Control and Supervision 13 9.02 Tennination by Owner for
5.02 Permits, Fees and Notices t3 Convenience 36
5.03 Patenls and Royalties 13
5.04 Prevailing Wages 13 PART 10 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
5.05 Hours of Labor 14 10.01 Governing Law 38
5.06 Nondiscrimination t4 10.02 Successors and Assigns 38
5.07 Safety Precautions 15 10.03 Meaning of Words 38
5.08 Operations, Material Handling, and Storage 10.04 Rights and Remedies 38
Areas 16 10.05 Contractor Registration 38
5.09 Prior Notice of Excavation 17 10.06 Time Computations 38
5.10 Unforeseen Physical Conditions 17 10.07 Records Retention 38
5.11 Protection of Existing Structures, Equipment, 10.08 Third-Party Agreemenls 38
Vegetation, Utilities, and Improvements 17 10.09 Antitrust Assignment 38
5.12 Layout of Work 17
5.13 Material and Equipment 18
March 20, 2003
00700 . page t
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
PART I - GENERAL PROVISIONS
I.
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. "Application for Payment" means a written
request submitted by Contraclor to AlE for J.
payment of Work completed in accordance with
Ihe Contract Documents and approved Schedule
of Values, supported by such substantiating dala
as Owner or AlE may require.
B. "Architect," "Engineer,lt or "AlE" means a K.
person or entity lawfully entiJled to practice
architecture or engineering, representing Owner
within the limits of its delegated authority.
C. "Change Order" means a written instrument L.
signed by Owner and Contractor Slating their
agreement upon all of the following: (1) a
change in the Work; (2) the amount of the
adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any, and (3) M.
the extenl of the adjustment in the Contract
Time, if any.
D. "Claim" means Contractor's exclusive remedy for
resolving disputes with Owner regarding the N.
terms of a Change Order or a request for
equitable adjustment, as more fully set forth in
part 8.
E. "Contract A ward Amount" is the sum of the Base
Bid and any accepted Alternates.
F. "Contract Documents" means the Advertisement O.
for Bids, Instructions for Bidders, completed
Form of Proposal, General Conditions,
Modifications to the General Conditions,
Supplemental Conditions, Public Works P.
Contract, other Special Forms, Drawings and
Specifications, and all addenda and
modifications thereof.
G. "Contract Sum" is the tolal amount payable by
Owner to Contractor for perfonnance of the Q.
Wark in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
H. "Contract Time" is the number of calendar days R.
allotted in the Contract Documents for achieving
Substantial Completion of the Work.
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 2
I
Part I
llContractor" means the person or entity who has
agreed with Owner to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
I
I
"Drawings" are the graphic and pictorial portions
of the Contract Documents showing the design,
location, and dimensions of the Work, and may
include plans, elevations, sections, details,
schedules, and diagrams.
I
ttFinal Acceptance" means the written acceptance
issued 10 Contractor by Owner after Contractor
has completed the requirements of the Contracl
Documents.
I
I
"Final Completion" means that Ihe Work is fully
and finally completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
I
"Force Majeure" means those acts entitling
Contractor to request an equitable adjustment in
the Contract Time, as more fully set forth in
paragraph 3.05A.
I
"Notice" means a written notice which has been
delivered in person to the individual or a member
of the firm or entity or to an officer of the
corporation for which it was intended or, if
delivered or sent by registered or certified mail,
to the Iasl business address known 10 the party
giving notice.
I
I
I
"Notice to Proceed" means a notice from Owner
to Contractor that defines the date on which the
Contract Time begins to ruo.
I
"Owner" means the state agency, institution, or
its authorized representative with the authority to
enter into, administer, and/or terminate the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents and
make related determinations and findings.
I
I
"Person" means a corporation, partnership,
business association of any kind, trust, company,
or individual.
I
"Prior Occupancy" means Owner's use of all or
parts of the Project before Substantial
Completion.
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
S.
"Progress Schedule" means a schedule of the
Wark, in a form satisfactory to Owner, as further
set forth in section 3.02.
I
T.
"Project" means the total construction of which the
Work performed in accordance with the Contract
Documents may be the whole or a part and which
may include construction by Owner or by separate
contractors.
I
I
U. "Project Manual" means the volume usually
assembled for the Work which may include the
bidding requirements, sample forms, and other
Contract Documents.
I
I
V. "Project Record" means the separate set of
Drawings and Specifications as further set forth in
paragraph 4.02A.
I
W. "Schedule of Values" means a written breakdown
allocating the total Contract Sum to each principle
category of Work, in such detail as requested by
Owner.
I
X. "Specifications" are that portion of the Contract
Documents consisting of the written requirements
for materials, equipment, construction systems,
standards and workmanship for the Work, and
performance of related services.
I
I
Y.
"Subcontract" means a contract entered into by
Subcontractor for the purpose of obtaining
supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any
kind for or in connection with the Work.
I
I
Z. "Subcontractor" means any person, other than
Contractor, who agrees to furnish or furnishes any
supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any
kind in connection with the Work.
I
AA. "Substantial Completion" means that stage in the
progress of the Work where Owner has full and
umestricted use and benefit of the facilities for the
purposes intended, as more fully set forth in section
6.07.
I
I
AB. "Worktt means the construction and services
required by the Contract Documents, and includes,
but is not limited to, labor, malerials, supplies,
equipment, services, permits, and the manufacture
and fabrication of components, perfonned,
I
I
Part 1
furnished, or provided in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
t.02 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
Any conflict or inconsistency in the Contract Documents
shall be resolved by giving the documents precedence in
the following order.
I.
Signed Public Works Contract, including any
Change Orders, and any Special Forms.
2,
Supplemental Conditions',
3.
Modifications to the General Conditions.
4.
General Conditions.
5.
Specifications--provisions in Division I shall take
precedence over provisions of any other Division.
6,
Drawings--in case of conflict within the
Drawings, large scale drawings shall take
precedence over small scale drawings.
7.
Signed and Completed Form of Proposal.
8.
Instructions to Bidders.
9. Advertisemenl for Bids.
1.03 EXECUTION AND INTENT
Contractor makes the following representations to Owner:
1. The Contract Sum is reasonable compensation for
the Work and the Contract Time is adequate for the
performance of the Work, as represented by the
Contract Documents;
2. Contractor has carefully reviewed the Contract
Documents, visited and examined the Project site,
become familiar with the local conditions in which
the Work is to be performed, and satisfied itself as
to the nature, location, character, quality and
quantity of the Work, the labor, materials,
equipment, goods, supplies, work, services and
other items to be furnished and all other
requirements of the Contract Documents, as well as
the surface and subsurface conditions and other
matters that may be encountered at the project site
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 3
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
or affect performance of the Work or the cost or
difficulty thereof;
3.
Contractor is financially solvent, able 10 pay its
debts as they mature, and possesses sufficient
working capital to complete the Wark and perform
Contractor's obligations required by the Contract
Documents; and
4.
Contractor is able 10 furnish the plant, tools,
materials, supplies, equipment and labor required
to complete the Work and perform the obligations
required by the Contract Documents and has
sufficient experience and competence to do so.
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 4
I
I
Part I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
PART 2. INSURANCE AND BONDS
I
2.01 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
I
Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall
obtain all Ihe insurance required by the Contract
Documents and provide evidence satisfactory to Owner
that such insurance has been procured. Review of the
Contractor's insurance by Owner shall not relieve or
decrease the liability of Contractor. Companies writing
the insurance to be obtained by this part shall be licensed
to do business under Chapter 48 RCW or comply with the
Surplus Lines Law of the State of Washington. Contraclor
shall include in its bid the cosl of all insurance and bond
costs required to complete the base bid work and accepled
alternates. Insurance carriers providing insurance in
accordance with the Contract Documents shall be
acceptable to Owner, and its A. M. Best rating shall be
indicated on the insurance certificates.
I
I
I
I
A. Contractor shall maintain the following insurance
coverage during the Wark and for one year after
Final Acceptance. Contractor shall also maintain
the following insurance coverage during the
perfonnance of any corrective Wark required by
section 5.17.
I
I
I. General liability on the ISO 1986 New
Occurrence Form or its equivalent which will
include:
I
a. Completed operations/products liability;
I
b. Explosion, collapse, and underground;
and
I
c. Employer's liability coverage.
2. Aulomobile liability
I
B. Contractor shall comply with the Washinglon Stale
Industrial Insurance Act and, if applicable, the
Federal Longshoremen's and Harbor Workers' Act
and the Jones Act.
I
I
C. All insurance coverages shall protect againsl
claims for damages for personal and bodily
injury or death, as well as claims for property
damage, which may arise from operations in
connection with the Work whether such
operations are by Contractor or any
Subcontractor.
I
I:
Part 2
D. All insurance coverages shall be endorsed to
include Owner as an additional named insured for
Work performed in accordance with the Contracl
Documents, and all insurance certificates shall
evidence the Owner as an additional insured.
2.02 COVERAGE LIMITS
The coverage limits shall be as follows:
A, Limits of Liability shall not be less than $1 ,000,000
Combined Single Limit for Bodily Injury and
Property Damage (other than Aulomobile liability)
Each Occurrence; Personal Injury and Advertising
Liability Each Occurrence.
B. $2,000,000 Combined Single Limit Arumal
General Aggregate.
C. $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate for Producls and
Completed Operations Liability.
D. $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit for Aulomobile
Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, Each
Accident or Loss.
2.03 INSURANCE COVERAGE CERTIFICATES
A. Prior to conunencement of the Work, Contractor
shall fumish to Owner a completed certificate of
msurance coverage.
B.
All insurance certificates shall name Owner's
Project number and Project title.
C. All insurance certificaIes shall specifically require
45 days prior notice to Owner of cancellation or
any material change, except 30 days for surplus line
insurance.
2.04 PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BONDS
Paymenl and performance bonds for 100% of the Contract
Sum, including all Change Orders and stale sales tax, shall
be furnished for the Work, and shall be in a form
acceptable to the Owner. No payment or performance
bond is required if the Contracl Sum is $25,000 or less
and Contractor agrees that Owner may, in lieu of the
bond, retain 50% of the Contract Sum for the period
allowed by RCW 39.08.010.
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 5
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 6
I
I
Part 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
2.05 ADDITIONAL BOND SECURITY
Contractor shall promptly furnish additional security
required to protect Owner and persons supplying labor or
materials required by the Contract Documents if:
A. Owner has a reasonable objection to the surety; or
B. Any surety fails to furnish reports on its financial
condition if requested by Owner.
2.06 BUILDER'S RISK
A, Contractor shall purchase and maintain property
insurance in the amount of the Contract Sum
including all Change Orders for the Work on a
replacement cost basis until Substantial
Completion. The insurance shall cover the interest
of Owner, Contractor, and any Subcontractors, as
their interests may appear.
B. Contractor property insurance shall be placed on an
"all risk" basis and insure against the perils of fire
and extended coverage and physical loss or damage
including theft, vandalism, malicious mischief,
collapse, false work, temporary buildings, debris
removal including demolition occasioned by
enforcement of any applicable legal requirements,
and shall cover reasonable compensation for AlE's
services and expenses required as a result of an
insured loss.
C. Owner and Contractor waive all subrogation rights
against each other, any Subcontractors, AlE, AlE's
subconsultants, separate contractors described in
section 5.20, if any, and any of their subcontractors,
for damages caused by fue or other perils to the
extent covered by property insurance obtained
pursuant to this section or other property insurance
applicable to the Work, except such riglits as they
have 10 proceeds of such insurance held by Owner
as fiduciary. The policies shall provide such
waivers of subrogation by endorsement or
otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be
effective to a person or entity even though that
person or entity would olherwise have a duty of
indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not
pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly,
and whether or not the person or entity had an
insurable interest in the property damaged.
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
PART 3 . TIME AND SCHEDULE
I
3.0t PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
I
Contractor shall diligently prosecute the Work, with
adequate forces, achieve Substantial Completion within
the Contract Time, and achieve Final Completion within a
reasonable period thereafter.
I
I
3.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Unless otherwise provided in Division 1,
Contractor shall, within 14 days after issuance of
the Notice to Proceed, submit a preliminary
Progress Schedule. The Progress Schedule shall
show the sequence in which Contractor proposes to
perform the Work, and the dates on which
Contractor plans to start and finish major portions
of the Work, including dates for shop drawings and
other submittals, and for acquiring materials and
equipment.
I
I
I
I
B.
Unless otherwise provided in Division 1,
The Progress Schedule shall be in the form of a bar
chart, or a critical path method analysis, as
specified by Owner. The preliminary Progress
Schedule may be general, showing the major
portions of the Work, with a more detailed Progress
Schedule submitted as directed by Owner.
I
c.
Owner shall return comments on the preliminary
Progress Schedule to Contraclor within 14 days of
receipt. Review by Owner of Contractor's schedule
does not constitute an approval or acceptance of
Contractor's construction means, methods, or
sequencing, or its ability to complete the Work
within the Contract Time. Contractor shall revise
and resubmit its schedule, as necessary. Owner
may withbold a portion of progress payments until
a Progress Schedule has been submitted which
meets the requirements of this section.
I
I
I
I
D. Contractor shall ulilize and comply with the
Progress Schedule. On a monthly basis, or as
otherwise directed by Owner, Contractor shall
submit an updated Progress Schedule at ils own
expense to Owner indicating actual progress. If,
in the opinion of Owner, Contractor is not in
conformance with the Progress Schedule for
reasons other than acts of Force Majeure as
I
I
I'
Part 3
identified in section 3.05, Contractor shall take
such steps as are necessary to bring the actual
completion dates of its work activities into
conformance with the Progress Schedule, or revise
the Progress Schedule to reconcile with the actual
progress of the Work.
E. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner in writing
of any actual or anlicipated event which is delaying
or could delay achievement of any milestone or
performance of any critical path activity of the
Work. Contractor shall indicate the expected
duration of the delay, the anticipated effect of the
delay on the Progress Schedule, and the action
being or to be taken 10 correct the problem.
Provision of such notice does not relieve
Contractor of its obligation to complete the Work
within the Contract Time.
3.03 OWNER'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK
FOR CONVENIENCE
A.
Owner may, at its sole discretion, order Contractor,
in writing, to suspend all or any part of the Work
for up to 90 days, or for such longer period as
mutually agreed.
B.
Upon receipl of a written notice suspending the
Work, Contractor shall immediately comply with
its terms and take all reasonable steps to minimize
the incurrence of cost of perfonnance directly
attributable to such suspension. Within a period up
to 90 days after the notice is delivered to
Contractor, or within any extension of that period
to which the parties shall have agreed, Owner shall
either:
I. Cancel the written notice suspending the
Work; or
2. Tenninate the Work covered by the notice as
provided in the termination provisions of part
9.
C.
If a written notice suspending the Work is
cancelled or the period of the notice or any
extension thereof expires, Contractor shall resume
Work.
D.
Contractor shall be enlitled to an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Time, or Contract
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 7
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
sum, or both, for increases in the time or cost of
perfonnance direclly attributable to such suspension,
provided Contractor complies with all requirements
set forth in part 7.
3.04 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK FOR
CAUSE
A. If Contractor fails or refuses to perform its
obligations in accordance with the Contract
Documents, Owner may order Contractor, in
writing, to stop the Work, or any portion thereof,
until satisfactory corrective action has been taken.
B. Contractor shall not be entilled to an equitable
adjuslment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum
for any increased cost or time of performance
attributable 10 Contractor's failure or refusal to
perform or from any reasonable remedial action
laken by Owner based upon such failure.
3.05 DELAY
A.
Any delay in or failure of performance by Owner or
Contractor, other than the payment of money, shall
not constitute a default hereunder if and to the
exlent the cause for such delay or failure of
perfonnance was unforeseeable and beyond the
control of the party ("Force Majeure"). Acts of
Force Majeure include, but are not limited to:
L Acts of God or the public enemy;
2. Acts or omissions of any government entity;
3. Fire or other casualty for which Contractor is
not responsible;
4. Quarantine or epidemic;
5. Strike or defensive lockout;
6. Unusually severe weather conditions which
could not have been reasonably anticipated;
and
7. Unusual delay in receipt of supplies or
products which were ordered and expedited
and for which no substitute reasonably
acceptable to Owner was available.
I
Part 3
B.
Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable
adjuslment in the Contract Time for changes in the
time of perfonnance directly attributable to an act
of Force Majeure, provided it makes a request for
equitable adjuslment according to section 7.03.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjuslment in
the Contract Sum resulting from an act of Force
Majeure.
I
I
I
c.
Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable
adjuslment in Contract Time, and may be entitled
to an equitable adjuslment in Contract Sum, if the
cost or time of Contractor's performance is changed
due to the fault or negligence of Owner, provided
the Contractor makes a request according to
sections 7.02 and 7.03.
I
I
D.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjuslmenl in
Contract Time or in the Contract Sum for any delay
or failure of perfonnance to the extent such delay
or failure was caused by Contractor or anyone for
whose acts Contractor is responsible.
I
I
E.
To the extenl any delay or failure ofperfonnance
was concurrently caused by the Owner and
Contractor, Contractor shall be entitled to an
adjuslment in the Conttact Time for that portion of
the delay or failure of performance that was
concurrently caused, provided it makes a request
for equitable adjustment according to section 7.03,
but shall not be entitled to an adjuslment in
Contract Sum.
I
I
I
F. Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to
prevent and mitigate the effects of any delay,
whether occasioned by an act of Force Majeure or
otherwise.
I
I
3.06 NOTICE TO OWNER OF LABOR DISPUTES
A. If Contraclor has knowledge that any actual or
potential labor dispute is delaying or threatens to
delay timely perfoffi13nce in accordance with the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately
give notice, including all relevant information, to
Owner.
I
I
B. Contractor agrees to insert a provision in its
Subcontracts and to require insertion in all sub-
subcontracts, that in the event timely
perfonnance of any such contract is delayed or
threatened by delay by any actual or potential
I
I
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 8
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON ST ATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
Part 3
I
labor dispute, the Subcontractor or Sub.
subcontractor shall immediately notify the next
higher tier Subcontractor or Contractor, as the
case may be, of all relevant infonnation
concerning the dispute.
actually achieved. Owner may offset these costs
against any payment due Contractor.
I
3.07 DAMAGES FOR fAILURE TO ACHIEVE
TIMELY COMPLETION
I
A.
Liquidaled Damages
I
I. Timely performance and completion of the
Work is essential to Owner and time limits
stated in the Contract Documents are of the
essence. Owner will incur serious and
substantial damages if Suhstimtial Completion
of the Work does not occur within the Contract
Time. However, it would be difficult if not
impossible to detennine the exact amount of
such damages. Consequently, provisions for
liquidated damages are included in the
Contract Docwnents.
I
I
I
2. The liquidated damage amounts set forth in the
Contract Documents will be assessed not as a
penalty, but as liquidated damages for breach
of the Contract Documents. This amount is
fixed and agreed upon by and between the
Contractor and Owner because of the
impracticability and extreme difficulty of
fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the
Owner would in such event sustain. This
amount shall be construed as the actual amount
of damages sustained by the Owner, and may
be retained by the Owner and deducted from
periodic payments to the Contractor.
I
I
I
I
3. Assessment of liquidaled damages shall nol
release Contractor from any further obligations
or liabilities pursuant to the Contract
Documents.
I
I
B.
Actual Damages
I
Actual damages will be assessed for failure to
achieve Final Completion within the time provided.
Aclual damages will be calculated on the basis of
direct architectural, administrative, and other
relaled costs attributable to the Project from the
date when Final Completion should have been
achieved, based on the date Substantial Completion
is actually achieved, to the date final Completion is
I
I
March 20, 2003
00700 . pagc 9
PART4.
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
SPECIFICA nONS, DRAWINGS, AND
OTHER DOCUMENTS
4.01 DISCREPANCIES AND CONTRACT
DOCUMENT REVIEW
A.
B.
The intent of the Specifications and Drawings is to
describe a complete Project to be constructed in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
Contraclor shall furnish all labor, materials,
equipment, tools, transportation, permits, and
supplies, and perform the Work required in
accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and
other provisions of the Contract Documents,
The Contract Documents are complementary.
What is required by one part of the Contract
Documents shall be binding as if required by all.
Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not
shown on the Drawings, or shown on the Drawings
and noI mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of
like effect as if shown or mentioned in both.
c.
Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents with each other and with
infonnation furnished by Owner. If, during the
performance of the Work, Contractor finds a
conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission in the
Contract Documents, il shall promptly and before
proceeding with the Work affecled thereby, report
such conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission to
AlE in writing.
D.
Contractor shall do no Work without applicable
Drawings, Specifications, or written modifications,
or Shop Drawings where required, unless
instructed to do so in writing by Owner. If
Contractor performs any construction activity, and
it knows or reasonably should have known that any
of the Contract Docwnents contain a conflict, error,
inconsistency, or omission, Contractor shall be
responsible for the perfonnance and shall bear Ihe
cost for its correction.
E.
Contraclor shall provide any work or materials the
provision of which is clearly implied and is within
the scope of the Contract Documents even if the
Contract Documents do not mention them
specifically.
I
Part 4
F. Questions regarding interpretation of the
requirements of the Contract Documents shall be
referred to the AlE.
I
4.02 PROJECT RECORD
I
A. Contractor shall legibly mark in ink on a separate
set of the Drawings and Specifications all actual
construction, including depths offoundations,
horizontal and vertical locations of internal and
underground utilities and appurtenances referenced
to permanent visible and accessible surface
improvements, field changes of dimensions and
delails, actual suppliers, manufacturers and trade
names, models of installed equipment, and Change
Order proposals. This separate set of Drawings and
Specifications shall be the "Project Record."
I
I
I
I
B. The Project Record shall be mainlained on the
project site throughout the construction and shall be
clearly labeled "PROJECT RECORD". The
Project Record shall be updaled at leasl weekly
noting all changes and shall be available 10 Owner
al all times.
I
I
C. Contractor shall submit the completed and finalized
Project Record to NE prior 10 Final Acceptance.
I
4,03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. "Shop Drawings" means documents and other
information required to be submitted to NE by
Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents,
showing in detail: the proposed fabrication and
assembly of structural elements; and the installation
(i.e. form, fit, and attachment details) of materials
and equipment. Shop Drawings include, but are
not limited to, drawings, diagrams, layouts,
schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations,
schedules, performance and test data, samples, and
similar malerials furnished by Contractor 10 explain
in detail specific portions of the Work required by
the Contract Documents. For materials and
equipment to be incorporaled into the Work,
Contractor submittal shall include the name of the
manufacturer, the model number, and other
information concerning the performance, capacity,
nature, and rating of the item. When directed,
I
I
I
I
I
I
Contractor shall submit all samples al its own
expense. Owner may duplicate, use, and disclose
I
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
Shop Drawings provided in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
B.
Contractor shaH coordinate all Shop Drawings, and
review them for accuracy, completeness, and
compliance with the Contract Documents and shaH
indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such
coordination and review. Where required by law,
Shop Drawings shaH be stamped by an appropriate
professional licensed by the state of Washington.
Shop Drawings submitted to AlE without evidence
of Contractor's approval shaH be returned for
resubmission. Contractor shall review, approve,
and submit Shop Drawings with reasonable
promptness and in such sequence as to cause no
delay in the Work or in the activities of Owner or
separate contractors. Contractor's submittal
schedule shaH aHow a reasonable time for NE
review. AlE will review, approve, or take other
appropriale action on the Shop Drawings.
Contractor shaH perform no portion of the Work
requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings
until the respective submittal has been reviewed
and the NE has approved or taken other
appropriate action. Owner and NE shall respond
to Shop Drawing submittals with reasonable
promptness. Any Work by Contractor shaH be in
accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings.
Submittals made by Contractor which are not
required by the Contract Documents may be
returned without action.
c.
Approval, or other appropriale action with regard
to Shop Drawings, by Owner or NE shaH not
relieve Contractor of responsibility for any errors
or omissions in such Shop Drawings, nor from
responsibility for compliance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents. Unless specified in the
Contract Documents, review by Owner or AlE shall
not constitute an approval of the safety precautions
employed by Contractor during construction, or
constitute an approval of Contractor's means or
methods of construction. IfContraclor fails to
obtain approval before installation, and the item or
work is subsequently rejected, Contractor shall be
responsible for all costs of correction.
D.
If Shop Drawings show variations from the
requirements of the Contract Documents,
Part 4
Contractor shall describe such variations in writing,
separale from the Shop Drawings, at the time it
submits the Shop Drawings containing such
variations. If AlE approves any such variation, an
appropriate Change Order will be issued. If the
variation is minor and does not involve an
adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contracl Time, a
Change Order need not be issued; however, the
modification shall be recorded upon the Project
Record.
E. Unless othetwise provided in Division I, Contractor
shall submit to AlE for approval 5 copies of all
Shop Drawings, Unless otherwise indicated, 3 sets
of all Shop Drawings shall be retained by AlE and
2 sets shall be returned to Contractor.
4.04 ORGANIZATION OF SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications are prepared in sections which conform
generally with trade practices. These sections are for
Owner and Contractor convenience and shall nol control
Contractor in dividing the Work among Ihe
Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work to
be performed by any trade.
4.05 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRA WINGS,
SPECIFICATIONS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, Specifications, and other documents
prepared by AlE are instruments of AlE's service
through which the, Work to be executed by
Contractor is desdibed. Neither Contractor nor any
Subcontractor shall own or claim a copyright in the
Drawings, Specifications, and other documents
prepared by NE, and NE shall be deemed the
aulhor of them and will, along with any righls of
Owner, retain all conunon law, statutory, and other
reserved rights, in addition 10 the copyright All
copies of these documents, except Contractor's set,
shall be returned or suitably accounted for to NE,
on request, upon completion of the Work.
B. The Drawings, Specifications, and other documents
prepared by the NE, and copies thereof fumished
to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this
Project They are not to be used by Contractor or
any Subcontractor on other projects or for additions
to this Project outside the scope of the Work
without the specific written consent of Owner and
AlE. Contractor and Subcontractors are granted a
limited license to use and reproduce applicable
March 20, 2003
. 00700. page II
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
portions of the Drawings, Specifications, and other
documents prepared by AlE appropriate to and for
use in the execution of their Wark.
c.
Contractor and all Subcontractors grant a non.
exclusive license to O\VJ1er, without additional cost
or royalty, to use for its own purposes (including
reproduction) all Shop Drawings, together with the
information and diagrams contained therein,
prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor. In
providing Shop Drawings, Contractor and all
Subcontractors warrant that they have authority to
grant to Owner a license to use the Shop Drawings,
and that such license is not in violation of any
copyright or other intellectual property right.
Contractor agrees to defend and indemnify Owner
pursuant to the indemnity provisions in section 5.23
from any violations of copyright or other
intellectual property rights arising out of Owner's
use of the Shop Drawings hereunder, or to secure
for Owner, at Contractor's own cost, licenses in
conformity with this section.
D.
The Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared
by Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, or its or
their equipment or material suppliers, and copies
thereof fumished to Contraclor, are for use solely
with respect to this Project. They are not to be
used by Contractor or any Subcontraclor of any
tier, or material or equipment supplier, on other
projects or for additions to this Project outside the
scope of the Wark without the specific written
consent or Owner. The Contractor, Subcontractors
of any tier, and material or equipment suppliers are
granted a limited license to use and reproduce
applicable portions of the Shop Drawings and other
submittals appropriate to and for use in the
execution of their Work under the Contract
Documents.
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 12
I
I
Part 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
PART 5 - PERFORMANCE
5.01 CONTRACTOR CONTROL AND
SUPERVISION
A.
Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,
using its best skill and attention, and shall perform
the Work in a skillful manner. Contractor shall be
solely responsible for and have control over
construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all
portions of the Work, unless the Contract
Documents give other specific instructions
concerning these matters. Contractor shall disclose
its means and methods of construction when
requested by Owner.
B.
Perfonnance of the Work shall be directly
supervised by a competent superintendent who is
satisfactory to Owner and has authority to act for
Contractor. The superintendent shall not be
changed withoulthe prior written consent of
Owner.
c.
Contractor shall be responsible to Owner for acts
and omissions of Contractor, Subcontractors, and
their employees and agents.
D.
Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good
order among Contractor's employees and other
persons performing the Work. Contraclor shall nol
permit employmenl of persons not skilled in tasks
assigned to them. Contracior's employees shall at
all times conduct business in a manner which
assures fair, equal, and nondiscriminatory treatment
of all persons. Owner may, by written notice,
request Contractor to remove from the Work or
Project site any employee Owner reasonably deems
incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable.
E.
Contraclor shall keep on Ihe Projecl site a copy of
the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, reviewed
Shop Drawings, and permits and permit drawings.
F.
Contractor shall ensure that its owner(s) and
employees, and those of its Subcontractors, comply
with the Elhics in Public Service Act RCW 42.52,
which, among other things, prohibits state
employees from having an economic interest in any
public
March 20, 2003
Part 5
works contract that was made by, or supervised by,
that employee. Contractor shall remove, at its sole
cost and expense, any of its, or its Subcontractors',
employees, if they are in violation of this act
5.02 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall pay for and obtain all
permits, licenses, and inspections necessary for
proper execution and completion of the Work.
Prior to Final Acceptance, the approved, signed
permits shall be delivered to Owner.
B. If allowances for permits or utility fees are called
for in the Contract Documents and set forth in
Contractor's bid, and the actual costs of those
permits or fees differ from the allowances in the
Contract Documents, the difference shall be
adjusted by Change Order.
C. Contractor shall comply with and give notices
required by all federal, state, and local laws,
ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of
public authorities applicable to perfonnance of Ihe
Work.
5.03 PATENTS AND ROYALTIES
Contractor is responsible for, and shall pay, all royalties
and license fees. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and
hold Owner harmless from any costs, expenses, and
liabilities arising out of the infringement by Contraclor of
any patent, copyright, or other intellectual property right
used in the Work; however, provided that Contractor
gives prompt notice, Contractor shall not be responsible
for such defense or indemnity when a particular design,
process, or product of a particular manufacturer or
manufacturers is required by the ContTact Documents. If
Contractor has reason to believe that use of the required
design, process, or prod~ct constitutes an infringement of
a patent or copyright, il shall promptly notity Owner of
such potential infringement.
5.04 PREVAILING WAGES
A, Contraclor shall pay the prevailing rate of wages to
all workers, laborers, or mechanics employed in the
perfonnance of any part of the Work in accordance
wilh RCW 39,12 and Ihe rules and regulations of
the Department of Labor and Industries. The
schedule of prevailing wage rates
00700 . page 13
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASillNGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
for the locality or localities of the Work, is
determined by the Industrial Statistician of the
Departmenl of Labor and Industries. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to verify the applicable
prevailing wage rate.
B.
Before commencing the Work, Contractor shall file
a statement under oath with Owner and with the
Director of Labor and Industries certifying the rate
of hourly wage paid and to be paid each
classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics .
employed upon the Work by Contractor and
Subcontractors. Such rates of hourly wage shall
not be less than the prevailing wage rate.
c.
Disputes regarding prevailing wage rates shall be
referred for arbitration to the Director of the
Department of Labor and Industries. The
arbitration decision shall be fmal and conclusive
and binding on all parties involved in the dispute as
provided for by RCW 39.12.060.
D.
Each Application for Payment submitted by
Contractor shall state thaI prevailing wages have
been paid in accordance with the prefiled
statement(s) of intent, as approved. Copies of the
approved intent statement(s) shall be posted on Ihe
job sile with the address and telephone number of
the Industrial Statistician of the Departmenl of
Labor and Industries where a complaint or inquiry
concerning prevailing wages may be made.
E.
In compliance with chapter 296-t27 WAC,
Contraclor shall pay to the Department of Labor
and Industries the currently established fee(s) for
each statement of intent and/or affidavit of wages
paid submitted to the Department of Labor and
Industries for certification.
5.05 HOURS OF LABOR
A.
Contraclor shall comply with all applicable
provisions of RCW 49.28 and they are incorporated
herein by reference. Pursuant to that statute, no
laborer, worker, or mechanic employed by
Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any other person
performing or contracting to do the whole or any
pal1 of the Work, shall be permilted or required to
work more than eight hours in anyone calendar
day, provided, that in cases of
I
Part 5
extraordinary emergency. such as danger to life or
property, the hours of work may be extended, but in
such cases the rate of pay for time employed in
excess of eight hours of each calendar day shall be
not less than one and one-half times the rate
allowed for this same amount of time during eight
hours' service.
I
I
I
B. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, RCW
49.28 permits a contractor or subcontractor in any
public works contract subject to those provisions,
to enter into an agreement with its employees in
which the employees work up to ten hours in a
calendar day. No such agreement may provide that
the employees work ten-hour days for more than
four calendar days a week. Any such agreement is
subject to approval by the employees. The overtime
provisions ofRCW 49.28 shall not apply to the
hours, up to forty hours per week, worked pursuant
to any such agreement.
I
I
I
I
5.06 NONDISCRIMINATION
A. Discrimination in all phases of employment is
prohibited by, among other laws and regulations,
Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, the
Vietnam Era Velerans Readjustmenl Act of 1974,
sections 503 and 504 oflhe Vocational
Rehabililation Act of 1973, the Equal Employmenl
Act of 1972, the Age Discrimination Act of 1967,
the Americans with Disabilities Acl of 1990, the
Civil Rights Act of t 991, Presidential Executive
Order 11246, Executive Order 11375, the
Washington State Law Against Discrimination,
RCW 49.60, and Gubernatorial Executive Order
85-09. These laws and regulations eSlablish
minimum requirements for affirmative action and
fair employment practices which Contractor must
meet.
I
I
I
I
I
B.
During performance of the Work:
I
I. Contractor shall not discriminale against any
employee or applicant for employment because
of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age,
marital status, or the presence of any physical,
sensory, or mental disability, Vietnam era
veteran status, or disabled veteran status, nor
commit any other unfair practices as defined in
RCW 49.60.
I
I
I
March 20, 2003
00700 - page 14
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
2. Contractor shall, in all solicitations or
advertisements for employees placed by or for
it, state that all qualified applicants will be
considered for employment, without regard to
race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age,
marital status, or the presence of any physical,
sensory, or mental disability.
I
I
I
3. Contractor shall send to each labor union,
employment agency, or representative of
workers with which it has a collective
bargaining agreement or other contract or
understanding, a notice advising the labor
union, employment agency, or workers'
representative of Contractor's obligations
according to the Contract Documents and
RCW 49.60.
I
I
I
4. Contractor shall permit access to its books,
records, and accounts, and to its premises by
Owner, and by the Washinglon Stale Human
Righls Conunission, for the purpose of
investigation to ascertain compliance with this
section of the Contract Documents.
I
I
5. Contractor shall include the provisions of this
section in every Subcontract.
5.07 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
I
A. Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,
maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the performance
of the Work.
I
B.
In carrying out its responsibilities according to the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall protect the
lives and heallh of employees performing the Work
and other persons who may be affected by the
Wark; prevent damage to materials, supplies, and
equipment whether on site or stored off-site; and
prevent damage to other property at the site or
adjacent thereto. Contractor shall comply with all
applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and
orders of any public body having jurisdiction for
Ihe safety of persons or property or to protect them
from damage, injury, or loss; shall erect and
maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety
and protection; and shall notify owners of adjacent
property and utilities when prosecution of the Work
may affect them.
I
I
I
I
I
I
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 15
PartS
c.
Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of
exposure data on all incidents relating to the Work
resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupational
disease, or damage to property, materials, supplies,
or equipment. Contractor shall inunediately report
any such incident to Owner. Owner shall, at all
times, have a right of access to all records of
exposure.
D.
Contractor shall provide all persons working on the
Project site with information and training on
hazardous chemicals in their work at the time of
their initial assignment, and whenever a new hazard
is introduced into their work area.
I. Information, At a minimum, Contraclor shall
inform persons working on the Project site of:
a. The requirements of chapler 296-62
WAC, General Occupillional Health
Standards;
b. Any operations in their work area where
hazardous chemicals are present; and
c. The location and availability of wrinen
hazard communication programs,
including the required list(s) of hazardous
chemicals and material safety data sheets
required by chapter 296-62 WAC.
2. Training. AI a minimum, Contraclor shall
provide training for persons working on the
Project site which includes:
a. Methods and observations that may be
used to detect the presence or release of a
hazardous chemical in the work area (such
as monitoring conducted by the employer,
continuous monitoring devices, visual
appearance or odor of hazardous
chemicals when being released, etc.);
b. The physical and health hazards of the
chemicals in the work area;
c. The measures such persons can take to
protect themselves from these hazards,
including specific procedures Contractor,
or its Subcontractors, or others have
implemented to protect those on the
Project site from exposure to hazardous
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
chemicals, such as appropriate work
practices, emergency procedures, and
personal protective equipment to be used;
and
d. The details of the hazard communications
program developed by Contractor, or its
Subcontractors, including an explanation
of the labeling system and the material
safety data sheet, and how employees can
obtain and use the appropriate hazard
information.
E.
Contractor's responsibility for hazardous, toxic, or
harmful subs lances shall include the following
duties:
1. Contractor shall not keep, use, dispose,
transport, generate, or sell on or about the
Project site, any substances now or hereafter
designated as, or which are subject to
regulation as, hazardous, toxic, dangerous, or
hamlful by any federal, state or local law,
regulation, statute or ordinance (hereinafter
collectively referred to as "hazardous
substances", in violation of any such law,
regulation, statute, or ordinance, but in no case
shall any such hazardous substance be stored
more than 90 days on the Project site.
2. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of all
spills or releases of any hazardous substances
which are otherwise required to be reported to
any regulatory agency and pay the cost of
cleanup. Contractor shall promptly notify
Owner of all failures to comply with any
federal, state, or local law, regulation, or
ordinance; all inspections of the Project site by
any regulatory entity concerning the same; all
regulatory orders or fines; and all responses or
interim cleanup actions taken by or proposed
to be taken by any government entity or private
party on the Project site.
F.
All Work shall be performed with due regard for
the safety of the public. Contractor shall perfom1
the Work so as to cause a minimum of interruption
of vehicular traffic or inconvenience to
pedestrians. All arrangements to care for such
traffic shall be Contraclor's responsibilities. All
expenses involved in the maintenance of traffic by
way of detours shall be bome by Contraclor.
I
Part 5
G.
In an emergency affecting the safety of life or the
Work or of adjoining property, Contractor is
permitted to act, at its discretion, to prevent such
threatened loss or injury, and Contraclor shall so
act if so authorized or instructed.
I
I
H.
Nothing provided in this section shall be
construed as imposing any duty upon Owner or
NE with regard to, or as constituting any express
or implied assumption of control or responsibility
over, Project site safety, or over any other safety
conditions relating to employees or agents of
Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, or the
public,
I
I
I
5.08 OPERATIONS, MATERIAL HANDLING, AND
STORAGE AREAS
I
A. Contractor shall confme all operations, including
storage of materials, to Owner-approved areas.
I
B. Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops,
offices) and utilities may be provided by
Contractor only wilh the consent of Owner and
without expense to Owner. The temporary
buildings and utilities shall remain the property of
Contractor and shall be removed by Contraclor at
its expense upon completion of the Work.
I
I
c.
I
Contraclor shall use only eSlablished roadways or
temporary roadways authorized by Owner. When
materials are transported in prosecuting the Work,
vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading
capacity recommendep by the manufacturer of the
vehicle or prescribed by federal, state, or local law
or regulation.
I
I
D.
Ownership and control of all materiats or facility
components to be demolished or removed from
the Projecl site by Contractor shall immediately
vest in Contractor upon severance of the
component from the facility or severance of the
material from the Project site. Contraclor shall be
responsible for compliance with all laws
governing the storage and ultimale disposal.
Contractor shall provide Owner with a copy of all
manifests and receipts evidencing proper disposal
when required by Owner or applicable law.
I
I
I
E.
Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care
and protection of its materials and
I
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 16
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
equipment delivered to the Project site. Materials
and equipment may be stored on the premises
subjecl to approval of Owner, When Contractor
uses any portion of the Project site as a shop,
Contractor shall be responsible for any repairs,
palching, or cleaning arising from such use.
I
I
F. Contractor shall protect and be responsible for any
damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or
equipment until the date of Substantial
Completion, and shall repair or replace without
cost to Owner any damage or loss that may occur,
except damages or loss caused by the acts or
omissions or Owner. Contractor shall also protect
and be responsible for any damage or loss to the
Work, or to the materials or equipment, after the
date of Substantial Completion, and shall repair or
replace without cost to Owner any such damage or
loss that might occur, to the extent such damages
or loss are caused by the acts or omissions of
Contractor, or any Subcontractor.
I
I
I
I
I
5.09 PRIOR NOTICE OF EXCA V A TION
I
A. "Excavation" means an operation in which earth,
rock, or other material on or below the ground is
moved or otherwise displaced by any means,
excepl the tilling of soilless than 12 inches in depth
for agricultural purposes, or road ditch maintenance
that does not change the original road grade or
ditch flow line. Before commencing any
excavation, Contractor shall provide notice of the
scheduled commencement of excavation to all
owners of underground facilities or utilities,
through locator services.
I
I
I
5.10 UNFORESEEN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS
I
A. If Contractor encounters conditions at the site
which are subsurface or otherwise concealed
physical conditions which differ materially from
those indicated in the Contract Documents, or
unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature
which differ materially from those ordinarily found
to exisl and generally recognized as inherent in
construction activities of the character provided for
in the Contract Documents, then Contractor shall
give writren notice to Owner promptly and in no
event later than 7 days after the first observance of
I
I
I
I
Part 5
the conditions. Conditions shall not be disturbed
prior to such notice.
B. If such conditions differ materially and cause a
change in Contractor's cost of, or time required for,
performance of any part of the Work, the
Contraclor may be entitled to an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum,
or both, provided it makes a request therefor as
provided in part 7.
5.11 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES,
EQUIPMENT, VEGETATION, UTILITIES, AND
IMPROVEMENTS
A, Contractor shall protecl from damage all existing
structures, equipment, improvements, utilities, and
vegetation: at or near the Project site; and on
adjacent property of a third party, the locations of
which are made known to or should be known by
Contractor. Contractor shall repair any damage,
including Ihat to Ihe property of a third party,
resulting from failure to comply with the
requirements of the Contract Documents or failure
to exercise reasonable care in performing the
Work. If Contractor fails or refuses to repair the
damage promptly, Owner may have the necessary
work performed and charge the cost to Contraclor.
B. Contractor shall only remove trees when
specifically authorized to do so, and shall protecl
vegetation that will remain in place.
,
5.12 LAYOUT OF WORK
A. Contractor shall plan and layout the Work in
advance of operations so as to coordinate all work
without delay or revision.
B. Contractor shall lay out the Work from Owner-
established baselines and bench marks indicaled on
the Drawings, and shall be responsible for all field
measurements in connection with the layout.
Contraclor shall fumish, at its own expense, all
stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, lools,
materials, and labor required to layout any part of
the Work. Contraclor shall be responsible for
executing the Work to Ihe lines and grades thaI may
be established. Contractor shall be responsible for
maintaining or restoring all stakes and other marks
established.
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 17
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
5.13 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. All equipment, material, and articles incOIporated
into the Work shall be new and of the most suitable
grade for the purpose intended, unless otherwise
specifically provided in the Contract Documenls.
References in the Specifications to equipment,
material, articles, or patented processes by trade
name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded
as eslablishing a standard quality and shall not be
construed as limiting competition. Contractor may,
at its option, use any equipment, material, article,
OI process that, in the judgment of AlE, is equal to
that named in the specifications, unless otherwise
specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching
that may be required to make its several parts fit
together properly, or receive or be received by
wOIk of others set forth in, or reasonably implied
by, the Contract Documents, Contractor shall nol
endanger any work by cutting, excavating, or
olherwise alJering the Work and shall nol cut or
alter the work of any other contractor unless
approved in advance by Owner.
C. Should any of the Work be found defective, or in
any way not in accordance with the Contract
Documents, this work, in whatever stage of
completion, may be rejected by Owner.
5.14 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY
SERVICES
A. Owner shall make all reasonable utilities available
to Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as
specified in the Contract Documents. Unless
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the
utility service consumed shall be charged to or paid
for by Contraclor at prevailing rates charged to
Owner or, where the utility is produced by Owner,
at reasonable rates detennined by Owner.
Contractor will carefully conserve any utilities
fumished.
B. ContTaclor shall, at its expense and in a skillful
manner satisfactory to Owner, install and
maintain all necessary temporary connections
and distribution lines, together with appropriate
protective devices, and all meters required to
I
Part 5
I
measure the amount of each utility used for the
purpose of detennining charges. Prior to the date
of Final Acceptance, Contractor shall remove all
temporary connections, distribution lines, meters,
and associated equipment and materials.
I
I
5.15 TESTS AND INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall maintain an adequate testing and
inspection program and perform such tests and
inspections as are necessary or required to ensure
that the Work confonns to the requirements of the
Contracl Documents. Contractor shall be
responsible for inspection and quality surveillance
of all its Work and all Work performed by any
Subcontractor. Unless otherwise provided,
Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,
inspections, and approvals with an independent
testing laboratory or entity acceptable to Owner, or
with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear
all related costs of lesls, inspections, and approvals.
Contractor shall give Owner limely notice of when
and where tests and inspections are to be made.
Contractor shall maintain complete inspection
records and make Ihem available to Owner.
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Owner may, at any reasonable time, conduct such
inspections and tests as it deems necessary to
ensure that the Work is in accordance with the
Contract Documents, Owner shalt promptly notifY
Contractor if an inspection or test reveals that the
Work is not in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Unless the subject items are expressly
accepted by Owner, such Owner inspection and
tests are for the sole benefit of Owner and do not:
I
I
I
I. Constitule or imply acceptance;
2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for
providing adequate quality control measures;
I
3. Relieve Conlraclor of responsibility for risk of
loss or damage to the Work, malerials, or
equipment;
I
4. Relieve Contractor of its responsibility to
comply with the requirements of Ihe Contract
Documents; or
I
I
March 20, 2003
00700 . page t 8
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
5. Impair Owner's right to reject defective or
nonconforming items, or to avail itself of any
olher remedy to which it may be entitled,
I
C. Neilher observations by an inspeclor retained by
Owner, the presence or absence of such inspector
on the site, nor inspections, tests, or approvals by
others, shall relieve Contractor from any
requirement of the Contract Documents, nor is any
such inspector authorized to change any term or
condition of tile Contract Docwnents,
I
I
I
D. Contractor shall promptly furnish, without
additional charge, all facilities, labor, material and
equipment reasonably needed for performing such
safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be
required hy Owner. Owner may charge Contractor
any additional cost of inspection or testing when
Work is not ready at the time specified by
Contractor for inspection or testing, or when prior
rejection makes reinspection or retest necessary.
Owner shall perform its inspections and tests in a
manner that will cause no undue delay in the Work.
I
I
I
5.16 CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMING WORK
I
A. If a portion of Ihe Work is covered contrary to Ihe
requirements in the Contract Documents, it must, if
required in writing by Owner, be uncovered for
Owner's observation and be replaced at the
Contractor's expense and without change in the
Contract Time.
I
I
B. If, al any time prior to Final Completion, Owner
desires to exa~ne the Work, or any portion of it,
which has been covered, Owner may request to see
such Work and it shall be uncovered by Contractor.
If such Work is in accordance with the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an
adjustment in the Contract Sum for the costs of
uncovering and replacement, and, if completion of
lbe Work is thereby delayed, an adjustment in lbe
Contract Time, provided it makes a request lberefor
as provided in part 7. If such Work is not in
accordance with Ihe Contract Documents, lbe
Contractor shall pay the costs of examination and
reconstruction.
I
I
I
I
C. Contractor shall promptly correct Work found by
Owner not to conform to the requirements of the
Contract Documents, whether observed before or
I
I
Part 5
after Substantial Completion and whether or not
fabricated, installed, or completed. Contractor
shall bear all costs of correcting such
nonconforming Work, including additional testing
and inspections.
D.
If, within one year after lbe date of Substantial
Completion of the Work or designated portion
lbereof, or within one year after lbe date for
conunencement of any system warranties
established under section 6.08, or within lbe terms
of any applicable special warranty required by Ihe
Contract Documents, any of lbe Work is found to
be not in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct it
promptly after receipt of written notice from Owner
to do so. Owner shall give such notice promptly
after discovery of the condition. This period of one
year shall be extended, with respect to portions of
Work first performed after Subslantial Completion,
by the period of time between Substantial
Completion and lbe actual performance of lbe
Work. Contractor's duty to correct with respect to
Work repaired or replaced shall run for one year
from lbe date of repair or replacement Obligations
under this paragraph shall survive Final
Acceptance.
E.
Contractor shall remove from the ProjecI site
portions of the Work which are not in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents
and are neither corrected by Contractor nor
accepted by Own~r.
F. If Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work
within a reasonable time after written notice to do
so, Owner may replace, correc4 or remove the
nonconforming Work and charge the cost thereof to
the Contractor.
G. Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting
destroyed or damaged Work, whelber completed or
partially completed, caused by Contractor's
correction or removal of Work which is not in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
H. Nothing conlained in this section shall be construed
to establish a period of limitation wilb respect to
olber obligalions which Contractor mighl have
according to the Contract Documents.
Establishment of the time period of one year as
March 20, 2003
00700 - page 19
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASIDNGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
described in paragraph 5,I6D relates only to the
specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work,
and has no relationship to the time within which the
Contractor's obligation to comply with the Contract
Documents may be sought to be enforced, including
the time within which such proceedings may be
commenced.
I. If Owner prefers to accepl Work which is not in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, Owner may do so instead of requiring its
removal and correction, in which case the Contract
Sum may be reduced as appropriate and equitable.
5.17 CLEANUP
Contractor shall at all times keep the Project site,
including hauling routes, infrastructures, utilities, and
storage areas, free from accumulations of waste materials.
Before completing the Work, Contractor shall remove
from the premises its rubbish, tools, scaffolding,
equipment, and malerials. Upon completing the Work,
Contractor shall leave the Project site in a clean, neat, and
orderly condition satisfactory to Owner. If Contractor
fails to clean up as provided herein, and after reasonable
notice from Owner, Owner may do so and the cost thereof
shall be charged to Contractor.
5.18 ACCESSTOWORK
Contractor shall provide Owner and AlE access to the
Wark in progress wherever located.
5.19 OTHER CONTRACTS
Owner may undertake or award other contracts for
additional work at or near the Project site. Contractor
shall reasonably cooperate with the other contractors and
wilh Owner's employees and shall carefully adapt
scheduling and perform the Work in accordance with
these Contract Documents to reasonably accommodate the
other work.
5.20 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
A. Before submitting Ihe first Applicalion for
Payment, Contractor shall furnish in writing to
Owner the names, addresses, and telephone
March 20, 2003
00700 - page 20
I
Part 5
numbers of all Subcontractors, as well as suppliers
providing materials in excess of$2,500.
Contractor shall utilize Subcontractors and
suppliers which are experienced and qualified, and
meet the requirements of the Contract Documents,
if any, Contractor shall not utilize any
Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Owner has a
reasonable objection, and shall obtain Owner's
written consent before making any substitutions or
additions.
I
I
I
I
B.
All Subcontracts must be in writing. By
appropriate written agreement, Contractor shall
require each Subcontractor, so far as applicable 10
the Work 10 be performed by the Subcontractor, to
be bound to Contractor by terms of the Contract
Documents, and to assume toward Contractor all
the obligations.and responsibilities which
Contractor assumes toward Owner in accordance
with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontract
shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner in
accordance with the Contract Documents with
respect to the Work to be performed by the
Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will
not prejudice such righls. Where appropriate,
Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter
into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.
However, nothing in this paragraph shall be
construed to alter the contractual relations between
Contractor and its Subcontractors with respect to
insurance or bonds.
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
Contractor shall schedule, supervise, and
coordinate the operations of all Subcontractors. No
Subcontracting of any of the Work shall relieve
Contractor from its responsibility for the
perfonnance of the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documenls or any other obligations of Ihe
Contract Documents.
I
I
D.
Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the
Work is hereby assigned by Contractor 10 Owner
provided that:
I
I. The assignment is effective only after
termination by Owner for cause pursuant to
section 9.01 and only for those Subcontracls
which Owner accepts by notifying the
Subcontractor in writing; and
I
I
2. After the assignment is effective, Owner will
assume all future duties and obligalions toward
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
the Subcontractor which Contractor assumed
in the Subcontract.
I
3. The assignment is subject to the prior rights of
the surety, if any, obligated under any bond
provided in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
I
5.21 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION
I
A. In addition 10 any special warranties provided
elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Contractor
warrants that all Work conforms to the
requirements of the Contract Documents and is free
of any defect in equipment, material, or design
furnished, or workmanship performed, by
Contractor.
I
I
I
B. With respect to all warranties, express or implied,
for Work performed or materials fumished
according to the Contract Documents, Contractor
shall:
I
1. Obtain all warranties that would be given in
normal conunercial practice;
I
2. Require all warranties to be executed, in
writing, for the benefit of Owner;
I
3. Enforce all warranties for the benefit of
Owner, if directed by Owner; and
I
4. Be responsible to enforce any subcontractor's,
manufacturer's, or supplier's warranty should
they extend beyond the period specified in the
Contract Documents.
I
C. The obligations under this section shall survive
Final Acceptance.
I
5.22 INDEMNIFICATION
I
A. Contractor shall defend, indenmify, and hold
Owner and AlE hannless from and against all
claims, demands, losses, damages, or costs,
including but not limited to damages arising out of
bodily injury or death to persons and damage to
property, caused by or resulting from:
I
I
I. The sole negligence of Contractor or any of its
Subcontractors;
I
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 21
Part 5
2. The concurrent negligence of Contractor, or
any Subcontractor, but only to the extent of Ihe
negligence of Contractor or such
Subcontractor; and
3. The use of any design, process, or equipment
which constitutes an infringement of any
United States patent presently issued, or
violates any other proprietary interest,
including copyright, trademark, and trade
secret.
B.
In any action against Owner and any other entity
indenmified in accordance with this section, by any
employee of Contractor, its Subcontractors, Sub.
subcontractors) agents, or anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them, the
indenmificalion obligation of this section shall not
he limited by a limit on the amounl or type of
damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or
for Contractor or any Subcontractor under RCW
Title 51, the Industrial Insurance Acl, or any other
employee benefit acts. In addilion, Contractor
waives inununity as to Owner and AlE only, in
accordance with RCW Title 51.
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
PART 6 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
6.01 CONTRACT SUM
Owner shall pay Contractor the Contract Sum for
performance of the Wark, in accordance with the Contract
Documents. The Contract Sum shall include all taxes
imposed by law and properly chargeable to the Projecl,
including sales tax.
6.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Before submitting its first Application for Payment,
Contractor shall submit to Owner for approval a
breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each
principle calegory of work, in such detail as requesled by
Owner ("Schedule of Values"). The approved Schedule of
V alues shall include appropriate amounts for
demobilization, record drawings, O&M manuals, and any
other requirements for Project closeout, and shall be used
by Owner as the basis for progress payments. Payment
for Work shall be made only for and in accordance with
those items included in the Schedule of Values.
6.03 APPLlCA TION FOR PAYMENT
A.
At monthly intervals, unless determined otherwise
by Owner, Contractor shall submil to Owner an
itemized Application for Payment for Work
completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and the approved Schedule of Values.
Each application shall be supported by such
substantiating data as Owner may require.
B.
By submitting an Application for Paymenl,
Contractor is certifying that all Subcontractors have
been paid, less earned retainage in accordance with
RCW 60.28,010, as their interests appeared in the
last preceding certificate of payment. By
submilting an Application for Payment, Contractor
is recertifying that the representations set forth in
section 1.03 are true and correct, to the best of
Contractor's knowledge, as of the date of the
Application for Payment.
c.
At the time il submits an Application for Paymenl,
Contractor shall analyze and reconcile, to the
satisfaction of Owner, the actual progress of the
Work with Ihe Progress Schedule.
D.
If authorized by Owner, the Application for
Payment may include request for payment for
malerial delivered to the Project site and suitably
I
Part 6
stored, or for completed preparatory work.
Payment may similarly be requested for material
stored off the Project site, provided Contractor
complies with or furnishes satisfactory evidence of
the following:
I
I
I. The material will be placed in a warehouse that
is structurally sound, dry, lighted and suitable
for the materials to be stored;
I
2. The warehouse is located wilhin a 10-mile
radius of the Project. Other localions may be
utilized, if approved in writing, by Owner;
I
3. Only malerials for the Projecl are stored within
the warehouse (or a secure portion of a
warehouse set aside for the Project);
I
I
4. Contractor furnishes Owner a certificate of
insurance extending Contractor's insurance
coverage for damage, fire, and theft to cover
the full value of all materials stored, or in
transit;
I
5. The warehouse (or secure portion Ihereof) is
continuously under lock and key, and only
Contractor's authorized personnel shall have
access;
I
I
6. Owner shall at all times have the right of
access in company of Contractor;
I
7. Contractor and its surety assume total
responsibility for the stored materials; and
I
8. Contractor furnishes to Owner certified lists of
materials stored, bills of lading, invoices, and
other information as may be required, and shall
also furnish notice to Owner when materials
are moved from storage to the Project site.
I
6.04 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
I
A. Owner shall make progress payments, in such
amounts as Owner determines are properly due,
within 30 days after receipl of a properly executed
Applicalion for Payment. Owner shall notify
Contractor in accordance wilh RCW 39.76 if the
Application for Payment does not comply with Ihe
requirements of the Contract Documents.
I
I
I
March 20, 2003
00700 - page 22
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
B. Owner shall retain 5% of the amount of each
progress payment until 45 days after Final
Acceptance and receipt of all documents required
by law or the Contract Documents, including, at
Owner's request, consent of surety to release of the
retainage. In accordance with RCW 60.28,
Contractor may request that monies reserved be
retained in a fund by Owner, deposiled by Owner
in a hank or savings and loan, or placed in escrow
with a bank or trust company to be converted into
bonds and securities to be held in escrow with
interest to be paid to Contractor. Owner may
pennit Contractor to provide an appropriale bond
in lieu of the retained funds.
I
I
I
I
I
C. Title to all Work and materials covered by a
progress payment shall pass to Owner at the time of
such payment free and clear of all liens, claims,
security interests, and encumbrances. Passage of
title shall not, however, relieve Contractor from any
of its duties and responsibilities for the Work or
materials, or waive any rights of Owner to insist on
full compliance by Contractor with the Contract
Documents.
I
I
I
D. Payments due and unpaid in accordance with the
Contracl Documents shall bear interest as
specified in RCW 39.76.
I
6.05 PAYMENTS WITHHELD
I
A. Owner may withhold or, on accounl of
subsequently discovered evidence, nullity the
whole or part of any payment to such extent as
may be necessary to protect Owner from loss or
damage for reasons including but not limited to:
I
1. Wark not in accordance with the Contract
Documents;
I
2. Reasonable evidence that the Work required
by the Contract Documents cannot be
compleled for the unpaid balance of the
Contract Sum;
I
I
3. Work by Owner to correct defeclive Work or
complete the Wark in accordance with section
5.17;
I
I
Part 6
4. Failure to perform in accordance with the
Contract Documents; or
5. Cost or liabilily Ihat may occur to Owner as
the resulJ of Contractor's fault or negligent acts
or omissions.
B. In any case where part or all of a payment is going
to be withheld for unsatisfactory performance,
Owner shall notity Contractor in accordance with
RCW 39.76.
6.06 RETAINAGE AND BOND CLAIM RIGHTS
RCW chapters 39.08 and 60,28, conceming the rights and
responsibilities of Contractor and Owner with regard to
the performance and payment bonds and retainage, are
made a part of the Contract Documents by reference as
though fully set forth herein.
6.07 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Substanlial Completion is Ihe stage in the progress of the
Work (or portion thereof designaled and approved by
Owner) when the construction is sufficienUy complete, in
accordance with the Contract Documents, so Owner can
fully occupy the Work (or the designated portion Ihereof)
for the use for which it is intended. All Work other than
incidental corrective or punch list work shall be
completed, Substantial Completion shall not have been
achieved if all syslems and parts are not functional, if
utilities are not connected and operating normally, if all
required occupancy perrriits have not been issued, or if the
Work is not accessible by normal vehicular and pedestrian
traffic routes. The date Substantial Completion is
achieved shall be established in writing by Owner.
Contraclor may requesl an early date of Substantial
Completion which must be approved by Change Order.
Owner's occupancy of the Work or designated portion
thereof does not necessarily indicate that Substantial
Completion has been achieved.
6.08 PRIOR OCCUPANCY
A. Owner may, upon written notice thereof to
Contractor, take possession of or use any
completed or partially completed portion of the
Work ("Prior Occupancy") at any time prior to
Substantial Completion. Unless otherwise agreed
in writing, Prior Occupancy shall not: be deemed
an acceptance of any portion of the Work;
accelerate the time for any payment to Contractor;
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 23
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
prejudice any rights of Owner provided by any
insurance, bond, guaranty, or the Contract
Documents; relieve Contractor of the risk of loss or
any of the obligations established by the Contract
Documents; establish a date for tcnnination or
partial termination of the assessmenl ofliquidated
damages; or constitute a waiver of claims.
B. Notwithslanding anything in the preceding
paragraph, Owner shall be responsible for loss of or
damage to the Work resulting from Prior
Occupancy. Contractor's one year duty to repair
and any system warranties shall begin on building
systems aClivated and used by Owner as agreed in
writing by Owner and Contractor,
6.09 FINAL COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND
PAYMENT
A. Final Completion shall be achieved when the
Work is fully and finally complete in accordance
with the Contract Documents. The dale Final
Completion is achieved shall be established by
Owner in writing.
B. Final Acceptance is the fonnal action of Owner
acknowledging Final Completion. Prior 10 Final
Acceptance, Contractor shall, in addition to all
other requirements in the Contract Documents,
submit to Owner a written notice of any
outstanding disputes or claims between Contractor
and any of its Subcontractors, including the
amounts and other details thereof. Neither Final
Acceptance, nor final payment, shall release
Contractor or its sureties from any obligations of
these Contract Documents or the Public Works
Bond, or constitute a waiver of any claims by
Owner arising from Contractor's failure to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
C. Acceplance of final payment by Contractor, or any
Subcontractor, shall constitute a waiver and
release to Owner of all claims by Contractor, or
any such Subcontractor, for an increase in the
Contract Sum or the Contract Time, and for every
act or omission of Owner relating to or arising out
of the Work, except for those Claims made in
accordance with the procedures, including the
time limits, set forth in part 8.
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 24
I
I
Part 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASIDNGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
PART 7 - CHANGES
I
7.01 CHANGE IN THE WORK
I
A. Owner may, at any time and without notice to
Contractor's surety, order additions, deletions,
revisions, or other changes in the Wark. These
changes in the Work shall be incorporaled into Ihe
Contract Documents through the execution of
Change Orders. If any change in the Work ordered
by Owner causes an increase or decrease in the
Contract Sum or the Contract Time, an equitable
adjustmenl shall be made as provided in section
7.02 or 7,03, respectively, and such adjustment(s)
shall be incorporaled into a Change Order.
I
I
I
B. If Owner desires to order a change in the Work, it
may request a written Change Order proposal from
Contractor. Contractor shall submit a Change Order
proposal within 14 days of the requesl from Owner,
or wilhin such other period as mutually agreed.
Contractor's Change Order proposal shall be full
compensation for implementing the proposed
change in the Work, including any adjustment in
the Contract Sum or Contract Time, and including
compensation for all delays in COlli1cction with such
change in the Wark and for any expense or
inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of
efficiency or productivity occasioned by the change
in the Work.
I
I
I
I
I
C. Upon receipt of the Change Order proposal, or a
request for equitable adjustment in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time, or both, as provided in
sections 7,02 and 7.03, Owner may accept or
reject the proposal, request further documentation,
or negotiate acceptable teans with Contractor.
Pending agreement on the tenns of the Change
Order, Owner may direct Contractor to proceed
immediately with the Change Order Work.
Contractor shall not proceed with any change in
the Work until it has obtained Owner's approvaL
All Work done pursuant to any Owner-directed
change in Ihe Work shall be execuled in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
I
I
I
I
D. If Owner and Contractor reach agreement on the
tenns of any change in the Work, including any
adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract
Time, such agreement shall be incorporated in a
I
I
I
March 20, 2003
00700- page 25
Part 7
Change Order, The Change Order shall constitute
full payment and fmal settlement of all claims for
time and for direct, indirect, and consequential
costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience,
disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or
productivity, related to any Work either covered
or affected by the Change Order, or related 10 the
events giving rise to the request for equitable
adjustment.
E,
If Owner and Contractor are unable to reach
agreement on the tenns of any change in Ihe
Work, including any adjustment in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time, Contractor may at any
time in writing, request a final offer from Owner.
Owner shall provide Contractor with its written
response within 30 days of Contractor's request.
Owner may also provide Contractor with a final
offer at any time. If Contractor rejects Owner's
fmal offer, or the parties are otherwise unable to
reach agreement, Contractor's only remedy shall
be to file a Claim as provided in part 8.
7.02
CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT SUM
A.
General Application
I. The Contract Sum shall only be changed by a
Change Order. Contractor shall include any
request for a change in the Contract Sum in its
Change Order proposal.
2. If the cost of Contractor's performance is
changed due to the fault or negligence of
Owner, or anyone for whose acts Owner is
responsible, Contraclor shall be entitled 10
make a request for an equitable adjustment in
the Contract Sum in accordance with the
following procedure. No change in the
Contract Sum shall be allowed to the extent:
Contractor's changed cost of performance is
due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or
anyone for whose acts Contractor is
responsible; the change is concurrently caused
by Contractor and Owner; or the change is
caused by an act of Force Majeure as defined
in Section 3.05.
a. A request for an equitable adjustment in
the Contracl Sum shall be based on
written notice delivered to Owner within
7 days of the occurrence of the event
March 20, 2003
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
giving rise to the request. For purposes
of this part, "occurrence" means when
Contractor knew, or in its diligent
prosecution of the Work should have
known, of the event giving rise to the
request. If Contraclor believes it is
entitled to an adjustment in the Contracl
Sum, Contractor shall immediately notify
Owner and begin to keep and maintain
complete, accurate, and specific daily
records. Contractor shall give Owner
access to any such records and, if
requested shall promptly fumish copies
of such records to Owner.
b.
Contractor shall not be entitled 10 any
adjustment in the Contract Sum for any
occurrence of events or costs that
occurred more than 7 days before
Contractor's written notice to Owner.
The written notice shall set forth, al a
minimwn, a description of: the event
giving rise to the request for an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Sum; the
nature of the impacts to Contractor and
its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and
to Ihe extent possible the amount of the
adjustment in Contract Sum requested.
Failure to properly give such written
notice shall, to the extent Owner's
interests are prejudiced, constitute a
waiver of Contractor's right to an
equilable adjustment.
c.
Within 30 days of the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the request, unless
Owner agrees in writing to allow an
additional period of time to ascertain
more accurate data, Contractor shall
supplement the written notice provided in
accordance with subparagraph a. above
with additional supporting data. Such
additional data shall include, at a
minimum: the amount of compensation
requested, itemized in accordance with
the procedure set forth herein; specific
facts, circumstances, and analysis that
confirms not only that Contractor
suffered the damages claimed, bul that
the damages claimed were actually a
result of the act, event, or condition
complained of and Ihat the Contracl
00700 . page 26
I
Part 7
Documents provide entitlement to an
equitable adjustment to Contractor for
such act, event, or condition; and
documentation sufficiently detailed to
pennil an informed analysis of the
request by Owner. When the request for
compensation relates to a delay, or other
change in Contract Time, Contractor
shall demonstrate the impact on the
critical path, in accordance with section
7.03e. Failure 10 provide such
additional infonnation and
documentation within the time allowed or
within the fonnat required shall, to the
extent Owner's interests are-prejudiced,
constitute a waiver of Contractor's right
to an equilable adjustment.
I
I
I
I
I
I
d. Pending final resolution of any request
made in accordance with this paragraph,
unless otherwise agreed in writing,
Contractor shall proceed diligenUy with
performance of the Work.
I
I
e. Any requests by Contractor for an
equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum
and in the Contract Time that arise out of
the same event(s) shall be submitted
together.
I
3. The value of any Work covered by a
Change Order, or of any request for an
equitable adjustment in the Contract
Sum, shall be delermined by one of the
following methods:
I
I
a. On the basis of a fixed price as
determined in paragraph 7.02B.
I
b. By application of unit prices to the
quantities of the items involved as
delennined in paragraph 7.02e.
I
c. On the basis of time and material as
detennined in paragraph 7.02D.
I
4. When Owner has requesled Contractor to
submit a Change Order proposal, Owner may
direct Contractor as to which method in
subparagraph 3. above 10 use when submitting
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
its proposal. Otherwise, Contractor shall
determine the value of the Work, or ofa
request for an equilable adjustment, on the
basis of the fixed price method.
I
I
B.
Change Order Pricing.. Fixed Price
I
When the fixed price method is used to determine
the value of any Work covered by a Change Order,
or of a requesl for an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Sum, the following procedures shall
apply:
I
I. Contractor's Change Order proposal, or request
for adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be
accompanied by a complete ilemization of the
costs, including labor, material, subcontractor
costs, and overhead and profit. The costs shall
be ilemized in the manner set forth below, and
shall be submitted on breakdown sheets in a
form approved by Owner.
I
I
I
2. All costs shall be calculated based upon
appropriate industry standard methods of
calculating labor, material quantities, and
equipment costs.
I
3. Ifany ofContraetor's pricing assumptions arc
contingent upon anticipated actions of Owner,
Contractor shall clearly state them in the
proposal or request for an equitable
adjustment.
I
I
4. The cost of any additive or deductive changes
in the Wark shall be calculated as set forth
below, except that overhead and profit shall
not be included on deductive changes in the
Work. Where a change in the Work involves
additive and deductive work by the same
Contractor or Subcontractor, small tools,
overhead, profit, bond and insurance markups
will apply to the nel difference.
I
I
I
5. If the total cosl oflhe change in the Work or
request for equilable adjustmenl does nol
exceed $1,000, Contraclor shall nol be
required to submit a breakdown if the
description of the change in the Work or
request for equilable adjustment is sufficiently
definitive for Owner to determine fair value.
I
I
I
March 20, 2003
00700 - page 27
Part 7
6. If the total cost of the change in the Work or
request for equitable adjustment is between
$1,000 and $2,500, Contraclor may submit a
breakdown in the following level of detail if
the description oflhe change in the Work or if
the request for equitable adjustment is
sufficiently definitive to permit the Owner to
determine fair value:
a. lump sum labor;
b. lump sum material;
c. lump swn equipment usage;
d. overhead and profit as set forth below; and
e. insurance and bond costs as set forth
below.
7, Any request for adjustment of Contract Sum
based upon the fixed price method shall
include only the following ilems:
a. Craft labor costs: These are the labor
costs delermined by multiplying the
estimated or actual additional number of
craft hours needed to perform the change
in the Work by the hourly labor cosIs.
Craft hours should cover direct labor, as
well as indirecllabor due to trade
inefficiencies. The hourly costs shall be
based on the following:
(1) Basic wages and benefits:
Hourly rates and benefits as
stated on the Departmenl of
Labor and Industries approved
"statement of intent to pay
prevailing wages." Direct
supervision shall be a reasonable
percentage not to exceed 15% of
the cost of direcllabor. No
supervision markup shall be
allowed for a working
supervisor's hours.
(2) Worker's insurance: Direct
contributions 10 the state of
Washington for industrial
March 20, 2003
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
insurance; medical aid; and
supplemental pension, by the
class and rates established by the
Departrnent of Labor and
Industries.
(3)
Federal insurance: Direct
contributions required by the
Federal Insurance Compensation
Act; Federal Unemployment Tax
Act; and the State Unemployment
Compensation Act.
(4) Travel allowance: Travel
allowance and/or subsistence, if
applicable, not exceeding those
allowances eSlablished by
regional labor union agreements,
which are itemized and identified
separalely.
(5) Safety: Cost incurred due 10 Ihe
Washington Industrial Safety and
Heallh Act, which shall be a
reasonable percentage not to
exceed 2% of the sum of the
amounts calculated in (t), (2),
and (3) above.
b.
Material costs: This is an itemization of
the quantity and cost of materials needed
to perform the change in the Wark.
Material costs shall be developed first
from actual known costs, second from
supplier quotations or if these are not
available, from standard industry pricing
guides. Material costs shall consider all
available discounts. Freight costs, express
charges, or special delivery charges, shall
be itemized.
c.
Equipment costs: This is an itemization of
the type of equipment and the estimated or
actual length of time the construction
equipment appropriale for the Work is or
will be used on the change in the Work.
Cosls will be allowed for construction
equipment only if used solely for the
changed Work, or for additional rental
costs actually incurred by the Contraclor.
Equipmenl charges shall be
00700 . page 28
I
Part 7
computed on the basis of actual invoice
costs or if owned, from the current edition
of one of the following sources:
I
I
(I) Associated General Contractors.
Washington Slate Departrnenl of
Transportation (AGC WSDOT)
Equipment Rental Agreement;
1987 edition.
I
(2) The state of Washington Utilities
and Transportation Corrunission
for trucks used on highways.
I
(3) The National Electrical
Contractors Association for
equipment used on electrical
work.
I
I
(4) The Mechanical Contraclors
Association of America for
equipment used on mechanical
work.
I
The Data Quest Renlal Rate (Blue Book)
shall be used as a basis for establishing
rental rates of equipment not listed in the
above sources. The maximum rate for
standby equipment shall not exceed that
shown in the AGC WSDOT Equipmenl
Renlal Agreemenl, 1987 edition.
I
I
I
d. Allowance for small tools, expendables &
consumable supplies: Small tools consisl
of tools which cosl $250 or less and are
normally furnished by the performing
contractor. The maximum rate for small
tools shall not exceed the following:
I
I
(I) For Contractor, 3% of direct
labor costs.
I
(2) For Subcontractors, 5% of direcl
labor costs.
I
Expendables and consumable supplies directly
associated with thc change in Work must be
itemized.
I
e. Subcontractor costs: This is defined as payments
Contractor makes to Subcontractors-for changed
Work performed by
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
Part 7
Subcontractors of any tier. The (d) For each Subcontractor, for any
Subcontractors' cost of Work shall be Work performed by its
calculated and itemized in the same manner as Subcontractor(s) of any lower
prescribed herein for Contractor. tier, 4% of the first $50,000 of
the amounl due the sub-
f. Allowance for overhead: This is defined as Subcontractor, and 2% of the
cosls of any kind attributable to direct and remaining amount if any.
indirect delay, acceleration, or impact, added
to the lotal cosllo Owner of any change in the (e) The cost to which overhead is to
Contract Sum but not to the cost of any change be applied shall be detennined in
in the Contract Time for which contractor has accordance with subparagraphs
been compensated pursuant to the conditions a.-e. above.
set forth in Section 7.03. This allowance shall
compensate Contractor for all noncraft labor, (2). For projects where the Contract Award
temporary construction facilities, field Amount is equal to or exceeds $3
engineering, schedule updating, as.buill million, the following shall apply:
drawings, home office cost, B&O taxes, office
engineering, estimating costs, additional (a) For Contractor, for any Work
overhead because of extended time, and any actually performed by
olher cost incidental to the change in the Contractor's own forces, 12% of
Work. It shall be strictly limited in all cases to the first $50,000 of the cosl, and
a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if 4% of the remaining cost, ifany.
none can be agreed upon to an amount not to
exceed the rates below: (b) For each Subcontractor
(including lower tier
subcontractors), for any Work
(1). For projects where the Contract Award actually performed by its own
Amount is under $3 million, the following forces, 12% of the first $50,000
shall apply: of the cost, and 4% of the
remaining cost, if any.
(a) For Contraclor, for any Work
actually performed by (c) For Contraclor, for any Work
Contractor's own forces, 16% of performed by its
the first $50,000 of the cost, and Subcontractor(s), 4% of the first
4% of the remaining cost, if any. $50,000 of the amount due each
Subcontractor, and 2% of the
(b) For each Subcontractor remaining amount if any.
(including lower tier
subcontractors), for any Work (d) For each Subcontractor, for any
actually performed by its own Work performed by its
forces, 16% of the first $50,000 Subcontractor(s) of any lower
of Ihe cost, and 4% ofthe / tier, 4% of the first $50,000 of
remaining cost, if any. the amounl due the sub.
Subcontraclor, and 2% of the
(c) For Contractor, for any work remaining amount if any.
performed by its
Subcontractor(s), 6% of the first (e) The cost to which overhead is to
$50,000 of the amounl due each be applied shall be detennined in
Subcontractor, and 4% of the accordance with subparagraphs
remaining amount if any. a.- e. above.
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 29
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASffiNGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
g.
Allowance for profit: This is an amount
to be added to the cost of any change in
contract swn, but not to the cost of
change in Contract Time for which
contractor has been compensated
pursuant to the conditions set forth in
section 7.03. It shall be limited to a
reasonable amount, mutually acceplable,
or if none can be agreed upon, to an
amount not to exceed the rates below:
b, Type of reimbursement including pre.
agreed rates for material quantities; and
c. Cost limit of reimbursement.
2. Contractor shall:
a. Cooperate with O\VI1cr and assist in
monitoring the Work being performed.
As requested by Owner, Contractor shall
idenlify workers assigned to the Change
Order Work and areas in which they are
working;
(1) For Contractor or Subcontractor
of any tier for work performed by
their forces, 6% of the cost
developed in accordance with
7.02 b. 7a.. e. above.
b. Leave access as appropriale for quantity
measurement; and
(2)
For Contractor or Subcontractor
of any tier for work performed by
a subcontractor of a lower tier,
4% of the Subcontractor cost
developed in accordance with
7,02 b. 7a. . h.
c. Not exceed any cost limil(s) without
Owner's prior written approval.
3. Contractor shall submit costs in accordance
with paragraph 7.02B. and satisfy the
following requirements:
h.
Cost of change in insurance or bond
premium: This is defined as:
a. Unit prices shall include reimbursement
for all direct and indirect costs of the
Work, including overhead and profit, and
bond and insurance costs; and
(1) Contractor's liability insurance:
The cost of any changes in
Contractor's liability insurance
arising directly from execution of
the Change Order; and
b. Quantities must be supported by field
measurement statements signed by Owner.
D. Change Order Pricing -- Time-and-Material Prices
(2) Public works bond: The cost of
the additional premium for
Contractor's bond arising directly
from the changed Work.
1. Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to
perform Wark on a time-and-material basis,
Owner's authorization shall clearly state:
The costs of any change in insurance or bond premium
shall be added after overhead and allowance for profit are
calculated in accordance with subparagraph f. and g.
above.
a. Scope of Work to be performed;
b. Type of reimbursement including pre.
agreed rates, if any, for material quantities
or labor; and
c.
Change Order Pricing -- Unil Prices
C. Cost limit of reimbursement.
1.
Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform
Work on a unit-price basis, Owner's authorization
shall clearly slate:
2. Contractor shall:
a. Scope of work to be performed;
3. Cooperate with Owner and assist in
moniIoring the Work being performed.
As requesled by Owner, identify workers
March 20, 2003
00700- page 30
I
I
Part 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
assigned to the Change Order Work and
areas in which they are working;
I
b. Identify on daily time sheets all labor
performed in accordance with this
aulhorization. Submit copies of daily time
sheets within 2 working days for Owner's
review;
I
I
c. Leave access as appropriate for quantity
measurement;
I
d, Perform all Work in accordance with this
section as efficiently as possible; and
I
e. Not exceed any cost limit(s) without
Owner's prior written approval.
I
3. Contractor shall submit costs in accordance
with paragraph 7.02B and additional
verification supported by:
I
a. Labor delailed on daily time sheets; and
b. Invoices for material.
I
7.03 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT TIME
I
A. The Contract Time shall only be changed by a
Change Order. Contractor shall include any request
for a change in the Contract Time in its Change
Order proposal.
I
B. If the time of Contractor's performance is changed
due to an act of Force Majeure, or due to the fault
or negligence of Owner or anyone for whose acts
Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled
to make a request for an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Time in accordance with the following
procedure. No adjustment in the Contract Time
shall be allowed to the extent Contractor's changed
time of performance is due to the faulJ or
negligence of Contractor) or anyone for whose acts
Contractor is responsible.
I
I
I
I
I. A request for an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Time shall be based on wrillen notice
delivered within 7 days of the occurrence of
the event giving rise to the request. If
Contractor believes it is entitled to adjustment
of Contract Time, Contraclor shall
I
I
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 31
Part 7
immediately notifY Owner and begin to keep
and maintain complete, accurate, and specific
daily records. Contraclor shall give Owner
access to any such record and if requesled,
shall promptly furnish copies of such record to
Owner.
2.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an
adjustment in the Contract Time for any events
that occurred more than 7 days before
Contractor's written notice to Owner. The
written nolice shall set forth, at a minimum, a
description of: the event giving rise to the
requesl for an equitable adjustment in Ihe
Contract Time; the nature of the impacts 10
Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, if
any; and to the extent possible the amount of
the adjustment in Contract Time requested.
Failure to properly give such wrillen notice
shall, to the extent Owner's interests are
prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's
right to an equitable adjustment
3. Wilhin 30 days of the occurrence of the event
giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees
in writing to allow an additional period of time
to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor
shall supplement the wrillen notice provided in
accordance with subparagraph 7.03B.2 with
additional supporting data, Such additional
dala shall include, at a minimum: the amount
of delay claimed, itemized in accordance with
the procedure'. set forth herein; specific facts,
circumstances, and analysis that confirms not
only that Contractor suffered the delay
claimed, but that the delay claimed was
actually a result of the act, event, or condition
complained of, and that the Contract
Documents provide entitlement to an equitable
adjustment in Contract Time for such act,
event, or condition; and supporting
documentation sufficiently detailed to pennit
an informed analysis of the request by Owner.
Failure to provide such additional information
and documentation within the time allowed or
within the format required shall, 10 the exlent
Owner's interests are prejudiced, constitute a
waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable
adjustment
4. Pending final resolution of any request in
accordance with this paragraph, Wlless
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
Part 7
otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall
proceed diligently with performance of the
Work.
indirect activities extended because of the
delay;
I
c.
Any change in the Contract Time covered by a
Change Order, or based on a request for an
equilable adjustment in the Contract Time, shall be
limited to the change in the critical path of
Contraclor's schedule attributable to the change of
Work or event(s) giving rise to the request for
equitable adjustment. Any Change Order proposal
or request for an adjustment in the Contract Time
shall demonstrate the impact on the critical path of
the schedule. Contraclor shall be responsible for
showing clearly on the Progress Schedule that the
change or event: had a specific impact on the
critical path, and except in case of concurrent
delay, was the sole cause of such impact; and could
not have been avoided by resequencing of the
Wark or other reasonable alternatives.
c, cost of temporary facililies or equipment
rental extended because of the delay;
I
d. cost of insurance extended because of the
delay;
I
e. general and administrative overhead in
an amount to be agreed upon, but not to
exceed 3% of Contract Sum divided by
the Contract Time for each day of the
delay.
I
I
I
I
D.
Contractor may request compensation for the cost
of a change in Contract Time in accordance with
this paragraph, 7.03D, subject 10 the following
conditions:
I
I. The change in Contracl Time shall solely be
caused by the fault or negligence of Owner or
AlE;
I
2. Compensalion under this paragraph is limited
to changes in Contract Time for which
Contractor is not entitled to be compensated
under section 7.02;
I
I
3, ContracIor shall follow Ihe procedure set forth
in paragraph 7.033;
I
4. Contractor shall establish the extent of the
change in Contract Time in accordance with
paragraph 7.03C; and
I
5. The daily cost of any change in Contract Time
shall be limited 10 the ilems below, less funds
that may have been paid pursuanllo a change
in the Contract Sum that contributed to this
change in Contract Time:
I
I
a. cost of nonproductive field supervision or
labor extended because of the delay;
b. cost of weekly meetings or similar
I
March 20, 2003 00700- page 32
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
PART 8 - CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION
I
8.01 CLAIMS PROCEDURE
I
A. If the parties fail to reach agreement on the terms of
any Change Order for Owner-directed Work as
provided in section 7.01, or on the resolution of
any request for an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Sum as provided in section 7.02 or the
Contract Time as provided in section 7,03,
Contraclor's only remedy shall be to file a Claim
with Owner as provided in this section.
I
I
B. Contractor shall file its Claim within the earlier of:
120 days from Owner's fmal offer in accordance
with either paragraph 7,OlE or Ihe date of Final
Acceptance.
I
I
C. The Claim shall be deemed to cover all changes in
cost and time (including direct, indirect, impact,
and consequential) 10 which Contractor may be
enlitled. It shall be fully substantiated and
docwnented. At a minimum, the Claim shall
contain Ihe following infonnation:
I
I
t. A detailed factual statement of the Claim for
additional compensation and time, if any,
providing all necessary dates, locations, and
items of Work affected by the Claim;
I
2. The date on which facts arose which gave rise
to the Claim
I
3, The name of each employee of Owner or AlE
knowledgeable aboul the Claim;
I
4. The specific provisions of the Contract
Documents which support the Claim;
I
5. The identification of any documents and the
substance of any oral communications that
support the Claim;
.
6. Copies of any identified documenls, other than
the Contracl Documenls, that supporllhe
Claim;
I
7. If an adjustmenl in the Contracl Time is
sought: the specific days and dates for which it
is sought; the specific reasons Contractor
believes an extension in the Contract Time
I
I
Part 8
should be granted; and Contraclor's analysis of
its Progress
Schedule 10 demonstrate the reason for the
extension in Contract Time;
8. If an adjustment in the Contract Sum is soughl,
Ihe exact amounl sought and a breakdown of
that amount into the categories set forth in, and
in the detail required by, section 7.02; and
9. A statement certifying, under penalty of
perjury, that the Claim is made in good faith,
that the supporting cost and pricing data are
true and accurate to the best of Contractor's
knowledge and belief, that the Claim is fully
supported by the accompanying data, and thaI
the amount requested accurately reflects the
adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract
Time for which Contractor believes Owner is
liable.
D.
After Contractor has submitted a fully docwnented
Claim that complies with all applicable provisions
of parts 7 and 8, Owner shall respond, in writing, 10
Contractor as follows:
1. If the Claim amount is less than $50,000, with
a decision within 60 days from the date Ihe
Claim is received; or
2. [fthe Claim amount is $50,000 or more, with a
decision within 60 days from the date the
Claim is received, or with notice to Contractor
of the date by which it will render its decision.
Owner will then respond with a written
decision in such additional time.
E. To assist in the review of Contractor's Claim,
Owner may visit the Project site, or request
additional infonnation, in order to fully evaluate
the issues raised by the Claim. Conlraclor shall
proceed wilh perfonnance of the Work pending
fmal resolution of any Claim. Owner's written
decision as set forth above shall be final and
conclusive as to all matters set forth in the Claim,
unless Contractor follows the procedure set forth in
section 8.02.
E.Any Claim of the Contractor against the Owner for
damages, additional compensation, or additional
time, shall be conclusively deemed to have been
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 33
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
waived by the Contractor unless timely made in
accordance with the requirements of this section.
8.02 ARBITRATION
A.
If Contractor disagrees with Owner's decision
rendered in accordance with paragraph 8.010,'
Contractor shall provide Owner with a written
demand for arbitration. No demand for arbitration
of any such Claim shall be made later than 30 days
after the date of Owner's decision on such Claim;
failure to demand arbitration within said 30 day
period shall result in Owner's decision being final
and binding upon Contractor and its
Subcontractors.
B.
Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed
with the American Arbitration Association (AAA),
with a copy provided to Owner. The parties shall
negotiate or mediate under the Voluntary
Construction Mediation Rules of the AAA, or
mutually acceptable service, before seeking
arbitration in accordance with the Construction
Industry Arbitration Rules of AAA as follows:
1. Dispules involving $30,000 or less shall be
conducted in accordance with the Northwest
Region Expedited Conunercial Arbitration
Rules; or
2. Disputes over $30,000 shall be conducted in
accordance with the Construction Industry
Arbitration Rules of the AAA, unless the
parties agree to use the expedited rules.
c.
All Claims arising out of the Work shall be
resolved by arbitration. The judgment upon the
arbitration award may be entered, or review of the
award may occur, in the superior court having
jurisdictiou thereof. No independent legal action
relating to or arising from the Work shall be
maintained.
D.
Claims between Owner and Contraclor, Contractor
and its Subconlractors, Contraclor and AlE, and
Owner and AlE shall, upon demand by Owncr, be
submitted in the same arbitration or mediation.
F.
If the parties resolve the Claim prior to arbitration
judgment, the terms of the resolution shall be
incorporaled in a Change Order. The Change
I
Part 8
Order shall constitute full payment and fmal
settlemenl of Ihe Claim, including all claims for
time and for direct, indirect, or consequential costs,
including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption
of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity.
I
I
8.03 CLAIMS AUDITS
I
A. All Claims filed againsI Owner shall be subjecl to
audil at any time following the filing of the Claim.
Failure of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier,
to maintain and retain sufficient records to allow
Owner to verify all or a portion of the Claim or to
permit Owner access to the books and records of
Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, shall
constitute a waiver of the Claim and shall bar any
recovery.
I
I
I
B. In support of Owner audit of any Claim, Contractor
shall, upon request, promptly make available 10
Owner the following documents:
I
1. Daily time sheets and supervisor's daily
reports;
I
2. Collective bargaining agreements:
I
3. Insurance, welfare, and benefits records;
4. Payroll registers;
I
5. Earnings records;
6. Payroll tax forms;
I
7 _ Material invoices, requisitions, and delivery
confirmations;
I
8. Material cosl distribution worksheet;
9. Equipment records (lisl of company
equipment, rates, etc.);
I
10. Vendors" rental agencies', Subcontractors" and
agents' invoices;
I
11. Contracts between Contractor and each of its
Subcontractors, and all lower-tier
Subcontractor contracts and supplier contracts;
I
I
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 34
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
I
Part 8
t 2. Subcontractors' and agents' payment
certificates;
c.
The audit may be performed by employees of
Owner or a representative of Owner.
Contractor, and its Subcontractors, shall
provide adequate facilities acceptable to
Owner, for the audit during normal business
hours, Contractor, and all Subcontractors,
shall make a good failh effort to cooperate
with Owner's auditors.
I
13. Cancelled checks (payroll and vendors);
I
14. Job cosl report, including monthly totals;
15. Job payroll ledger;
I
16. Planned resource loading schedules and
summanes;
I
17. General ledger;
18. Cash disbursements joumal;
I
I
19. Financial statements for all years reflecting the
operations on the Work. In addition, the
Owner may require, if it deems it appropriate,
additional financial statements for 3 years
preceding execution of the Wark;
I
20. Depreciation records on all company
equipment whether these records are
maintained by the company involved, its
accountant, or others;
I
21. If a source other than depreciation records is
used to develop costs for Contractor's internal
purposes in establishing the actual cost of
owning and operating equipment, all such
other source documents;
I
I
22. All nonprivileged documents which relate to
each and every Claim together with all
documents which support the amount of any
adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time
sought by each Claim;
I
I
23. Work sheets or software used 10 prepare Ihe
Claim establishing the cost components for
items of the Claim including but not limited to
labor, benefits and insurance, materials,
equipment, Subcontractors, all documents
which establish Ihe time periods, individuals
involved, Ihe hours for the individuals, and the
rates for the individuals; and
I
I
I
24. Work sheets, software, and all other
documents used by Contractor to prepare its
bid.
I
March 20, 2003
00700- page 35
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
PART 9 - TERMINATION OF THE WORK
9.01 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE
A.
Owner may, upon 7 days written notice to
Contractor and to its surety, terminate (without
prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the
Wark, or any part of it, for cause upon the
occurrence of anyone or more of the following
events:
I. Contractor fails 10 prosecute the Work or any
portion thereof with sufficient diligence to
cnsure Substantial Completion of the Work
within the Contract Time;
2. Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, makes a
general assignment for the benefit of its
creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account
of its insolvency;
3. Contractor fails in a material way to replace or
correct Wark not in conformance with the
Contract Documents;
4. Contractor repealedly fails to supply skilled
workers or proper materials or equipment;
5. Contractor repeatedly fails to make prompt
payment due to Subcontractors or for labor;
6. Contractor materially disregards or fails to
comply with laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations, or orders of any public authority
having jurisdiction; or
7. Contractor is otherwise in material breach of
any provision of the Contract Documents.
B.
Upon termination, Owner may at its option:
I. Take possession of the Projecl site and take
possession of or use all materials, equipment,
tools, and construction equipment and
machinery thereon owned by Contractor to
maintain the ordcrly progress of, and to finish,
the Work;
2. Accept assigrnnent of subcontracts pursuant to
section 5.2 t; and
I
Part 9
3. Finish the Work by whatever other reasonable
method it deems expedient.
I
c.
Owner's rights and duties upon termination are
subject to the prior rights and duties oflhe surety, if
any, obligated under any bond provided in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
I
I
D.
When Owner terminates the Work in accordance
wilh this section, Contractor shall take the actions
sel forth in paragraph 9.02B, and shall not be
entitled to receive further payment until the Work
is accepted.
I
I
E.
If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds
the cost of finishing the Work, including
compensation for AlE's seIVices and expenses
made necessary thereby and any other extra costs
or damages incurred by Owner in compleling the
Work, or as a result of Contractor's actions, such
excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs
exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to Owner. These obligations for
payment shall survive termination.
I
I
I
f.
Termination of the Work in accordance with this
section shall not relieve Contractor or its surety of
any responsibilities for Work perfoIDled.
I
G. If Owner terminates Contractor for cause, and it is
later determined that none of the circumstances set
forth in paragraph 9.01A exisl, then such
termination shalll:>e deemed a termination for
convenience pursuant to section 9.02.
I
I
9.02 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR
CONVENIENCE
I
A. O\Vl1er may, upon written notice, terminate (without
prejudice 10 any right or remedy of Owner) the
Work, or any part of it, for the convenience of
Owner.
I
B. Unless Owner directs otherwise, after receipt of a
written notice of termination for either cause or
convenience, Contractor shall promptly:
I
I. Stop performing Work on the date and as
specified in the notice of termination;
I
2. Place no further orders or subcontracts for
materials, equipment, services or facilities,
I
March 20, 2003
00700 . page 36
I
I
I
I
I
.'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
Part 9
except as may be necessary for completion of
such portion of the Work as is not terminated;
3. Cancel all orders and subcontracls, upon terms
acceptable to Owner, to the extent that they
relate to the performance of Work terminated;
4. Assign 10 Owner all of the right, title, and'
interest of Contractor in all orders and
subcontracts;
5. Take such action as may be necessary or as
directed by Owner to preserve and protect the
Work, Project site, and any other property
related to this Project in the possession of
Contractor in which Owner has an interest; and
6. Continue performance only to the extent not
terminated.
c.
If Owner terminates the Work or any portion
thereof for convenience, Contractor shall be
entitled 10 make a request for an equitable
adjustment for its reasonable direct costs incurred
prior to the effective date of the termination, plus a
reasonable allowance for overhead and profit on
Work performed prior to termination, plus Ihe
reasonable administrative costs of the termination,
but shall not be entitled to any other costs or
damages, whatsoever, provided however, the total
sum payable upon termination shall not exceed the
Contract Sum reduced by prior payments.
Contractor shall be required to make ils request in
accordance with the provisions of part 7.
D.
If Owner terminates the Work or any portion
thereof for convenience, the Contract Time shall be
adjusted as deternllned by Owner.
March 20, 2003
00700- page 37
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
I
PART 10- MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
10.01 GOVERNING LAW
The Contract Documents and the rights of the parties
herein shall be governed by the laws of the state of
Washinglon. Venue shall be in the county in which
Owner's principal place of business is located, unless
otherwise specified.
10.02 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their
partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to
the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns,
and legal representalives of such other party in respect to
covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the
Contract Documents. Neither party shall assign the Work
without written consent of the other, except that
Contractor may assign the Wark for security purposes, to
a bank or lending institution authorized to do business in
the state of Washington. If either party attempls to make
such an assignment without such consent, that party shall
neverIheless remain legally responsible for all obligations
set forth in the Contract Documents.
10.03 MEANING OF WORDS
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words
which have well-known technical or construction industry
meanings are used in the Contract Documents in
accordance with such recognized meanings. Reference to
standard specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical
society, organization, or association, or to the code of any
governmental authority, whether such reference be
specific or by implication, shall be to the latest standard
specification, manual, or code in effect on the date for
submission of bids, except as may be otherwise
specifically stated. Wherever in these Drawings and
Specifications an article, device, or piece of equipment is
referred to in the singular manner, such reference shall
apply to as many such articles as are shown on the
drawings, or required to complete the installation.
10.04 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
No action or failure to act by Owner or AlE shall
constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under
the Contract Documents, nor shall such action or failure to
act constitute approval of an acquiescence in a breach
therein, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
I
Part 10
10.05 CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION
I
Pursuant to RCW 39.06, Contraclor shall be registered or
licensed as required by the laws of the State of
Washington, including hut not limited to RCW 18.27.
I
10.06 TIME COMPUTATIONS
I
When computing any period of time, the day of the event
from which the period of time begins shall not be counted.
The lasl day is counted unless it falls on a weekend or
legal holiday, in which evenl the period runs until the end
of the next day that is not a weekend or holiday. When
the period of time allowed is less than 7 days,
intennediate Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays are
excluded from the computation.
I
I
to.07 RECORDS RETENTION
I
The wage, payroll, and cost records of Contractor, and ils
Subcontractors, and all records subject to audit in
accordance with section 8.03, shall be retained for a
period of no I less than 6 years after Ihe date of Final
Acceptance.
I
I
10.08 THIRD-PARTY AGREEMENTS
The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a
contractual relationship of any kind between: AlE and
Contractor; Owner and any Subcontractor; or any persons
other than Owner and Contractor.
I
I
10.09 ANTITRUST ASSIGNMENT
Owner and Contractor recognize that in actual economic
practice, overcharges resulting from antitrust violations
are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore,
Contractor hereby assigns to Owner any and all claims for
such overcharges as to goods, materials, and equipment
purchased in connection with the Work performed in
accordance with the Contract Documents, except as to
overcharges which result from antitrust violations
commencing after the Contract Sum is established and
which are not passed on to Owner under a Change Order.
Contractor shall put a similar clause in its Subcontracts,
and require a similar clause in its sub-Subcontracts, such
that all claims for such overcharges on the Work are
passed to Owner by Contractor.
I
I
I
I
I
I
March 20, 2003
00700- page 38
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.02
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
FOR WASHINGTON STATE FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION
(Paragraphs keyed to the State's General Conditions)
Replaces Section 2.02 - COVERAGE LIMITS INSURANCE COVERAGE CERTlFICATES
A. Insurance Coverage Certificates
The Contractor shall furnish acceptable proof of insurance coverage on the State of
Washington Certificate of Insurance form SF500A, dated 07/02/92.
B. Required Coverages
1. For a contract less than $100,000,00, the coverage required is:
a, Public Liability Insurance - The Contractor shall at all times during the term of
this contract, at its cost and expense, carry and maintain general public liability
insurance, including contractual liability, against claims for bodily injury, personal
injury, death or property damage occurring or arising out of services provided
under this contract. This insurance shall cover claims caused by any act, omission,
or negligence of the Contractor or its officers, agents, representatives, assigns or
servants. The limits of liability insurance, which may be increased as deemed
necessary by the contracting parties, shall be:
Each Occurrence
General Aggregate Limits
(other than products - commercial operations)
Products - Commercial Operations Limit
Personal and Advertising Injury Limit
Fire Damage Limit (anyone fire)
Medical Expense Limit (anyone person)
$1,000,000,00
$1,000,000,00
$1,000,000.00
$ 1 ,000,000,00
$50,000.00
$5,000.00
b. If the contract is for underground utility work, then the Contractor shall provide
proof of insurance for that above in the form of Explosion, Collapse and
Underground (XCU) coverage.
c. Employers Liability on an occurrence basis In an amount not less than
$1,000,000,00 per occurrence.
2. For contracts over $100,000.00 but less than $5,000,000.00 the contractor shall obtain
the coverage limits as listed for contracts below $100,000.00 and General Aggregate
and Products - Commercial Operations Limit of not less than $2,000,000.00.
3. Coverage for Comprehensive General Bodily Injury Liability Insurance for a contract
over $5,000,000,00 is:
Supplemental Conditions
Page 1 of9-April l5,2004
2.04
Each Occurrence
General Aggregate Limits
(other than products - commercial operations)
Products - Commercial Operations limit
Personal and Advertising Injury Limit
Fire Damage Limit (anyone fire)
Medical Expense Limit (anyone Person)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
/,
I
I
$2,500,000.00
$5,000,000.00
$5,000,000.00
$2,500,000,00
$50,000,00
$5,000,00
4. For all Contracts - Automobile Liabilitv: in the event that services delivered pursuant
to this contract involve the use of vehicles or the transportation of clients, automobile
liability insurance shall be required. If Contractor-owned personal vehicles are used, a
Business Automobile Policy covering at a minimum Code 2 "owned autos only" must
be secured, If Contractor employee's vehicles are used, the Contractor must also
include under the Business Automobile Policy Code 9, coverage for non-owned autos,
The minimum limits for automobile liability is: $1,000,000,00 per occurrence, using a
combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage,
5, For Contracts for Hazardous Substance Removal (Asbestos Abatement, PCB
Abatement, etc.)
a. In addition to providing insurance coverage for the project as outlined above, the
Contractor shall provide Environmental Impairment Liabilitv insurance for the
hazardous substance removal as follows:
EACH OCCURRENCE
$500,000.00
AGGREGATE
$1,000,000,00
or $1,000,000,00 each occurrence/aggregate bodily injury and property damage
combined single limit.
I) Insurance certificate must state that the insurer is covering hazardous substance
removal.
2) Should this insurance be secured on a "claims made" basis, the coverage must
be continuously maintained for one year following the project's "final
completion" through official completion of the project, plus one year
following.
b, For Contracts where hazardous substance removal is a subcomponent of contracted
work, the general contractor shall provide to the Owner a certificate of insurance
for coverage as defined in 5a, above. The State of Washington must be listed as an
additional insured. This certificate of insurance must be provided to the Owner
prior to commencing work.
AlA Payment Bond and Pcrformancc Bond forms A312 are required by the Owner for the
work of this contract. These forms must be obtained from the Contractor's bonding company.
The Payment Bond shall cover payment to laborers and mechanics, including payments to
Supplemental Conditions
Page 2 of9 - April 15, 2004
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Employee Benefit Funds, and payments to subcontractors, material suppliers, and persons
who shall supply such person or persons, or subcontractors with materials and supplies,
2,06 Builder's Risk - Add the following at the end of paragraph 2,06 A: "For projects not
involving New Building Construction, 'Installation Floater' is an acceptable substitute for the
Builder's Risk Insurance,"
3,02 Replaces Section 3,02 B - CONSTRUCTIQN SCHEDULE
B, The Progress Schedule shall be in the form of a Critical Path Method (CPM) logic
network or, with the approval of the Owner, a bar chart schedule may be submitted, The
scheduling of construction is the responsibility of the Contractor and is included in the
contract to assure adequate planning and execution of the work. The schedule will be
used to evaluate progress of the work for payment based on the Schedule of Values. The
schedule shall show the Contractor's planned order and interdependence of activities, and
sequence of work, As a minimum the schedule shall include:
. Date of Notice to Proceed;
. Activities (resources, durations, individual responsible for activity, early starts, late
starts, early finishes, late finishes, etc.);
. Utility Shutdowns;
. Interrelationships and dependence of activities;
. Planned vs. actual status for each activity;
. Substantial completion;
. Punch list;
. Final inspection;
. Final completion, and
. Float time
The Schedule Duration shall be based on the Contract Time of Completion listed on the
Bid Proposal form, The Owner shall not be obligated to accept any Early Completion
Schedule suggested by the Contractor. The Contract Time for Completion shall establish
the Schedule Completion Date,
If the Contractor feels that the work can be completed in less than the Specified Contract
Time, then the Surplus Time shall be considered Project Float. This Float time shall be
shown on the Project Schedule. It shall be available to accommodate changes in the work
and unforeseen conditions,
Neither the Contractor nor the Owner have exclusive right to this Float Time. It belongs
to the project.
3.06 Replaces Section 3,05 A.6 - DELAY
Unusually severe weather, in excess of weather conditions experienccd within the area any
time in the preceding ten years:
Supplemental Conditions
Page 3 of9 - April 15,2004
Supplemental Conditions
Page40f9-ApriI15,2004
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Monthly rainfall in excess of the highest monthly rainfall experienced for the same month,
B. Annual rainfall in excess of the highest annual rainfall experienced.
C. Monthly snowfall in excess of the highest monthly snowfall experienced for the same
month.
D, Annual snowfall in excess of the highest annual snowfall experienced,
E, Average high temperatures, for the summer months, in excess of the highest temperatures
experienced,
F. Average low temperatures for the winter months, lower than the lowest average
temperatures experienced.
5,02 Replace Section 5.02 B - PERMITS. FEES AND NOTICES
B, The actual cost of the general building permit (only) and the public utility hook-up fees
will be a direct reimbursement to the Contractor or paid directly to the permitting agency
by the Owner. Fees for these permits should not be included by the Contractor in his
bid amount
Add New Section 5.02 D - PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES
D, The General Contractor Shall submit copies of each valid permit required on the project to
the Owner's representative. Nothing in this part shall be construed as imposing a duty
upon the Owner or NE to secure pern1its,
5.04 Add New Paragraph F - PREV AILING WAGES
Copies of approved Intents to Pay Prevailing Wages for the Contractor and all subcontractors
shall be submitted with the Contractor's first application for payment. As additional
subcontractors perform work on the project, their approved Intent forms shall be submitted
with the Contractor's next application for payment.
The Contractor and all subcontractors shall promptly submit to the Owner certified payroll
copies ifrequestcd,
5,07 Replaces 5.07, Section A - SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A. In performing this contract, the Contractor shall provide for protecting thc Jives and health
of employees and other persons; preventing damage to property, materials, supplies, and
equipment; and avoid work interruptions, For these purposes, the Contractor shall:
1. Follow Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WlSHA) rcgional directives and
provide a site-specific safety program that will require an accident prevention and
hazard analysis plan for the contractor and each subcontractor on the work site, The
Contractor shall submit a site-specific safety plan to the Owner's represcntativc prior
to the initial scheduled construction meeting.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Provide adequate safety devices and measures including, but not limited to, the
appropriate safety literature, notice, training, permits, placement and use of barricades,
signs, signal lights, ladders, scaffolding, staging, runways, hoist, construction
elevators, shoring, temporary lighting, grounded outlets, wiring, hazardous materials,
vehicles, construction processes, and equipment required by Chapter 19.27 RCW,
State Building Code (Uniform Building, Electrical, Mechanical, Fire, and Plumbing
Codes); Chapter 212-12 WAC, Fire Marshal Standards, Chapter 49.17 RCW, WISHA;
Chapter 296-155 WAC, Safety Standards for Construction Work; Chapter 296-65
WAC; WISHA Asbestos Standard; WAC 296-62-071, Respirator Standard; WAC
296-62; General Occupation Health Standards, WAC 296-24, General Safety and
Health Standards, WAC 296-24, General Safety and Health Standards, Chapter 49.70
RCW, and Right to Know Act.
3, Comply with the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA), Clean Air Act, Shoreline
Management Act, and other applicable federal, state, and local statutes and regulations
dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public
natural resources,
4. Post all permits, notices, and/or approvals in a conspicuous location at the construction
site.
5. Provide any additional measures that the Owner determines to be reasonable and
necessary for ensuring a safe environment in areas open to the public. Nothing in this
part shall be construed as imposing a duty upon the Owner or AlE to prescribe safety
conditions relating to employees, public, or agents of the Contractors.
5.20 Replace Paragraph A - SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
A. Prior to submitting the third Application for Payment, Contractor shall furnish in writing
to Owner on Owner provided formes) the namcs, addresses, telephone numbers, and Tax
Idcntification Numbers (TIN) of all subcontractors, as well as suppliers providing
materials in excess of $2,500.00. The COil tractor shall desigllate all subcolltractor alld
supplier participallts which they believe to be MBE or WBE oWlled busillesses, or have
idelltified themselves to the COil tractor as MBE or WBE, or are Washillgtoll State
OMWBE certified. The COil tractor shall illdicate the allticipated dollar value of each
MWBE subcolltract. Contractor shall utilize subcontractors and suppliers, which are
experienced and qualified, and meet the requirements of the Contract Documcnts, if any.
Contractor shall not utilize any subcontractor or supplier to whom the Owner has a
reasonable objection, and shall obtain Owner's written consent before making any
substitutions or additions,
7.01 Add Paragraph F - CHANGE IN THE WORK
F. I. The Field Authorization (FA) is executed as a directive to proceed with work when the
processing time for an approved change order would impact the projcct.
Supplemental Conditions
Page 5 of9 - April 15, 2004
Supplemental Conditions
Page60f9-ApriI15,2004
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. A scope of work must be defined, a maximum not to exceed cost agreed upon, and any
estimated modification to the contract completion time determined, The method of
final cost verification must be noted and supporting cost data must be submitted in
accordance with the requirements of Part 7 of the General Conditions. Upon
satisfactory submittal and approval of supporting cost data, the completed FA will be
processed into a change order. No payment will be made to the Contractor for FA
work until that FA is converted to a Change Order.
10,10 Add Part 10,10 - MINORITY AND WOMEN'S BUSINESS ENTERPRISES (MWBE)
PARTICIPATION
In Accordance with the legislative findings and policies set forth in Chapter 39,19 RCW the
State of Washington encourages participation in all of its contracts by MWBE firms certified by
the Office of Minority and Women's Business Enterprises (OMWBE), Participation may be
either on a direct basis in response to this solicitation or as a subcontractor to a Bidder. Any
affirmative action requirements set forth in federal regulations or statutes included or referenced
in the contract documents will apply, Bidders may contact OMWBE to obtain information on
certified firms for potential subcontractors/suppliers,
A, When referred to in this Contract, the terms Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and
Women's Business Enterprise (WBE) will be as defined by OMWBE, WAC 326-02-030,
B. The OMWBE has compiled a directory of certified fimls. Copies of this directory may be
obtained through the OMWBE. For information regarding the certification process or the
certi fication status of a particular firm, contact:
The OMWBE, 406 South Water, P,O. Box 41160, Olympia, Washington 98504-1160,
telephone (360) 753-9693.
C. Eligible MWBEs or M/W firms
MWBE fimlS utilized for this project for voluntary MWBE goals may be certified by
Washington State OMWBE or self identified as minority or women owned (M/W firm).
D. MWBE Voluntary Goals
The Owner has established voluntary goals for MWBE participation for this project. The
voluntary goals are set forth in the Advertisement for Bids.
E. If any part of the contract, including the supply of materials and equipment, is anticipated to
be subcontracted, then prior to receipt of the first payment, Contractor shall submit, pursuant
to Section 5.20 A, a list of all subcontractors/suppliers it intends to use, designate whether
any of the subcontractors/suppliers are MWBE firms, indicate the anticipated dollar value of
each MWBE subcontract, and provide Tax Identification Number (TIN),
I
I
F. If any part of the contract, including the supply of materials and equipment is actually
subcontracted during completion of the work, then prior to final acceptance or completion of
the contract or as otherwise indicated in the contract documents, the Contractor shall submit
a statement of participation indicating what MWBEs were used and the dollar value of their
subcontracts,
I
I
I'
G. The provisions of this section are not intended to replace or otherwise change the
requirements ofRCW 39.30.060, If said statute is applicable to this contract then the failure
to comply with RCW 39.30.060 will still render a bid non-responsive.
I
I
H, The Contractor shall maintain, for at least three years after completion of this contract,
relevant records and information necessary to document the level of utilization of MWBEs
and other businesses as subcontractors and suppliers in this contract, as well as any efforts
the Contractor makes to increase the participation of MWBEs as listed in section I below.
The Contractor shall also maintain, for at least three years after completion of this contract, a
record of all quotes, bids, estimates, or proposals submitted to the Contractor by all
businesses seeking to participate as subcontractors or suppliers in this contract. The state
shall have the right to inspect and copy such records. If this contract involves federal funds,
Contractor shall comply with all record keeping requirements set forth in any federal rules,
regulations or statutes included or referenced in the contract documents.
I
I
1. Bidders shall advertise opportunities for subcontractors or suppliers in a manner reasonably
designed to provide MWBEs capable of performing the work with timely notice of such
opportunities, and all advertisements shall include a provision encouraging participation by
MWBE firms. Advertising may be done through general advertisements (e.g. newspapers,
journals, etc.) or by soliciting bids directly from MWBEs. Bidders shall provide MWBEs
that express interest with adequate and timely information about plans, specifications, and
requirements ofthe contract.
I
I
I
I
I
I
J. Contractors shall not create barriers to open and fair opportuUltles for all businesses
including MWBEs to participate in all State contracts and to obtain or compete for contracts
and subcontracts as sources of supplies, equipment, construction and services. In considering
offers from and doing business with subcontractors and suppliers, the Contractor shall not
discriminate on the basis of race, color, creed, religion, sex, age, nationality, marital status, or
the presence of any mental or physical disability in an otherwise qualified disabled person.
K. Any violation of the mandatory requirements of this part of the contract shall be a material
breach of contract for which the Contractor may be subject to a requirement of specific
performance, or damages and sanctions provided by contract, by RCW 39.19.090, or by other
applicable laws.
I
I
I
I
Supplemental Conditions
Pagc 7 of9 - April 15, 2004
Supplemcntal Conditions
Page 8 of9 - April 15,2004
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10.11 MINIMUM LEVELS OF APPRENTICESHIP P ARTICIP A TION
In accordance with Executive Order 00-01 the State of Washington may require
apprenticeship participation for projects of a certain cost. The bid advertisement and Bid
Proposal form shall establish the minimum percentage of apprentice labor hours as compared
to the total labor hours. .
A. Voluntary workforce diversity goals have been established for the apprentice hours.
These goals are that one-fifth (1/5) of the apprentice hours be performed by minorities,
and one-sixth (116) of the apprentice hours be performed by women,
B, Apprentice participation, under this contract, may be counted towards the required
percentage (%) only if the apprentices are from an apprenticeship program registered and
approved by the Washington State Apprenticeship and Training Council (RCW 49.04 and
WAC 296-04),
C. Bidders may contact the Department of Labor and Industries, Specialty Compliance
Services Division, Apprenticeship Section, P.O. Box 44530, Olympia, W A 98504-4530
by phone at (360) 902-5320, and e-mail at thurn235@lni.wa.gov , to obtain information on
available apprenticeship programs.
D. For each project that has apprentice requirements, the contractor shall submit a
"Statement of Apprentice/Journeyman Participation" on forms provided by the
Department of General Administration, with every request for progress payment. The
Contractor shall submit consolidated and cumulative data collected by the Contractor and
collected from all subcontractors by the Contractor. The data to be collected and
submitted includes the following:
I. Contractor name and address
2. Contract number
3, Project name
4. Contract value
5. Reporting period "Notice to Proceed" through "Invoicing Date"
6. Craft/trade/occupation of all (contractor and subcontractor trades working
on the project) apprentices and journeymen
7. Total number of apprentices and total number of hours worked by
apprentices, both categorized by gender and ethnicity
8. Total number of joumeymen and total number of hours worked by
joumeymen, both categorized by gender and ethnicity
9. Cumulative combincd total of apprentice and joumeymenlabor hours.
10. Total percentage of apprentice hours worked
E. No changes to the required percentage (%) of apprentice participation shall be allowed
without written approval of the Owner. In any request for thc change the Contractor shall
clearly demonstrate a good faith effort to comply with the requirements for apprentice
participation.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.'
I
I
I
I
F. Any substantive violation of the mandatory requirements of this part of the contract may
be a material breach of the contract by the Contractor. The Owner may withhold payment
pursuant to Part 6.05, stop the work for cause pursuant to Part 3,04, and terminate the
contract for cause pursuant to Part 9,01.
SupplementalConditionslWORDHOLD
Supplemental Conditions
Page 9 of9 -April 15, 2004
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
State of Washington
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES
Prevailing Wage Section - Telephone (360) 902-5335
PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540
Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates For Public Works Contracts
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits.
On public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief
description of overtime calculation requirements is provided on the Benefit Code Key.
CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 09-01-04
*****************************************************************************************************************
Classification
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
BOILERMAKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
BRICK AND MARBLE MASONS
JOURNEY LEVEL
CABINET MAKERS (IN SHOP)
JOURNEY LEVEL
CARPENTERS
ACOUSTICAL WORKER
BRIDGE, DOCK AND WARF CARPENTERS
CARPENTER
CREOSOTED MATERIAL
DRYWALL APPLICATOR
FLOOR FINISHER
FLOOR LAYER
FLOOR SANDER
MILLWRIGHT AND MACHINE ERECTORS
PILEDRIVERS, DRIVING, PULLING, PLACING COLLARS AND WELDING
SAWFILER
SHINGLER
STATIONARY POWER SAW OPERATOR
STATIONARY WOODWORKING TOOLS
CEMENT MASONS
JOURNEY LEVEL
DIVERS & TENDERS
DIVER
DIVER TENDER
DREDGE WORKERS
ASSISTANT ENGINEER
ASSISTANT MATE (DECKHAND)
BOATMEN
ENGINEER WELDER
LEVERMAN, HYDRAULIC
MAINTENANCE
MATES
OILER
DRYWALL TAPERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
ELECTRICAL FIXTURE MAINTENANCE WORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
Page 1
PREVAILING
WAGE
$32.61
$43.47
$39.87
$14.67
$39.11
$38.95
$38.95
$39.05
$39.63
$39.08
$39.08
$39.08
$39.95
$39.15
$39.08
$39.08
$39.08
$39.08
$32.61
$80.62
$41.72
$39.52
$38.76
$39.52
$39.57
$41.04
$38.76
$39.52
$39.16
$39.44
$9.37
(See Benefit Code Key)
Over
Time
Code
Holiday
Code
Note
Code
1N
50
1B
5N
1M
5A
1M 5D
1M 5D
1M 5D
1M SD
1M 5D
1M 5D
1M SD
1M 5D
1M 5D
1M 5D
1M 5D
1M SD
1M 5D
1M SD
1N 50
1M 50 8A
1M 50
1B 5D 8L
1B 50 8L
1B 5D 8L
1B 5D 8L
1B 5D 8L
1B 5D 8L
1B 5D 8L
1B 5D 8L
1J 5B
CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 09-01-04
*****************************************************************************************************************
(See Benefit Code Key)
Over
PREVAILING Time Holiday Note
Classification WAGE Code Code Code
ELECTRICIANS. INSIDE
CABLE SPLICER $49.51 10 6H
CABLE SPLICER (TUNNEL) $53.31 10 6H
CERTIFIED WELDER $47.79 10 6H
CERTIFIED WELDER (TUNNEL) $51.41 1D 6H
CONSTRUCTION STOCK PERSON $24.33 10 6H
JOURNEY LEVEL $46,06 10 6H
JOURNEY LEVEL (TUNNEL) $49.51 1D 6H
ELECTRICIANS. MOTOR SHOP
CRAFTSMAN $15.37 2A 6C
JOURNEY LEVEL $14.69 2A 6C
ELECTRICIANS. POWERLlNE CONSTRUCTION
CABLE SPLICER $49.54 4A 5A
CERTIFIED LINE WELDER $45.15 4A 5A
GROUNDPERSON $32.63 4A 5A
HEAD GROUNDPERSON $34.43 4A 5A
HEAVY LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $45.15 4A 5A
JACKHAMMER OPERATOR $34.43 4A 5A
JOURNEY LEVEL L1NEPERSON $45.15 4A 5A
LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR $38.37 4A 5A
POLE SPRAYER $45.15 4A 5A
POWDERPERSON $34.43 4A 5A
ELECTRONIC & TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIANS
JOURNEY LEVEL $12.07
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS
MECHANIC $49.28 4A 6Q
MECHANIC IN CHARGE $54.18 4A 6Q
FABRICATED PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS
ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $13.50
FENCE ERECTORS
FENCE ERECTOR $13.80
FENCE LABORER $11.60
FLAGGERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $27.93 1N 5D
GLAZIERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $39.96 2E 5G
HEAT & FROST INSULATORS AND ASBESTOS WORKERS
MECHANIC $41.93 1F 5E
HEATING EQUIPMENT MECHANICS
MECHANIC $16.00
HOD CARRIERS & MASON TENDERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $33.09 1N 5D
INDUSTRIAL ENGINE AND MACHINE MECHANICS
MECHANIC $15.65
INDUSTRIAL POWER VACUUM CLEANER
JOURNEY LEVEL $9.07
INLAND BOATMEN
CAPTAIN $3514 1K 5B
COOK $30.11 1K 5B
DECKHAND $29.09 1K 5B
ENGINEER/DECKHAND $31.66 1K 5B
MATE, LAUNCH OPERATOR $33.24 1K 5B
Page 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 09-01-04
I
*****************************************************************************************************************
I
PREVAILING
WAGE
Classification
INSPECTION/CLEANING/SEALING OF SEWER & WATER
SYSTEMS BY REMOTE CONTROL
CLEANER OPERATOR, FOAMER OPERATOR
GROUT TRUCK OPERATOR
HEAD OPERATOR
TECHNICIAN
TV TRUCK OPERATOR
INSULATION APPLICATORS
JOURNEY LEVEL
IRONWORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
LABORERS
ASPHALT RAKER
BALLAST REGULA TOR MACHINE
BATCH WEIGHMAN
BRUSH CUTTER
BRUSH HOG FEEDER
BURNERS
CARPENTER TENDER
CASSION WORKER
CEMENT DUMPER/PAVING
CEMENT FINISHER TENDER
CHANGE-HOUSE MAN OR DRY SHACKMAN
CHIPPING GUN (OVER 30 LBS)
CHIPPING GUN (UNDER 30 LBS)
CHOKER SETTER
CHUCK TENOER
CLEAN-UP LABORER
CONCRETE DUMPER/CHUTE OPERATOR
CONCRETE FORM STRIPPER
CONCRETE SAW OPERATOR
CRUSHER FEEDER
CURING LABORER
DEMOLITION, WRECKING & MOVING (INCLUDING CHARRED
OITCH DIGGER
DIVER
DRILL OPERATOR (HYDRAULIC, DIAMOND)
DRILL OPERATOR, AIRTRAC
DUMPMAN
EPOXY TECHNICIAN
EROSION CONTROL WORKER
FALLER/BUCKER, CHAIN SAW
FINAL DETAIL CLEANUP (I.e., dusting, vacuuming, window cleaning; NOT
construction debris cleanup)
FINE GRADERS
FIRE WATCH
FORM SETTER
GAB ION BASKET BUILDER
GENERAL LABORER
GRADE CHECKER & TRANSIT PERSON
GRINDERS
GROUT MACHINE TENDER
I
$9.73
$11.48
$12.78
$7.16
$10.53
$20.50
$43.12
$33.09
$32.61
$27.93
$32.61
$32.61
$32.61
$32.61
$33.45
$33.09
$32.61
$32.61
$33.09
$32.61
$32.61
$32.61
$32.61
$33.09
$32.61
$33.09
$27.93
$32.61
$32.61
$32.61
$33.45
$33.09
$33.45
$32.61
$32.61
$32.61
$33.09
$25.61
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
$32.61
$27.93
$32.61
$32.61
$32.61
$33.09
$32.61
$32.61
I
I
I
Page 3
I
I
I
(See Benefit Code Key)
Over
Time
Code
Holiday
Code
Note
Code
1B 5A
1N 5D
1N 5D
1N 5D
1N 5D
1N 50
1N 50
1N 5D
1N 50
1N 5D
1N 5D
1N 50
1N 5D
1N 5D
1N 50
1N 5D
1N 5D
1N SD
1N 5D
1N 5D
1N 5D
1N 50
1N 5D
1N 5D
1N 50
1N SD
1N 50
1N 50
1N 50
1N 5D
1N 50
1N 50
1N 50
1N 5D
1N 5D
1N 50
1N 5D
1N 5D
1N 5D
1N 50
CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 09-01-04
I
(See Benefit Code Key)
Over
PREVAILING Time Holiday Note
WAGE Code Code Code
$32.61 1N 50
$33.45 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 5D
$33.45 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 50
$32.61 1N 5D
$33.45 1N 5D
$33,09 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$27.93 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$33.45 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 50
$33.45 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$33.45 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 5D
$33.09 1N SD
$32.61 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 50
$33.09 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 50
$33.09 1N 50
$33.09 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 50
$32.61 1N 50
$33.09 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 50
$32.61 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
$32.61 1N 50
$32.61 1N 5D
$33.09 1N 5D
I
*****************************************************************************************************************
Classification
GUARDRAIL ERECTOR
HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL A
HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL B
HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL C
HIGH SCALER
HOD CARRIERlMORTARMAN
JACKHAMMER
LASER BEAM OPERATOR
MANHOLE BUILDER-MUD MAN
MATERIAL YARDMAN
MINER
NOZZLEMAN, CONCRETE PUMP. GREEN CUTTER WHEN USING HIGH
PRESSURE AIR & WATER ON CONCRETE & ROCK, SANDBLAST,
GUNITE, SHOTCRETE, WATER BLASTER
PAVEMENT BREAKER
PILOT CAR
PIPE POT TENDER
PIPE RELlNER (NOT INSERT TYPE)
PIPELA YER & CAULKER
PIPELA YER & CAULKER (LEAD)
PIPEWRAPPER
POT TENDER
POWDERMAN
POWDERMAN HELPER
POWERJACKS
RAILROAD SPIKE PULLER (POWER)
RE-TIMBERMAN
RI PRAP MAN
RODDER
SCAFFOLD ERECTOR
SCALE PERSON
SIGNALMAN
SLOPER (OVER 20")
SLOPER SPRA YMAN
SPREADER (CLARY POWER OR SIMILAR TYPES)
SPREADER (CONCRETE)
STAKE HOPPER
STOCKPILER
TAMPER & SIMILAR ELECTRIC, AIR & GAS
TAMPER (MULTIPLE & SELF PROPELLED)
TOOLROOM MAN (AT JOB SITE)
TOPPER-TAilER
TRACK LABORER
TRACK LINER (POWER)
TRUCK SPOTTER
TUGGER OPERATOR
VIBRATING SCREED (AIR, GAS, OR ELECTRIC)
VIBRATOR
VINYL SEAMER
WELDER
WELL-POINT LABORER
Page 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 09-01-04
*****************************************************************************************************************
(See Benefit Code Key)
Over
PREVAILING Time Holiday Note
Classification WAGE Code Code Code
LABORERS - UNDERGROUND SEWER & WATER
GENERAL LABORER $32,61 1N 5D
PIPE LAYER $33.09 1N 5D
LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION
IRRIGATION OR LAWN SPRINKLER INSTALLERS $11.42
LANDSCAPE EQUIPMENT OPERATORS OR TRUCK DRIVERS $7.81
LANDSCAPING OR PLANTING LABORERS $7.93
LATHERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $39.63 1M 5D
MACHINISTS (HYDROELECTRIC SITE WORK)
MACHINIST $16,84
METAL FABRICATION (IN SHOP)
FITTERlWELDER $15.16
LABORER $11.13
MACHINE OPERATOR $10.66
PAINTER $11.41
PAINTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $30.76 2B 5A
PLASTERERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $25.83
PLAYGROUND & PARK EQUIPMENT INSTALLERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $7.93
PLUMBERS & PIPEFITTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $48.86 1G SA
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS
ASSISTANT ENGINEERS $37.26 1T 5D 8L
BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (3 YD & UNDER) $39.88 1T 5D 8L
BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (OVER 3 YD & UNDER 6 YD) $40.34 1T 5D 8L
BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (6 YD AND OVER WITH $40.86 1T 5D 8L
BACKHOES, (75 HP & UNDER) $39.49 1T 5D 8L
BACKHOES, (OVER 75 HP) $39.88 1T 5D 8L
BARRIER MACHINE (ZIPPER) $39.88 1T 5D 8L
BATCH PLANT OPERATOR, CONCRETE $39.88 1T 5D 8L
BELT LOADERS (ELEVATING TYPE) $39.49 1T 5D 8L
BOBCAT $37.26 1T 5D 8L
BROOMS $37.26 1T 5D 8L
BUMP CUTTER $39.88 1T 5D 8L
CABLEWA YS $40.34 1T 5D 8L
CHIPPER $39.88 1T 5D 8L
COMPRESSORS $37.26 1T 5D 8L
CONCRETE FINISH MACHINE - LASER SCREED $37.26 1T 5D 8L
CONCRETE PUMPS $39.49 1T 5D 8L
CONCRETE PUMP-TRUCK MOUNT WITH BOOM ATTACHMENT $39.88 1T 5D 8L
CONVEYORS $39.49 1T SD 8L
CRANES, THRU 19 TONS. WITH ATTACHMENTS $39.49 1T 5D 8L
CRANES, 20 - 44 TONS, WITH ATTACHMENTS $39.88 1T 5D 8L
CRANES. 45 TONS - 99 TONS, UNDER 150 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING $40.34 1T 5D 8L
JIB WITH ATACHMENTS)
CRANES, 100 TONS - 199TONS, OR 150 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB $40.86 1T 5D 8L
WITH ATTACHMENTS)
CRANES, 200 TONS TO 300 TONS, OR 250 FT OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB $41.40 1T 5D 8L
WITH ATTACHMENTS)
CRANES, A-FRAME, 10 TON AND UNDER $37.26 1T 5D 8L
Page 5
I
CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 09-01-04 I
*****************************************************************************************************************
(See Benefit Code Key)
Over
PREVAILING Time Holiday Note I
Classification WAGE Code Code Code
CRANES, A-FRAME, OVER 10 TON $39.49 1T 5D BL
CRANES, OVER 300 TONS. OR 300' OF BOOM INCLUDING JIB WITH $41,92 1T 5D BL I
ATTACHMENTS
CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (20 - 44 TONS) $39.88 1T 5D BL
CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (45 - gg TONS) $40.34 1T 5D BL
CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (100 TONS & OVER) $40.86 1T 5D BL
CRANES, TOWER CRANE UP TO 175' IN HEIGHT, BASE TO BOOM $40.86 1T 5D BL I
CRANES, TOWER CRANE OVER 175' IN HEIGHT, BASE TO BOOM $41.40 1T 5D BL
CRUSHERS $39.88 1T SD BL
DECK ENGINEER/DECK WINCHES (POWER) $39.88 1T 5D BL
DERRICK, BUILDING $40.34 1T 5D BL I
DOZERS, D-9 & UNDER $39.49 1T 5D BL
DRILL OILERS - AUGER TYPE, TRUCK OR CRANE MOUNT $39.49 1T 5D BL
DRILLING MACHINE $39.88 1T 5D BL
ELEVATOR AND MANLlFT, PERMANENT AND SHAFT-TYPE $37.26 1T 5D BL I
EQUIPMENT SERVICE ENGINEER (OILER) $39.49 1T 5D BL
FINISHING MACHINE/BIDWELL GAMACO AND SIMILAR EQUIP $39.88 1T 5D BL
FORK LIFTS, (3000 LBS AND OVER) $39.49 1T 5D BL
FORK LIFTS, (UNDER 3000 LBS) $37.26 1T 5D BL I
GRADE ENGINEER $39.49 1T 5D BL
GRADECHECKER AND STAKEMAN $37.26 1T 5D BL
GUARDRAIL PUNCH $39.88 1T 5D BL
HOISTS, OUTSIDE (ELEVATORS AND MANLlFTS), AIR TUGGERS $39.49 1T 5D BL I
HORIZONTAUDIRECTIONAL DRILL LOCATOR $39.49 1T 5D BL
HORIZONTAUDlRECTIONAL DRILL OPERATOR $39.88 1T 5D BL
HYDRALlFTS/BOOM TRUCKS (10 TON & UNDER) $37.26 1T 5D BL
HYDRALlFTS/BOOM TRUCKS (OVER 10 TON) $39.49 1T 5D BL
LOADERS, OVERHEAD (6 YD UP TO B YD) $40.34 1T 5D BL I
LOAOERS, OVERHEAD (B YD & OVER) $40.86 1T 5D BL
LOADERS, OVERHEAD (UNDER 6 YD), PLANT FEED $39.88 1T 5D BL
LOCOMOTIVES, ALL $39.88 1T 5D BL
MECHANICS, ALL $40.34 1T 5D BL I
MIXERS. ASP HAL T PLANT $39.88 1T 5D BL
MOTOR PATROL GRADER (FINISHING) $39.88 1T 5D BL
MOTOR PATROL GRADER (NON-FINISHING) $39.49 1T 5D BL
MUCKING MACHINE, MOLE, TUNNEL DRILL AND/OR SHIELD $40.34 1T 5D BL I
OIL DISTRIBUTORS, BLOWER DISTRIBUTION AND MULCH SEEDING $37.26 1T 5D BL
OPERATOR
PAVEMENT BREAKER $37.26 1T 5D BL
PILEDRIVER (OTHER THAN CRANE MOUNT) $39.88 1T SD BL I
PLANT OILER (ASPHALT, CRUSHER) $39.49 1T 5D BL
POSTHOLE DIGGER, MECHANICAL $37.26 1T 5D BL
POWER PLANT $37.26 1T 5D BL
PUMPS, WATER $37.26 1T 5D BL I
QUAD 9, 0-10, AND HD-41 $40.34 1T 5D BL
REMOTE CONTROL OPERATOR ON RUBBER TIRED EARTH MOVING $40.34 1T 5D BL
EQUIP
RIGGER AND BELLMAN $37.26 1T 5D BL
ROLLAGON $4034 1T 5D BL I
ROLLER, OTHER THAN PLANT ROAD MIX $37.26 1T 5D BL
ROLLERS, PLANTMIX OR MUL TILlFT MATERIALS $39.49 1T 5D BL
ROTO-MILL, ROTO-GRINDER $39.88 1T 5D BL
SAWS, CONCRETE $39.49 1T 5D BL I
Page 6
I
I
I
I
CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 09-01-04
*****************************************************************************************************************
I
I
Classification
SCRAPERS - SELF PROPELLED. HARD TAIL END DUMP, ARTICULATING
OFF-ROAD EQUIPMENT ( UNDER 45 YD)
SCRAPERS' SELF PROPELLED, HARD TAIL END DUMP, ARTICULATING
OFF-ROAD EQUIPMENT (45 YD AND OVER)
SCRAPERS, CONCRETE AND CARRY ALL
SCREED MAN
SHOTCRETE GUNITE
SLlPFORM PAVERS
SPREADER, TOPSIDE OPERATOR - BLAW KNOX
SUBGRADE TRIMMER
TOWER BUCKET ELEVATORS
TRACTORS, (75 HP & UNDER)
TRACTORS, (OVER 75 HP)
TRANSFER MATERIAL SERVICE MACHINE
TRANSPORTERS, ALL TRACK OR TRUCK TYPE
TRENCHING MACHINES
TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER (UNDER 100 TON)
TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER (100 TON & OVER)
TRUCK MOUNT PORTABLE CONVEYER
WHEEL TRACTORS,FARMALL TYPE
YO YO PAY DOZER
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS- UNDERGROUND SEWER &
(SEE POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS)
POWER LINE CLEARANCE TREE TRIMMERS
JOURNEY LEVEL IN CHARGE
SPRAY PERSON
TREE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
TREE TRIMMER
TREE TRIMMER GROUNDPERSON
REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS
MECHANIC
RESIDENTIAL BRICK & MARBLE MASONS
JOURNEY LEVEL
RESIDENTIAL CARPENTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
RESIDENTIAL CEMENT MASONS
JOURNEY LEVEL
RESIDENTIAL DRYWALL TAPERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
RESIDENTIAL ELECTRICIANS
JOURNEY LEVEL
RESIDENTIAL GlAZIERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
RESIDENTIAL INSULATION APPLICATORS
JOURNEY LEVEL
RESIDENTIAL LABORERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
RESIDENTIAL PAINTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBERS & PIPEF1TTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Page 7
I
I
I
I
PREVAILING
WAGE
$39.88
$40.34
$39.49
$39.88
$37.26
$40.34
$39.88
$39.88
$39.49
$39.49
$39.88
$39.88
$40.34
$39.49
$39.49
$39.88
$39.88
$37.26
$39.88
$33.06
$31.34
$31.76
$29.48
$21.94
$27.68
$39.87
$17.85
$25.63
$18.00
$27.78
$16.84
$9.86
$18.08
$15.97
$14.60
(See Benefit Gode Key)
Over
Time Holiday Note
Code Code Code
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
1T 5D 8L
4A 5A
4A SA
4A SA
4A SA
4A 5A
1M
SA
I
CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 09-01-04
*****************************************************************************************************************
(See Benefit Code Key)
Over
PREVAILING Time Holiday Note
Classification WAGE Code Code Code
RESIDENTIAL REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING
JOURNEY LEVEL $46.41 1G 5A
RESIDENTIAL SHEET METAL WORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $30,22 1J 6L
RESIDENTIAL SOFT FLOOR LAYERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $10.88
RESIDENTIAL SPRINKLER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION)
JOURNEY LEVEL $19,67
ROOFERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $34.53 1R 5A
USING IRRITABLE BITUMINOUS MATERIALS $37.53 1R 5A
SHEET METAL WORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $46.74 1J 6L
SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (ELECTRICAL)
JOURNEY LEVEL $19.29
SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (NON-ELECTRICAL)
JOURNEY LEVEL $12.15
SOFT FLOOR LAYERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $32.24 1B 5A
SOLAR CONTROLS FOR WINDOWS
JOURNEY LEVEL $10.31 1B 50
SPRINKLER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION)
JOURNEY LEVEL $19.67
STAGE RIGGING MECHANICS (NON STRUCTURAL)
JOURNEY LEVEL $13.23
SURVEYORS
CHAIN PERSON $9.35
INSTRUMENT PERSON $11.40
PARTY CHIEF $13.40
TELEPHONE LINE CONSTRUCTION - OUTSIDE
CABLE SPLICER $28.29 2B 5A
HOLE DIGGER/GROUND PERSON $15.91 2B 5A
INSTALLER (REPAIRER) $27.13 2B 5A
JOURNEY LEVEL TELEPHONE lINEPERSON $26.32 2B 5A
SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER I $28.29 2B 5A
SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER II $27.72 2B 5A
TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (HEAVY) $28.29 28 5A
TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (LIGHT) $26.32 28 5A
TELEVISION GROUND PERSON $15.10 28 5A
TELEVISION L1NEPERSON/INSTALLER $2011 28 5A
TELEVISION SYSTEM TECHNICIAN $23.80 28 5A
TELEVISION TECHNICIAN $21.43 28 5A
TREE TRIMMER $26.32 28 5A
TERRAZZO WORKERS & TILE SETTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $37.03 1H 5A
TilE, MARBLE & TERRAZZO FINISHERS
FINISHER $30.86 1H 5A
TRAFFIC CONTROL STRIPERS
JOURNEY LEVEL $31.90 1K 5A
TRUCK DRIVERS
ASPHALT MIX (TO 16 YARDS) $36.89 1T 5D 8L
ASPHALT MIX (OVER 16 YARDS) $37.47 1T 50 8L
Page 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CLALLAM COUNTY
Effective 09-01-04
*****************************************************************************************************************
I
I
PREVAILING
WAGE
$20.23
$20,23
$37.47
$23,73
$11,60
$9.45
$11.60
Classification
I
DUMP TRUCK
DUMP TRUCK & TRAILER
OTHER TRUCKS
TRANSIT MIXER
WELL DRILLERS & IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLERS
IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLER
OILER
WELL DRILLER
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Page 9
I
I
(See Benefit Gode Key)
Over
Time Holiday Note
Code Code Code
1
1
1T
1
5D
8L
BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 09-01-04
*****************************************************.*******************.*************************************.********
I.
OVERTIME CODES
OVERTIME CALCULATIONS ARE BASED ON THE HOURLY RATE ACTUALLY PAID TO THE WORKER. ON PUBLIC
WORKS PROJECTS, THE HOURLY RATE MUST BE NOT LESS THAN THE PREVAILING RATE OF WAGE MINUS THE
HOURL Y RATE OF THE COST OF FRINGE BENEFITS ACTUALLY PROVIDED FOR THE WORKER.
ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID ATONE
AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURL Y RATE OF WAGE.
A.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL ALSO BE P AID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF
TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
B.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID ATONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE P AID AT DOUBLE THE HOURL Y RATE OF
WAGE.
C
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
D.
THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAYS OF A FlVE - EIGHT HOUR WORK WEEK AND THE FIRST EIGHT (8)
HOURS WORKED ON A FIFTH CALENDAR DAY, EXCLUDING SUNDA Y, IN A FOUR - TEN HOUR SCHEDULE. SHALL BE
PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALFTIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8)
HOURS PER DAY ON SATURDA Y; ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS IN A FIFTH CALENDAR
WEEKDAY OF A FOUR - TEN HOUR SCHEDULE; ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN (10) HOURS PER DA Y
MONDA Y THROUGH FRIDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOUDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE
THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
E.
ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF 10 PER DAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. THE
FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALFTIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS or EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON
SUNDA YS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
F.
THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID ATONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURL Y RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON
SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL
HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DA Y SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
G
THE fiRST TEN (IO) HOURS WORKED ON SATURDA YS AND THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON A FIFTH
CALENDAR WEEKDAY IN A FOUR - TEN HOUR SCHEDULE, SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE
HOURL Y RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OFTEN (IO) HOURS PER DAY MONDAY THROUGH
SA TURDA Y, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDA YS AND HOLlDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURL Y
RATE OF WAGE.
H.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER
CONDITIONS OR EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
W AGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLlDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURL Y RATE OF
WAGE.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDA Y SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
WORK PERFORMED ON SUNDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. WORK PERFORMED
ON A HOLlDA Y SHALL BE PAID ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THEIR HOURL Y RATE FOR ACTUAL HOURS WORKED
PLUS EIGHT (8) HOURS OF STRAIGHT TIME FOR THE HOLlDA Y.
THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDA Y SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURL Y RATE OF I
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON
SUNDA YS AND HOLlDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
K.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDA YS AND SUNDA YS SHALL I3E PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURL Y
RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLlDA YS SHALL BE PAlO AT DOUBLE THE HOURL I' RATE OF WAGE.
L.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDA YS, SUNDA YS AND HOLJDA YS (EXCEPT THANKSGIVING DA I' AND CHRISTMAS
DA Y) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL I-lOURS WORKED ON
THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
M.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDA YS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DA YS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER
CONDITIONS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED
ON SUNDA YS AND HOUDA YS SHALL I3E PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
N.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDA YS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DA YS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-IIALF TIMES
THE HOURL Y RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDA YS AND HOLlDA YS SHALL 8E PAID AT DOUBLE
THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
2.
BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 09-01-04
'" ..:.2-
P
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS) AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID ATONE AND ONE-
HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE
HOURL Y RATE OF WAGE.
Q
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID ATONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT CHRISTMAS DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT
DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON CHRISTMAS DAY SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND
ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
R.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
T
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, EXCEPT MAKE-UP DAYS, SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES
THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED AFTER 6,00PM SATURDAY TO 6,00AM MONDAY AND ON
HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
U.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SA TURDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES
THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE
HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
W.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS (EXCEPT MAKE-UP DAYS) SHALL BE PAID ATONE AND ONE-
HALFTIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES
THE HOURL Y RATE OF WAGE.
ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DA Y OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID ATONE
AND ONE-HALFTIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
A.
THE FIRST SIX (6) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF SIX (6) HOURS ON SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS
AND HOUDA YS SHALL BE PAID ATTWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
B.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID ATONE AND ONE-HALFTIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
c.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL HE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
D.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SA TURDA YS AND SUNDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALr TIMES THE HOURL Y
RATE OF WAGE THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT STRAIGHT TIME IN
ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON 1-I0LlDA YS SHALL BE
PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
E.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS OR HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-
HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS OR ON LABOR DA Y SHALL BE
PAID ATTWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
F.
THE FIRST ElGHT (8) HOURS WORKED ON HOLlDAYS SHALL BE rAID AT THE STRAIGHT HOURLY RATE Or WAGE
IN ADDI'nON TO THE HOLlDA Y PAY. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON HOLlDA YS SHALL
BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE
G.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDA Y SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE Or WAGE. ALL HOURS
WORKED ON PAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID ATTWO AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURL Y RATE OF WAGE
INCLUDING HOLIDAY PAY.
I'L
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURL Y RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL
HOURS WORKED ON HOLlDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURL Y RATE OF \V AGE IN
ADDITION TO THE HOUDA Y PAY.
L
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DA Y) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-
HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOLJRS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND ON LABOR DA Y SHALL BE
PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURL Y RATE OF WAGE.
J.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURL Y RATE Or WAGE. ALL HOURS
WORKED ON rAID HOLlDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE-HALr TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE,
INCLUDING THE IfOUDA Y PAY. ALL HOURS WORKED ON UNPAID HOLIDA YS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE
HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
K.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLlDA YS SHALL BE PAID A'I TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF W AGE IN ADDITION TO
THE HOUDAY PAY.
4.
5.
BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 09-01-04
-3-
I
M.
I
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE
OF WAGE.
O.
ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE.
I
A.
ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE PAID
AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS. SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS
SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
I
HOLIDAY CODES
I
A.
HOLIDAYS, NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY. LABOR DA Y, THANKSGIVING OA Y. FRIDAY
AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7).
I
B.
HOLIDAYS, NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, FRIDA Y
AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS, AND CHRISTMAS DA Y (8).
c.
HOLIDAYS, NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DA Y, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DA Y,
THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRlDA Y AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY. AND CHRISTMAS DA Y (8).
I
D.
HOLIDAYS, NEW YEAR'S DAY. MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DA Y, THANKSGIVING DA Y, THE
FRIDAY AND SATURDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DA Y. AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
I
E.
HOLlDA YS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DA Y, MEMORIAL DA Y, INDEPENDENCE DA Y, LABOR DAY,
PRESIDENTIAL ELECTION DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS
DAY (9).
I
G.
HOLJDA YS: NEW YEAR'S DA Y, MEMOR1AL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DA Y, LABOR DA Y, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE
LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7).
H.
I
HOLlDA YS: NEW YEAR'S DA V, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DA Y AFTER
THANKSGIVING DA Y. AND CHRISTMAS (6).
I
HOLlDA YS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DA Y, INDEPENDENCE DA Y, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, AND
CHRISTMAS DA Y (6).
I
N
HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DA Y, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DA Y, lNDEPENDENCE DA Y, LABOR DA Y, VETERANS'
DA Y, THANKSGIVING DA Y, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9).
O.
I
PAID HOUDA YS: NEW YEAR'S DA Y, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDA Y, INDEPENDENCE DA Y, LABOR DAY,
THANKSGIVING DAY. AND CHRISTMAS DA Y (6).
P.
1-IOLlDA YS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, lABOR DA Y, THANKSGIVING DA Y, FRIDAY
AND SATURDA Y AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS, AND CHRISTMAS DA Y (9).
I
Q
PAID HOLlDA YS: NEW YEAR'S DA Y, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DA Y, LABOR DA Y, THANKSGIVING DAY.
AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6).
R.
I
PAID HOLlOA YS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DA Y, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING OA y,
DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, ONE-HALF DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DA Y, AND CHRISTMAS DAY. (7 1/2).
S.
PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DA Y. LABOR DA Y,
THANKSGIVING DA y, AND CHRISTMAS DA Y (7).
I
1'. PAID HOLlDA YS: SEVEN (7) PAlO HOLlDA YS.
V.
PAlD HOLlDA YS: SIX (6) PAID HOLlDA YS.
I
W. PAID HOUDA YS' NINE (9) PAID HOLlDA YS.
X.
HOLlDA YS: AFTER 520 HOURS - NEW YEAR'S DA Y, THANKSGIVING DA Y AND CHRISTMAS DA Y. AI'TEI{ 2080
HOURS - NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DA Y, INDEPENDENCE DA Y, LABOR DA Y,
THANKSGIVING DA Y, CHRISTMAS DA Y AND ^ FLOATING HOL!DA Y (8).
I
Y.
HOL!DA YS: NEW YEAR'S DA Y, MEMORIAL DAY. INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DA Y, PRESlDENTlAL ELECTION
DA Y, THANKSGIVING DA Y. THE FRIDA Y FOllOWING THANKSGIVING DA Y, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.
6.
8.
BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 09-01-04
-4-
z.
HOLlOA YS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DA Y, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, VETERANS DAY,
THANKSGIVING DA Y, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DA y, AND CHRISTMAS DA Y (8).
A.
PAID HOLIDAYS, NEW YEAR'S DAV, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DA Y,
THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DA Y. AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
B.
PAID HOLIDAYS, NEW YEAR'S EVE DAY. NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DA Y,
THANKSGIVING DAY. DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY. CHRISTMAS EVE DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY. (9)
C
HOLIDAYS, NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DA Y. MEMORIAL DA Y,INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY,
THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DA Y, AND
CHRISTMAS DAY (9).
D.
PAID HOLIDAYS, NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY. MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DA Y,
THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, THE DA Y BEFORE OR THE DA Y
AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY (9).
H.
HOLIDAYS, NEW YEAR'S DAY, MARTIN LUTHER KING JR. DAY, MEMORlAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR
DA Y, THANKSGIVING DA Y. THE FRIDA Y AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
I.
PAID HOLIDAYS, NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DA Y, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING
DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7).
L
HOLIDAYS, NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY,INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DA Y,
THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORKING DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY. AND
CHRISTMAS DAY. (8)
Q
PAID HOLlDA YS, NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DA Y, VETERAN'S
DAY THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DA Y AND CHRISTMAS DAY. UNPAID
HOLlDA Y, PRESIDENTS' DAY.
S.
PAID HOLIDAYS, NEW YEAR'S DA Y, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DA Y. LABOR DA Y, THANKSGIVING
DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS EVE DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DA Y (8).
T.
PAID HOLIDA YS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL OA Y, INDEPENDENCE OA Y, LABOR
DAY. THANKSGIVING DAY, THE fRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVTNG OA Y, THE LAST WORKING DA Y BEFORE
CHRISTMAS DA Y, AND CHRISTMAS DA Y (9).
U.
HOLlDA YS NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DA Y,
LABOR DA Y. THANKSGIVING DAY. THE FRIDA Y AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DA V BEFORE
CHRISTMAS DAY, CHRISTMAS DA Y (9).
V.
PAID HOLlDA YS, NEW YEAR'S DA Y, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DA Y. LABOR DA Y, THANKSGIVING
OA Y, OA Y AFTER THANKSGIVING DA Y, CHRiSTMAS EVE OA Y, CHRiSTMAS OA Y, EMPLOYEE'S BIRTJ-IDA Y.
AND ONE DAY OF THE EMPLOYEE'S CHOICE (10).
W
PAID HQLIDA VS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS DAY, MEMORIAL DA Y.
!NDEPENDENCE OA Y, LABOR OA Y, THANKSGIVING OA Y, DA Y AFTER THANKSGIViNG OA Y, CHRISTMAS
DAY, OA Y BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY (10).
x.
PAID HOLlDA YS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE OR AFTER NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS DA y,
MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING
DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, DA Y BEFORE OR AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY, EMPLOYEE'S BIRTHDAY (II).
NOTE CODES
A.
THE STANDBY RATE OF PA Y FOR DIVERS SHALL BE ONE-HALF TIMES THE DIVERS RATE OF PA Y. IN ADDITION TO
TI-IE HOURl Y W AGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPL Y TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET
OR MORE,
OVER 50' TO 100' - $1.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET
OVER 100' TO 175' - S2.25 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET
OVER 175' TO 250' - $5.50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 175 FEET
OVER 250' - DIVERS MA Y NAME THEIR OWN PRICE, PROVIDED IT IS NO LESS THAN THE SCALE LISTED
FOR 250 FEET
c.
THE STANDBY RATE OF PA Y FOR DIVERS SHALL BE ONE-HALF TIMES THE DIVERS RATE OF PA Y. IN ADDITION TO
THE HOURI. Y W AGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PReMIUMS APPL Y TO DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET
OR MORE:
OVER 50''1'0 100' - S].OO PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEE"r
OVER 100' TO ISO' - $1.50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET
OVER 1 SO' TO 200' - $2.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 150 FEET
BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 09-01-04
-S-
I
OVER 200' - DIVERS MAY NAME THEIR OWN PRICE
I
D WORKERS WORKING WITH SUPPLIED AIR ON HAZMA T PROJECTS RECEIVE AN ADDITIONAUI.OO PER HOUR.
L
WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS _ LEVEL A $0.75,
LEVEL R $0.50, AND LEVEL C $0.25
I
M.
WORKERS ON HAZMA T PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS fOLLOWS, LEVELS A & R $100,
LEVELS C & D, $050. '
I
N.
WORKERS ON HAZMA T PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS _ LEVEL A $1.00,
LEVEL B, $0.75, LEVEL C $0.50, AND LEVEL D, $0,25.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'j
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REOUIREMENTS
01 000 GENERAL
1
Conditions:
a. General Conditions and other Contract Documents apply to each Division of the
Specifications.
b. Provisions contained in this Division apply to each Division of the Specifications.
c. In the case of conflict between Division Oland Division 00, the conditions set forth in
Division 00 shall be followed,
2.
Workmen:
a. Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his workmen
and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the work
assigned to him,
b. Contractor shall enforce no profanity or harassment policy for workmen as related to
students, faculty, and other pedestrians on site. Failure to enforce policy will result in
offenders being removed from campus.
c. Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5,01
3,
Taxes:
a, Except as contained in the General Conditions, sales, use, payroll, unemployment, old
age pension, and surtax applicable to this Project shall be paid by Contractor with the
exception of sales or use tax on materials furnished by Owner.
b. Taxes and assessments on real property comprising the site of this Project shall be paid
by Owner.
4.
Manufacturer's Directions:
a. Follow Manufacturer's directions unless otherwise indicated in Contract Documents.
5.
Proiect Design Personnel:
a. Architect:
b. Mechanical Engineer:
c. Electrical Engineer:
d. Engineer of Record:
Stuart Bonney, AlA, Olympic Design Works Inc; (360) 4] 7-2777
Henry Romer, PE, RichmondlArchos Engineers; (360) 357-9589
Rod Roche, PE, RichmondlArchos Engineers; (360) 357-9589
Steve Zenovic, PE, Zenovic Associates; (360) 417-0501
END OF SECTION 01 000
01 010 SUMMARY OF THE WORK
0101 I Work covered bv Contract Documents
I. Unless otherwise provided, Contractor shall provide at his expense all materials, labor,
equipment, tools, transportation, and utilities, including cost of connection, necessary for
successful completion of Project.
2. Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 4.0 I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 0 I - General Requirements
November 2004
O(;9>>1pic Desi(Jl1 Works, Inc. PS
01012 OTl!anization and Format ofProiect Manual
1. Division and paragraph numbers, of the Project Manual and the items of work included under the
headings generally conform to the "Master Format" of the Construction Specification Institute.
Numbering of paragraphs and divisions is merely for convenience and identification and may not
be consecutive: the Contractor shall check his copies of the Contract Documents with the
Specification and Drawing index to be sure that they are complete. Trade headings are used in
the Specifications for convenience only. The Architect is not bound to define the limits of any
Subcontractors.
2. These Specifications are of the abbreviated or "streamlined" type, and frequently include
incomplete sentences. Words such as "shall", "shall be", "the Contractor shall II and similar
mandatory phrases are noted on the drawings. Phrases following a heading for material or item
of equipment and listing required features or characteristics of the item shall be construed as
meaning, "The item shall be,..", or "The item shall include...", and the Contractor shall provide
all items, articles, materials, and operations listed; including all labor, material, equipment and
incidentals required for satisfactory installation and completion of the work.
3. The following terms are used in the Contract Documents and are defined as follows:
a.
The terms "approved" and "for approval" mean "approved by Architect" unless
explicitly stated otherwise in the Contract Documents and "for the Architect's approval"
unless explicitly stated otherwise in Contract Documents.
The term "coordinate" means satisfactorily combine the work of all trades for a complete
and operational installation.
The term "selected" means "selected by the Architect", with the approval of the Owner,
and unless noted otherwise is limited to a manufacturer's standard line of colors, finishes,
or details.
The term "provide" means "furnish and install".
The term "directed" means "as directed by the Architect".
Where the ternls, "or approved" or "or approved equal" are used, the Architect is the sole
judge of the quality and suitability of the proposed substitution.
b.
c,
d.
e.
f.
END OF SECTION 01 010
01 020 ALLOWANCES
01 021 General
1. Allowances are monies provided the Owner under the construction contract for Owner selected
items. The Owner may select materials from any supplier and submit invoices to Contractor for
inclusion in allowance amounts. Allowances shall be considered Subcontract amounts. Deletion
of any allowance item shall be accompanied by a 10% profit and overhead amount. Balances of
allowances not used shall be remitted to Owner with a corresponding 10% to cover overhead and
profit. Additions or increases in allowance amounts shall have a corresponding 10% added.
2. Allowances are for materials only, all Work required for installation shall be included in Base
Bid unless noted otherwise,
01022 Bid Allowances
I. No Bid Allowances in this Project
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
ol~pic Design Works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 01 020
I
01030 BASE BIDS AND ALTERNATES
I
01 03 I General
I
I. Intent:
a, It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract for the construction of the Project
complete as shown and indicated, In order to allow the maximum amount of
construction within a fixed budget, the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids,
to accept only the Base Bid, all alternates, or any combination thereof.
I
01032 Bid Alternates
I
1.
No Bid Alternates in this Project
END OF SECTION 01 030
I
01040 COORDINATION
I
o I 042 Instructi ons
I
1.
All instructions will be given to the Contractor, or to his authorized agent, by the Architect or his
representative for distribution to Subcontractors or tradesmen on the Work; in like manner, all
communication from Subcontractors and tradesmen on the Work to the Architect will be given
through the Contractor. No Subcontractors or tradesmen shall contact the Owner or Architect to
discuss the Work, except as the Contractor and Architect may arrange.
I
I
01 043 Coordination with Other Trades:
I
I. All Contractors shall diligently comply with the following requirements:
a. Cooperate in planning and layout of the work well in advance Of operations.
b. Inform other Contractors of requirements at proper time to prevent delay or revisions.
c. Be informed on the requirements of other Contractors and check own Work for conflicts
with the Work of other Contractors,
d. Insure delivery of materials and performance of Work on coordinated schedule with
other Contractors.
I
I
01 044 Cutting & Patching:
I.
Contractor shall coordinate all cutting, fitting, or patching of Work that may be required to make
the several parts of the Work come together properly and be fitted to receive or to be received by
other portions of his own Work; or that of Subcontractors or installing tradesmen as shown or
reasonably implied by Contract Documents for a completed structure. Also, make or have made
proper and sufficient repair or closure as Architect may direct.
I
I
2,
Do not endanger any Work by cutting, digging, etc., and do not cut or alter Work of any Section
without prior consent of Architect.
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 ~ General Requirements
November 2004
ol;ogmpic Desiglt W orksJ lltc_ PS
3. Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.13
END OF SECTION 01040
01 050 FIELD ENGINEERING
1.
Reference Point:
a. All locations and elevations noted in the Contract Documents are based on surveyed
data. Before starting work, locate all reference points for setting and establishing finish
elevations and as required for proper placement of the Work at each level as work
progresses. Contractors are employ the services of a licensed land surveyor acceptable
to the Architect, to perform such work. Carefully maintain and protect new and existing
monuments, benchmarks and other reference points; if disturbed or destroyed, replace as
directed at no additional cost to the Owner. The cost of performing the work under this
paragraph shall be borne by the Contractor.
b. Establish working lines and level, locate and layout by instrumentation.
I) Site improvements, including paving, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil
placement, utility locations, slope and invert elevations are based on reference
elevation. Contact Civil Engineer of Record.
2,
Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.12
END OF SECTION 01 050
01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
01 061 Codes, Regulations, Permits & Ordinances
1.
Refer to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.02 and Bidding Requirements
END OF SECTION 01 060
01090 REFERENCED STANDARDS
01 091 Conformity to Standards
1.
Throughout the Contract Documents, reference is made to codes and standards which establish
qualities and types of workmanship and materials, and which establish methods for testing and
reporting on the pertinent characteristics.
2.
Where materials or workmanship are required by these Contract Documents to meet or exceed
the specifically named code or standard, it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide materials
and workmanship that meet or exceed the specifically named code or standard.
3.
It is also the Contractor's responsibility, when so required by the Contract Document or by
written request from the Architect, to deliver to the Architect all required proof that the materials
or workmanship, or both, meet or exceed the requirements of the specifically named code or
standard. Such proof shall be in the form requested in writing by the Architect, and generally
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
ol~pic DesilJl1 Works, IlIc_ PS
I
~
I
~
I
~
I
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
will be required to be copies ofa certifi~a.ieport of tests conducted by a testing agency approved
for that purpose by the Architect.
I'
01 092 Abbreviations
I
I . Reference in the technical divisions of these Specifications to standard data of the following
organizations shall be the latest edition at the date noted on the specification book, unless
otherwise noted. The Contractor shall conform with said standard requirements when reference
is made thereto as if the data were repeated verbatim in the Specifications, except where standard
data are supplemented and modified by these Specifications.
I
2. Standard data of the following organizations are referenced in the specifications, and the
organization names are abbreviated as noted,
I
AAN:
ACI:
AGA:
AlA:
AlMA:
AISC:
AISI:
AMCA:
ANSI:
APA:
APWA
ARm:
ASME:
ASTM:
AWl:
AWS:
AWWA:
CFR:
CRSI:
CS:
CSI:
FS:
FGMA:
IEEE:
IPCEA
MLA:
NAAMM:
NBGQA:
NEMA
NFPA:
NWMA:
PS:
SOl:
SMACNA:
SSPC:
TCA:
UBC:
UL:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
American Association of Nurserymen
American Concrete Institute
American Gas Association
American Institute of Architects
Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association
American Institute of Steel Construction
American Iron and Steel Institute
Air Movmg and Conditioning Association
American National Standards Institute
American Plywood Association
American Public Works Association
Asphalt Roofing Industry Bureau
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society for Testing & Materials
Architectural Woodwork Institute
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
Code of Federal Regulations
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Commercial Standard of the U.S, Department of Commerce
Construction Specifications Institute
Federal Specification
Flat Glass Marketing Association
Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
Meal Lath Association
National Association of Architectural Metal Mfgs.
National Building Granite Quarries Association
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
National Fire Protection Association
National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
Product Standard of U.S. Dept., of Commerce
Steel Door Institute
Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
Steel Structures Painting Council
Tile Council of America
Uniform Building Code of International Conference of Building Officials
Underwriter's Laboratories
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
Ol;gmpic Design Works} Inc. PS
UMC:
UPC:
WWPA:
Uniform Mechanical Code
Uniform Plumbing Code
Western Wood Products Association
END OF SECTION 01 090
01 100 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01 lID TIME OF COMPLETION & LIOUIDATED DAMAGES
I. Refer to Division 00 - General Conditions 3.07 and Bid Form.
01 115 Procedural Outline for Starting Work
1. Requirements Prior to Starting Work;
a. Pre-Construction Conference-
I) Prior to commencing work, the Owner, Architect and Contractor shall meet at a
time and place set by the Owner to discuss the Project schedule, storage of
materials and any other special requirements that concern the Project. The final
Project Schedule shall be submitted within thirty (30) calendar days following
the conference. Conditions mutually agreed upon at this conference may be
incorporated into the Contract.
b. Contractor's receipt of the executed Contract is not to be considered as authority to begm
Work. After the conclusion of the pre-construction conference, the Owner will issue to
the Contractor a written Notice to Proceed,
01 120 EQUIPMENT AND STOCKPILE LOCATIONS
I. Stockpile materials and equipment only on are~s of the Site defined within the Work limits
shown on the Sheet A-DO. Stockpile areas shall not endanger or inhibit the public use of the Site,
outside the Work limits area, in any way.
2. Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.08
01 125 Restoration of Work
I. The Contractor shall restore to the Architect's satisfaction all areas disturbed by the construction
process. All ingress or egress points that are disturbed will have to be regraded, resodded, etc.,
to restore them to original condition.
2. Protect all existing trees and foliage on the Site from any potential damage above and below
grade, If unavoidable damage occurs, notify Architect immediately and a decision will be
rendered as to how the Contractor is to replace or repair the damage at the Contractor's expense.
3. Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.11
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'e'
Division 0 I - General Requirements
November 2004
ol~pic Design Works/ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
01 130 ACCELERA nON OF WORK
1
I. If, in judgment of Owner, it becomes necessary at any time to accelerate the Work or a portion
thereof, the Contractor, when ordered or directed by Owner, shall deploy the workmen in such
portions of the Project where directed to enable others to properly engage and carry on their
Work,
a. If circumstances require that the entire Work or a portion thereof be completed at a date
earlier than Contract completion date as adjusted by change orders, the Contractor, when
ordered or directed by Owner, shall increase his forces, equipment, hours of work, and/or
number of shifts and shall expedite delivery of materials to meet the altered completion
date or dates ordered or directed, Any increase in cost to Contractor in compliance with
such orders will be adjusted in accordance with the Work.
b. If, in judgement of Owner, the Work is behind schedule and rate of placement of Work is
inadequate to regain scheduled progress so as to insure timely completion of the Work or
a separable portion thereof, Contractor, when so informed by Owner, shall immediately
take action to increase rate of Work placement. This shall be accomplished by anyone
or a combination of the following, or other suitable measures -
I) An increase in working forces,
2) An increase in equipment or tools,
3) An increase in hours of work or number of shifts,
4) Expediting delivery of materials,
Contractor shall, within ten (10) calendar days after being so informed, notify Owner of
specific measures taken and/or planned to increase rate of progress together with an
estimate of when scheduled progress will be regained. Should the plan of action be
deemed inadequate by Owner, Contractor will take additional steps or make adjustments
as necessary to his plan of action until it meets Owner's approval. Acceleration of Work
will continue until scheduled progress is regained, Scheduled progress shall be
established from the latest revised approved progress schedule for the job. Timely
completion will be understood as Contract completion date as revised by all time
extensions granted at the time acceleration is undertaken. Contractor shall not be
entitled to additional compensation for additional effort he applies to the Work under the
terms of this sub-paragraph,
c. Any directive or order to accelerate the Work will be in writing. Any directive or order
terminating accelerated Work will be in writing.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
01 135 Susoension of Work bv Owner
I
1. Refer to Division 00 - General Conditions 9.01 and 9.02,
01 150 BUILDING PERMIT SET
I
I. The Contractor shall keep the building permit set of Drawings at the job during construction, in
good condition. Just prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect the
approved set of plans.
I
END OF SECTION 01 100
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 0 I - General Requirements
November 2004
ol~rric DesilJl1 Works/ Iltc. PS
01 200 PROJECT MEETINGS
01 210 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
I. A pre-construction conference between Architect, Owner's representative, and Contractor shall
be held at the Site prior to commencement of the Work for the purpose of resolving current
problems, further orienting Contractor to requirements of the Contract Documents, informing
Contractor of Architect's responsibility to Owner for inspection, and working out with Contractor
a general schedule of inspection,
01220 PROGRESS MEETINGS
I. Weekly job site meetings will be held by the Owner and Architect to insure all activities are
being coordinated properly on the Project and to assist the Contractor in staying on schedule,
Status of submittals, field authorizations, change orders, progress payments, and other matters
will be reviewed. Contractor shall attend such meetings and shall require Subcontractors to
attend as necessary.
END OF SECTION 01 200
01 300 SUBMITTALS
1.
Deliver submittals to the Architect unless indicated otherwise. Accompany each submittal with
a letter of transmittal indicating:
a. Title of Project
b. Name of Contractor
c. Title of Submittal
2. Submit five (5) copies unless stated otherwise.
01310 PROGRESS SCHEDULE
1.
Refer to Division 00 - General Conditions 3.02
01315
Submittal Schedule
1.
Contractor shall, within twenty (20) calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, furnish a
submittal schedule listing all items that will be furnished for review to Owner and Architect.
a. This schedule shall include, among other things, shop drawings, Manufacturer's
literature, certificates of compliance, materials samples, materials colors, guarantees, etc.
b. Schedule shall indicate type of item, contract requirement reference, Contractor's
scheduled dates for submitting the items, and projected need dates for review by
Architect. Ifresubmittal is required, and additional fifteen (15) days will be allowed for
after receipt. Contractor shall revise and/or up-date this schedule as appropriate and
submit it with each payment estimate until all items have been submitted and reviewed.
c. Submittal schedule shall be coordinated with progress schedule for all the Work.
Contractor shall revise and/or up-date the schedule to insure consistency with the
progress schedule as it may be revised and/or up-dated. Such revised submittal
schedules shall be promptly provided.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'e'
Division 0 I - General Requirements
November 2004
ol:9>>lpic Design works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
d.
Furnishing of the submittal schedule or revision thereto shall not be interpreted as
relieving Contractor of his obligation to comply with all the Specification requirements
for items on the schedule.
I
2.
Contractor shall notify Architect 24 hours minimum in advance of performing any Work which
would cover or otherwise make it difficult to inspect any structural, plumbing, mechanical, or
electrical Work. Should any of said Work be covered without proper notification having been
given Architect, Contractor shall uncover that Work for inspection at his own expense per
Division OO-General Conditions 5.16 B. Contractor shall schedule the Work so that an
inspection team may observe and inspect a maximum part to the mechanical, electrical, and
plumbing Work in operating condition, before it is covered up. This formal inspection team will
furnish a list of items that must be completed to satisfaction of Architect before the Work is
covered over. Contractor shall notifY Architect when he is ready for the inspection,
I
I
I
01 320 PROGRESS REPORTS
I
I
I. Contractor shall prepare daily reports of his operations and bring copies for the Owner to the
weekly meeting. The daily report will contain at least the following information:
a, Weather conditions,
b. Manpower on the job in each trade,
c. Major items of equipment on the job,
d. A brief summary of Work accomplished that day,
e. Materials, equipment, or Owner-furnished items alTiving or leaving Site,
f. Significant events,
g. Any tests made and their result if known,
h. Any oral instructions received,
1. Visitors to the job.
I
I
I
2. Contractor shall maintain a file of copies of all daily reports on the Site and make it available to
Architect or Owner upon request.
I
01 370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES:
I
I. A schedule of dollar values shall be submitted to Architect and Owner not less than twenty (20)
days prior to first request for payment. Breakdown of costs shall follow the trade Divisions of
the Specification and each item thereunder shall include its pro-rated part of overhead and profit
so the sum of the items will equal the Contract price. Breakdown will correspond exactly to
items of Work in the progress schedule including work of Subcontractors. Further breakdown of
specific line items may be required by Owner after initial review,
I
I
2. See related section Division 00 - General Conditions 6.02
END OF SECTION 01 300
I
01 400 OUALITY CONTROLS
I
01410 TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES:
I
1.
Refer to Division 00 - General Conditions 5. I 5
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 0 I - General Requirements
November 2004
ol~pic DesifPl Works) Inc. PS
2.
Authority of Inspectors:
a. Inspectors have full authority to see that Work is performed in accordance with Contract
Documents and the directions of the Architect. In the event that unforeseen
circumstances or conditions develop which he deems hazardous to the safety of
personnel or property, they may stop the Work and make an immediate report to the
Architect.
3. Contractor's Responsibility:
a. Layout and plan Work so that parts of the Work requiring special inspection and
laboratory testing are available to such personnel and that times are allowed for their
inspection and evaluation.
b, NotifY Owner and Architect at least 48 hours before inspection will be required.
c. Access: Furnish access and arrange for inspection and testing personnel to have free
access to the parts of the Work for which they have evaluation responsibility. Furnish
records and drawings or data as may be required by testing and inspection personnel for
the performance of their duties,
d. Defective Work: Refer to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.16
4. Submittals:
a, Reports: Address I copy to Contractor; address 1 copy to Architect; address I copy to
the Structural Engineer; and address I copy to the Owner.
b. Laboratory Reports: In all reports include description of weather or climatic conditions
pertinent to the report, date and time, identification of portion of Work covered by
report, name of inspectors or testers, and analysis of cause in case of failure.
c. Site Reports: Submit "Inspection at Site" reports; include pertinent data on weather,
condition of Work, and evaluation, consolidation methods, and finishes.
5. Duties of Inspectors and Testing Services:
a, General-
1) Independent inspection and testing services will be engaged for the checking and
testing of the following phases of the Work.
b, Sitework and Utilities-
I) Compaction ofFill: Test fill after compaction for required densities; verify
bearing capacity of all hearing surfaces.
c. Earthwork-
I) Excavation for Footings/Piers: Inspect excavations for conformance with
specified depth of excavation, verifY bearing capacity of all excavated bearing
surfaces,
d. Concrete Work-
1) Structural Concrete: Make tests of water/cement ratio by weight; check batch
consistency; make slump tests for each structural pour per ASTM C143. Make
and cure at least 3 test cylinders of each strength of concrete for each day's pour.
2) Obtain copies of batch receipts at Site from delivery truck driver and forward to
Architect.
3) For the purposes of this Specification, structural concrete is defined as any piles,
grade beams, footings, stem walls, plinths, retaining walls, floor slabs, drivcway
aprons and plazas.
4) Testing of sidewalks and curbing is not required.
6. Duties of Laboratorv:
a. Submit reports promptly. Test and obtain certifications for tests of structural
components as described above,
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 0 I - General Requirements
November 2004
ol~pic Design Works/ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
01420 OUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I. Familiarity with Pertinent Codes and Standards:
a, In procuring all items used in this Work, it is the Contractor's responsibility to verify the
detailed requirements of the specifically named codes and standards and to verify that
the items procured for use in this Work meet or exceed the specified requirements.
I
2.
Reiection of Non-Complving Items:
a. The Architect reserves the right to reject items incorporated into the Work that fail to
meet the specified minimum requirements. The Architect further reserves the right,
without prejudice to other recourse, to accept non-complying items subject to an
adjustment in the Contract Amount as approved by the Owner.
I
I
b.
The Architect reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity
to Specifications at any time, The Contractor shall furnish samples upon request.
Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the Site and replaced with
conforming materials at Contractor's sole expense. Cost of testing of materials not
meeting Specifications shall be paid by the Contractor, Should material be found to meet
Specifications, the Owner shall bear the cost of testing.
I
1
c.
Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.16
I
END OF SECTION 01 400
I
01 500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES:
I
1. General:
a, Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5,14
b, Contractor shall provide and pay for all temporary utilities, unless other arrangements
are made at the Pre-construction Conference.
c. Temporary electrical system shall comply with local codes and conditions.
I
I
01 513 temporarv heatinl!, cooling and ventilating
I
1. Contractor shall provide and maintain, at his own expense, all temporary heating including all
fuel and required attendance necessary to protect and dry all Work during cold weather. Specific
heating requirements include, but are not limited to:
a. Plaster - Uniform temperature of 55d F minimum for a week before application of
plaster, during plastering operations, and until plaster is dry. Distribute heat evenly
throughout building.
b. Gypsum Wallboard - 55d F minimum day and night during entire joint treatment
operation and until execution of Certificate of Substantial Completion,
c. Ceramic Tile - 50d F during preparation of mortar bed, laying of tile, and for 72 hours
after completion of tile work.
d. Acoustical Tile - 70d F minimum during setting of tile.
e. Linoleum Flooring - 70d F minimum during application.
f. Carpeting - 60d F minimum and 95d F maximum for 7 days prior to laying of carpet and
continuously during installation.
g. Painting - 55d F minimum during painting operations and until dry.
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
ol:9>>lpic Design W OTks} IlIc. PS
I
2. Contractor shall provide temporary heat to space as soon as roof is dried-in. Exterior openings
and other sources of moisture shall be enclosed to ensure that timely moisture reduction in on-
grade concrete floor slabs is achieved. When floor slab moisture test results indicate floor
finishes can be installed, Contractor has option to reduce temporary heat to a level that will
maintain passing moisture test readings.
I
I
3. When temporary heating is no longer required or as soon as the permanent heating system may
be used, Contractor may dismantle the temporary heating system and shall at his own expense
(including cost of fuel) operate the permanent heating system, assuming all responsibility and
risk thereof.
I
01 514 temporarv telephone and FAX
I
1. Contractor shall install and operate a hard-wired job telephone and FAX at his own expense, no
cell phones.
I
01 515 temporary water
I. Contractor shall pJovide and pay for all water for building purposes which is required by all
trades, unless other arrangements can be made at the Pre-construction Conference.
I
2. Contractor shall make temporary connections and provide piping, hoses, nozzles, and other
accessories required during construction, if necessary.
I
3. Contractor shall be responsible for watering plants and trees to remain within the construction
limits indicated on Sheet A-OO.
I
01516 temporarv sanitarv facilities
I
I. Contractor shall provide and maintain a sanitary temporary toilet and shall remove it at the
completion of the job.
I
01 525 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
I
01 527 scaffolding, platforms, etc.
I
I. Contractor or his Subcontractors shall furnish and maintain all equipment such as temporary
stairs, ladders, ramps, platforms, scaffolds, hoists, runways, derricks, chutes, elevators, etc" as
required for proper execution of the Work.
I
2. All apparatus, equipment, and construction shall meet all requirements of the Labor Law, safety
regulations, and other Federal, State or local laws applicable thereto,
I
01530 BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
I
01 533 tree and plant protection
I. Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.11 and specific requirements in Division 02
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
ol~pic Design Works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
2. Groups of trees and other vegetation shall be protected around entire group to satisfaction of
Architect. Refer to Note #7, Sheet A-OO.
I
3. Areas outside of protective fencing shall remain undisturbed and shall not be used for any
purpose.
I
4, Vegetation that has died or has been damaged beyond repair shall be removed and replaced by
Contractor to satisfaction of Architect.
I
o 1 534 temporarv enclosures
I
1. Contractor shall provide temporary weather-tight enclosures for all exterior' openings as soon as
walls and roof are built so as to protect all Work from the weather.
I
2. Refer to General Condijinn, ,~.heet A-OO for extent and description of construction perimeter
fencing.
3. Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.1 I
I
01540 SECURITY
I
01 542 snow and ice
I
]. Contractor shall remove all snow and ice as may be required for the proper protection and
prosecution of the Work.
I
01 543 bracing, shoring, and sheathing
I
1. Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing, and sheathing as required for safety and for proper
execution ofthe Work and have same removed if required when the Work is completed.
01 544 persons
I
I. Contractor shall provide installation and maintenance of necessary precautions to protect all
persons on the Site, including members of the gencral public, from injUry or harm, including but
not limited to:
a. Posting of appropriate warning signs in hazardous areas.
b. Providing guardrails, barricades of adequate heights, together with warning lights around
obstructions, pits, trenches, or similar areas in on-site or adjacent streets, roads,
sidewalks, or on the site of structure itself. All such guardrails around openings in floors
or roofs shall be at least 3'-6" in height.
I
I
I
2. Contractor shall enforce a "no profanity or harassment policy" amongst the workmen in
reference especially to pedestrians in and around the Work area. Violators will be subject to
immediate removal from Site.
I
2. Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.07
I
01 545 weather
I
Peninsula CoJIcgc Space Renovations - Building 'c'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
Ol~pic Design Works} rile, PS
I
I.
Contractor shall at all tiines provide protection against weather (rain, winds, storms, frost, or
heat) so as to maintain all work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage.
At the end of the day's work, all new Work shall be protected,
I
2
Contractor shall take special care to protect buildings and contents from damage due to weather
exposure during period when roof surface is open. Effective temporary protection shall be
installed nightly,
I
3.
During cold weather, Contractor shall protect all Work from damage. Iflow temperatures make
it impossible to continue operations safely in spite of cold weather precautions, Contractor shall
cease work and so notify Owncr and Architect.
I
I
01 546 temDorarv surface protection
I. Prior to commencement of any Demolition or General Contract Work, Contractor shall provide
and maintain in working order surface protection for sensitive building elements.
I
I
2. In the event of chemical spill or other compromise of protection onto or beyond the protected
elements, Contractor shall remove and replace in-kind protection for the entire effected areas, at
no cost to the Owner, at the discretion of the Architect.
I
01 547 temporarv fire protection
1. Contractor shall provide and maintain in working order 2 (two) Standard UL Labeled ABC all-
purpose 10 lb. fire extinguishers. These extinguishers shall not be incorporated into the final
Proj ect.
I
2, Fires shall not be built on the premises except by express consent of local governing authorities.
I
I
01 548 adiacent property
I. Contractor shall provide all necessary protection for adjacent property and lateral support
thereof.
I
01 549 work area
I
1. Contractor shall confine operations and storage to Work areas. Work areas for all Work are
limits as shown on the Drawings. In those locations where existing vegetation or improvements
are to remain, the Contractor must work around the material.
I
01 550 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
I
01 551 access roads
I. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to maintain all required roads to the building as
required for construction equipment and delivery of materials.
I
2. Contractor shall keep emergency right-of-way through fenced area clear by establishing clear
zones in front of access gates as noted on Sheet A-OO.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
Ol;gmpic Desi(Jll works) Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
3.
Contractor shall coordinate access road use with Fire Department.
I
01 552 parking areas
I
}, It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to see that workmen are not parking in assigned
parking spaces or in any other violation of campus parking policies.
01 560 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
I
01 561 construction cleaning
I
I, Contractor shall keep premises broom clean during progress of the Work.
2, Remove waste materials and rubbish caused by employees, subcontractors, and installers,
I
3, Prior to and during process of painting and varnishing, clear area where such Work is in progress
of all debris, rubbish, and building materials that may cause dust. Sweep floors as required and
take all possible steps to keep area dust free.
I
01 568 surface water control
I
I. Contractor shall at all times protect the excavation, trenches, and building from damage from rain
water, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and all other water, and:
a. Provide pumps and equipment and enclosures necessary for such protection.
b. Construct and maintain necessary temporary drainage and do pumping necessary to keep
Site free of water accumulation.
I
I
2. Cost of water control shall be borne by Contractor. Owner may, if promptly notified of adverse
underground water conditions, negotiate reasonable financial relief for Contractor where such
conditions could not have been reasonably determined from Soils Engineer's Reports,
I
01 569 dust control
I
I. When construction occurs during dry weather periods, dust resulting from construction shall be
minimized through use of good operational techniques, such as watering of exposed areas.
01570 NOISE CONTROL
I
1.
General:
a. The purpose of this Specification is to keep the level of construction noise inside
adjacent buildings and/or rooms from exceeding a DBE 55 curve (with windows closed)
during all occupied hours. The Contractor may meet this criterion by erecting barriers
between equipment on job and such interior areas or by providing equipment noise
attenuators. Outdoor Vehicle and Internal Combustion Engine Noise: Noise level of
each piece of equipment shall not be greater than 86 DBA at a distance of 50 feet as
measured under noisiest operating conditions,
I
I
I
01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
I
GENERAL
1.
Division 01 General applies to this section.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 0] - General Requirements
November 2004
O(~pic Design Works} lltc. PS
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
01 590 FIELD OFFiCES:
2.
Scope:
a.
All signs used by the Contractor on the Site shall conform to the
requirements of this section, The Contractor shall supply the following
job sign and shall conform to the Specifications given herein.
3.
Prohibitions:
a, The following may not be used by the Contractor on Site:
I) Separate Contractor's, Subcontractor's or supplier's signs or
advertisements.
2) Signs that flash, blink, rotate or otherwise draw unusual
attention (except there required by safety regulations).
All Project Signs and Construction Signs shall be fabricated from the following
materials:
2. Plywood Face:
a. High density overlay type, with overlay ,012" thick each side, 45% resin
content by dry weight, and minimum weight of 60 pounds/thousand sq.
ft. of surface. 3/4" nominal plywood thickness shall be provided.
3. Paint:
a. Provide 2 coats on all sign faces, backs and edges.
4.
Wood Posts:
a. Pressure treated, S4S. All signs will be reviewed with the Architect for
location and nature of mounting details.
All Project Signs and Construction Signs shall conform to the following.
a. Sign Panel: All cuts and edges shall be square and clean and all defects
patched before painting,
b. Image: Symbol or type may be screened or hand painted.
c, Hand-made patterns must be carefully cut and true to the symbols
provided therein. Only clear, crisp sign painting is acceptable.
Hand-painted typeograph shall be true to the font design.
d, Posts: All signs 4' x 8' and larger shall have compacted gravel around
each post.
01 591 offices
Contractor shall at all times provide and maintain a weather-tight office for use by Contractor,
Owner and/or Architect, and Subcontractors. This building shall be property of Contractor and
shall be removed when directed.
1.
2.
This office shall be heated when needed and provided with doors and locks, tables, benches,
electric lights, and racks for drawings.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
ol~pic Desi9l1 works, lltc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
01 593 first aid facilities:
1. In accordance with the requirements of 296-24 WAC; furnish personnel trained in first aid and
certified as approved by Washington Department of Labor and Industries. Provide first aid kits
on site; types and quantities in accordance with requirements of 196-24-065 WAC.
END OF SECTION 01 500
01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
1. Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.13
2.
Contractor shall, if required, furnish evidence of the quality of any materials.
3.
Contractor shall remove materials not meeting requirements of the Contract Documents from
Project without expense to Owner.
4. No asbestos or products containing asbestos have been knowingly specified for this Project.
Notify the Architect immediately if-
a. Materials containing asbestos are brought to the Site for inclusion in the Work.
b, Asbestos materials are encountered in any existing structures upon which work is being
performed.
01610 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
1
Materials shall be delivered to the Site in original packaging with labels and trademarks intact,
and such labels and trademarks shall remain intact until used.
01 620 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
1.
Contractor shall confine his apparatus, storage of materials, and operations of his workmen to
limits indicated by law, ordinances, and permits and shall alTange and maintain parking of
vehicles and storage of materials in an orderly manner leaving all walks, driveways, roads, and
entrances, unencumbered.
2.
All equipment on Site shall be protected from physical damage and from the elements by
measures satisfactory to Owner.
01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
1.
Contractor's Responsibility:
a. It is strictly the Contractor's responsibility to be certain that all materials selected by him,
or for him by his Subcontractors or material suppliers, conform with the requirements of
the Contract Documents. The approval of a manufacturer's name by the Owner does not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for providing material and equipment that
comply with the Contract Documents.
b. It is frequently necessary to design the structure and finish around, and to specify items
to accommodate, one manufacturer's product including mechanical and electrical items
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
ol~pic Design Works/ Illc. PS
c.
or equipment. In the event the Contractor receives approval to provide another
manufacturer's product or assembly, it shall be understood that any modifications
necessary to the proper installation and function of the substituted items shall be made by
the Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. The Contractor shall bear the additional
cost required for necessary detailing to accommodate the change. Changes made to
accommodate approved but not specified items shall be approved by the Owner prior to
construction.
All redesign costs resulting from substitutions shall be borne by Contractor, and shall be
paid to Owner before final Certificate for Payment will be issued,
2,
Substitutions and approval before receipt of bids:
a. Whenever a material, article, or piece of equipment is identified on the Drawings or in
the Specifications by reference to manufacturer's name, trademark, model, or catalog
number, only such specific items may be used except as hereinafter provided,
b. When the term "or approved" is employed, any items or material not specifically named
by manufacturer's name shall be subject to the Owner's approval. Written requests for
approval shall be submitted by bidders to the Architect at least 10 days prior to the
established bid date. Requests received after that time will not be considered.
c. Requests for approval shall clearly describe the product for which approval is asked.
The specific application shall be accompanied by samples, record of performance,
certified copies of tests by impartial and recognized laboratories, and engineering data.
Approval of all items and materials will be given only by written addendum sent to all
Bidders.
d, Proposals for changes in structure, design, or function will not be considered.
3.
Substitutions After Award of Contract:
a, In general, the equipment and materials selected by the Architect are considered to be
those best suited for this Project, and substitutions will be considered after execution of
the Contract only under the following conditions:
1) That the equipment or materials proposed for substitutions are equal to, or
superior in construction, efficiency, and utility to the equipment or material
specified, and that equipment or material specified cannot be delivered to the job
in time to complete the work in proper sequence of work by other subcontractors
due to conditions beyond control of the Contractor.
2) To receive consideration, requests for substitutions must be accompanied by
documentary proof of equality, engineering data, difference in price, and time of
delivery in the form of certified quotations from suppliers of both specified and
proposed equipment, showing prices and date of ordering. In case of difference
in price, the Owner shall receive all benefit of the difference in cost involved in
any substitutions as shown by the certified quotations. The Contract will be
altered by change order to credit Owner with any savings obtained, No
substitutions involving additional cost to the Owner will be approved.
3) When the Ovmer approves a substitution, it is with the understanding that the
Contractor guarantees the substituted item to be equal to, or better than the one
specified.
4.
Substitution Request Form
See the following page for the modified CSI Substitution Request Form:
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
O('9>>1piC Design works/ Inc. PS
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
PROJECT:
PROJECT NO.:
DATE:
I
SPECIFICATION SECTION:
PARAGRAPH:
I
TO,
FROM:
I
(Bidder / Contractor)
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION
I
MANUFACTURER:
MODEL NO.
1
Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, perfonnance, and test data
adequate for evaluation of the request (applicable portions of the data are clearly identified).
I
Attached data also includes description of the changes to Contract Documents which proposed substitution will
require for its proper installation.
I
The following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct:
The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.
I
I / We will pay for changes to Ihe building design, including engineering design, delailing, and
construction costs caused by the requested substitution.
I
The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or
specified wananty requirements.
I
Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.
I I We state that the fimction, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution is equivalent or superior to the
specified item
1
SIGNATURE:
1
FIRM:
ADDRESS:
I
PHONK
I
FOR USE I3Y ARCHITECT:
_ Accepted
_ Accepted as Noted
_ NOI Accepted
Received Too Late
I
I
BY:
DATE:
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
olympic Design Works/ Inc, PS
END OF DIVISION 01 600
01 700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1.
Scope:
a.
At or near completion of construction of the Project, certain items, or Work and
submittals as specified elsewhere, are required prior to the Owner's acceptance and final
payment for the Project which include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 6.09
01 710 FINAL CLEANING
I. Interior surfaces:
a. After all trades have completed their Work and just before final acceptance and
occupancy by the Owner, thoroughly clean all interior surfaces of the project; vacuum
floors, walls, and ceilings. Clean'air ducts; replace filters; hand dust all shelves, counters,
and cabinets; clean finish floors and floor covering and wax; wash and polish all mirror
and metal trim or fittings; clean toilet and plumbing fixtures; clean lighting fixtures and
electrical equipment, include washing and polishing lenses inside and out. Wash and
polish all exposed stainless steel surfaces and wash and polish all glass and glazing.
2. Exterior Surfaces:
a, Remove construction equipment and temporary facilities from premises; clean and
disinfect areas occupied by sanitary conveniences; remove temporary connection to
services and restore to "original" condition. Remove all construction debris and excess
materials. Repair any landscape or site damage to the satisfaction of the Architect.
01715 PRE-FINAL, SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, FINAL INSPECTIONS, & OCCUPANCY
1.
Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 6.09
2.
Upon Contractor's request, Owner and Architect (and Consultants as appropriate) will make a
pre-final inspection and furnish to Contractor a list of items to be corrected by Contractor. Upon
correction of these items, O\Vller will arrange a substantial completion inspection to include
Tenant representatives at which time Owner will furnish final list of items to be corrected. At the
substantial completion inspection, unless building is rejected, Owner and Contractor will execute
a Certificate of Substantial Completion that states the dates for user occupancy, commencement
of warranties, final completion inspection, and for voiding the liquidated damages requirement
contained in Section 0 I 110 and 00 General Conditions.
2.
Final Completion Inspection will ensure that all deficiencies noted at the substantial completion
inspection have been corrected according to terms of the substantial completion certificate. When
all items have been corrected, Owner will authorize final payment. If all items have not been
cOlTected as agreed, Owner may elect to complete the Work under provisions of General
Conditions.
3,
Neither the final payment nor the remaining retained percentage or close-out shall become due
until the Contractor submits to the Owner that:
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
Ol~mpic DesiiJ>> Works} Iltc, PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(I) an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other
indebtedness connected with the work for which the Owner or his property might in
any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, due to final payment
and
(2) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such
obligations such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract
to extend and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a subcontractor
refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may
furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnifY him against any such lien. If
any such lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall
refund to the Owner all moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay in
discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. .
01 720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.
Contractor shall deliver to Architect prior to final acceptance:
a. Accurate "as built" Drawings and/or other documentation if the Work is constructed in
any way at variance to that shown on Contract Documents.
b. Certificates of inspection and of occupancy that may be required by authorities having
jurisdiction over the Work.
Contractor shall record any found yet un-located or unknown subsurface utilities onto the "as
built" drawings.
Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 4.02
2,
3.
01 730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
I. Before execution of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall furnish the
operating instructions and maintenance manuals as called for in the Contract Documents.
3. Operating Instructions:
a.
Provide an operation instruction period for Owner's representatives and personnel
following completion and initial operation of equipment and systems; including but not
limited to HV AC, Electrical systems, and landscaping care. Instructions shall be given
by manufacturer's authorized personnel, Contractors' or Subcontractors' foremen, or
superintendents for the trades involved. Provide a thorough review of the following
information:
I) Operations and Maintenance Manuals,
2) Spare parts, tools, and materials,
3) Lubricants and fuels,
4) Identification systems,
5) Control sequences,
6) Hazards,
7) WaITanties and Bonds, and
8) Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments
4.
Operations and Maintenance Manuals:
a. Provide O&M manuals per specific requirements of Division 02-16.
a. Organize operations and maintenance materials into sets of manageable size. Bind into
heavy-duty 3-ring binders with pockets for folded sheet information. Mark Project
identification on binder cover and spine including Project and Owner name and date of
submittal. Provide three (3) separate copies to include the following information:
Peninsula College Space Renovations ~ Building 'c'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
ol~c DesilJl1 works/ IlIc_ PS
I)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Operational instructions
Emergency instructions
Spare parts list
Copies of warranties
Wiring diagrams
Shop Drawings and product data cut sheets
01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
1. Refer also to Division 00 - General Conditions 5.21
2.
Contractor shall warranty the Project to be free from defects and within conformation to the
Contract Documents for a period of 12 months after the Certificate of Substantial Completion is
issued. When written guarantees beyond one year after substantial completion are required of any
Division of the Specification, Contractor shall secure such guarantees and/or warranties properly
addressed and in favor of Owner. These documents shall be delivered to Owner upon substantial
completion of Contractor's work and prior to execution of Certificate of Substantial Completion.
3.
Delivery of guarantees and warranties shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation assumed
under any other provision of this contract.
4.
Nothing herein intends nor implies that guarantees and/or warranties shall apply to Work abused
or neglected by Owner.
01 750 CORRECTION OF WORK DURING GUARANTEE PERIOD:
1.
COlTections:
a, Where items on the Owncr's "Punch List" have not been corrected prior to expiration of
the specified guaranteed period, it shall nevertheless be the responsibility of the
Contractor to permanently correct said items after the specified guarantee period. The
Contract shall not be fully performed until such permanent cOlTections are made.
2.
. Guarantee Period:
a. All corrective work performed by the Contractor in remedying defective Work during the
guarantee period following the Owner's acceptance of the project shall be subject to the
same guarantee requirements ofthc original Work for a period as specified from the date
of completion of the corrective Work.
END OF SECTION 01 700
END OF DIVISION 01
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 01 - General Requirements
November 2004
ol~J1ic Design wOTks/ lite. PS
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
.............'.'.'....D'.'.""..~.'D' ';,.;J]jJ.'.............
IT ']
DIVISIONS 01. - r6
CSI FORMAT CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICA nONS .
I
I
DIVISION 02 SITEWORK
GENERAL
I.
00 General Conditions and Division 0 I apply to this Division,
I
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary for completion of
Work within the Contract Documents.
I
02100 SITE PREPARATION
GENERAL
1.
Division 02 applies to this Section,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
02 050 DEMOLITION
GENERAL
I
2.
Existinl! Conditions:
a, Examine Site to determine type of problems to be encountered.
b. Note the project boundaries on General Conditions Site Plan, Sheet
A-OO. These limits will be strictly enforced.
4.
Equipment:
a. For Work within project boundary area
I) Observe and maintain protected areas specified above in 02-100
GENERAL 3,a.
2) Use equipment best suited for excavation.
5.
Field Engineering:
a. Contractor shall hire Field Engineer to locate building perimeters and
construction heights and grades, and to map utility locations from CAD
base maps provided by Architect. Such base maps are provided for
informational purposes only and do not relieve Contractor of
responsibilities set forth in Section 02-010 GENERAL.
END OF SECTION 02 100
1.
Division 02 GENERAL applies to this Section.
02060 BUILDING DEMOLITION
I
GENERAL
I
1
I
I.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Demolition and removal of existing structures as shown on
Drawings.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Electrical and Mechanical Demolition as shown on Drawings.
b.
2.
Svstems Description:
a. Notify corporations, companies, individuals, and local authorities
owning conduits running to property. Arrange for removal of wires
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "C"
Division 02 - Sitcwork
November 2004
ol:gmpic Desi(Jl1 Works/ T11C, PS
I
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
running to and on property, Remove pipes and sewers in accordance
with instructions of above owners.
3.
Ouality Assurance:
a. Requirements Of Regulatory Agencies:
1) Contact Local Building Authorities and Fire Marshall to
become familiar with local laws and regulations governing
this work.
4.
Use ofEQuioment:
a, Access to the Site shall be restricted to the northeast side of the project
as shown on General Conditions Site Plan Sheet A-OO, No equipment
will he allowed on Plaza concrete south ofthe project.
Furnish labor, equipment, and materials as required to complete demolition as
described in Contract Documents.
Performance:
a. Based on a Notice to Proceed date of December 13,2004, demolition
work is to be completed by January 3"', 2005. Review demolition
procedures and operational sequence with Architect prior to proceeding.
b. Protect and maintain conduits, drains, sewers, pipes, and wires that are
to remain on the property.
c. Remove all parts of building or structure to be demolished, including
foundations and footings unless shown otherwise.
2.
Cleaning:
a. Keep street and road reasonably clean, and sweep daily.
b. Promptly remove materials, rubbish, and debris from building and from
property .
02 070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
GENERAL
1.
Scooe:
a. Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Salvage one (1) exterior light fixture at the current Main Entry
and reuse at the new entry alcove, per drawings.
2) Salvage two (2) ADA entry control actuators for reuse per
drawings.
b. Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Electrical work specified in Section 1600
2.
3.
Protection:
a. Providc, erect, and maintain barricadcs, lighting, and guardrails as
required by applicable regulatory advisory to protect occupants of
building, workers, and public.
b. Protect and maintain electrical conduits, pipe, wires, and fixtures that are
to remain.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "C"
Division 02 - Sitcwork
November 2004
ol~pic Desifflt Works/ Il1c. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Materials:
a. Unless noted otherwise, maintain possession of materials being removed
or demolished. Immediately remove debris from site, and dispose of
properly.
b, Carefully remove, store and protect for re-installation materials
indicated.
Preparation:
a, During removal of existing building structure, provide proper protection
from hazards to adjacent walkway areas that are to be kept open during
normal working hours.
b, Carry out demolition work to cause as little inconvenience to adjacent
occupied buildings as possible.
2.
Demolition:
a, General-
I)
Demolish in an orderly and careful manner as required to
accommodate work.
Perform demolition in accordance with applicable authorities
having jurisdiction.
Keep street, sidewalks, and parking lot clean, and swept daily.
Carefully remove, disassemble, or dismantle, as required, and
store in approved location at site, items indicated to be reuscd in
completed work.
Remove loose materials caused by or remaining from demolition
work.
Remove demolished materials, tools and equipment from site
upon completion of work. Leave site in condition acceptable to
Architect.
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
02075 CONCRETE REMOVAL
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Demolition and removal of existing concrete walks, walls, floor
slabs and foundations as shown on Drawings.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Electrical Demolition as shown on Drawings.
b.
2.
Svstems Description:
a. Notify corporations, companies, individuals, and local authorities
owning conduits running to property. Arrange for removal of wires
running to and on property. Remove pipes and sewers in accordance
with instructions of above owners.
3.
Oualitv Assurance:
a. Requirements Of Regulatory Agencies:
I) Contact Local Building Authorities and Fire Marshall to bccome
familiar with local laws and regulations goveming this work.
Furnish labor, equipment, and materials as rcquired to complete demolition as
described in Contract Documents.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "c"
Division 02 - Sitework
November 2004
ol;9J11pic Desi(JII Works/ Iltc. PS
I
EXECUTION 1.
02 200 EARTHWORK
GENERAL
02210 GRADING
02 21 I rough grading
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION I.
2.
3.
4.
Performance:
a. Protect and maintain conduits, drains, sewers, pipes, and wires that are
to remain on the property,
b. Remove all parts of building or structure to be demolished including
foundations and footings unless shown otherwise.
c, Execute work in an orderly and careful manner, with due consideration
for any Owner activities.
END OF SECTION 02 050
1.
Division 02 GENERAL and 02-100 GENERAL applies to this Section.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) All work to prepare Site for construction.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere _
I) Structure excavation & trenching specified in Section 02220.
2) Backfilling & compacting specified in Section 02 222.
b.
2,
Allowable Tolerances:
a. Maximum variation from indicated grades shall be 1/20 of one foot.
Lawn Area:
a. Well-drained, silty sand, with good binding characteristics.
Preparation:
a. Carefully examine site with Architect prior to beginning of Work to pre-
plan procedures for making cuts, placing fills, and other necessary Work.
Compaction of fills shall be as specified in Section 02 222.
Make proper allowance for final finishes of plaza, sidewalks, and planting areas
as outlined in Sections 02 500 and 02 212 respectively. finished rough grade
prior to placing mulch is -
a. Shrub or Ground Cover Areas (within 10 feet of building) - 12" below
top of walk. finish grade of soil is top of mulch material after mulch has
been laid.
b. Lawn Arcas - 6" below finish grade
If soft spots, water, or other unusual excavating conditions arc encountered, stop
work and notify Architect.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "C'.
Division 02 - Sitcwork
November 2004
Ol;gmpic Design WOTks/ Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
02 212 finish grading
GENERAL I.
I
I
I
I
I
2.
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
2.
I
EXECUTION I.
I
2.
3.
I
4.
I
I
I
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnishing and spreading of mulch over and through planting
areas.
2) Fine grading required because of tolerances allowed in Section
02 211, Do not commence work of this Section until these
tolerances are met.
b,
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Mulch material, to be applied over finish grading, specified in
Section 02 920,
2) Stripping, storing and/or removal of existing topsoil specified in
Section 02 118.
Oualitv Assurance:
a, Any material brought to Site is subject to this Specification.
Planting Areas:
a. Mulch material: Dark, fine Douglas Fir or Alder bark, well-
decomposed.
Lawn Areas:
a, 60% coarse sand, 40% mulch material
During preliminary grading, dig out weeds from planting areas by their roots and
remove from Site.
Use equipment suitable for the Work.
Remove from Site rocks larger than 2" in size and foreign matter such as
building rubble, wire, cans, sticks, concrete, etc., before placing topsoil.
Slope grade away from building for 8 feet minimum from walls at slope of 112
inch per ft. minimum, unless otherwise noted. High point of finish grade at
building foundation shall be 6 inches minimum below stem wall grade.
5.
Direct surface drainage in manner indicated on Drawings by molding surface to
facilitate natural run-off of water. Fill low spots and pockets with mulch
material and grade to drain properly.
02 220 EXCA V A TING, BACKFILLING, & COMP ACTING
I
02 221 excavating
GENERAL
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Project excavation and trenching except as spccified in Section
02 200 GENERAL.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
b.
1
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building ''C''
Division 02 - Sitcwork
November 2004
ol~pic Design works/ Inc, PS
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
I
I)
2)
Rough grading specified in Section 02 211.
Excavating, backfilling, and compacting inside and outside of
building required for Electrical and/or Mechanical Work shall be
responsibility ofrespective Section doing Work unless arranged
differently by Contractor.
I
I
2.
Job Conditions:
a. When existing utility lines are encountered, relocate or protect as
required by Site Demolition Plan Sheet C-O I.
I
3.
Reference Standards:
a. WSDOT Standard 2-03 applies.
I
Debris and material not necessary for Project are property of Contractor and are
to be disposed of properly off-Site. If material necessary for Project is hauled
away, replace with equal quality as specified in Section 02 222.
I
2.
I
Equipment:
a. Use lightest possible equipment suitable for the Work. Refer to 02-100
GENERAL.
I
Carefully examine Site and available information to determine type soil to be
encountered. Discuss problems with Architect before proceeding with Work.
I
2.
Excavate as necessary for proper placement and forming of footings and
foundations.
3.
I
Excavation Carried Deeper Than Required:
a. If soils beneath bearing surfaces, after compaction testing, do not meet
required level of bearing strength, contact Architect prior to proceeding
with work.
I
4.
If rock, water, or other unusual excavating conditions are encountered, stop
Work and notify Architect.
I
02222 backfilling & compacting
GENERAL
I
1.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Performance of backfilling and compacting except as specified
in Section 02 200 GENERAL.
2) Procedure and quality for backfilling and compacting performed
on Project unless specifically specified otherwise.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere _
I) Structure excavation & trenching specified in Section 02 220.
b
I
I
2.
Protection:
a. Damage to dampproofing, moisture barner, waterproofing, or other portions
of the Work due to Work of this Section shall be repaired by Contractor at
no additional cost to Owner.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "c"
Division 02 - Sitework
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Backfill material shall be free from debris, stones over 6 inches diameter, frozen
materials, brick, lime, and concrete.
a. Site material, if approved by Architect.
b. Borrowed fill shall conform to WSDOT Spec 9-03.10, Gravel Base.
Preparation:
a. Before backfilling, locate on record set of Drawings utility and service
lines to be covered.
b. Do not backfill until utilities involved have been tested and approved by
Architect.
2.
Backfilling:
a. Slope grade away from building as specified in Section 02 212.
b. Hand backfill within areas shown to be protected or where damage to
trees might result.
3.
Compaction of Backfills:
a. Fills under Walks, Plazas, & around Foundation Walls
1) Place backfill in 8 inch layers, dampen (do not soak), and
mechanically tamp to 95% minimum of maximum density as
established by ASTM D 1557-78, "Tests for Moisture Density
Relations of Soils & Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 Pound
Rammer and 18 Inch Drop."
4.
If Site material will not compact to specified density or it is suspected that it will
not, remove and replace with material specified in PRODUCT section above.
END OF SECTION 02 200
02 660 WATER DISTRIBUTION
I
GENERAL
1.
Division 02 General applies to this Section.
I
I
I
I
2.
Excavation and backfill shall be as specified in Section 02 200 with following
additional requirements:
a. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Drawings.
b. Excavate to required depth.
c. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as required.
d. Remove debris from trench prior to placement of pipe.
e. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect.
f. Backfill only after pipes have been tested, inspected, and approved by
Architect.
g. Remove excess earth trom Site or place as directed by Architect.
h. Bury outside pipe 30" minimum below finish grade.
02700 SEWERAGE & DRAINAGE
I
GENERAL
1.
Division 02 applies to this Section.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "c"
Division 02 - Sitework
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
I
EXECUTION I.
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
1) Sewer and drainage systems outside of building.
I
3.
Reference Standards:
a. WSDOT Chapter 7 applies to this Section.
I
Excavation and backfill shall be as specified in Section 02 200 with the
following additional requirements-
a. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Drawings.
b. Excavate to required depth.
c. Grade to obtain fall required.
d. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp if required.
e. Remove debris from trench prior to laying pipe.
f. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect.
g. Backfill only after pipes have been tested, inspected, and approved.
Notify Architect prior to testing.
h. Remove excess earth from Site.
I
I
I
I
2. Provide all construction staking and field engineering.
I
I
I
I
02 720 STORM SEW AGE SYSTEMS
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
I) Furnish and install storm drainage piping from point of water
collection to terminating point.
2. Reference Standards:
a. WSDOT 7-04 through 7-08 apply to this Section.
Pipe:
a.
I
I
I
I
High Density Poly Ethylene (HOPE) ADS Pipe N-12 or equal
conforming to WSDOT 9-05.20.
2. Manholes, Catch Basin and Control Release Unit:
a. Confornl to WSDOT Standard 7-05 and Civil drawings for Details.
END OF SECTION 02700
02 900 LANDSCAPING
GENERAL 1.
EXECUTION L
Division 02 General applies to this Section.
I
I
2.
Scopc:
a. Rcfer to Sheet A-03 for Landscaping rcquiremcnts.
Preparation:
a. Plant List is for convenience of Contractor. Some substitutions may be
required due to availability.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "C"
DIvision 02 - Sitcwork
November 2004
Ol;yjmfric Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
b.
Before proceeding with Work, check and verify dimensions and
quantities. Report variations between Drawings and Site to Architect
before proceeding with Work.
All new planting indicated on Sheet A-031 is required.
c.
02920 SOILS PREPARATION
I
02 921 soil preparation & soil mixes
GENERAL 1.
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish and install top dressing of humus material
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Finish grading specified in Section 02 212.
b.
Mulch Material:
a. Dark, fine Douglas Fir bark, well composted.
Procedure in area south of building indicated on Sheet A-03
a. After finish grading is complete, spread 4", approximately 12 CY / per
1000 SF, of specified mulch material over planting areas.
b. Roto-till mulch material, that has been applied previously, into top 4
inches of topsoil until a homogeneous mixture results.
c. Spread another 4" of humus material over entire area.
02950 TREES. PLANTS, & GROUND COVER
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish and install landscaping plants as described in Contract
Documents.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Landscape plant maintenance specified in Section 02 970.
b.
2.
Guarantee:
a. Guarantee furnished shrubs, trees, ground covers, and vines to live and
remain in healthy condition for] -year minimum from date landscape
work is accepted as complete.
Plant materials shall conform to requirements of Plant List on Drawings and to
"Horticultural Standards" of American Association of Nurserymen as to kind,
size, age, etc.
a. NomenClature - Plant names used in Plant List conform to "Standardized
Plant Names" by American Joint Committee on Horticultural
Nomenclature except in cases not covered. In these instances, follow
custom of nursery trade. Plants shall bear a tag showing the genus,
species, and variety of at least 10% of each species delivered to Site.
b. No substitutions will be allowed without prior written approval of
Architect.
c. Quality -
Peninsula College Space Renovations - I3uilding ''C''
Division 02 - Sitcwork
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
2.
I) Plants shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, free from plant disease,
insect pests or their eggs, noxious weeds, and have healthy,
normal root systems. Container stock shall be well established
and free of excessive root-bound conditions.
2) Do not prune plants or top trees prior to delivery.
3) Plant materials shall be subject to approval by Architect as to
size, health, quality, and character.
d. Measurements -
I) Measure height and spread of specimen plant materials with
branches in their normal position as indicated on Drawings or
Plant List.
2) Measure caliper of trees 6 inches above surface of ground.
3) Where caliper or other dimensions of plant materials are omitted
from Plant List, plant materials shall be normal stock for type
listed.
4) Plant materials larger than those specified may be supplied with
approval of Architect -
a) If complying in all other respects.
b) If at no additional cost to Owner.
c) If sizes of root excavations are increased
proportionately.
5) Shape and Form - Plant materials shall be symmetrical or typical
for variety and species and conform to measurements specified
in Plant List.
Planting Tablets:
a. 21 gram Agriform (20-10-5).
3
Mulch material:
a. Dark, fine Douglas Fir, well-com posted
EXECUTION 1.
Do not plant trees and shrubs until major construction operations are completed.
2.
Lavout:
3. Layout individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple
plantings. Stake locations and outline areas. Securc Architect's
acceptance before planting. Make minor adjustments as may be
requested.
3.
Excavation:
a. If underground construction work or obstructions are encountered in
excavation of tree holes, Architect or Arborist shall select alternate
locations.
Excavation Sizc -
1) Cans-
a)
b.
2)
Plant plants delivcred in 5 gallon containers in holes at
least 2 feet in diameter.
Plant plants delivered in 1 gallon containers in holes 12
inches in diameter.
Earth Ball or Bare Root -
a) Plant trees in holes at least two times greater in diameter
than ball of earth or natural bare root spread.
b)
Peninsula College Space Renovations -Building "e"
Division 02 - Silcwork
November 2004
Ol:!)mfric Desi(Jl1 Works} Iltc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3)
Depth of holes shall be at least 6 inches below roots or root ball,
then filled sufficiently with good topsoil to bring plant to proper
elevation.
4.
Planting:
a. Plant immediately after removing plant from container.
b. Place trees and shrubs in holes so, in relation to finished grade, plant
shall be approximately one inch higher than natural grade before being
transplanted.
C. Properly cut off broken or frayed roots. Remove binders from around
root ball. Lay back or cut top 1/3 of burlap from around root ball.
d. Center plant in hole and backfill with mixture of three parts good topsoil
and one part rotted composted manure making a ring of mounded soil
around holes perimeter to form watering basin.
e. Add planting tablets in plant pit as follows-
I) One Gallon Shrub - I tablet.
2) Five Gallon Shrub or Tree - 3 tablets.
3) 15 Gallon Tree - 4 tablets.
4) 24 inch Box Tree - 6 Tablets.
f. Settle by firming and watering to bring ball down to proper level, just
slightly higher than surrounding soil.
g. Do not use muddy soil for backfilling.
h. Make adjustments in positions of plants as directed by Architect.
I. Thoroughly water trees and shrubs immediately after planting.
5.
Mulching:
a. After planting, mulch shrub and ground cover planting areas with 2"deep
layer of specified mulch.
b. Place mulch to uniform depth and rake to neat finished appearance.
02 970 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
I
GENERAL
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Provide maintenance for landscaping as described in Contract
Documents.
Maintain trees, shrubs, lawn and plants for 60 days after completion of landscape
installation and acceptance of landscape work by Architect and Arborist.
a. Provide plant warranty of I year from date of final acceptance of
Project. Trees, shrubs, ground covers, or vines that do not live and have
to be replaced shall be guaranteed and mamtained an additional I year
from date of replacement.
b. Replace trees, shrubs, ground covers, or vines that are dead or appear
dead as directed by Architect at end of maintenance period. Make
replacements within 30 days of notification.
c. Provide written instructions on maintenancc rcquiremcnts for the
balance of the I-year guarantee period. Instructions shall be given to the
Architect for forwarding the Owner's custodian.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "c"
Division 02 - Sitcwork
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
2.
Trees. Shrubs. Ground Cover. & Vines:
a. Maintain by pruning, cultivating, and weeding as required for healthy
growth for a period of 60 days beyond final acceptance of Project.
b. Restore planting basins.
c. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to
proper grades or vertical positions as required.
d. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. If
spraying required, notifY Owner 48 hours in advance, and clearly post
areas with warning signage.
d. Provide supplemental water by hand as needed in addition to water from
sprinkling system for a period of 90 days following final acceptance of
Project.
I
I
I
I
2.
Lawn Areas:
a. Ensure survival and vigorous growth for sod areas by watering, fertilizing,
mowing and otherwise providing care for a period of 90 days after final
acceptance of Project.
I
I
END OF SECTION 02 900
I
I
END OF DIVISION 02
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "C"
Division 02 - Sitcwork
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
I
GENERAL
1.
00 General Conditions and Division Olapply to this Division.
.
I
2.
Scope:
a.
I
I
c.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for
completion of Work unless indicated or noted otherwise.
2) Application or installation of concrete reinforcing, accessories
and hardware.
3) Furnishing of concrete accessories by Contractor if so arranged
with Subcontractor.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
1) Furnishing of items to be embedded in concrete specified in
Section involved.
Furnished by Others but Installed by this Section-
I) Inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, light fixtures, and fastening
devices for other Work, including those for Mechanical and
Electrical, shall be provided by Section involved.
I
I
b.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Quality Assurance:
a. ACI Standards 30 I, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings"; ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete", and the CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice" shall govern
concrete Work except where specified differently.
b. Owner will procure the services ofa qualified Testing Agency to provide
on-site observation, take test cylinders and measure concrete slump.
Cylinders will be broken by the lab at 7-day and 28 day intervals with
reports promptly issued to the Contractor and Architect.
03050 CONCRETE PROCEDURES
03 051 cold weather concrete procedures
GENERAL
1.
Cold Weather Requirements:
a. Comply with ACI 306.
03 052
hot weather concrete procedures
GENERAL
1.
Hot Weather Requirements:
a. Comply with ACI 305
END OF SECTlON 03 050
03100 CONCRETE FORM WORK
GENERAL
1.
Sections 03 000 & 06 000 apply to this Section.
I
I
2. Scope:
a. Includes but Not Limited To -
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'c'"
Division 03 - Concrete
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
I
I)
Labor, materials and eqUIpment necessary for complete
construction of required formwork ready for pouring of
concrete.
Materials and equipment necessary to strip and dispose of
formwork.
Design, construction, and safety of formwork.
Design and construction of special form beds for broken
concrete blocks
I
2)
I
3)
4)
I
Forms:
a.
I
Wood, metal, or plastic as arranged by Contractor. Forming material
shall be compatible with finish requirements for concrete to be left
exposed or to receive decorative finish.
Release agents used shall be compatible with finish requirements.
I
b.
2.
Screeds & Cold Joint Forms:
a. Burke adjustable screed supports as manufactured by The Burke
Company, San Mateo, CA
I
3.
Special Forms:
a. 2x6 sides wi plywood bottom box forms for broken concrete blocks.
b. y," cant strips to form crack joints
I
Forms:
a. Forms hall conform to shape, lines, and dimensions called for on
Drawings and concrete tolerances specified in Section 03 300.
b. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage, retighten during
pour if necessary.
c. Forms shall be properly braced and tied.
d. Provide temporary clean-outs at base of tall forms to facilitate cleaning
and inspection.
e. Make proper form adjustments before, during, and after pouring.
f. Unless fomls are new, clean forms of loose concrete and other debris
from previous work and repair to proper condition.
I
I
I
I
2.
Accessories:
a. Provide for installation of inserts, templates, fastening devices, and other
accessories to be set in concrete prior to placing.
I
3.
I
Special Forms:
a. Provide beds 11" wide such that one crack down the middle will form
two blocks.
b. Provide correct length such that each block will have one smooth end.
I
4.
Curing Time:
a. Removal of forms can usually be accomplished in 8 to 24 hours.
I
END OF SECTION 03 100
I
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 works} Inc. PS
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'''
Division 03 - Concrete
I
I
I
03 190 GRANULAR BASE
GENERAL
1.
Division 03 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
2.
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Gravel under slabs on grade.
2) Road base under sidewalks .
Granular Base:
a. Under Slabs On Grade -
1) \1.." to I" gravel or crushed rock.
b. Under Sidewalks -
I) Road Base type gravel or crushed rock, graded as follows:
Sieve % bv Weight Passing
I" 100
3/4" 85 - 100
#4 45 - 60
# 10 30 - 50
#200 5 - 10
(nonplastic)
Place four inches minimum of granular base over compacted sub-base, level, and
compact thoroughly.
END OF SECTION 03 190
03 200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL
1.
Division 03 GENERAL applies to this Section.
03210 CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL
Rebar shall have grade identification marks and conform to ASTM A 615,
"Spccifications for Deformed & Plain Billet-Stcel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcing", Grade 50 minimum.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building ;C'"
Division 03 - Concrete
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes But Not Limited To -
1) Furnishing, bending, and installing reinforcing.
2. Quality Assurance:
a. Fabricate and place reinforcing steel according to latest edition of ACI
"Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete
Structures" and details on Drawings.
3. Product Delivery & Storage:
a. Reinforcing steel shall be frec of rust, scale, or othcr coating at time of
delivcry and placing.
b. Properly protect rebar on site after delivery.
1.
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
EXECUTION I.
I
a.
b.
Bars shall be deformed type.
Bars shall be free of scale or other bond-reducing coatings.
I
Bend bars cold.
2.
I
Support bars in slabs on grade and footings with plain concrete blocks (no wood
or wire).
3.
I
Securely anchor and tie reinforcing bars and dowels prior to placing concrete.
4.
Concrete Protection for Reinforcement:
Provide following minimum concrete cover for reinforcement (ACI 318):
a. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth
I) Exterior Slabs on Grade- 2"
I
I
5.
Avoid splices of reinforcing bars at points of maximum stress.
Lap bars as follows:
a. Compression splices 30 bar diameters minimum.
b. Tension splices 40 bar diameters minimum.
c. No splice shall be less than 12 inches.
I
I
6. Steel reinforcing bars shall run continuous through cold joints.
03 220 WELDED WIRE FABRIC
I
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnishing materials for use in exterior slabs.
I
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
2.
03251
Welded steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement meeting requirements of
ASTM A 185, "Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcementlt .
a. Style-6x6-WIAxWIA.
I
I
Install welded wire fabric in as long of lengths as practicable.
Lap welded wire fabric at least one full mesh and tie splice with wire.
I
END OF SECTION 03 200
I
expansion & contraction ioints
I
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
I.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Expansion joints in concrete except Portland ccment concrete
pavmg.
Fibcr Expansion Joints:
a. Manufacturcd commercial type meeting requirements of ASTM D
1751-83, "Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillcrs for
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'"
Division 03 - Concrete
November :~004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
I
I
c.
Concrete Paving 8< Structural Construction (Non-extruding) & Resilient
Bituminous Type".
y," thick unless indicated differently on Drawings.
Approved Manufacturers -
I) "Sealtight" by W R Meadows Inc., Elgin, IL
2) "Fiber Expansion Joint" by The Burke Company, San Mateo,
CA
I
b.
I
I
END OF SECTION 03 250
I
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
I
GENERAL
1.
Division 03 GENERAL applies to this Section.
2.
Scope:
a.
I
b.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnishing and installing all concrete work unless noted
otherwise in the Contract Documents.
2) Placing concrete accessories.
3) Placing under-slab vapor barrier.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Furnishing of under-slab vapor barrier specified in Section 07
190.
Submittals:
a. Written report to Architect for each proposed concrete mix design at
least 15 days prior to pour. Do not begin concrete production without
Architects review of design mix submittals.
b. Laboratory test reports or evaluation reports for concrete materials and
concrete mix designs.
I
I
3.
I
I
I
4. Quality Assurance:
a. Delivery Tickets -
I) Require mix plant to furnish delivery ticket for each batch of
concrete. Keep delivery tickets at jobsite for use of Owner or
his representatives. Tickets shall show following-
a) Name ofready-mix batch plant
b) Serial number
c) Date and truck number
d) Name of Contractor
e) Name and location of Job
f) Specific class or designation of concrete in conformance
with that employed in job specification
g) Amount of concrete
h) Time loaded
i) Type, name, and amount of admixtures used
j) Amount of cement
k) Total water content
I) Water added by receiver of concrete with his initials.
b. Allowable Tolerances -
I) Variation from plumb -
a) 0 to 10 feet - 1/4" maximum
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'''
Division 03 - Concrete
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
4.
Placing Rate -
I) In order to avoid overloading of forms and ties, observe
following rate of filling per hour for various air temperatures _
Temperature Rate ofFill Per Hour
40 deg. F 2'
SO deg. F 3'
60 deg. F 4'
70 deg. F S'
Rainy Weather - Protect concrete which has not received its initial set to
avoid excess water in mix.
NotifY Architect 24 hours minimum prior to placing concrete.
c.
d.
e.
2)
3)
b) 20 feet or more - 3/S" maximum
Variation in thickness - 1/4" to 1/2" standard, 5% for footings
Variation in grade -
a) 0 to 10 feet - 1/4" standard, I/S" for floor slabs
b) 10 to 20 feet - 3/8" standard, 1/4" for floor slabs
c) 40 feet or more - 3/4" standard, 3/S" for floor slabs
Variation in plan -
a) - 0 to 20 feet - 1/2"
b) 40 feet or more - 3/4" standard, plus 1/2" for footings.
Variation in openings
a) Size - plus 118"
b) Location - 1/4"
Variation in stairs & landings -
a) Consecutive steps-
(I) Treads - liS"
(2) Risers - 1116"
b) Flight of stairs -
(1) Treads - 114"
(2) Risers - liS"
4)
5)
6)
Products:
a. Mixer -
I) Approved AGe Type or ready-mix equipment conforming to
requirements of ASTM C 94, "Specification for Ready-Mixed
Concrete" .
b. Portland Cement -
1) Meet requirements of ASTM C 150, "Specifications for Portland
Cement",
2) Type I
Coarse Aggregates -
I) Meet requirements of ASTM C 33, "Specification for Concrete
Aggregates", or nonconforming aggregate which by test or
actual service produces concrete ofrequired strength and
conforms to local goveming codes.
2) Aggregate shall be uniformly graded as follows _
a) Flat Work - Size #67 (3/4 inch to #4 or 3/4 maximum to
1/4 inch minimum)
b) All Other - Size #57 (One inch maximum to 1/4 inch
minimum).
c.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'''
Division 03 - Concrete
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
d.
Fine Aggregates -
I) Meet requirements of ASTM C 33, "Specification for Concrete
Aggregates" .
Water-
I) Clean and potable.
Admixtures -
I) Except for air entraining agents specified below, use of
admixtures is forbidden without written approval of Owner.
a) Do not use calcium chloride.
Air Entraining Agents -
I) Meet requirements of ASTM C 260, "Specification for
Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete", except those
containing chlorides may not be used.
Fly Ash-
I) Meet requirements of ASTM C61S
2) Type F
3) Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25% of cement content by
weight.
Water-reducing, Retarding, and Accelerating Chemical Admixtures
I) Meets requirements of ASTM C 494
2) Notify Architect of intended use 7 days prior to pour.
e.
f.
g.
h.
l.
Execution:
a. Mixing of Concrete -
I) Mix a minimum of one minute
2) Increase mixing time 15 seconds for each additional yard of
concrete or fraction thereof in excess of one cubic yard.
3) Addition of Water to Concrete -
a) A void use of extra water. If water is added on the job,
do not exceed specified slump.
b. Finish -
]) Rubbed -
a) Exposed foundation walls, plinths, and retaining walls
shall recei ve rubbed finish.
2) Rough -
a) Top of footings.
3) No Special Finish-
a) Beams, girders, and joists.
4) Steel Trowel Finish -
a) Interior flatwork.
5) Broom Finish -
a) Exterior flatwork (within patterned plaza), ramps, staIrs,
curbs, and gutter. Remove edger marks.
c. Control Joints - (Unless shown otherwise)
1) Walks, curbs, and gutters shall be scored 5'-0"0.c.
2) New patterned concrete Plazas and Walks shall have control
joint pattern to match existing Zone "B" Work (scc west plazas)
Peninsula College Space Renovations ~ Building 'C'''
Division 03 - Concrete
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
03 311 normal weight structural concrete
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION I.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnishing and placing 3000 psi concrete in following locations
a) Foundations and Walls
b) Exterior Walks and Slabs in frost areas
c) - Floor Slabs
d) Exterior Equipment Bases
2) Furnishing and placing of 2500 psi eoncrete in following
location -
a) Footings
b) All other concrete not specified elsewhere.
Materials shall be as specified under Section 03 100.
2.
Proportions:
a. 2500 psi Concrete -
I) Min. weight ccment per cubic yard concrete - 517 Ibs.
2) Air Entrainment (plus or minus 1/2%) - 3%
3) Slump - 4 inches maximum.
b. 3000 psi Concrete -
1) Min. weight cement per cubic yard concrete - 587 Ibs.
2) Air Entrainment (plus-or-minus 1/2%) _
a) Exterior Flatwork - 5%
b) All Other - 3%
3) Slump - 4 inches maximum.
Inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, pipes, conduits, and other accessories shall be
installed by appropriate Section and inspected prior to pouring. See Section 03
000.
2.
Remove water and debris from space to be poured.
3.
Placing:
a. Placc as soon after mixing as possible.
b. Deposit as nearly as possible in final position.
c. Do not use contaminated, deteriorated, or retempered concrete.
d. Placing of concrete shall be continuous until a panel or section is
complete.
e. Thoroughly work in concrete around reinforcing bars.
f. Do not embed aluminum in concrete.
g. Compact concrete in forms by vibrating and other means where required.
h. Avoid accumulation of hardened concrete.
1. Locate construction joints where shown on Drawings to least impair
strength of completed structure. Construction joints in foundation walls
shall not occur within 6 feet of corner and he keyed, and have
continuous plastic waterstop incorporated into pours.
Bonding Fresh and Hardened Concrete:
a. Retighten forrns.
b. Roughen surfaces.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'''
Division 03 - Concrete
4.
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
d.
Clean off foreign matter and laitance.
Wet but do not saturate.
Slush with neat cement grout.
Proceed with new concrete pour.
e.
f.
5.
Curing:
a. Keep concrete moist seven days minimum for regular concrete and three
days for high early strength.
b. See Section 03 370 for curing compounds.
6.
Grouting Anchor Bolts and Plates:
a. Grout solid leaving no voids.
7.
Special Requirements:
a. Footings -
I) Bear 12 inches minimum into undisturbed earth or on
mechanically-compacted engineered fill. Exterior wall footing
shall bear 18 inches minimum below finish grades.
2) Level finish footing top and leave rough.
. 3) Set in beveled keyway on continuous footings.
4) Where joints are required, bulkhead, key horizontally, and dowel
with two #5 rebars, 4 feet long.
b. Foundations & Walls-
I) Leave steel projecting where required for floor tie if indicated by
Drawings.
c. Interior Slabs -
I) Pour interior slabs directly after foundations and sub-slab utility
installation has been completed.
2) Cover vapor barriers with 2"of sand prior to pouring concretc.
3) See Section 01-513 for temporary heating requirements to
achieve timely moisture reduction in cured floor slabs.
d. Exterior Walks -
I) Use air-entrained concrete mix, providing not less than 4.0% nor
not more than 6.0% entrained air for concrete exposed to
treezing and thawing cycles.
2) Limit maximum water-cement ratio of concrete exposed to
freezing and thawing to 0.45.
e. Equipment Bases -
I) Coordinate with appropriate Sections for locations and
dimensions.
8.
Finishes:
a. Rubbed Finish -
1) Immediately after removing forms from foundation walls or
retaining walls, remove joints, marks, bellies, projections, loose
materials, and cut back metal ties from surfaces to be exposed.
2) Point up voids with cement mortar, 1:2 mix, and rub exposed
surface with carborundum to smooth, even surface.
b. Steel Trowel Finishes -
I) Float and steel trowel interior slabs after concrete has set enough
to avoid bringing water and fines to surface and when concrete
has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power trowel.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'c'"
Division 03 . Concrete
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 workS} IlIc. PS
I
I
c.
2) Check and level surface plane to tolerances 1/8" in 8'-0" for
floor flatness and v.." in 20' -0" for floor levelness. Grind smooth
any high spots.
3) Uniformly slope surfaces to drain where indicated on Floor
Plans in Janitors Room and Restrooms.
Broom Finishes -
I) Broom finish non-patterned exterior walks, south alcove,
equipment bases, & formed curbs.
2) Apply broom finish parallel to travel in alcove.
3) Round edges including edges formed by expansion joints.
4) Remove edger marks.
I
I
I
I
03 354 exposed aggregate concrete
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION L
1.
I
Division 03 GENERAL, and Section 03 311 applies to this Section.
2.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes but not limited to -
I) Providing exposed aggregate for patterned strip outside south
canopy entrance.
Related work specified Elsewhere -
I) Normal weight structural concrete specified in Section 03 31 L
I
b.
Pea gravel aggregate matching existing work and meeting requirements of
ASTM C 33-85, "Specification for Concrete Aggregates". Provide clean with no
foreign materials, etc.
I
I
Provide 3,000 psi concrete mix as specified in section 03 311 using above
specified aggregate only. Finish per 03 311 "Steel Trowelled Finishes".
I
2.
After initial set and 1l0at, wash surface with water to uniformly expose
aggregate.
END OF SECTION 03 300
I
03 370 CONCRETE CURING
I
GENERAL
L
I
PRODUCTS 1.
Division 03 GENERAL applics to this Section.
2.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnishing and applying to all exterior llatwork.
2) Furnishing and applying to all interior slabs.
Sodium silicate based compound providing waterproofing, curing, hardening,
dustprooling, and sealing of substrate.
I
2.
Disolving formula, acrylic based sealer.
I
3.
Approved Manufacturers -
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'''
Division 03 - Concrete
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
a. Acuricon as manufactured by Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Co., Newark,
NJ
b. Ashford Formula - by Curecrete Chemical Co., Orem, UT
c. Equal as approved by Architect.
I
EXECUTION I.
Apply all compounds in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
I
2.
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. In hot, dry, or windy conditions apply evaporation control
compound.
I
END OF SECTION 03 370
I
I
I
I
I
END OF DIVISION 03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'"
Division 03 - Concrete
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 04 MASONRY
, NO REQUIREMENTS
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 workS} IIIC. PS
I
I
DIVISION OS METALS
\ GENERAL
I
I
1.
General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Division.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary for
completion of Work indicated in Drawings or Specifications.
I
OS 100 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
1.
Division 05 GENERAL applies to this Section.
2.
Reference Standards:
a. Fabrication and Erection -
I) AISC "Specification for Structural Steel for Buildings -
Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design", latest edition,
shall serve as a minimum standard. Erection includes setting,
aligning, and bracing as necessary.
b. Welding meet requirements of-
I) A WS D.l.l "Structural Welding Code - Steel Gas Welding",
latest applicable edition.
2) A WS D.I.3 "Specifications for Welding Sheet Steel in
Structures", latest applicable edition.
3.
Submittals:
a. Shop Drawings:
Shop drawings shall detail fabrication of structural steel components,
including connections, splices, holes, welds and bolts. Submit in
quadruplicate to Architect 21 days prior to beginning fabrication.
Structural Steel Shapes. Plates and Bars:
a. Meet requirements of ASTM A 36, carbon steel.
b. Refer to Drawings for other requirements.
2.
Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing:
a. Meet requirements of ASTM A 500, Grade B.
3.
Anchor Rods. Bolts and Nuts:
a. ASTM A 36
4.
Non-high Strength Bolts. Nuts and Washers:
a. ASTM A 307, Grade A.
5.
High Strength Bolts. Nuts and Washers:
a. ASTM 325.
I) Submit copies of factory tests required by ASTM Standard to
Architect before erection begins.
2) Maintain bolts on job site until lot numbers identified in test
submittals are verified.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 05 - Metals
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 WorkS} IlIc. PS
6.
Primer:
a. Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, non-asphaltic, rust
inhibiting primer.
\
7.
Non-metallic. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:
a. Pre-mixed, ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application.
8.
Weld Connections:
a. Comply with A WS D 1.1, applicable type to meet current AISC
Specifications for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and
methods us~d in correcting welded work.
EXECUTION I.
Structural Steel:
a. Fabrication & Manufacture:
I) Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to the greatest
extent possible to maximize controlled conditions.
2) Fabricate according to AISC specifications referenced in this
Section and in Shop Drawings.
3) Comply with fabrication tolerances of AISC's "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural
steel.
b.
Priming:
I) Shop prime steel, except for surfaces to be embedded in concrete
or mortar, surfaces to be field-welded, surfaces to be high-
strength with slip-critical connections, and surfaces to receive
sprayed-on fireproofing.
2)
Do not prime at temperatures below 45 deg F. Protect machine-
finished surfaces against corrosion.
3)
Clean field welds, grind serious abrasions, and apply field prime
,
touch-up. .
c.
Shop and Field Oualitv Control:
I) Owner will engage an independent testing and inspection agent
to perform shop and field inspections and tests and to prepare
test reports.
2) Contractor is to correct deficiencies in Work or remove and
replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate
do not comply with specified requirements.
3) Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of corrected Work with specified
requirements.
4) High-strength bolted connections will be tested and inspected
according to RCSC's "Specifieation for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts".
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 05 - Metals
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 workS} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5) In addition to visual inspection, welded connections will be
inspected and tested according to A WS D 1.1 procedures.
d.
Erection:
I) Erect structural steel accurately and to elevations indicated and
according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section.
2) Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's
"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"
3) Clean concrete and masonry surfaces of bond-reducing materials
and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates.
Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates and set on
setting nuts as required. Tighten anchor bolts and pack grout
solidly between bearing surfaces and plates.
4)
Field welds will comply with A WS DI.I for procedures,
appearance and quality of welds and methods used in correcting
welded Work.
5)
Bolted Connection type shall snug-tightened, unless indicated as
slip-critical, direct tensioned, or shear/bearing connections.
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
I
GENERAL
I
1.
Division 05 GENERAL and Section 05 100 GENERAL apply to this Section.
05121
beams & columns
I
GENERAL
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
05 124 tubular steel
GENERAL I.
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish and install beams and columns as shown on Drawings.
\
I
W, S, HP, C, or TEE shapes in horizontal or vertical application, together with
angles, plates, etc, as shown on Drawings.
Conform to Drawings, Schedules, and Section 05100 General.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Structural pipe and tubing shown on Drawings.
Unless shown differently on Drawings, Materials shall conform with the
following:
a. Round Structural Pipe shall meet requirements of ASTM A 53-84a,
"Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc
Coated, Welded and Seamless", Type E or S, Grade B.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 05 - Metals
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 workS} IlIc. PS
Nominal Pipe Size Wall Weight Schedule
NPS Thiclmess Class Number
3" 0.216" STD 40
4" 0.237" STD 40
5" 0.258" STD 40
6" 0.280" STD 40
I
I
I
b.
Shaped Structural Tubing shall meet requirements of ASTM A 500-84,
"Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes", Grade B.
I
I
05 127 bolts & steel embedded in concrete or masonry
I
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To:
I) Anchors, plates, channels, angles, bolts, etc.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
I) Installation specified in Section 06 100
I
b.
I
PRODUCTS I.
As specified in Section 05 100 General
2.
Fabricate and install according to approved details and instructions of Section
fabricating work to be connected.
I
I
3.
Threaded rod used as a substitute for anchor or holdown bolts must be provided
with a mill certificate or equivalent proof of specified strength.
END OF SECTION 05 100
I
I
I
I
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
GENERAL
1.
Division 05 GENERAL applies to this Section.
2. Form from materials of type, size, thiclmess, and shapes indieated. Work to
dimensions indicated or accepted on Shop Drawings, field verified by fabricator,
using proven details of fabrication and support.
3.
Shear, punch or dill metals cleanly and accurately. Remove sharp edges or rough
areas and ease exposed edges.
I
END OF SECTION 05 500
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 05 - Metals
November 2004
olympic Desi(Jl1 works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
05550 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
GENERAL
1.
Division 05 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
I
05 563 beam connections
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish beam I column connections that are to be welded to
metal or embedded in masonry or concrete.
Related W<?rk Specified Elsewhere-
I) Installaiion specified in Section 06100.
I
I
b.
PRODUCTS 1.
See Section 05 100 GENERAL.
2. Coordinate sizes with Section 06 170.
I
I
3. See Drawings for specific requirements.
05 580
steel pipe downspouts
GENERAL I.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish steel pipe downspouts and welded support brackets
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Installation specified in Section 07 637.
I
I
b.
PRODUCTS I.
4" or 2\1," Standard Black Pipe, as shown on Drawings, meeting requirements of
ASTM A 53, "Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless"
I
I
2.
See Drawings for specific Details.
END OF SECTION 05 550
I
I
I
I
END OF DIVISION 05
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'c'
Division 05 - Metals
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 works} IIIc. PS
I
I
DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Division.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for
construction of wood framing and finish as described in
Drawings.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
I) Refer to Structural General Notes on Drawings.
b.
3.
Grading:
a. Lumber -
I) In accordance with PS 20-70, ANSI A 199.1-1974, and National
Grading Rules for softwood dimension lumber and bearing grade
stamp of WWP A, SPIB, or other association recognized by the
American Lumber Standards Committee
b. Plywood -
I) AP A Performance Rated units are specified. Grading shall be
in accordance with PS 1-83/ANSI AI99.1. Every sheet shall
bear appropriate AP A grade stamp.
4.
Grade Marking:
a. Identify species oflumber, plywood, and structural glu-lam lumber by
grade mark or Certificate of Inspection issued by approved lumber
grading or inspection bureau or agency listed above or in applicable
Section below.
b. For exposed lumber apply grade stamps to ends or back of each piece, or
omit grade stamps entirely and issue certificate of grade compliance
from inspection agency in lieu of grade stamp.
5.
Seasoning:
a. Lumber 2 inches or less in nominal thickness shall not exceed 19% in
moisture content at time of fabrication and installation and be stamped
liS-DRY", nK_DlI, or "MClS".
b. Plywood shall not exceed 18% moisture content when fabricated nor
more than 19% when installed.
6.
Lumbcr shall be S4S unless noted otherwise.
7.
Product Delivcrv. Storage. & Handling:
a. Protect lumber and plywood and keep under cover in transit and at Site.
b. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required.
c. Store on level racks and keep free of ground to avoid warping. Stack to
insure proper ventilation and drainage.
8
Execution:
a. Frame, anchor, tie, and brace members or parts to develop strength and
rigidity necessary for purposes for which they are used.
Pcninsul<l College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
b.
Preparation, fabrication, and installation of wood members as well as
glues and mechanical devices for fastening them shall conform to good
engineering practices.
I
I
I
06050 FASTENERS & SUPPORTS
GENERAL 1.
2.
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION L
Division 06 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
Scope:
a.
I
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Install per manufacturers recommendations.
2) Furnish and Install
a) Connectors
b) Construction Mastics
c) Rough hardware not specified in other Sections.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
I) Bolts embedded in concrete or masonry.
2) Miscellaneous metal specified in Section 05 550.
I
I
I
b.
Bolts. Nails. Adhesives. Steel Joist Hangers. Expansion Bolts:
a. Standard type and make for job requirements.
b. Hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel for use with treated lumber.
I
I
2.
Construction Mastics:
a. Meet requirements of American Plywood Association Specification
AFG-O I and be Phenol Resorcinol type when used on pressure treated
wood products.
3.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Hangers -Hot-dipped galvanized type when used with pressure treated
lumber.
I) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., San Leandro, CA
2) Equal as approved by Architect
I
Install per manufacturers instructions, requirements, and according to best
practice.
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 06 050
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
1.
Division 06 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
I
I
I
GENERAL
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnish and Install -
a) Wood Framing 06 110.
b) Sheathing 06 115.
c) Miscellaneous Framing 06 125.
d) Heavy Timber Construction 06 140.
e) Pre-fabricated Structural Woods 06 170.
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
Pcninsu]<l College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f) Ghi-Iam Construction 06 180.
2) Work Installed but Furnished by Others -
a) Metal Fabrications not noted otherwise
b. Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
I) Furnishing of Metal Fabrieations specified in Section 05 500.
2) Building paper specified in Section 07 150.
3.
Reference Standards:
a. International Building Code, 2003 Edition.
I) Standards listed within IBC are to be considered minimum
standards and are often exceeded by this Contract Work.
Dimension Lumber:
a. Bearing Walls & Shear Walls-
I) Douglas Fir #2 or btr.
2) Douglas Fir #1 or btr. for studs over 16' -0"
b. Interior Non-bearing 2x4 or 2x6 Partitions (other than shear walls)
Douglas Fir (WWP A), Std or Better
c. Dimension lumber shall be clearly grade marked.
2.
Boards: (Including furring and bridging)
a. Adequate for intended use.
3. Posts. Beams & Timbers:
a. 5" x 5" & larger - #1 or better minimum, Douglas Fir.
06 110 WOOD FRAMING
06 112 wall framing
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1
Wood:
a. Conform with Section 06 100 General except as specified below.
b. Pressure Treated Wood - See Section 06 300.
c. Posts & Beams -
I) #1 Douglas Fir or better.
2. Bolts:
a. Meet requirements of ASTM A 307, "Specifications for Carbon Steel
Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners", size as indicated below, unless
Drawings show otherwise.
3. Nails:
a. Box or Common.
Walls:
a. Openings -
I) Stud /Trimmer with multiple studs at holdowns as shown on
Drawings.
b. Comers & Partition Intersections -
I) Triple studs.
c. Top Plates In Bearing Partitions - ,
1) Doubled and lapped. Stagger joints at least 4 feet.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
I
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
d.
Headers -
I) 4xlO and 2x6 flat typical, unless noted otherwise on Structural
Plans. See also Door and Window Details.
Ends Of Stud Wall to Reinforced Masonry _
1) Connect Double stud with 1," anchor bolts maximum 4S" o.C. to
Masonry wall.
Firestops -
I) 'Spaces in wall over 10 feet high, at ceiling. soffit, and floor
levels,
Spacing -
I) 16"0.c. at exterior and bearing walls.
2) 24"0.c. at non-bearing interior partitions.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Wood in Contact with Concrete or Masonrv:
a. Use pressure treated wood as specified 06 300.
b. Set true and level to provide full bearing. Use mortar for leveling if
leveling is required. See Section 04 100.
c. Bolt sill to concrete as follows unless otherwise noted on Structural
Drawings. Minimum embedment of 7 inches.
I) Exterior walls and bearing walls -
a) 5/S"xI2" bolt, 32 inches o.c.
2) Interior non-bearing partitions -
a) 1I2"x I 0" bolt, 4 feet o.c. or powder actuated fasteners at
24 inches o.c., Hilti or equal.
3) Shear Walls -
a) Refer to Shear wall schedule on Structural Drawings.
3.
Posts & Beams:
a. Frame wood columns and posts to true end bearings.
b. Extend posts or columns down to supports of such design as to hold
them securely in position.
c. Securely fasten column at top to beam or girder.
d. Beams & Girders -
1) Stagger individual members of each beam or girder so over any
one support, no more than half the members will have ajoint. In
all cases, however, joints shall occur over supports'.
2) Stagger-nail huilt-up members 9 inches o.c. or bolt, if shown on
Drawings. Set with crown edge up with full bearing at ends and
intermediate supports.
3) Wood shims are not acceptable under ends.
4) Do not notch without pemlission of the Architect.
4.
NaIl As Follows:
a. Stud to plate - End nail, two 16d.
b. Stud to plate - Toe nail, three 16d or four Sd.
c. Top plates - Spiked together, 16d, 24 inches o.c.
d. Top plates - Laps and intersections, two 16d.
e. Continuous one-by brace to stud - Two Sd.
f. Two-by cut-in braCing to stud - Two 16d.
g. Comer studs and angles - l6d, 24 inches o.c.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
06 113 roof & ceiling framing
I
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
06115 SHEATHING
I
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Roof and ceiling joists.
2) Roof Rafters.
3) Ledger, wall, and valley plates.
4) T&G Decking at Lobby
5) Wood-framed Soffits
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Furnishing of glu-Iam beams specified in Section 06 IS2.
2) Installing of glu-Iam beams specified in Section 06 143.
b.
1.
Wood:
a.
b.
Conforrn with Section 06 100 General.
Ledger, wall, valley plates -
I) #2 & btr. Douglas Fir
2.
Nails:
a.
b.
16d box or common, Sinkers O.K.
20d galvanized for T &G to GLB at Lobby
Use Manufacturer's recommendation for fasteners on framing anchors.
c.
Place rafters or joists with crown side up at 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise
indicated in Drawings or directed by the Architect.
2.
Block and bridge as necessary and as shown. See Section 06 129.
3. Special Requirements:
a. Roof & Ceiling Joists -
I) Lap joists 4 inches minimum and secure with code approved
framing anchors.
b. Roof Rafters -
I) Cut level at wall plate and provide at least 2-1/2 inches bearing
where applicable. Nail to plate with three 16d nails.
2) Provide for bracing / blocking at bearing partitions.
L
Products:
a. This specification is written for APA Perfomlanee Rated Plywood.
Wafer-board, Composite board, and Oriented Strand Board (but not
Structural Particleboard) are accepted as equals providing specified span
ratings are met, subject to pnor approval by Architect.
I) In all cases, thickness shown is minimum regardless of span
rating. Material used for same purpose shall be of same
thickness.
General Use Sheathing
I) Exposure 1.
b.
3/S inch
15/32 inch
1/2 inch
19/32 inch
24/0
32/16
32/16
40/20
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IIIG. PS
2.
I
5/8 inch
23/32 inch
3/4 inch
40/20
48/24
48/24
I
c.
Nails -
I)
2)
3)
I
I
Up to 19/32" panel - 8d box or common.
19/32" and thicker panel - IOd box or common.
Refer to Shear Wall schedules on Structural Drawings
Execution:
a. Nail heads shall be flush with, but not penetrate, plywood surface.
b. Observe and follow panel edge and side spacing requirements shown on
panel faces.
I
06 116 plywood wall sheathing
I
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) All Wall sheathing
I
Plywood:
a. 15/32 inch thick minimum, complying with table above.
I
2.
Nails:
a. As specified in 06 liS General.
I
Panel edges shall bear on framing members and butt along their center lines.
Back block panel edges that do not bear on framing members with 2" nominal
framing.
I
2.
Place nails not less than 3/8 inch in from edge and 6 inches o.c. along
intermediate supports and along panel edge unless shown otherwise on
Drawings. Use 8d box nails.
I
3.
Refer to Shear wall schedule on Drawings for special requirements.
I
4.
Stagger panel end joints.
I
5. Follow end and edge spacing requirements recommended by Manufacturer.
I
06117
plywood roof sheathing
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
Plywood:
a. 5/8 inch thick minimum complying with table above for over open-web
trusses and rafters.
b. 3/8 inch thick minimum complying with table above for over wood
decking at Canopy construction.
I
I
2.
Nails:
a. As specified in 06 115 GENERAL.
I
Placing:
a. Always lay face grain at perpendicular to supports.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building ;C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Stagger panel end joints.
2.
Nailing: (Unless noted otherwise on Drawings.)
a. Place nails at least 3/8 inch in from edge.
b. Nail 6 inches o.c. along supported edges.
c. Nail 12 inches o.c. on intermediate supports.
d. Nail 4 inches o.c. at Shear diaphragm boundary minimum or as indicated
an Structural Drawings.
3. Protect sheathing from excess moisture until roofing is installed.
06 118 plywood floor sheathing
I
I
GENERAL 1.
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Sub-flooring at all Mechanical lofts
Subflooring:
a. Plywood - 23/32 inch thick minimum, AP A rated Sturd-I-Floor panels
with fully sanded face.
2.
Nails:
a. Sub flooring - As specified in 06 115 General.
b. Underlayrnent - 4d ring shanked.
Subflooring:
a. Apply bead of glue to structural supports and apply plywood at right
angles to supports.
b. Nail panel edges at 6 inches o.c. and along intermediate bearing at 10
inches o.c. with 8d nails.
06125 WOOD DECKING
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) T&G Roof Decking at Lobby
Roof Decking:
a. 2x6 Tongue and Groove Decking as shown on Drawings.
b. Species: Douglas Fir or Hemlock
c. Grade: Appearance
d. Nails: 20d Galvanized spikes
e. Insecticide: Borate based insecticide compound
Lay-up to be Type III (combination two-span and continuous)
2.
Spike Decking to Glu-Iams below with (2) spikes per plank at each beam
3.
Prior to covering decking, call for exterminator to apply borate hetween decking
and plywood diaphragm layer.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} Il1c. PS
I
06129 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING
1.
I
I
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Bridging between joists and rafters as shown on Drawings.
2) Solid blocking as necessary or detailed.
3) Backing (nailers) for attaching moldings, trim, base, chair rails,
hardware, equipment, accessories, or plumbing.
4) Furnish and install furring where required.
I
Joist Bridging:
a. Ix3. #2 Douglas Fir or equal.
b. Steel Type X braces may be used on roofs only.
c. Nails: 8d box or common, galvanized.
I
I
2.
Solid Blocking:
a. Conform with Table in Section 06 100 General except for Shear Nailing.
b. Blocking shall be full height to the members being blocked and drilled
for ventilation when and as shown on Drawings.
c. Refer to Shear Wan notes for sheaf panel to blocking nailing.
I
I
3.
Wood Furring:
a. Dimensions as shown on Drawings.
b. Grade: Utility or better.
c. Nails to be size and type to fit substrate and secure furring firmly.
I
Joist Bridging:
a. Provide between joists every 8'-0" maximum.
b. Nail each end with two 8d nails.
I
I
2.
Solid Blocking:
a. Provide miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required
for support of handrails, facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and
trim.
b. Provide continuous horizontal blocking row at mid-height of walls or
partitions over 16 feet high, using 2-inch-thick members of same width
as wan or partition studs. This blocking may act as fireblock if
applicable.
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 06100
06 140 HEA VV TIMBER CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL
I.
2.
Division 06 GENERAL applies to this Section.
In case of conflict, Structural drawings and General Notes over-ride this Section.
I
06 143 installation of glu-lam beams
GENERAL
1.
I
I
I
Scope:
a.
I)
Includes but Not Limited To -
Installation of Glu-Iam beams and Hardware.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
Install Work in accordance with Fabricators instructions and Glu-Lam Erection
Safety Practices.
2.
Connect per Details.
3.
Adequately support and brace work until tied into building structure to insure
against collapse due to wind or other forces.
4. Maintain protection of beams until roofing has been installed.
5.
Do not install badly stained or marred beams at exposed locations.
6.
Refer to Structural Drawings for V -4 or V -8 designation and specified camber if
applicable.
END OF SECTION 06 140
06170 PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD
I
I
I
I
GENERAL
1.
2.
Division 06 GENERAL applies to this Section.
In case of conflict, Structural drawings and General Notes over-ride this Section.
06180 GLU-LAM CONSTRUCTION
06 182 glu-lam beams
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Scopc:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish complete glu-Iam beams, and hardware.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Installation specified in Section 06143.
2) Treatment specified in Section 06-300.
2) Refer to Structural General Notes and Drawings
b.
2. Oualitv Assurance:
a. Fabricator shall be licensed by American Institute of Timbcr
Construction.
b. Fabricate in accordancc with ANSl/ AITC A 190.1-1983 and bear AlTC
quality mark.
3. Shop Drawings:
a. Provide in quadruplicate 21 days prior to ordering.
b. Furnish copy of licensing certificate from AITC.
4. Product Protection & Handling:
a. Seal beam faces with pcnetrating sealer.
b. Treat beam cnds with wood preservative.
c. Wrap membcrs separately with heavy water repellent cover. Protect
against damage in transit.
d. Store and handle to insure maintcnance of appearance.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
I
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IIIC. PS
PRODUCTS L
I
Wood:
a.
b.
I
Species- Douglas Fir
S tress Grade -
1) Fb 2400 psi
Fe perpendicular 600 psi
Fe (columns) 1550 psi
Fv 165 psi
E 1,600,000 psi
2) Glu-\am beams for cantilevers, continuous spans, and columns
shall have an Fb value for compression zone equal to Fb value
specified for tension zone {balanced combination) and carry
the designation "V8".
Moisture content-
I) 12% maximum for straight beams
2) 10% maximum for curved or arched beams.
Appearance Grading-
I) Industrial unless exposed.
2) Industrial Appearance where exposed.
I
I
I
c.
I
d.
I
I
2.
Glue:
a. Exterior type with mold inhibitor.
3.
Hardware & Steel Shapes:
a. Conform to requirements of Section 05 100 General.
I
I
06 197 plywood wcb ioists
GENERAL I.
PRODUCTS I.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes but Not Limited To-
I) Furnishing plywood web joists, blocking, and necessary
connections required for roof framing.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
1) Scction 06190 GENERAL applies to this Section.
b.
I
I
2.
Coordination:
a. Coordinate duct, pipe and venting holes required by other divisions.
Provide additional joists or headers as required for accommodation of
other trades.
I
Matcrials:
a. Wood Chord Members-
I) Single top and bottom chord
b. Joist Bridging-
1) Type, size, and spacing as required by joist manufacturer.
I
I
2.
Accessories:
a. Fasteners-
1) Galvanized steel, type to suit application.
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations. Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} 111c. PS
I
I
I
I
I
3.
Fabrication:
a. Verify dimensions and Site conditions prior to shop drawing submittal.
b. Fabricate in aceordance with approved shop drawings.
4.
Approved Manufacturer:
a. TJL trusses as manufactured by Truss Joist Corporation.
b. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding. See Section 0 I 630.
06 198 laminated veneer lumber (L VL) or (PSL)
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
.
m
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but not Limited to-
I) Furnishing L VL or PSL products for framing.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
I) Section 06190 GENERAL applies to this Section.
b.
2.
Coordination:
a. Coordinate duct, pipe and venting holes required by other divisions.
Provide additional members as required for accommodation of other
trades.
Materials:
a. L VL wood beams-
I) Approved Manufacturers:
a. Products specified as M=L or PSL shall conform to the
performance criteria of L VL or PSL products as
manufactured by TrusJoist as MICRO=LAM and
PARALLAM.
b. Substitutes are acceptable provided they have the same
structural value subject to approval by the Architect
prior to bidding. See section 01 630.
2.
Accessories:
a. Fasteners-
I) Galvanized steel, type to suit application.
Install work in accordance with Manufactures instructions and Industry Erection
Safety Practiccs.
2.
Adequately support and brace work until tied into building structure to insure
against collapse due to wind or other forces.
2.
Where multiple M=L's are specified, connect together with (2) rows of 16d nails
@ 12" o.c. unless noted otherwise.
END OF SECTION 06 170
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 20(j4
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
.
I
1.
Division 06 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
I
06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
GENERAL
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To installation of following items unless
arranged for otherwise-
I) Architectural Woodwork specified in 06-400.
2) Wood doors specified in Division 08.
3) Windows specified in Division 08.
4) Hollow Metal Frames
5) Finish Hardware specified in Division 08.
6) Building Specialties specified in Division 10.
7) Miscellaneous trim and moldings in 06-205.
8) Exterior wood fascia, barges, and soffits in 06-206
9) Wood siding in 06-208.
10) Closet and Storage Shelving in 06-430.
11) Custom Architectural Cabinets in 06-410.
11) Miscellaneous as specified elsewhere.
I
I
I
I
3. Execution:
a. Work shall be made in accordance with measurements taken on the Site.
b. Scribe, miter, and join accurately and neatly.
c. Exposed surfaces shall be machine sanded, unless directed otherwise,
ready for finishing.
d. Allow for free movement of panels.
e. Countersink nails
f. Glue shall be waterproof and of best quality.
g. Back prime all sidings or Work to be installed against concrete or
masonry.
h. Architectural Woodwork-
1) Install plumb, level, and square in manner and quality consistent
with A WI Custom Grade requirements.
I
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
I) Trim not specified elsewhere
I
I
I
I
06 205 miscellaneous trim & moldmg
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
Softwood:
a. Douglas Fir at window sills, chair rails, and wall caps per Drawings.
Grade indicated within Details
b. Paint grade Hemlock for other.
I
I
I
Wood:
a. Trims -
1) Miter boards and trim.
2) Rigidly secure in placc, nail as necessary.
3) Use care to prevent hammer-head or nail set markings.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
4)
Secure trim in straight, true, line without buckles, sags, splitting,
ragged edges, tool marks, or other defects.
Set exposed nail heads 1/8 inch to receive putty.
5)
06 206 exterior wood fascia. rakes, barges. bands. soffits, and T &G ceilings
I
GENERAL
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I
I
I
06 208 wood siding
GENERAL
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
Furnish and install, fascia, barges, rakes, and bands as described in
Contract Documents.
Fascias, Rake, Barge, and Bands-
a. V erticallaminated boards, typical for fascia, barge, band, and rake
boards. All sizes detailed on Drawings.
b. Nails: 16d Galvanized, casing type.
c. Approved Manufacturers:
1) Socomi-Iam by South Coast Lumber, Brookings OR
2) No substitutions allowed
Fascia, Rake, Barge, and Bands-
a. Miter boards at splices.
b. Rigidly secure in place, nail as necessary.
c. Use care to prevent hammer head or nail set markings.
d. Secure in straight, true, level line without buckles, sags,
splitting, ragged edges, tool marks, or other defects.
e. Set exposed nail heads 1/8 inch.
1.
Section 06 200 GENERAL applies to this Section.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes But Not Limited To-
I) Providing wood siding at exterior ofbuilding.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
I) Moisture barriers specified in Section 07 190.
b.
Tongue & Groove Vertical Siding
a. T&G Cedar; I x 6 nominal
b. Grade: Select Tight-knot KD.
2.
Nails: 6d Galvanized finish
3.
Backorime:
a. Exterior primer as specified in Section 09 900.
Wood Siding
a. Backprime all Siding materials, including cut ends.
b. Install siding with rough sidc and square edge outward.
c. Miter outside comers of buildings and cross nail miters together with
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 ~ Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 works} IlIc. PS
I
I
d.
(2) 6d @ l2"0.c. Butt inside corners
Install in as long of runs as possible, but remove defects such as splits,
loose knots, etc. Save shorter pieces for shorter runs.
Blind nail. Use care to prevent hammer-head or nail set markings.
Secure in straight, true, vertical lines without buckles, sags, splitting,
ragged edges, tool marks, loose knots, or other defects.
Set exposed nail heads 1/8 inch.
I
e.
f.
I
g.
I
06 210 installation of doors & metal frames
I
GENERAL
EXECUTION 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Storing and installing of wood and metal doors.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
I) Furnishing of doors and metal frames specified in Division 08.
2) Finishing of doors specified in Section 09 900.
b.
I
2.
Product Storage & Handling:
a. Wood Doors-
I) Do not have doors delivered to building Site until after plaster,
cement, and taping compound are dry. If doors are to be stored
at Jobsite for more than one week, seal top and bottom edges.
2) Store upright on a level surface in a dry, well ventilated space.
Cover to keep clean but allow air circulation.
3) Handle with clean gloves and do not drag doors across one
another or across other surfaces.
4) Do not subject doors to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity or
sudden changes therein. Condition doors to average prevailing
humidity of locality before hanging.
I
I
I
I
Wood Doors:
a. Install with 1/8" clearance between door and frame. Form a square
frame with jambs and stops.
b. Install door according to Manufacturer recommendations. When
finished, doors shall not bind, stick, or be mounted so as to cause future
hardware difficulties.
c. Do not impair utility or structural strength of door in fitting of door,
applying hardware, or cutting and altering door louvers, panels, or other
special details.
d. Read Hardware Manufacturer's instructions pnor to mounting hardware
and follow as closely as possible.
e. Use hardware templates furnished by Manufacturer when mounting
hardware.
f. Set hinges flush with edge surface. Be sure that hinges are set in a
straight line to prevent distortion. Use three hinges per door on doors 7
feet in height or less and four hinges per door on doors over 7 feet in
height.
g. Mount door latches in top of strike plate opening so when door later
settles, latch will not bind.
h. Mount closers on stop side of door (Parallel Arm) where possible.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Pcninsuta College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and PI<lstics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
2.
Metal Frames:
a. Assemble and install per manufacturers instructions.
06 212 hardware installation
I
GENERAL
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Installation of finish hardware.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Hardware specified in Seetion 08 700.
b.
Preparation:
a. Provide solid blocking for all wall stops and bumpers.
b. Fasteners: Check all conditions and use fastening devices as needed to
secure or anchor all hardware as per manufacturer's published templates.
Self-tapping sheet metal screws are not acceptable. All closures and exit
devices on wood doors shall be thru-bolted. The Contractor shall be
responsible for drilling wood or metal with the recommended hole sizes.
2.
Installation:
a. The General Contractor shall be responsible for proper installation and
operation of hardware in locations specified. Door closures shall be
installed and adjusted to close and latch the door without slamming.
b. The Contractor shall protect exposed hardware surfaces during the
construction period from damage to products and finishes.
c. Mounting Heights: Mount units at heights recommended in
"Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for BHMA" except as
otherwise indicated.
d. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's
instructions.
e. Whenever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware on surfaces
which will be painted or finished at a later time, install each item
completely and then remove and store in a secure place. After
completion of the finishes, reinstall each item.
f. Do not install surface mounted items unless finishes are completed on
the substrate.
e. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to
insure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that
cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
3.
Adiustment:
a. Whenever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy, make a final check and adjustment of all
hardware items during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy.
Clean and lubricate operating itcms necessary to restore proper function
and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to
compensate for final operation for heating and ventilating equipment.
b. Instruct Owners pcrsonnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of
hardware and hardware finishes.
END OF SECTION 06 200
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} Illc. PS
I'
GENERAL
1.
Division 06 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
I
I
06300 WOOD TREATMENT
06 310 PRESERVATIVE PRESSURE TREATMENT
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish and install Pressure Treated lumber or plywood in
contact with concrete or masonry and for components indicated
as "pressure treated" or "P.T," according to Drawings.
2) Mud Sills, Furring, and others as indicated on Drawings.
I
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
I
2.
Reference Standards:
a. Impregnated lumber or plywood conforming to A WP A Standard C2-0 I
in conjunction with Association Standard C I.
I
I
3.
Lumber shall be dried to 15-19% moisture content after treatment. Materials to
be painted shall have knots and pitch pockets sealed.
#2 Douglas Fir or better (Hem-Fir and Sitka Spruce permitted).
I
I
2.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. "ACQ Naturewood Preservative", by Allweather Wood Treaters,
Washougal, WA.
b. Substitutions meeting Specification permitted.
I
I
I
I
I
Preservative Pressure Treated Material:
a. Liberally brush cut ends, bolt holes, and machined areas with the same
treatment material.
b. Hand-select materials to be used for exposed locations.
END OF SECTION 06 300
06 400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
GENERAL
1.
Division 06 GENERAL applies to this Section.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Fabrication and delivery to Site of millwork specified below.
2) Installation of adjustable and fixed shelf standards and shelving.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Installation of architectural woodwork hardware not itemized
above specified in Section 06 200.
2) Furring and blocking members specified in Section 06100.
I
I
b.
I
3. Reference Standards:
a. Applicable standards of A WI "Quality Standards and GUIde
Specifications" apply to this Section as if written in this Project Manual
unless noted otherwise.
I
'I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
. .
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
.
I
.
I
I
I
.
I
I
I
b.
A WI "Custom" grade except as otherwise indicated shall be base quality
requirement.
4.
Submittals:
a. Submit shop Drawings.
b. Submit samples of wood species that is to receive a transparent finish to
the Architect.
c. Submit manufacturer's literature of specialty items not manufactured by
Architectural Woodwork firm; if requested by Arehitect.
5.
Product Delivery & Storage:
a. Assemble Work at shop and deliver ready for erection insofar as
possible.
b. Protect millwork from moisture and damage while in transit to jobsite.
Unload and store in a place where it will be protected from moisture and
damage and convenient to use.
6.
Execution:
a. Fabricate Work in accordance with measurements taken on Site.
b. Install hardware in accordance with Manufacturer's directions.
c. Repair & Cleaning -
I) In addition to AWl requirements, exposed finished surfaces of
millwork shall have damaged surface or defects removed or
repaired to match adjacent similar undamaged surface as
directed by Architect.
06410 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
1 ) Wood cabinets.
2) Cabinet hardware.
3) Countertops.
2.
References:
a. ANSUBHMA A 156.9 -- American National Standard for Cabinet
Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association.
b. ANSUBHMA A 156.18 -- American National Standard for Materials and
Finishes; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association.
c. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and
Quality Certification Program; Architectural Woodwork Institute.
3.
Submittals:
a. Shop Drawings-
I) Dimensioned plans and elevations and large scale details,
showing location of each item, identifying components used, and
indicating method of attachment.
b. Veneer-
1) Samples selected from and representative of veneers to be used;
6 inch by 12 inch pieces.
Peninsula College Space Rcnovntions - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desigll Works} IIIC. PS
.'
c.
d.
e.
4.
Ouality Assurance:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5
Factory Finishes-
I) Samples: 8- by IO-inch samples, finished, for each finish and
color.
Countertops-
I) Samples for verification. Standard product line of manufaeturer
chips of each type, pattern, and color.
Cabinet Hardware-
I) Product data.
2) One sample of each type.
Standard for Materials and Workmanship: Comply with applicable
requirements of" Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," published
by Architectural Woodwork Institute (A WI) (hereinafter referred to as
"woodworking standard"). Where Contract Documents indicate
requirements that conflict with the woodworking standard above,
comply with the standard stated above.
Grades as indicated on Drawings.
Standard for Factory Finishing-
I) Comply with Section 01500, "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards." Where Contract Documents indicate requirements
that conflict with the woodworking standard above, comply with
the standard stated above.
Fabricator Qualifications-
1) Fabricator approved by the Architect. All Work of this Section
shall be fabricated by a single firm.
Installer Qualifications-
I) Fabricator shall install his own Work.
Pre-installation Mecting-
1) Meet at project Site, prior to delivery of fabricated items, to
review coordination and environmental controls required for
proper installation and ambient conditions in areas to receive
Work. Require attendance by the Contractor, installers of this
Work, installers of wet work such as plastering, installers of
finishes, and mcchanical and clectrical Work, and those
responsible for continued operation (temporary or permanent) of
systems required to maintain temperaturc and humidity
conditions. Proceed with installation only when agreement is
reached that required ambicnt conditions can bc maintained.
Delivery. Storage. And Handling:
a. Do not deliver products until ambient conditions required can be and are
maintained. Do not deliver woodwork until wet work, painting, grinding,
and similar operations in storage and installation areas that could
damage, soil, or deterioratc wood work have been completed. Protect
woodwork during transit, dclivery, storage, and handling to prevent
damage, soiling, and deterioration. Store products only in areas where
ambient conditions required can be and are maintained.
6
Proiect Conditions:
a. Obtain field measurements and verify dimensions before fabricating
woodwork.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
OI;9mpic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
'.
I
I
,
I'
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A WI Grading:
a. Premium grade.
2.
Cashiers half-wall and other Cabinets and Shelves:
a. Style: As indicated on drawings.
b. Lumber species: As indicated on Drawings
c. Panel products for transparent finish-
I) _' Species; Birch.
2) Matching between panels in same area: Sequence-matched,
uniform-size sets.
3) Matching within panel face: Center match.
4) Matching of adjacent veneer leaves: Slip match.
5) Acceptable types: Veneer core plywood.
6) Panel thickness: 3/4 inch, thickness appropriate to radii at
radius bends
7) Finish: Factory-applied transparent finish; A WI System No. I
8) Interior finish: Low-pressure decorative laminate.
9) Exposed edges: Matching veneer edges.
10) Semi-exposed edges: Matching veneer edges.
d. Conceal all fasteners.
e. Countertops -
1) Performance Specification for Solid Surfaces for Cashiers half-
wall See Drawings.
a) Min 5000 psi for tensile strength per ASTM D-638
b) Min 7000 psi for flexural strength per ASTM D790
c) Max 3% for elongation per ASTM D-638
d) Min 90 Rockwell "m" scale for hardness per
ASTM D-785
e) Min no change in 100 hours per NEMA LD3
f) Product must pass ANSI Zl24 for stain and abrasion
resistance
g) Flamability Class 1
h) Pre-approved products:
1. Corian
2. Staron
2) Specification for horizontal surfaces indicated as P-lam on
Drawings.
a) Panel products for opaque finish: Particleboard.
b) Panel thickness: 3/4 inch
c) Finish: High-pressure plastic laminate.
d) Plastic laminate thickness: Grade GP50
e) Conceal all fasteners.
f) Seal bottoms of particleboard panels with (2) coats of
commercial sealer
3. Wood Materials:
a. Lumber-
I) Species and grade as specified in woodworking standard, unless
otherwise indicated.
b. Moisture content at time of fabrication-
I) As specified in woodworking standard.
c. Provide lumber dressed on all exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} Inc. PS
I
EXECUTION I.
I
d. Do not use twistcd, warped, bowed, or otherwise defective lumber.
e. Sizcs indicated are nominal, unless otherwise indicated.
f. Do not mark or color lumber, cxccpt where such marking will bc
conccaled in finish work.
g. Plywood-
I) Types, grades, and cores as specificd in the woodworking
standard, except as othcrwise specificd in this Scction.
h. Particleboard-
I) ANSI A208.1, I-M-2 or 2-M-2, or bettcr.
I
,I
I
I
4.
Miscellaneous Matcrials:
a. Wood Filler for Transparent Finish Woodwork-
I) Match final finish color.
b. Fasteners-
I) Type, size, matcrial, and finish as required for cach use.
I
5.
Cabinet Hardware:
a. Finishcs on exposed hardware-
1) Satin Aluminum
b. Concealed hardware-
1) Manufacturer's standard finish, complying with applicable
product class of ANSI/BHMA AI56.9.
c. Hingc Typc-
1) Julius Blum, sclf closing
d. Pull Type-
-I) As sclccted by Architcct.
c. Drawer Slides-
1) Acuride
f. Locks-
1) 5-pin tumbler, dcad bolt.
2) Compatible with "Best" system
g. Cabinct-Mounted Adjustable Shelf Supports-
1) Reccssed, drilled standards with removable platcd stcel pins.
h. Hardware Quantities-
I) Hingcs- Two per door up to 36 inchcs high; three pcr door over
36 inchcs high.
2) Pulls- One per door, drawer.
3) Catches- One per door.
4) Drawer slides, top mountcd- Two per drawcr.
I
I
I
I
I
~
I
I
Gcneral Fabrication:
a. Fabricate to dimcnsions, profilcs, and details indicatcd. To grcatest
cxtent possible, completc fabrication and assembly before shipment to
Site.
b. Disassemble componcnts only as ncccssary for shipment and
installation. Prc-cut openings for applied fixtures and fitting, where
possiblc.
c. Pre-drill mountings for applied hardware, wherc possible.
I
I
I
2.
Fabrication - Cabinetwork:
a. Veneer matching shall bc continuous across doors, drawer fronts, and
pancls. Install cabinct hardware.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
J.
4.
5.
",'
Installation:
a. Condition woodwork to humidity and temperature in installation area
prior to installing. Verify that blocking and backings have been installed
at appropriate locations for anchorage.
Examine shop-fabricated work for completion, complete Work as
required, and remove packing.
Make joints neatly, with uniform appearance.
Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight, with no distortions.
Install with no variation in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
Shim as required, using concealed shims.
Refinish cut surfaces and repair finish at cuts.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to
substrates.
Use anchorage methods indicated; where anchorage method is not
indicated, use only concealed fasteners or blind nailing except where
impossible.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork to eliminate visual and
functional defects. Where repair is not possible, replace woodwork.
Touch up shop-applied finishes where damaged or soiled.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
I.
Adiustment:
a. Install so doors operate smoothly and are accurately aligned.
b. Install so drawers operate smoothly and are accurately aligned.
c. Complete hardware installation.
d. Anchor tops securely.
e. Install tops plumb and level, within 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
f. Adjust and lubricate cabinet hardware for smooth operation.
Cleaning:
a. Clean exposed and semi-exposed surfaces.
6.
Protection:
a. Protect woodwork from damage and maintain environmental conditions
required.
06405 STANDING & RUNNING TRIM. & RAILS
GENERAL
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Indirect lighting soffit in Lobby
2) Other standing & running trim
Interior for Transparent Finish:
a. Solid wood shall be Douglas Fir.
b. Grade varies, see Details
END OF SECTION 06 400
END OF DIVISION 06
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations ~ Building 'C'
Division 06 - Wood and Plastics
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 workS} IlIc. PS
I
DIVISION 07 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
I
GENERAL
1.
General Conditions apply to this Division.
I
I
2. Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for full
completion of Work indicated in Contract Documents.
07 150 DAMPPROOFlNG
I
GENERAL
1.
Division 07 GENERAL applies to this Section.
07 160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish and apply to exterior below grade foundation walls and
top of footings.
2.
Delivery. Storage and Handling:
a. Deliver materials to project Site in Manufacturer's original unopened
containers.
3.
Site Conditions:
a. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations regarding weather
conditions before and during installation, condition of the substrate to
receive damproofing, and protection of the installed damproofing
system.
Bituminous Damproofing Materials:
a. Cold Applied Asphalt Emulsion Semi-Mastic-
I) Fibrated damproofing mastic of medium consistency, asbestos
free.
b. Approved Manufacturer's-
1) A-H Semi-Mastic Emulsion, Anti Hydro Company, Inc.
2) Emulsified Asphalt Semi-Mastic, The Euclid Chemical
Company
3) Hydrocide 700B Mastic, Sonneborn Building Products.
4) Tex-Mastic 633-FB, TexMastic internatIOnal
5) Sealmastic Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing Type II, W R
Meadows
c. Asphalt Primer-
1) Conform to requirements of ASTM D 41.
2.
Installation Accessories:
a. Reinforcing Fabric-
1) Woven or non-woven fiberglass, treated with organic binders
and coated for compatibility with damproofing bitumen.
b. Detailing Mastic-
I) Asphalt based plastic roof cement, trowel consistency, meeting
requirements of ASTM D 4586.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "C"
Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 works} 111c. PS
I
EXECUTION I.
I
Examination:
a. VerifY that surfaces are smooth, sound, clean, and dry, and that elements
which win penetrate damproofing have been completed and are rigidly
installed.
b. Beginning of installation constitutes acceptance of substrate.
I
I
2.
Preparation:
a. Remove honeycomb, aggregate pockets, fins, ridges, and projecting
rough areas.
b. Fill cracks with latex patching mortar, or detailing mastic as
recommended by membrane manufacturer.
c. Form fillets (cants) at inside corners and around projecting elements
using latex patching mortar or detailing mastic.
I
I
I
3.
General Installation:
a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling, preparation,
application, and protection of damproofing materials.
I
4.
Below-Grade Damproofing:
a. Apply one coat of primer at 200-300 square feet per gallon and allow to
dry.
b. Form flashings at outside corners, changes in plane, and penetrations.
Apply coating of damproofing or detailing mastic, embed layer of
fiberglass reinforcing extending at least 12 inches onto damproofing
surface, and topcoat with another layer of damproofing or detailing
mastic.
c. Apply a uniform coat of semi-mastic damproofing using spray
applicator, brush or mop. Coverage, 401, to 501, gallons per 100 square
feet to provide minimum 30-mil dry film thickness.
d. Apply a "touch-up" coating over areas where coating is thin or has not
formed a smooth lustrous surface.
e. Apply second coat of damproofing as specified above.
I
I
I
I
I
5.
Inspection:
a. Before covering or backfilling damproofing, notify Architect.
I
6.
Protection and Cleaning:
a. Take measures required to protect completed damproofing after
installation.
b. Clean spillage and soilmg from adjacent surfaces using clcaning agents
and procedures recommended by the manufacturer of the surface.
I
I
07 190 VAPOR & AIR RETARDERS
GENERAL
l.
Division 07 GENERAL applies to this Section
I
07 193 polvcthvlene film vapor retarders
GENERAL
1.
I
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnishing and installing vapor barrier on walls and, below
interior concrete slabs as shown on Drawings.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "C'
Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} Inc. PS
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
07196
air retarders
GENERAL
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
07200 INSULATION
GENERAL
I
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
1.
Vapor Barrier:
a. 6 mil minimum clear polyethylene sheets at inside face of insulation at
exterior walls
b. 6 mil minimum clear polyethylene sheets over sub-base, under 2" sand,
beneath concrete floor slabs
c. Both shall conform to requirements of ASTM D 4397, "Specification for
Polyethylene Sheeting For Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural
Applications" .
Install using 3/8" minimum staples through cardboard disc or strip
reinforcement. Staple every 6 inches along structural members and blocking and
3 inches in from edge of sheet. Run long edge of sheet along structural member.
Bed joints in sealant of type specified in Section 07 920, or seal with vapor
resistant tape of type recommended by Manufacturer for vapor barrier
installation.
Seal penetrations through vapor barrier immediately prior to installation of
gypsum board.
At completion of vapor barrier installation and at completion of Project, inspect
exposed plastic vapor barrier for holes, tears, and punctures and repair damaged
areas. Vapor barrier is to be air tight and free from holes, tears, and punctures.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Fumishing and installing air retarders on the exterior side of
exterior wall sheathing prior to installation of siding.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Tyvek Housewrap by DuPont Company, Wilmington, DE
Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions over exterior wall
sheathing. Seal penetrations through air infiltration barrier immediately prior to
installation of finish material.
Tape all joints with manufacturer approved tape.
At completlon of air infiltTation barrier installation, inspect exposed air
infiltration barrier for holes, tears, and punctures and repair damaged areas.
Barrier is to be free from holes, tears, and punctures.
END OF SECTION 07190
Division 07 GENERAL applies to this Section.
Peninsula Collegc Space Renovations - Building "C"
Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 works, IlIc. PS
I
2.
I
Protection:
a. Do not cover recessed light fixtures with insulation.
b. Cut out insulation to provide a minimum of 6 inch clearance around
recessed lighting fixtures.
I
I
07212 BOARD INSULATION
07 213 polystyrene board insulation
I
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
07221
rigid insulation
GENERAL 1.
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION I.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish and install on interior side of perimeter foundation walls
and below concrete slabs for 24" at exterior perimeter.
I
I
Inside face of stem wall Installation:
a. Meet requirements of ASTM C 578-85, Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene
Thermal Insulation. Type IV.
I) Approved Manufacturers Types IV -
a) Amofoam CM, Amoco Foam Products Co
b) Foamular 250, UC Industries
c) Styrofoam SM, Dow Chemical Co
I
I
Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
I
2.
Install against interior sidc of perimeter foundation walls extending downward to
top of footing.
I
I
Includes but Not Limited To -
a. Furnish and install board insulation where shown on Drawings as
"Rigid Insulation" and not appcaring elsewhere in this Specification.
b. Furnishing 2" rigid insulation for cavity behind 4x I 0 typical header.
See Drawings.
I
I
Foil-faced Foam Insulation Board:
a. Polyisocyanuratc with radiant barrier foil face
b. Meet requirements spccified in Federal Spec HH-I-197211, Class 1 and
ASTM CI289 Type !, Class 1.
c. Approved Manufacturers-
1) ThermalGlas AGS, by thermal systems, Inc., Huntington Beach,
CA.
2) Celotex Corporation
I
I
I
2. "R" Factor of 7.5 per inch minimum.
Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "C"
Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desigll worksJ Inc. PS
I
I
07 220 BATT INSULA nON
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I
I
I
I
07 300 SHINGLES
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
]) Furnishing and installing batt insulation at exterior walls and
vaulted roofs where indicated within the Contract Documents.
2.
Product Handling. Storage and Delivery:
a. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers with
labels intact and legible.
b. Deliver materials in sufficient quantities to allow continuity of Work.
c. Select and operate material handling equipment so new construction and
applied roofing is not damaged.
d. Store materials on clean, raised platforms or pallets with weather
protective covering.
e. Provide continuous protection of materials against wetting and moisture
absorption.
3.
Insulation shall be manufactured and installed in compliance with UBC,
WSNREC, or other applicable building codes.
"Friction-Fit" un faced batts, either 16" or 24" wide according to framing spacing.
2.
"R" Factor of 30 at ceilings in accordance with Fed Spec HH-I-52Ie.
3. "R" Factor of21 in exterior walls.
4.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Certain teed Corp, Valley Forge, P A
b. Manville Corp Fiberglass, Denver, CO
c. Owens-Coming Fiberglass Corp, Toledo, OH
Install in accordance with Manufacturer's directions and the following:
a. Leave no gaps in insulation envelope.
b. Install insulation between jambs & framing, behind plumbing &
wiring and in similar places.
c. Fit ends ofbatts snug against top and bottom plates.
d. Where insulation is not enclosed by structure, drywall or
suspension system, support in place with wire at 16" o.c. or
other suitable material as approved by Architect.
END OF SECTION 07 200
07312 Laminated Shingles
I
GENERAL
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited to -
I) Furnishing and installation of Work in this Section.
Peninsula College Space Renovations ~ Building "C"
Divl'sion 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
b.
2) Installation of Valleys, Hips, Ridges, drip edges, vent flashings,
step flashing, trim details, etc.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Demolition specified in Section 02 050.
2) Rough Carpentry specified in Section 06100.
3) Furnishing of Sheet Metal Work specified in
Section 07 600.
4) Vent flashing specified in Section 07 727.
I
I
I
2.
Ouahtv Assurance:
a. This Specification sets minimum standards for materials and
workmanship. Manufacturer's bonding requirements shall apply where
they impose higher standards.
b. Building codes are to be used as minimum standards only. Codes or
"industry standards" will not be recognized as standards of quality for
workmanship.
I
I
I
3.
Job Conditions:
a. Cold weather application-
I) When temperature at installation will be 45 deg F or less, store
shingles at 70 deg F minimum for 72 hours minimum. Do not
take more shingles to site than can be installed during same
working day unless provisions to maintain 60 deg F minimum
storage temperature are provided.
2) In addition to above requirements, do not install shingles at
lower temperatures than allowed by Manufacturer for
application.
3) Shingles are to be stored in a safe location, completely protected
against the weather.
I
I
I
I
4.
Warranties. Guarantees. and Bonds:
a. At completion ofroofillg, furnish Owner with Manufacturer's standard
written warranty or bond.
b. In addition to Manufacturer's warranty, Contractor shall furnish written
one year guarantee covering repairs and replacements for any defect or
failure due to faulty workmanship at no additional cost to Owner.
c. To qualify for stated warranty, manufacturers installation instructions
must be followed explicitly.
I
I
I
5.
Submittals:
a. Submit copies of Manufacturer's specification sheets and published
installation instructions and recommendations.
b. Submit product samples for color verification.
I
6.
Replacement Shingles:
a. Leave three squares of shingles, and 200 hip and ridge shingles.
b. Storage location will be determined by Director of Institutional Support
Services.
I
I
Shingles:
Meeting or exceed requirements of ASTM D 3462-87 and ASTM D 3018-90,
Type I and following requirements -
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "c"
Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION
I
I
I
I
a.
b.
Shingles to contain 3M Algae Block granules
Minimum manufactured weight - 240 Ibs.
Hip and Ridge Shingles shall be Factory PreFormed.
UL Class "A" Fire Rating
Minimum 30 year warranty or bond.
Color: "Charcoal"
100 MPH limited wind warranty.
Minimum Class 4 Impact Resistance
c.
d
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Approved Manufacturers: The following is the sole manufacturer approved.
Other manufacturers will not be eonsidered due to Owners desire to match
products from previous installations.
a. Malarkey Roofing Products 1(800) 545-1191
I) Legacy-30 product line
b. No substitutions allowed.
3.
Underlavrnenl:
a. Primary-
I) Malarkey ASTM Type 15
2) Equal or exceeding ASTM Type 15 felt listing.
b. Secondary-
1) Malarkey 350# roll roofing material, full width.
2) 350# roll roofing equal as approved by Architect
4.
Fasteners:
a. Aluminum or galvanized, eleven or twelve gauge, barbed shank roofing
nails wi minimum 3/8" diameter head. Fasteners shall be long enough to
penetrate all roofing materials and at least 1" into roof deck. Use longer
nails where additional roofing material is used or required by
Manufacturer.
b. Staples not permitted.
5.
Plastic Cements:
a. Malarkey Plastic Cement
b. Equal or exceeding ASTM standard D4586 Type IT.
6
Hip and Ridge Shingles:
a. Malarkey Rake' n Ridge
b. Cut shingles not acceptable.
Note: The following text is taken from Malarkey manufacturers instructions. It
is the sole responsibility of the installer to verify and follow the written
instructions from the manufacturer. All manufacturers recommendations will be
followed, unless exempted in writing from Architect after bidding.
1.
Underlavmenl:
a. Primary Underlayment -
I) Apply 36" wide sheets over complete deck, including area to be
covered with secondary underlayment, with each sheet
overlapping preceding sheet and doubling through valleys. Lap
underlayment 2" horizontally and 4" minimum end lap.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "C'
Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 works} IlIc. PS
I
b. Secondary Underlayment -
I) Apply specified material along eaves and rakes. Apply material
full width centered down each valley. Lap end joints 12".
c. Nailing -
I) If shingles applied as felts are laid -
a) Nail sufficiently to hold in place.
2) If felts to be left exposed for extended period -
a) Apply as above then spot mop in field and continuously.
seal at lower edge and end laps with asphalt emulsion to
protect from blow-off. Use emulsion or adhesives
approved by Manufacturer.
2.
Vallevs:
a. Apply secondary underlayment as follows:
I) Use continuous maximum length whenever possible. Nail top of
each section and lap 8" in the direction of flow.
2) Center full width roll roofing material in the valley over primary
underlayment.
3.
Eaves:
a.
Apply secondary underlayment as follows:
I) Below starter course install full width horizontal course
overhanging eave line 1/2".
2) Use continuous maximum length whenever possible. Nail top of
each section @ 18" o.c. and end lap 8".
4.
Shingles (Application of the 5 5/8" diagonal offset pattern):
a. Starter Course:
Use starter strip of self-sealing 3-tab shingle with tabs cut off and the
adhesive at the eave. Cut 6" off of the length of the first slab and begin
in the lower left-hand comer of the roof. Starter course should overhang
drip flashing 1/4" - 3/8". Continue starter course across roof eave with
full-length shingles with labs cut off.
b. First course:
Start with full shingle applied onto and flush with end of starter course
at lower left hand comer of roof and secure with fasteners.
c. Second course:
Cut 5 5/8" from the left end of shingle and apply the 34 3/8" long section
over the first course shingle, exposing the first course 5 5/8". Butt
bottom edge of shingle should be applied to the top of saw tooth of
underlying shingle so that there will be 5 5/8" of each shingle exposed,
secure with fasteners.
d. Third course:
Cut II 1/4" from the left end of the shingle and apply the 28 3/4" long
section, over the second course shinglc, exposing the second course 5
5/8", secure with fasteners.
e. Succeeding courses:
Courses four through seven are bcgun with a partial shingle 5 5/8"
shorter progressively, establishing the overall diagonal method.
f. Insure alignment by running chalk line at least each sixth course to
control horizontal alignment.
g. Use four nails in each shingle placed on line 1" above cutouts,
(63/8" above bottom edge). Place nail I" from cach end of strip and
remaining nails spaced evenly between. Should any nail fail to penetrate
Pcnins!JlaCollcgc Space Renovations - Building "C"
Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
h.
solid decking, drive additional nail nearby. Nails must be driven flush
with shingle surface. FASTENERS MUST NOT BE OVERDRIVEN TO
CUT INTO SHINGLE SURFACE.
Trim shingles to be even with hip and ridge lines and cap with hip and
ridge shingles. Use factory supplied hip and ridge shingles. Apply with
5 5/8"exposure to weather. Nail I" in from the edges with nails long
enough to penetrate all roofing materials, underlayments, and at least I"
into roof deck. Begin laying ridge shingles at the end of the ridge
opposite the prevailing wind direction. It is further specified that each
ridge shingle be hand sealed with a dime size spot of plastic adhesive.
Vent pipe sleeve flange minimum width 6". Fit shingles under lower
edge and over sides and upper edge.
Ensure sealing of each shingle.
1.
1.
4.
Plastic Cements:
a. Avoid excessive use of cement under shingles as it may cause blistering.
5.
Cleaning:
a. Clean shingles and building of any soiling caused by this installation.
b. Clean up Site nightly.
END SECTION 07 300
07600 FLASIDNG & SHEET METAL
I
GENERAL
1.
Division 07 General applies to this Section.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
Coordination:
a. Cooperate with related Sections during shop drawing and erection stage.
3.
Products:
a. Screws, Bolts, Nails, & Accessory Fasteners-
I) Of strength and type consistent with function and roofing
warrantee performance period.
4.
Execution:
a. Form accurately to details.
b. Profiles, bends, and intersections shall be even and true to line.
c. Allow sufficient tolerance for expansion and contraction.
d. Leave metals clean and free of defects, stains, and damaged finish.
e. Insulate work to prevent electrolytic action.
5.
Submittals:
a. Submit samples for flashings to Architect for approval.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "C"
Division 07 - Thenna! & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
I
07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM
07 621 Prefinished Flashing & Counterflashing
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes But Not Limited To -
I) Flashing and counterflashing not specified to be of other
material.
2. Warranty:
a. 25 year minimum.
24 gauge steel conforming to ASTM A-446, Grade A or higher.
2. Finish:
a) Polyvinylidene Fluoride (Kynar 500). Color: Brown
Install with existing detail as minimum standard or details per
Project Manual.
2.
Slope to provide positive drainage.
3.
Fold exposed edges 1/2" to provide stiffness.
4.
Provide sufficient hold-down clips to insure true alignment and security against
wind.
5.
Provide 4" minimum overlap.
07637 CONTINUOUS ROLLED GUTTERS
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but not limited to -
I) Gutters throughout all building. Retain existing downspouts and
drain system, unless noted otherwise.
Related work specified elsewhere -
1) Steel Pipe Downspouts specifIed in Division 05.
2) Removal of existing gutter systcm specitied in
Section 02 050.
b.
2.
Warranty:
a. Provide Owner with two (2) year written warranty against leakage.
Gutters:
a. 26 gauge steel, roll fomled and continuous lengths up to 60'-0",
prcfinished enamel. Color to be selected by Architect, intended selection
Muskett Brown.
b. Hanger system shall be as detailed in Figure A, Page 41 of SMACNA
Manual, 3rd Edition.
c. Cross-sectional configuration of gutter shall be 6" x 5", type "ogee".
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "e"
Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
Downspouts, gutters, hangers, fasteners, and accessories shall be compatible
material.
3.
Strainers:
a. Beehive stainless steel strainers required at all downspout tops.
Preparation:
a. Before starting work, verifY governing dimensions at building. Inspect
for conditions that would prevent installation of first class system. Do
not install over improper conditions.
2.
Installation:
a. Furnish and install outlet tubes and gutter ends where required to
connect to existing downspouts at existing drain system. Furnish and
install expansion joints in 60 foot runs, and in fUns which are restrained
at both ends.
3.
Fabricate and install in accordance with SMACNA Manual, 3rd Edition.
4.
At completion of this work, block downspouts and flood gutters. Notify
Architect prior to testing. Repair leaks and adjust gradients for proper drainage.
Install strainers at each outlet tube.
5.
Install spikes and ferrels @ 12" o.c. Install slits in ferrels downward.
END SECTION 07 600
07700 ROOF SPECIALTIES & ACCESSORIES
I
GENERAL
1.
Division 07 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
07 725 prefabricated ridge vents
GENERAL
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes -
1) Furnishing ridge vents in locations where they currently exist as
well as where shown in Project Manual.
Related work specified elsewhere -
I) Installation specified in Section 07310.
b.
Material:
a. Polypropylene - .080 - .250 gauge.
2.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. "Ridgeline Vent" by Ridgeline Corporation, Detroit, Ml.
b. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding.
Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "C"
Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 WorksJ IlIc. PS
I
'""
07 727 pipe flashing
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes -
I) Installing pipe flashing on existing roof vents or roof vent
extensions.
Related work specified elsewhere -
I) Demolition specified in Section 02 050.
2) Installation specified in Section 07 310.
b.
I
2.
Approved Manufacturer:
a. Any metal lead type
b. Any product from roofing manufacturers specific product line for
application with the specified roofing.
Size:
a. I 1/2",2",3",4", or as required to conform to existing conditions.
I
I
Field verify sizes and quantities required.
I
2.
Install per manufacturer's recommendations.
I
END OF SECTION 07 700
I
07 900 JOINT SEALERS
GENERAL
1.
Division 07 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
07 920 SEALERS & CAULKING
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
I
1.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes But Not Limited To -
I) Furnish and install sealants as specified below for types and
usage and as shown in Project Manual.
2.
Product Storage:
a. Handle to prevent inclusion of foreign matter, damage by water, or
breakage.
b. Deliver and keep in original containers until ready for use.
c. Do not use damaged or deteriorated materials.
d. Store in a cool place, but never under 40 Degree F.
I
I
I
Type of Application:
a. Exterior joints and cracks around windows, louvers, wall penetrations,
connections, and other Joints necessary to seal off building from outside
air and moisture. Meet requirements of -
I) ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, or
2) ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, or
3) Fed Spec TT-S-00227e, Class B, Type 1.
b. Joints in masonry. Meet requirements of -
1) ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Use NT, Class 25, or
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building "e"
Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2) ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, Class 25 (Silicone),
or
Fed Spec TT-S-OOI543A.
3)
2.
Color:
a. Where sealant is not to be painted and is exposed to view, color match to
background, as close as possible, with manufacturer's standard colors.
3.
Cleaners & Primers:
a. As recommended by Manufacturer.
4.
Backing (if necessary):
a. Flexible polyethylene rod equal to Ethafoam or Mince!.
5.
Bond Breaker:
a. As required for proper application and function.
ASTM C 962, "Standard Guide for Use ofElastomeric Joint Sealants", together
with Manufacturer's directions apply to preparation and application of sealants.
2.
Preparation of Surfaces:
a. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free of dust, oil, grease, dew, or frost.
b. Do not apply caulking to painted surfaces. Remove old paint surfaces
and old caulking material.
c. Prime very porous surfaces.
d. Clean and prime surfaces receiving caulking before caulking in
accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Furnish
Manufacturer's latest instructions if required.
3.
Mixing:
a. Mix in exact proportions as recommended by Manufacturer.
b. Do not thin.
c. Secure perfect blend by thorough, slow mixing.
d. Mix five minutes mechanically (one gallon units), or ten minutes by
hand.
e. Do not mix in direct sunlight.
4.
Application of Backing:
a. Polyurethane for open joints be at least 1-1/2 times width of open joint
and of thickness to give solid backing.
b. Backing shall fill up joint so depth of joint is at least one-half its width
for joints from 1/2 inch to one inch.
5.
Application:
a. Apply with a hand-caulking gun. Use gun nozzles ofpropcr size to fit
joints.
b. Completely fill control joints inside walks with caulking material. Do
not use backing material.
c. Minimum adhering surface shall be at 1/2 inch.
d. Seal Joint when it is in normal condition, not contracted or expanded.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - l3uilding "C"
Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} Inc. PS
I
I
f
Use masking tape to protect surrounding surfaces, and remove
immediately after drawing bead, with inner edge drawn away first to
eliminate feather-edging.
After gunning, tool with a putty knife of a suitable size. Tool may be
moistened with solvent to avoid sticking.
Do not apply caulking at temperatures under 50 degrees F.
I
e.
I
g.
6.
Clean-up:
a. Clean adjacent materials which have been soiled immediately (before
setting) with solvents as recommended by Manufacturer.
I
END OF SECTION 07 900
I
I
I
END DIVISION 07
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space-Renovations - Building "C"
Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
DIVISION 08 DOORS & WINDOWS
GENERAL
I
I
1.
General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Division.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish labor, material, and equipment necessary for completion
of specified Work unless indicated or noted otherwise.
I
08100 METAL DOORS & FRAMES
GENERAL
I
1.
Division 08 GENERAL applies to this Section.
08 112 hollow metal frames
I
GENERAL
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnishing hollow metal frames.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Installation specified in Division 06.
b.
Sheet Steel:
a. 16 gauge cold rolled steel.
2.
Finish:
a. Use one of following systems -
I) Prime surfaces with rust inhibiting primer.
2) Galvanize at exterior applications or subjected to high humidity.
3.
Anchors:
a. 14 US gauge meeting UL requirements
4. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Any current member of the Steel Door Institutc.
b. Atlanta Meta' Products, Long Island, NY
c. Fordcrcr Hollow Metal Products, San Francisco, CA
d. Hol-O-Met Manufacturing Corporation, Mesa, AZ
e. Stiles Custom Metal, Ceres, CA
5. Fabrication:
a. General Requirements -
1) Provide frame form as detailed.
2) Frames shall be welded units.
a) Provide temporary spreader on each welded frame.
3) Check with finish hardware schedule.
4) Provide Manufacturer's gauge label for each item.
b. Make breaks, arises, and angles uniform, straight, and true. Accurately
fit comers.
c. Do not extend hinge cut out full width of door unless fill strip is
inserted, weld filled, and ground smooth so no seam appears on back
faceplate.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
I
EXECUTION 1.-
I
d.
I
e.
f.
Provide mortar guards at strikes and hinges.
Punch frame for door silencer.
Provide a minimum of six jamb anchors and two floor anchors per
pre-installed frame. Frames installed after wall construction shall have a
minimum of eight jamb anchors with each frame leg being anchored near
bottom of frame. Anchors to meet wall conditions.
I
Instructions to Installers:
a. Erect frames plumb, true, and square.
b. Stuff frames shown to be insulated with insulation of type specified in
Section 07 200.
I
I
END OF SECTION 08 100
I
08 200 WOOD & PLASTIC DOORS
I
GENERAL
1.
Division 08 GENERAL applies to this Section.
08 211 flush wood doors
I
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish doors noted as "Interior Doors" or "Rotary-cut Flush
Doors".
I
b.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Installation specified in Section 06 200.
2) Finish Hardware speClfied in Section 08700.
3) Finishing specified in Section 09 932.
I
I
2.
Quality Assurance:
a. A WI quality standard" Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of
the Architectural Woodwork Institute and additional requirements given
below.
b. All doors shall have the manufacturer's name permanently affixed to the
hinge side of the door.
I
I
3.
ShOD Drawings:
a. Submit in quadruplicate. Indicate location, swing and size of each door,
product data confirming adherence to Specifications, including but not
necessarily limited to details of construction, location and extent of
hardware backing, requirements for veneer match and other pertinent
data. Do not begin fabrication until approval from Architect.
I
I
I
4.
Product Delivery. Storage. & Handling:.
a. Store upright on a level surface in a dry, well-ventilatcd building. Cover
to keep clean but allow air circulation.
b. Handle with clean gloves and do not drag doors across one another or
across other surfaces.
c. Do not subject doors to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity.
d. Deliver in clean truck and, in wet weather, under cover.
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e. Deliver to building site after plaster, cement, and drywall joint
compound are dry.
5.
Coordination:
a. Coordinate with Sections 08 111 and 08 700 for proper positioning and
type of hardware.
6.
Warranty:
a. See below
Interior Doors:
a. Type - (Custom Grade)
I) A WI Spec Symbol PC-5, Flush.
b. Core Material -
I) WoodBlock
c. Veneer-
I) Rotary cut Birch meeting requirements of ANSIIHPMA HP
1983 "A" Face or AWl Grade 1,1/50 inch thick minimum solid
wood.
2) So called "two-ply" veneers are not acceptable.
d. Construction -
1) 7 ply
2) Thickness: 1%"
e. Warranty-
1) Provided by the National Woodwork Manufacturer's
Association, Chicago, Illinois (latest edition & revision).
f. Double doors require pattern match for transparent finish
g. Approved Manufacturers -
1) Vancouver Door, Inc.
2) Eggers Industries, Neenah, WI
3) Weyerhaeuser, Marshfield, WI
4) Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding.
END OF SECTION 08 200
08 300 SPECIAL DOORS
GENERAL
1.
Division 08 GENERAL applies to this Section.
08 305 ACCESS DOORS
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Furnish access doors at Restrooms, Mechanical areas, and other
locations if required by Code.
2) Furnish 24"x 36" flush access doors at corridor access to attic
area and mechanical loft
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Installation spccified in Section 06 100 or 03 300 as required.
I
I
I
b.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building;C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
I
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IIIG. PS
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
Wall Access:
a. Wallboard-
I) Style C by BOICO
2) Style DW or M by Milcor
3) DSC-214M by Karp
I
I
I
I
3.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Babcock-Davis Associates Inc, Arlington, MA
b. The Bilco Company, New Haven, CT
c. BOICO - Birmingham Ornamental Iron Co, Birmingham, AL
d. Milcor Division INRYCO Inc, Milwaukee, WI
e. Karp Associates Inc, Maspeth, NY
f. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding.
I
I
Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
1.
Scope:
a.
I
I
I
I
08 350 FOLDING DOORS and GRILLES
08353 Accordion Folding Grilles
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
b.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Provide side-folding security grille at Cashier Queue area.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Preparation of opening specified in Division 02 or 06 as
required.
2) Performance of installation specified in Section 06 200.
Curtain:
a. Prefinished aluminum grille.
I
2.
Tracks:
a. Face mounted, heavy extruded aluminum wall channel and overhead
track with adjustable trolley assemblies. Ball-bearing rollers.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
Finish:
a. Brushed or Anodized.
4.
Stacking Dimension:
a. Folding grille storage shall conform to drawing configuration.
5.
Operation:
a. Manual pull, wall-locking.
1) Lead post with cylinders interior/exterior engaging hook bolt
lock and rubber bumpcr full height.
Note: Grille to span entire opening without intermediate post.
2) Traveling end post, with protection plate, self-locks into floor
stop.
6.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. Atlas Door CO, Edison, NJ
b. Crawford Door Co, Century, FL
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION I..
c. Kinear Corp., Columbus, OH
d. Martin Doors, Salt Lake City, UT
e. Overhead Door Corp., Dallas, TX
f. Raynor Manufacturing Co. Dixon, 1L
g. Windsor Door Co Inc., Little Rock, AR
h. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding. See Section 01 630.
Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION 08 300
08400 ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS
I
GENERAL
1.
Division 08 GENERAL applies to this Section.
08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnishing and installing thermal aluminum doors and window
sections.
2) Furnishing and installing single pane aluminum doors and
windows at Tower.
Related Work Speci fied Elsewhere -
1) Glass and glazing specified in Section 08800
2) Hardware specified in Division 08 700.
3) Caulking frame perimeter specified in Section 07 900
b.
2. Protection:
a. Protect surface from damage until Substantial Completion. Repair or replace
damaged materials at no cost to Owner.
3. Submittals:
a. Shop drawings, see Section 01 340.
b. Submit standard anodized color line to Architect
4. Guarantee:
a. Guarantee doors are secure from unauthorized entry under nOITnal use
when locked.
Manuallv Operated Doors:
a. Aluminum -
I) 60631'5 aluminum alloy (ASTM B 221-83, "Specifications for
Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes & Tubes",
alloy GS IOA-T5)
2) Provide welded corners for doors.
b. Stiles & Top Rails-
I) 3-1/2" x 1_3/4" x 0.125" thick
c. Bottom Rail -
1) 10" x 1-3/4" x 0.125" thick
d. Construction -
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - BUilding 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
EXECUTION 1.
I
I) Manufacturer's standard.
e. Glazing Stops -
1) Snap-in type with neoprene bulb-type glazing.
glazed from exterior side.
f. Weatherstripping -
I) Manufacturer's standard.
g. Finish -
I) Anodized, submit standard color line.
h. Approved Manufacturers -
I) US Aluminum
2) Kawneer Company Inc, Norcross, GA
3) PPG Industries, Pittsburgh, P A
4) Tubelite Architectural Products, Reed City, MI
I
Units shall be
I
I
I
2.
Provide thermal break frames
I
3.
Double Glazed Frames:
a. Standard -
I) US Aluminum I" insulated glass system.
b. Aluminum -
I) 6063-TS aluminum alloy.
c. Scaler Tape -
I) 3M
d. Fasteners -
1) Aluminum or nonmagnctic stainless steel. Concealed fastenings
cadmium or zinc plated steel.
e. Finish -
I) Match doors.
f. Caulking -
I) For threshold only.
g. Approved Manufacturers -
1) Match Doors
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.
Fabrication:
a. Construction shall meet Manufacturer's recommendations. Joints shall
be tightly closed.
b. Adequately reinforcc to hold pivots and closers.
I
I
Erection:
a. Threshold shall be set in full bed of mastic, caulked, and made
watertight.
b. Thresholds shall be accurately fitled.
c. Use sealer tape to prevent electrolytic action.
d. Follow Manufacturer's recommcndations for erection.
e. Sct plumb, square, and level in correct alignment, and securely
anchored.
f. Adjust doors for perfcct operation after glazing entry.
g. Refer to Drawings for mullion placement and construction details.
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 08400
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'e'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
08500 METAL WINDOWS
GENERAL
1.
Division 08 GENERAL applies to this section.
08 520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnishing metal window frames complete with glazing.
2) Furnish necessary anchors and accessories, including neoprene
glazing beads.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Caulking specified in Section 07 900.
2) Installation specified in Section 06 200.
3) Metal storefront at entries specified in Section 08 400.
4) Quality of glazing specified in Section 08800.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
b.
2.
Reference Standards:
a. Conform to specifications in ANSI! AAMA 101-85 and meet additional
requirements specified below.
I) Projected - Specification P-C20
2) Fixed - Specification F-C20
3.
Quality Control:
a. Windows shall bear AAMA "Quality Certified" label for type of window
specified above.
4.
Shop Drawings:
a. Submit to Architect in quadruplicate 14 days minimum prior to
beginning fabrication. Include details of sash construction, and
verification of rough opening size.
Windows:
a. Glazing Beads -
1) Manufacturer's standard.
b. Screens -
1) Rolled or extruded frames with 18 x 14 mesh with 0.013 inch
diameter aluminum wire or fiberglass.
c. Glazing -
1) Furnish fixed and ventilated units with double glazing per
Specification 08 800.
2) Sealed Units -
a) Meet requirements of ASTM E 774-84a, "Specification
for Sealed Insulating Glass Units", Class C minimum.
b) Thickness - 3/4 inch minimum
c) Metal-to-glass bond and separated by a 1/4 inch
minimum dehydrated air space.
3) Approved Sealed Unit Manufacturers -
a) Any member of Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturer's
Association.
d. Provide full thermal break sash.
d. Color-
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
EXECUTION 1.
08700 HARDWARE
GENERAL I.
f.
I) Kynar brown finIsh if from standard finish line
2) Otherwise; Bronze Anodized
Approved Manufacturers -
I) Any Manufacturer authorized to use AAMA "Quality Certified"
label for type of window specified is approved upon Architect's
approval prior to bid opening.
Windows:
a. Experienced mechanics shall install windows. Do not force windows
into openings.
b. Set windows plumb, level, and in alignment and secure properly to walls
and mullions with anchors and fastening devices supplied by
Manufacturer.
c. Bed joints at mullions and contacts of windows with sills in mastic
cement supplied by window erector. Trim off excess mastic.
d. A void direct contact between aluminum and adjacent steel work by
insulating with materials equal to 3M's EC 1202 tape if materials are in
pressure contact or with bituminous paint if pressure between surfaces
cannot be maintained.
e. Protect aluminum window surfaces from adjacent work as necessary.
2.
Adiustment & Cleaning:
a. After windows are in place, erection mechanic shall adjust hardware and
ventilators to operate smoothly and be weatherl1ght when closed.
b. After installation, clean interior and exterior metal surfaces of windows
and accessories of mortar, plaster, pamt, and other contaminants.
Maintain protection and provide final cleaning.
END OF SECTION 08 500
Division 08 GENERAL applies to this Section.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Work under this section includes the complete finish hardware
requirements for the Project. Quantities listed are for the
Contractor's convenience only and are not guaranteed. ltems not
specifically mentioned but necessary to complete the Work shall
be furnished, matching the items specified in quality and finish.
Relatcd Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Submittals specified in General Conditions
2) Installation of hardware specified in Section 06 200.
b.
3.
Quality Control:
a. Supplier-
1) Finish hardware shall be supplied by a factory-authorized builder's
hardware distributor for products as specified, or approved and who
has been furnishing hardware in the same area as the Project for a
period of not less than two years. The supplier's organization shall
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
include a mei\-iber of the American Society of Architectural
Hardware Consultants who is available at all reasonable times
during the course of Work to meet with the Owner, Architect or
Contractor for project hardware consultation.
I
b.
Installer-
I) Finish hardware shall be installed only by experienced
tradesmen in compliance with trade union jurisdictions, either at
the door and frame fabrication plant or at the project Site.
I
I
c.
Codes-
I) All finish hardware shall comply with applicable local and/or
current building codes and the Americans with Disabilities Act.
2) Hardware for fire-rated openings shall also be in compliance
with all fire and building codes applicable to the district in
which the building is located. Provide only hardware which has
been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors
required and which complies with the requirements of the door
and door frame labels.
I
I
I
3. Submittals:
a. Submit one (I) copy of manufacturer's data for each item of finish
hardware with one hardware schedule submitted. Data to be used to
assist Architect in reviewing schedule.
b. At the earliest possible date, submit five (5) copies of the finish
hardware schedule, organized into "Hardware Sets" and indicating
complete designation of every item required for each door opening.
Approval of the hardware schedule does not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility to fulfill the Project requirements in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
c. Submit a keying schedule in accordance with the instructions from the
Owner and/or Architect.
d. After the schedules have been approved by the Architect, submit two (2)
copies of the corrected schedules to the Contractor for use and
distribution. Schedules to include copies of manufacturer's data for each
item of finish hardware supplied.
e. Furnish approved hardware schedule and templates for each fabricator of
doors, frames and other work to be factory prepared for the installation
of hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such other work
to confirrn that adequate provisions will be made for the proper
installation of hardware.
f. Sample formal:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
HWl
ONE SGL DOOR 101 CORRIDOR 100 FROM OFFICE 101 LHR 90
3'0" x TO" x 1-3/4 WD x HM 20 Min
1-1/2 PRo Butts BBI279 652 4-1/2 x 4-1/2
I Lockset 5056L 2 LUSTRA - 626
I Closure P2820 - 689
I Kickplate #37 - 12 x 34 - COLOR_
I Wall Bumper W9 626
3 Silencers 64
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 workS} IlIc. PS
I
4.
Product Handling and Storage:
a. Packaging-
I) Each item or package is to be separately tagged with
identification related to the final hardware schedule. Basic
installation instructions shall be included in the packages.
b. Storage-
I) The General Contractor shall provide a locked room at the
jobsite for the storage of the hardware.
5.
Guarantee:
a. Finish hardware shall carry a limited warranty against defects in
material, workmanship and operation for a period of one year, backed by
a factory warranty of the hardware manufacturer, except the door closers
shall have a five year warranty. No liability shall be assumed by the
hardware supplier where faulty operation is due to abuse, improper
usage, improper installation or failure to exercise normal maintenance.
6.
Substitutions:
a. No substitutions of material listed will be allowed without written
consent of the Architect, except approved substitutions as listed. When
substitutions are requested, they shall be in writing and accompanied by
catalog cuts of the proposed item, as well as the specified item. Request
for substitutions to be made no less than ten (10) days prior to bid date.
7.
Keving:
a. Provide small format interchangeable core cylinders compatible with the
"Best" lock system.
b. Keying will be as directed by the Owner.
c. If required, provide temporary cylinders for use during construction,
keyed alike. The Genera' Contractor shall receive six (6) copies of this
key. Upon completion of the building, it shall be the responsibility of the
hardware supplier to furnish permanent cylinders and keys to the Owner
as directed by Architect.
d. Furnish (25) uncut Best "F" keyway keys and uncombinated cores-
Stamp "DO NOT DUPLICATE" on key bow of all blanks.
8
Finish:
a. Exposed surfaces of all hardware shall be dull chrome (626 - 652),
unless noted otherwise.
b. Closures shall be sprayed to match adjacent hardware.
9.
Hardware Groups: (sec Door Schedule)
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 WorkS} IIIG. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I) Storefront entries:
GROUP 01
DBL LEAF 6-0x7-0 STOREFRONT ENTRY DOOR
One (I) ADA Push pad and power accuator per entry (I total)
ADA push pad to be hard-wired
Norton P8501 BF-AL closer on western leaf
Panic Hardware per manufacturer on both leafs
Butts, weather-stripping, sweeps, silencers per manufacturer
GROUP 02
SNGL LEAF 3-0x7-0 STOREFRONT ENTRY DOOR
One (1) ADA Push pad and power accuator per entry (1 total)
ADA push pad to be hard-wired
Panic Hardware per manufacturer
Butts, weather-stripping, sweeps, silencers per manufacturer
No closer
2) Interior flush wood Doors:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
Butts:
a. Sizes:
1)
2)
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Di vision 08 - Doors & Windows
GROUP 03
SNGL LEAF 3-0x7-0 PRIVATE OFFICE - CASHIER
ADA Lever lockset wi Best cylinder per Specification
Lockfunction: Key loek outside only
Butts, stops & holders, silencers per Specification
No closer, sill, or kick plate required.
GROUP 04
SNGL LEAF 3-0x7-0 PUBLIC ROOMS
ADA Lever lockset wi Best cylinder per Specification
Lock function: Key loek outside only
Butts, stops & holders, silencers per Specification
No closer, sill, or kick plate required.
GROUP 05
SNGL LEAF 3-0x7-0 STORAGEIEQUIPMENT
ADA Lever lockset wi Best cylinder per Specification
Lock funetion: Key lock outside only
Butts, stops & holders, silencers per Specification
No closer or sill required.
Kick plates per Specifications
GROUP 06
SNGL LEAF 3-0x7-0 RESTROOM
ADA Lever lockset wi Best cylinder per Specification
Lock function: Key lock outside, button lock inside, button unlocks
upon door closure, no deadbo!ts or latches
Butts, stops & holders, silencers & kick plates per Specification
No closer or sill requircd.
1-3/4" exterior doors
1-3/4" interior doors up to and including 36"
5.0 x 4.5
4.5 x 4.5
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 works} IlIc. PS
I
NOTE: Butt sizes are to be modified if door trim interferes with
the fullest possible degree of opening for doors.
I
b. Quantity:
I) 1-1/2 pair up to and including 90" in height. For doors over 90"
in height supply one additional butt for each additional 30" in
height, or fraction thereof.
c. For unusual size or weight doors, furnish type, size and quantity
. recommended by the butt manufacturer.
d. All exterior and interior reverse bevel locked doors to have non-
removable pins (NRP set screw in barrel).
e. Approved Manufacturer:
I) Hager
f. Acceptable Substitutions:
I) McKinney
2) Stanley
I
I
I
I
I
2.
Locks:
a. Provide curved lip strikes of minimum length to protect trim with
wrought boxes.
b. Design: Lever
c. Approved Manufacturer:
1) Schlage
d. Acceptable Substitutions:
I) Corbin/Russwin
2) Arrow
I
I
I
I
3.
Door Closures:
a. Size as recommended by manufacturer.
b. Power of closer shall be adjusted to conform to the sizing requirements
outlined in ADA & ANSI AII7.1-1980.
c. Provide the proper feet to suit the conditions and the proper length arm
to allow fullest degree of opening for doors.
d. Provide drop plates where required.
e. Contractor shall install all the screws required for the foot.
f. Provide special closer mounting as required where interference with
weatherstrip or sound seal occurs.
g. Door closer brackets shall be installed without notching door seal.
h. Approved Manufacturer:
1) Norton, model P850IBF-AL
2) No substitutions allowed.
I
I
I
I
4.
Kick Plates:
a. Furnish kick plates at interior and exterior side of Restrooms and other
doors if indicated in hardware schedule.
b. Matcrial shall be .050 minimum thickness stainless steel.
c. Plates shall be mounted with truss-head screws of matching finish.
d. Sizc: Height to bc 10", width, as required to provide W' clearance at
sides of doors and stops.
e. Where door seal, sound seal or weatherstrip is installed on the jamb stop
adjust kickplate width to allow 118" - 1/4" clearance each sidc.
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Build.ing 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
f. Where kickplate width will interfere with installation of other hardware,
adjust width for proper clearance.
g. Approved Manufacturer:
I) Rockwood
h. Acceptable Substititions:
I) Builders Brass Works
2) Quality
3) Trimco
I
I
I
I
6. StoDs & Holders:
a. There shall be stops to protect all walls, cabinetwork or hardware
operation. Wall Stops shall be used wherever possible, unless otherwise
called for in the hardware types. Where floor stops are used they shall
be installed DO farther than 8" from the latch edge of the door.
b. Approved Manufacturer:
I) Rockwood
c. Acceptable Substitutions:
I) Builders Brass Works
2) Quality
3) Trimco
I
I
8. Weatherstrip and Thresholds:
a. Where it occurs, weatherstrip shall be applied to both sides of a mullion.
b. All 20 minute doors shall have PK55D door seal, except where sound
seals are specified.
a. Door closures shall be adjusted to allow closing and latching of the door
without slamming.
b. See Drawings for ADA threshold detail.
e. Approved Manufacturer:
I) Pemko
f. Acceptable Substitution:
1) Reese
I
I
I
9. Door Silencers:
a. Quantity: Fumish three (3) for each single door frame and four (4) for
each double frame.
b. Type: 64 for metal frame and 65 for wood frame.
c. Approved Manufacturer:
I) Rockwood
d. Acceptable Substitutions:
I) Builders Brass Works
2) Glynn Johnson
3) Quality
I
I
I
I
I
I
10. Flush Bolts & Dustoroof Strikes:
a. Bolts shall be installed top and bottom inactive leaf of pair of doors.
DUSlproof strike - Mounted in floor or threshold to accept bolt at bottom
of inactive leaf. Supply 12" standard length for doors up to 84" in
height. Doors over 84" will have top rod extension to place center line of
bolt no more than 72" from floor.
b. Approved Manufacturer:
I) Builders Brass Works
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
c.
Acceptable Substitution:
I) Glynn Johnson
I
11.
Automatic Flush Bolts & Related Products:
(Dustproof Strikes, Coordinator, Brackets, etc.)
a. Approved Manufacturer:
I) Door Controls
b. Acceptable Substitution:
I) Glynn Johnson
I
I
12.
Panic hardware:
a. Provide panie hardware where indicated in Hardware groups above.
b. Provide panic hardware by storefront manufacturer
c. Acceptable substitution:
I ) Adams-Wright concealed rod Series 8500 / 8600
2) Door-O-Matic 1490
I
I
I
13.
Pull Bars and Push Plates:
a. Provide Pull bars and Push plates where indicated in Hardware groups
above in Addendum #3 at restrooms.
b. Style: Rounded bars conforming to ADA.
c. Finish: Brushed Aluminum
d. Approved Manufacturers:
I) Tice
2) Quality
3) Builders Brass Works
I
I
I
Preparation:
a. Provide solid blocking for all wall stops and bumpers.
b. Fasteners-
1) Check all conditions and use fastening devices as needed to
secure or anchor all hardware as per manufacturer's published
templates. Self-tapping sheet metal screws are not acceptable.
All closures on wood doors shall be thru-bolted. The Contractor
sball be responsible for drilling wood or metal with the
recommended hole sizes.
I
I
I
I
2.
Installation:
a. The General Contractor shall be responsible for proper installation and
operation of hardware in locations specified. Door closures shall be
installed and adjusted to close and latch the door without slamming.
b. The General Contractor shall protect exposed hardware surfaces during
the construction period from damage to products and finishes.
c. Mounting Heights: Mount units at heights recommended in
"Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for BHMA" except as
otherwise mdicated.
d. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's
instructions.
1) Whencver cutting and fitting are required to install hardware on
surfaces which will be painted or finished at a later time, install
each item completely and then remove and store in a secure
place. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item.
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e.
2) Do not install surface mounted items unless finishes shall be
completed on them.
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to
insure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that
cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
3.
Adjustment:
a. Whenever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy, make a final check and adjustment of all
hardware items during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy.
Clean and lubricate operating items necessary to restore proper function
and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to
compensate for final operation for heating and ventilating equipment.
b. Instruct Owners personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of
hardware and hardware finishes.
END OF SECTION 08 700
I
DIVISION 08 715. ADA POWER ACCUATED DOOR OPERATORS
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Division 08 GENERAL applies to this Section.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited to-
I) Electro-mechanical swing door operating devices
2) Controls and Safety devices
Related Work specified elsewhere:
I) Section 08 400 Entrances and Storefronts
2) Section 08 700 Hardware
3) Division 16 - Electrical: 117 V AC, 15 A power circuit for one
operator. Low voltage control hard-wiring to remote push-pad.
b.
3.
Submittal:
a. Product data: Provide manufacturers product and installation data for all
materials specified herein.
b. Shop drawings: Show profiles, joining method, location of components,
anchorage details, adjacent construction interface, dimensions, and
electrical and wiring requirements.
c. Contract Close-out: Submit Manufacturers written warranty and
performance certification.
d. Provide maintenance data for care and cleaning.
4.
Product Handling:
a. All materials shall arrive in the manufactures original seal and labeled
packaging.
b. Store in a dry, protected and well-ventilated area.
c. Contractor shall report damaged packaging immediately to the carrier and
note such damages on bill of lading.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 workS} IIIG. PS
I
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
I
5.
Warranty:
a. Warranted materials shall be free of defects in material and workmanship
for one year after project close-out.
I
Automatic Door Operator (2 totalt
I
a.
Operator shall be an electro-mechanical system installed onto header to
resist dirt, dust, and corrosion. Bearing shall be fully lubricated and sealed.
Entire operator shall be removable from header as a unit. All equipment
shall operate in temperature extremes of -30d F to BOd F.
Operator shall open door with a fractional HP DC motor through reduction
gears, splined spindle, door arm, and linkage assembly. Drive train shall
have constant positive engagement. Operator shall stop the door in an
open 90 degree position.
Operator shall close door by spring energy. Closing speed to be controlled
by motor acting as dynamic brake.
Operator shall function as manual door closer in the direction of swing
with or without electrical power.
Door forces and speeds generated during power and manual operation
shall not exceed requirements set forth in ANSI A156.19
I
I
b.
I
c.
I
d.
e.
2.
Finishes:
a. Manufacturers anodized mill finish.
I
3.
Accessories:
a. As supplied and/or recommended by manufacturer for a complete
installation.
b. West Entry:
I. 6x6 mounting post, hard-wired with 4\1," square push pad
2. Mnfr: Curran Engineering Inc.
Part #: CE916635 No substitutions accepted
I
I
I
4.
Manufacturer:
a. Stanley Access Technologies
b. Substitutions allowed after bid subjcct to mecting or exceeding
Specifications herein at no additional cost to Owner.
I
I
Inspection:
a. Installer shall verify that installation area is dry, clean and free of foreign
matter. Check as-built conditions and verify manufacturers details for
accuracy to fit the assembly prior to installation. Report in writing to the
Contractor any condition detrimental to the operation of the swinging door
operator and correct prior to any installation.
I
I
2.
Installation:
a. Installation shall be by an installer approved and trained by thc
manufacturer in strict accordance with the manufacturers listing
requirements.
b. Comply fully with manufacturers installation guide.
c. Provide all fasteners required for installation of system
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IIIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
08 800 GLAZING
I
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
Adiustment and Cleaning:
a. After repeated operation of the completed installation, re-adjust door
operators and controls for optimum operating conditions and safety. Clean
all metal surfaces promptly after installation.
4. Safety:
a.
Explain and review the "Daily Safety Check Procedure" with Owner.
END OF SECTION 08 715
1.
Division 08 GENERAL applies to this Section.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
I) Quality of glazing used in windows, doors, and storefront.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Neoprene glazing beads for entrances, window walls, and
windows are specified with frames.
2) Furnishing and installing of glazing used in windows with
insulated glazing specified in Section 08 520.
b.
3.
Glass Standards:
a. Glazing shall meet applicable requirements of Federal Consumer
Product Safety Standard 16CFR 120 I.
b. Except where glass exceeds 5'-6" in width, cut clear glass so any wave
will run horizontally when glazed.
c. Do not install glass having broken or chipped edges.
4.
Manufacturer's Labels:
a. Labels showing strength, grade, thickness, type, and quality are required
on each piece of glass.
5.
Products:
a. Glazing compound shall be type recommended by Window
Manufacturer for specified function.
6.
Execution:
a. Order glass in sufficient time to prevent delay in the work. However,
contact Architect before ordering to determine if there have been
changcs in design.
b. Metal Frames - Glaze in neoprene supplicd with frames.
c. Glaze other glass with a glazing compound in a manner which will leave
glass frce of rattles, and with waves running horizontally.
08830 PATfERNED & WIRED GLASS
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'e'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 works} IItC. PS
I
08 832 wire glass
GENERAL 1.
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
I
Scope:
a.
I
I
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Interior door lites where scheduled.
2) Custom sliding relites per Detail
3) Other locations if indicated within the Contract Documents
I
I
I
I
Glass specified in this paragraph shall meet requirements of Fed Spec
DD-G45Id with following classifications according to use-
a. Type II rolled fIat, 1/4 inch, wired glass.
I) Class I, Style A, Form 1.
a) Quality q8 Glazing.
b) Mesh M2 or M3, UL listed.
Install in glass stops in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
08840 HEAT TREATED FLAT GLASS
1.
Scope:
a.
I
I
I
I
08 842 fullv tempered glass
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
~:XECUTION 1.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnishing and installing glass in entry doors and adjacent
sidelights below door height.
2) Glazing in Tower storefront - single glazed
3) Stopped-in single glazing between spaced glu-lam towcr legs
Meet requirements of ASTM C 1048-85, "Standard Specification For
Heat-Treatcd Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass".
a. Kind - FT
b. Quality -
I) q3 - Glazing select.
Thickness
1) 1/4 inch.
Class -
I)
2)
3)
I
I
I
I
I
c.
d.
Class I - Clear
Class 2 - Tinted Heat-Absorbing & Light-Absorbing.
Combination of above two as indicated.
See Section 08 800 General.
08 850 INSULATING GLASS
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish and install insulating glass in cntranccs and storefronts
where shown on Drawings.
I
Insulating glass shall be manufactured by the following method:
a. Clear outer lite, y," dehydrated air space, clear inner lite
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IIIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Unit thickness 1"
c. U value = .65
2.
Construction:
a. Sealing method shall be with bent comer spacer bar, with a primary seal of
polyisobutylene and a secondary seal of poly sulfide (or silicon).
b. Required "Class A" rating per ASTM E-774 and test method ASTM E-773.
3.
Warranty:
a. Provide 10 year written warranty against seal failure.
b. Provide glass warranty by storefront manufacturer for storefront
components
4.
Approved Manufacturers:
a. . Members of Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (SIMGA)
Sash shall be square and true in plane before installation.
2. Glass stop clearance 1/8 inch.
3.
Frame clearance 1/8 inch.
4.
Use non-hardening sealants.
5. Use neoprene blocks and spacers on all units with face stops.
6.
Locate blocks 1/4 of width of glass in from each end.
7.
Use a full bed of glazing material on bottom of sash.
8.
Trim and slope glazing material from glass to outside stop for water drainage.
9.
Do not cover glass with paper, paint, or other materials. Such coverings act as a
heat trap and may contribute to glass failure due to thermal stresses caused by
increased uneven temperatures.
END SECTION 08 800
END DIVISION 08
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 08 - Doors & Windows
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
I
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
I
I
I
I
I
I
GENERAL
1.
General Conditions and Division 0 I apply to this Division.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for
completion of work unless indicated or noted otherwise.
09100 METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
GENERAL
1.
Division 09 GENERAL applies to this Section.
09 130 ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Provide acoustical suspension system to receive acoustical tile.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Light fixtures in ceilings specified in Division 16.
b.
2. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
a. Meet seismic bracing requirements ofUBC Standard 47-18 or equivalent
governing standard for the location.
3. Tile and Grid Svstem shall be from the same Manufacturer
Systems shall meet requirements of ASTM C 635-83, "Specification for Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile & Lay-In Panel Ceilings", intermediate
duty, electro-galvanized.
a. Exposed surfaces shall be finished with factory-applied white baked
enamel.
b. Main T-Runners & Cross T-Splines-
I) Fabricated of 0.020 inch thick minimum, intermediate duty,
cold-rolled electro-galvanized steel.
2) Main runners and cross T's shall have I" exposed face.
c. Hanger Wire -
I) 12 gauge cold-rolled electro-galvanized steel.
d. Edge Molding -
1) Channel section of 0.020 inch thick cold-rolled
electro-galvanized steel.
e. Hold-down Clips -
1) As required by UL to prevent lifting of panels under unusual
draft conditions.
f. Approved Manufacturers -
I) Chicago Mctallic Corporation, Chicago, IL
2) Donn Corp, Westlake, OH
3) Armstrong World Industries
4) Any approved Acoustic Tile Manufacturer
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building ;C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
EXECUTION I.
2.
3.
Installation shall meet requirements of ASTM C 636-76 (1981), "Recommended
Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
& Lay-In Panels'"
Pay particular attention to required hanger wire placement and fixture
protection. Individual component deflection not to exceed 1/360 of span.
Do not attach suspension system to adjustable folding partition headers.
END OF SECTION 09 100
09 250 GYPSUM BOARD
GENERAL
1.
Division 09 GENERAL applies to this Section.
09 260 gypsum wallboard
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Interior surfaces as shown on Drawings.
2.
Job Conditions:
a. Environmental Requirements -
I) Temperature shall be 55d F minimum day and night during
entire joint operation and until building is occupied. See Scction
01513.
2) Provide ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture.
3) Avoid hot air drafts which will cause too rapid drying.
Gypsum Board:
a. Meet requirements of ASTM C 36-84a, "Specification for Gypsum
Wallboard", Type X, UL one-hour rated.
b. 5/8 inch thick tapered edge Face paper suitable for painting.
c. Use water resistant type conforming to requirements of ASTM C
630-84a, "Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard", in
contact with exterior door and window frames, and on walls in Serving
Area, Restrooms, Custodial Rooms, Boilcr Room, and Font Room.
2.
Metal Accessories:
a. 26 gauge steel, electrolytic galvanized zinc-coated, treated for maximum
ccment and paint adhesion. Surfaces to rcccivc bedding cement shall be
knurled for maximum bonding.
I) Comer Beads -
a) 1 1/8" leg minimum square bead at all corners, except:
b) Usc bullnose corners at:
. (3) sides of window wrap per Details
. Soffit horizontal outside corners.
. Bottom cdge of skylight well
. Other location per Details.
Casing -
a) Channcl type.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
2)
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3)
Control Joints -
a) USG #D93
Furring Channels -
a) 25 gauge galvanized USG DWC
Resilient Channel -
a) RC-I indicated on Drawings at room side of interior
stud walls, typical. Coordinate with hollow metal jamb
throat opening dimension if necessary.
b) Note additional RC-I requirements in Section 09-530.
4)
5)
3.
Joint Compound & Reinforcing:
a. Best recommended by Wallboard Manufacturer.
4.
Bugle Head Screws:
a. Meet requirements of ASTM C 1002-83, "Steel Drill Screws for
Application of Gypsum Board"
1) Type G - For fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
2) Type S - For fastening gypsum board to steel framing members.
3) Type W - For fastening gypsum board to wood members.
Metal Wood Gypsum Laminate
(Type S) (Type W) (Type G)
5/8" Single Layer I" 1-3/8"
3/8" Double Layer 1-1/8" 1-1/2"
1/2" Double Layer 1-3/8" 1-3/4"
5/8" Double Layer 1-5/8" 2"
None
Nominal size
Nominal size
Nominal size
Fastening:
a. Apply from center of wallboard towards ends and edges.
b. Do not apply screws closer than 3/8 inch to ends or edges.
c. Space screws not over 12 inches o.c.
d. Adjust power screw-driver to set heads in 1/32 inch dimple.
e. Do not break face paper. If face is accidentally broken, apply second
screw 2 inches away.
f. Screws on adjacent ends or edges should be opposite each other.
g. Drive screws with shank perpendicular to face of board.
2. Single Laver Application:
a. Apply ceilings first. (Use minimum of two men)
b. Use board of size to give minimum number of joints.
c. Apply board at right angles to support. Shim to level.
d. Stagger end joints. End joints shall occur over framing members or be
back blocked with 2x4.
e. Butt edges in moderate contact. Do not force in place.
f. Leave facings true with joint, finishing flush, vertical work plumb, and
ceiling surfaces level.
g. Scribe work closely. Kecp joints as far from opcnings as possible. If
joints occur near an opening, apply wallboard so vcrtical joints arc
centered over openings. No vertical joints shall occur within 8 inches of
external comers or openings.
h. After installation, pound on walls and ceilings to detect loose screws.
Push on board adjacent to fasteners to dctect movcment. Tighten loose
screws.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
3.
Double Layer Application:
a. Apply base layer parallel to studs and attach with appropriate specified
screws 8 inches o.c. at edges and 12 inches o.c. in field.
b. Apply face layer with joints staggered in relationship to base and
occurring over studs. Use combination of adhesive and screws to meet
Manufacturer's specifications for fire-rated construction.
c. Caulk perimeter in offices, etc, for sound attenuation.
4.
Metal Trim:
a. Corner Beads -
I) Apply tape-on metal trim.
2) Using metal bead as a screed, cover both flanges with joint
compound about 3" to 4" wide. Topping or finishing compound
is not recommended for first application. Allow 12 to 24 hours
or more to dry.
3) Sand lightly if necessary. Apply second coat of joint or topping
compound feathering edges 2" to 3" beyond preceding coat.
b. Windows & Doors -
I) Apply metal edge over gypsum board where it abuts exterior
metal window or door frames. Hold metal trim back from metal
window or door frames 1/8" to allow for caulking by Division
07.
c. Trim-
I) Apply in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
d. If partitions have an exposed free end, apply widc angle tape.
5.
Taping:
a. Buttering Joints -
I) Check screws by drawing finishing knife across surface. Drive
home protruding screws, leaving a dimple in wallboard.
2) With broad steel finishing knife, butter joint compound into
channel formed by tapered edges of board. Fill channel fully
and evenly. Avoid heavy fills.
b. Embedding Tape -
I) Center tape reinforccment and press it down into fresh joint
compound. Hold knife at approximately 45 deg angle to board
and draw along joint with sufficient pressure to rcmove excess
compound. Leave sufficient compound under tape for propcr
bond but not over 1/64 inch under feathercd edge.
2) . Do not use topping or finishing compound for embedding tape.
c. Covering Tape -
I) When tape is embedded, apply skim coat of joint compound
immediately after cmbedding to reduce possibility of edge
wrinkling or curling, or edge cracking.
2) Allow to dry twelve hours.
d. Spotting Screw l'leads -
I) Apply first coat of compound over scrcw heads immediately
prior to or after embedding tape. Use prcssure on knife to finish
compound level with wall surfacc.
2) Spot screw hcads in similar manner during second coat
application of compound.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.
I
09300 TILE
I
GENERAL
1.
2.
I
I
I
e.
3) During application of third coat over joints, sand screw heads
lightly and apply third finishing coats. "Durite" Screenbak
sanding cloth, 320 or 220 grit, is recommended for best results.
Allow compound over screw heads to completely dry.
4) Light sanding may be necessary before decoration.
Second Coat Application -
I) After embedding and covering coat is completely dry, 24 hours
under good drying conditions, apply second coat feathered
approximately 1-1/2 inches beyond edges of first coat. Allow to
dry.
Third Coat Application -
I) After second coat is dry, sand lightly. Apply thin "finishing"
coat to joints. Feather joint edges 2 inches minimum beyond
second coat. Sand lightly when dry.
End Joints -
I) Treat butt or end joints the same as tapered joints.
2) Fill joint with compound to a point slightly above surface of
boards to allow for shrinkage in drying.
3) Apply additional compound along eaeh side of joint and embed
tape as described for tapered joints. Apply covering, second,
and third coats in same manner as tapered joints.
4) Feather finishing coats of compound wider (approximately 24
inches) as there is no taper in which to embed tape.
Finishing Inside Corners -
I) Fold tape along center crease. Butter both sides of corner with
joint compound and apply tape.
2) Apply second and third coats of compound (one side at a time)
in same manner used to finish flat joints.
Standards -
1) At Janitors Closet, and Equipment Room achieve Architectural
Tape level II, fire tape only
2) At restrooms achieve Architectural Tape level V, high gloss.
3) All other rooms achieve Architectural Tape level IV for matte
finish after prime coat.
f.
g.
h.
I.
Cleaning:
a. Remove from Site all debris connected with this work.
END OF SECTION 09 250
Division 09 GENERAL applies to this Section.
References:
a. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of America, Inc.
(TCA) 2002. Qualification data for firms and persons specified to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed
projects with project names, addresses, and names of Architects and
Owners.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'e'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol"C Desi(Jl1 Works, IIIG. PS
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
3.
Ouality Assurance:
a. Source of Materials-
I) Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and
color of tile, grout, and setting materials.
b. Installer-
I) A firm with successful experience in work similar in scope to
the work of this project.
I
I
I
I
4.
Delivery. Storage. and Handling:
a. Comply with ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. Deliver
and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact until time of use. Prevent damage or contamination to
materials by water, freezing, foreign matter. or other causes.
I
I
5.
Proiect Conditions:
a. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after
installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's
printed recommendations. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent
damage to tile work form carbon dioxide buildup. Maintain
temperatures at not less than 50 degrees F in tiled areas during
installation and for 7 days after completion unless higher temperatures
are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's
instructions.
I
I
6.
Maintenance:
a. Extra Materials-
I) Furnish not less than 2 percent maintenance stock for each type,
color, pattern, and size of tile product installed.
2) Deliver stock of maintenance materials to the Owner. Fumish
maintenance materials from same lot as material installed, and
enclosed in protective packaging with appropriate identifying
labels.
I
I
I
General Materials:
a. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1.
"American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic tile." unless
otherwise indicated. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade"
requirements unless otherwise indicated. ANSI Standard for Tile
Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard refercnced with
products and materials indicated for setting and grouting.
b. Colors, Textures, and Patterns-
I) For tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors,
surface textures, or other appearance characteristics, provide
products as scheduled on drawings.
c. Factory Blcnding-
I) Blend tile in factory. and package accordingly so that tIle units
taken from one package will show thc same range in colors as
those taken from other packages and will match approved
samples.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 works} IlIc. PS
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Exanlination:
a. Examine surfaces to receive tile work, with installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of installed tile. Do not proceed with
tile work until surfaces and conditions comply with requirements
indicated in referenced tile installation standard.
2.
Preparation:
a. Blending-
I) For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected,
verifY that tile has been blended in factory and packaged
accordingly so that tile units taken from one paekage will show
the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and
will match approved samples. If not factory blended, either
return to manufacturer or blend tiles at project site before
installing.
b. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating-
I) Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent adhesion or
staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, pre-coat exposed tile
surfaces with a continuous film of temporary protective coatmg,
taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.
Installation - (general):
a. ANSI tile Installation Standard: Comply with applicable parts of ANSI
AI08.4-1999 series of tile installation standards included under
"American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of
Ceramic Tile" for the type of setting and grouting materials and methods
indicated.
b. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic tile
Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated, or ifnot
otherwise indicated, as applicable to installation conditions shown.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and
fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions. Terminate
work neatly at obstructions, edges, and comers without disrupting
pattern or joint alignment. Accurately form intersections and returns.
Perform cutting and drilling of tile without matting visible surfaces.
Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items
for straight, aligned joints. Fix tilc closcly to electrical outlets, piping,
fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap
tile.
c. Joint patterns-
1) Lay tile joints in grid pattem as shown on Drawings. Align
joints when adjoining tiles on base, walls, and trim arc same
size. Layout tile work and center tile fields in both directions in
cach space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown.
4. Mixing Mortar and Grout:
a. Mix mortar and grout to comply with requirements of referenced
standards and manufacturers, to produce mortar and grout of uniform
quality with optimum performance characteristics for application
indicated.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 workS} IlIc. PS
I
5. Cleaning and Protection:
a. Cleaning-
I) Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic
tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Remove latex-
portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended
by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout
manufacturer. Apply tile filler to clean, dry tile in compliance
with filler manufacturer's directions. Repeat application as
necessary to obtain uniform color in appearance of both tile and
grout.
b. Finished Tile Work-
I) Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped,
broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work.
c. Protection-
I) When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective
coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile work.
Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy
covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage,
and wear. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings
and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
09 392 interior floor tile. mortar bed
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
1.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
I) Interior floor tile in Restrooms.
2) 1 y," maximum thickness. mortar bed sloped to floor drains
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
I) Section 09 300 applies to this Section.
b.
Setting Materials:
a. Epoxy resin based setting material: ANSI AII8.3.
b. Approvcd manufacturers-
I) American Olean Tile Company.
2) Boiardi Products Corporation.
3) Bostik Construction Products Division/Emhart Corporation.
4) Custom Building Products, Inc.
5) C-Cure Chemical Company, Inc.
6) Mapei Corporation.
2.
Grouting Materials:
a. Epoxy rcsin based Grout: Comply with ANSI AII8.
b. Approvcd Manufacturers-
I) Custom Building Products.
2) Mapci Corporation.
Application:
a. Conform to ANSI Al 08.5 for tile, ANSI A 108.6-1999 for installation of
ceramic tile... epoxy grouting, and TCA Assembly FI13-89.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'e'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
D
I
I
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2_ Installation:
a. Install expansion and contraction joints if in locations shown on
Drawings per TCA EJl71-89. Coordinate with Architect.
I
I
3. Protection:
a. Protect floors from foot traffic for at least 48 hours and general traffic
for at least 72 hours after installation. Prohibit heavy traffic on floors
for at least 7 days after installation.
09500 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENTS
GENERAL
1.
Division 09 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary installation of
acoustical ceiling areas as described in Drawings.
I
I
3.
Maintenance Materials:
a. Provide Owner with 80 sf of tile for future use.
4.
Product Storage:
a. Store materials where protected from moisture and damage.
b. Use no soiled, scratched, or broken material in the Work.
I
~I
5.
Environmental Conditions:
a. Temperature at time of setting tile shall be 65 d F minimum.
.6.
Coordination:
a. Coordinate with other Sections involved.
I
7. Execution:
a. Preparation -
1) Inspect for defects in backing and support that would not be
acceptable to produce a first class job. Do not apply material
until defects are eorrected.
2) Materials shall be dry and clean at time of application.
b. Installation -
I) Work shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's
recommendations insofar as they are concerned with Contract
Documents.
2) Layout tile symmetrically about centerlines of room unless
shown otherwise by Drawings or directed by Architect in the
field.
3) Leave tile in true plane with straight, even joints.
4) Tile joints shall be straight and in alignment, and exposed
surface flush and level. Wherever tile abuts walls, columns, and
other vertical surfaces, furnish and install specified molding.
5) Locate fixtures symmetrically in room insofar as possible
(unless shown otherwise). Locate fixtures within tile spaces or
centerline on tile joints. Keep method of locating fixtures as
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
I
consistent as possible throughout building. Fixture location
method within each room shall always be consistent.
I
I
I
c. Adjustment & Cleaning -
I) "Touch-up" minor abraded surfaces.
2) Remove from site all debris connected with work of this Section.
3) Remove and replace discolored tile to match adjacent tile.
4) Remove and replace damaged or out-of-Ievel tile at no cost to
Owner.
I
I
09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 513 tile susoended
GENERAL I.
PRODUCTS I.
F:XF:CUTION I.
Scope:
a.
I
I
b.
Includes But Not Limited To -
I) Furnish and install tile for suspended ceilings.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Suspension System specified in Section 09 100.
2) Painting specified in Section 09 900.
I
I
Tile:
a. Mineral Fiber Lay-in panels
b. Finish -
I) Factory applied white coating with a light reflection coefficient
minimum of 0.75.
c. Rating -
I) Non-rated
d. Pattern -
I) Random fissured - unless selected differently by Architcct.
e. Thickness -
1) 5/8 inch minimum.
f. NRC Range-
l) .65 to .85 minimum
g. Approvcd Manufacturers -
I) Armstrong World Industrics Co, Lancaster, PA
2) Celotex Corp, Tampa, FL
3) US Gypsum, Chicago, IL
4) Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding. See General
Specification.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section 09-500 GENERAL applies to this Section.
2. Install lay-in panels in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
1.
Scooc:
a. Includes but Not Limited To -
I
I
09530 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION. BARRIERS & WALL TREATMENTS
GENERAL
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IIIC. PS
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b.
I) Furnishing acoustical insulation and systems on all walls
between Corridors and Offices, between all Offices, and
between offices.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Installation specified in Division 06.
Fiberglass Insulation:
a. Provide unfaced R-II.
b. Approved Manufacturers-
I) U S Gypsum Company, Chicago, IL
2) Owens-Coming Fiberglass Corp, Toledo, OH
3) Manville Corp, Denver, CO
4) Equals as approved by Architect prior to bidding.
2.
Acoustical Sealant:
a. Non-hardening, non-bleeding, and non-drying resilient water based
caulk.
b. Approved Manufacturers-
I) Acoustical Sealant by U.S. Gypsum Company.
2) Acoustical Sealant BA-98 by Pecora Corp.
3) Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding.
3.
Resilient Channels:
a. RC-I as manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Corp.
b. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding. See Section 0 I 630.
General:
a. Fabricate as indicated on Drawings.
b. Wood or metal members to be properly secured in place; straight true
and plumb.
2.
Acoustical Walls:
a. Walls detailed for acoustical performance are to be constructed to be
completely sealed airtight.
b. Electrical boxes are to be sealed with caulking to not let air pass through
the back or side openings. Electrical boxes shall not be placed back to
back in a wall.
c. When resilient channels are specified, apply per manufacturer's
directions, and with top of channel toward the gypsum wallboard.
d. Note double plate wall between upstairs Restroom and Testing Rooms.
Provide 2 complete separate wall systems with RC-l on both sides.
Insulate wall stud spaces and cavity between prior to wall board
application.
3. Penetrations:
a. Penetrations of acoustical walls or floors by piping, conduit, or ductwork
larger than 1-1/2" diameter, shall be made by providing a sheet metal 18
gauge sleeve covering the entire inside perimeter of a 1" oversized wall
or ceiling cut (does not apply to concrete block). This sleeve shall be
plastered to the wall, ceiling, or floor to ensure an airtight seal.
b. Penetrations smaller than 1-1/2" in diameter do not require the metal
sleeving, but shall be sealed airtight with acoustical caulk.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
c.
Where acoustical double walls are penetrated, a separate sleeve shall be
cut and fit to each side of the wall (allow no sleeve connection between
walls).
I
END OF SECTION 09 500
I
09 667 RESILEINT SHEET LINOLEUM
I
GENERAL
1.
Division 09 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
2.
Scope:
a.
I
b.
Includes but Not Limited To-
I) Homogeneous linoleum sheet flooring, adhesive and heat
welded seams installation. See Sheet A-24 for patterning.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Rubber base specified in Section 09 678.
I
3.
Standards:
a. ASTM F 2031 for Linoleum Sheet Flooring
b. ASTM E 662-83 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated
by Solid Materials.
c. ASTM T 710-86 Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other
Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.
d. ASTM 492 for Impact Insulation.
I
I
4.
Submittals:
a. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Division 00
GeneralConditions and Division 1 Submittal procedures.
b. Product Data: Submit product data, including MSDS sheets, for
specified products.
c. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and
product components, including anchorage accessories, finish colors, and
textures.
d. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finished, colors,
and textures.
e. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
1) Operation and Maintcnance Data: Operation and maintenance
data for installed products in accordance with Division I
Closeout Submittals (Maintenance data and Operation Data)
Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products,
and precautions against cleaning matcrials and methods
detrimental to finishes and performance.
2) Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.
Quality Assurance:
a. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this
section that has specialized in installation of work similar to the required
for this project.
b. Mock-Ups: Install at project Site a Job mock-up using acceptable
products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - FinIshes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Owner's and Architects acceptance of finish color, texture and pattern,
and workmanship standard prior to commencing Work.
6.
Delivery. Storage. and Handling;
a. General: Comply with Division I Product Requirements Sections
b. Ordering: Comply with manufacturers ordering instructions and lead-
time requirements to avoid construction delays.
c. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturers-original, unopened,
undamaged containers with identification label intact.
d. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to
harmful weather conditions and a temperature and humidity conditions
recommended by manufacture.
I) Material should be stored in areas that are full enclosed,
weather-tight with the permanent HV AC system set at a uniform
temperature of at least 68d F for 72 hrs. prior to, during and after
installation.
7.
Proiect Conditions:
a. Environmental Requirements and Conditions: In accordance with
manufacturers recommendations, areas to receive flooring shall be clcan,
fully enclosed, weather-tight with the permanent HV AC set at a uniform
temperature of at least 68d F. The flooring materials should be
conditioned in the same manner. Maximum temperature should not
exceed] OOd F after installation.
b. Temperature Rcquirements. Maintain air temperature in spaces where
products will be installed for time period before and after installation
recommended by manufacturer.
I) Temperature Conditions 68d F for 72 hours prior to, during and
after installation.
c. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements openings by field
measurements before fabrication, show recorded measurements on shop
drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid construction delays.
8.
Sequencing and Scheduling:
a. Finishing Operations: Install the flooring after finishing operations.
Including painting and ceiling operations, have been completed.
b. Concrete Curing: Do not install flooring over concrete substrates until
substrates have cured and are dry to hand with adhesive as determined
by resilient flooring manufacture's recommended bond, moisture test,
and pill test.
9.
Warrantv:
a. Project Warranty: Refer to Division 00 General Conditions for project
warranty provisions.
b. Manufacturers Warranty: Submit for Owner's acceptance, manu-
facturers standard warranty documcnt executed by authorized company
official. Manufacturers warranty is addition to, and not a limitation of,
other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
1) Warranty Period: Five (5) year limited warranty commencing on
Date of Substantial Completion.
Penmsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
PRODUCTS 1.
EXECUTION 1.
I
10.
Maintenance:
a. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner extra 100 sf of each color materials
from same production as products installed. Package product with
protective covering and identifY with descriptive labels. Comply with
Division 01 Closeout Submittals.
I
I
Linoleum Sheet Flooring:
a. Approved Manufacturer's:
I) Marrnoleum by Farbo Linoleum, Inc. Humboldt Industrial Park,
Maplewood Drive, PO Box 667, Hazelton, PA 18201.
800 342 0604, Fax 206 842 0889
E-mail www.forboLinoleumNA.com
2) Marmorette by Armstrong, 2500 Columbia A venue, PO Box
3001, Lancaster, PA 17603
877 276 7876, Fax 800-599-9335
I
I
I
2.
Product Substitutions:
a. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.
I
3.
Related Materials:
a. Related Materials:
I) Underlayment and Patching Compound: Refer to both
topping slab and flooring manufacturers
recommendations for compatibility of Portland cement-
based underlayment and patching / leveling compounds.
2) Resilient Flooring Accessories: Manufacturers
recommended accessories for a complete high-quality
installation
I
I
I
4.
I
Source Ouality:
a. Source Quality: Obtain flooring product materials from a single
manufacturer.
I
Manufacturer's instructions:
a. Compliance: Comply with manufacturers product data, including
product technical bulletins, product catalog installation, instructions, and
product carton instructions for installation.
I
2.
Examination:
a. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have
been previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for
product installation in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
b. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturers installation
requirements, visually inspect materials prior to installation. Material
with visual defects shall not be installed and shall not be considered as a
legitimate claim.
I
I
I
3.
Preparation:
a. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish
surfaces from damage during product installation.
b. Surface Preparation:
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~c Desi(Jl1 Works} 111c. PS
I
4. Installation:
a. Adhesive flooring installation: Cut required length of linoleum flooring
from roll allowing enough material to extend up the wall 4 to 6 inches at
either end. Layout and position sheet flooring so that any seams will fall
at least 6 inches from underlayment joints or saw cuts in concrete
substrate. Scribe and cut flooring material to shape of vertical surfaces,
including walls and partitions. Apply adhesive and lay sheet flooring
into wet adhesive and with a I OO-pound roller. Install sheet Flooring
square with room.
1) Adhesive, Seamless Flooring Installation: Rout out seams and
heat weld together with complementary colored heat welding
rod of complementary composition in accordance with resilient
flooring manufacturers recommendations.
2) Adhesive Material Installation: Use trowel as recommended by
flooring manufacturer of specific adhesive. Spread at a rate of
approximately 150 sq.ft/gal., or as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
b. Installation Techniques:
1) Where casework and other items are indicated for installation on
top of finished flooring install flooring before these items are
installed.
2) Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt tightly to vertical surfaces,
and permanent fixtures including pipes, outlets edging,
thresholds, and nosmgs.
3) Extend flooring in toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar
openmgs.
4) Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and
similar items occurring within finish floor areas. Maintain
overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring
installed on these covers.
5) Do not install resilient flooring over expansion joints. Use
expansion joint covers manufactured for use with resilient
flooring.
6) Adhere resilient flooring substrate without producing open
cracks, voids, raising and buckling atJoints, telegraphing of
adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in
completed installation. Use adhesive applied to substrate in
compliance with flooring manufactures recommendations,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I)
General: Prepare Floor Substrate in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
Floor Substrate: Prepare floor substrate to be smooth, rigid, flat,
level; permanently dry clean and free offoreign materials such
as dust, paint, grease, oils, solvent, curing and hardening
compounds, sealers, asphalt and old adhesive residue.
Concrete Floor Substrate: Concrete floor substrate shall have a
minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi. Refer to Section
03-540 for self-leveling compounds with Portland cement based
compounds. Do not use or install flooring over gypsum-based
leveling or patching materials. Reference Standard. Comply
with ASTM F 71 0 Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and
Other Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.
2)
3)
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'c'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
5.
I
7)
including those for trowel notching, adhesive mIxing, and
adhesive open and working times.
Roll Resilient flooring as required by resilient flooring
manufacturer.
I
I
Field Oualitv ReQuirements:
a. Manufacturers Field Services: Upon Owner's request and with a least 72
hours notice, provide manufacturer's field service consisting a t product
use recommendations and periodic sit visit for inspection of product
installation in accordance with manufacture's instructions.
I
I
6.
Cleaning:
a. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent
Work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean
installed products in accordance with manufacturers instructions prior to
owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project Site and
legally dispose of debris.
1) Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using
cleaning methods recommended by the floor manufacturer.
2) Sweep and vacuum floor after installation.
3) Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by the
flooring manufacturer.
4) Damp-mop tile flooring to remove black marks and soil.
I
I
I
I
4.
Protection:
a. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage
during construction. Remove and legally dispose of protective covering
at time of Substantial Completion.
I
5.
Initial Maintenance Procedures:
a. General: Include in Contract sum amount cost for initial maintenance
procedures, and execute procedures after flooring installation as
recommended by flooring manufacturer.
b. Initial maintenance "Start Kit" supplied by manufacturer. Initial
maintenance to be conducted by flooring contractor.
c. Drying Room Yellowing: Expose installed linoleum to either natural or
artificial light to allow "drying room yellowing": (the film is a natural
occurrence of the oxidation of the linseed oil in linoleum products) on
installed linoleum flooring.
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 09 665
I
09678 RESILIENT BASE & ACCESSORIES
GENERAL
1.
Scope:
a.
I
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish and install molded rubber products as described in
Contract Documents.
I
2.
Protection:
a. Keep traffic away until adhesive has set.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} Iltc. PS
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
09 676 FLOOR MATS
GENERAL
I
I
I
3.
Submittals:
a. Submit samples to Architect for approval.
Rubber Material:
a. Homogeneous, first-quality rubber compound, free of foreign materials,
properly vulcanized, free from objectionable odors, blisters, cracks, and
other defects affecting appearance or serviceability of rubber and shall
not contain fabric
b. Color pigments used shall be highly fade-resistant, insoluble in water,
and resistant to light, alkali and other cleaning agents.
c. Colors as selected by Architect.
2. Base:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Molded or Extruded/Vulcanized rubber.
Size - 1/8" x 6" in Main Lobby, 1/8"x 4" in all other spaces.
Use preformed external comers, butt joint interior comers.
Style -
I) Use coved base over glued-down carpet, resilient flooring or
concrete slabs.
e. Approved Manufacturers -
I) Burke Flooring Products, San Jose, CA
2) Flexco, Tuscumbia, AL
3) Johnsonite Flooring Products Div, Middlefield, 01-1
4) Roppe Rubber Corporation, Fostoria, 01-1.
3.
Adhesive:
a. Best for work as recommended by Manufacturer.
Surface to rcccive rubber shall be sound, clean, free from foreign matter, tightly
nailed, and dry.
2.
Installation:
a. Fit rubber tightly. Use fillers where necessary.
b. Secure rubber with Manufacturer's approved adhesive. Cement base
substantially to vertical surfaces excluding cabinetwork p-Iam kicks.
c. Line up top and bottom lines of base throughout.
d. Roll rubber until firm bond has been establishcd.
END OF SECTION 09 650
1.
Division 09 GENERAL applies to this Scction.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includcs but Not Limited to-
I) Labor, materials and cquipment necessary for a complete
installation of mats indicated as 'TIRE TILE" on Sheet
A-03.
I. Submittal:
a. Product data
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, IlIc. PS
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION I.
09 680 CARPET
GENERAL
I
b.
c.
Sample: Submit 12" square section of mat showing full range of color,
texture and variations to be expected.
Maintenance data for care and cleaning of mats
I
Rubber Mats: 12"xI2" x3/8" thick "Tirex" tile
I
2.
Color: Natural
I
3.
Frame:
a. Manufactures standard aluminum frame
b. Alternate: 1/2" x I" x 1/8" galvanized steel angle with mitered comers with I"
leg floated flush into recessed concrete leaving 3/8" inside reveal.
Adhesive:
a. As supplied and/or recommended by manufacturer
I
I
2.
3.
Manufacturer:
a. Pacific Mat
b. Equal as approved by Architect
I
Installation:
a. Comply with Manufacturers instructions.
b. Place tiles in parquet pattem
I
2.
I
Protection:
After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of
3/8" plywood of fiberboard in recess and cover frame and concrete edge with 1/4"
plywood protective cover. Maintain protection during construction and install floor
mats just prior to Substantial Completion.
I
END OF SECTION 09-676
I
I
1.
Division 09 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
09686 SHEET CARPET. DIRECT GLUE DOWN
GENERAL
I.
Scope:
a.
I
Includcs but Not Limited To -
1) Modular tile carpet and adhesives to bc provided by Owner.
2) Labor, equipment, and accessories as noted necessary for
complete, finished carpet installation to be provided by
Contractor.
I
2.
I
Environmental Requirements:
a. Tempcrature shall be 60d F minimum and 95d F maximum for seven
days prior to installation of carpet and continuously during installation.
I
4.
Installcr Oualification:
a. Carpet layer shall be skilled mechanic who has scrved full two-year
apprcnticeship and installs carpet as a full timc profession.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
OI:9>>tPic Desi(Jl1 workS} IIIG. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I
I
I
5.
Guarantee:
a. Provide one year free service for correcting conditions resulting from
faulty installation workmanship. Faulty workmanship shall include but
not be limited to -
I) Open seams
2) Over compressed (humped) seams
3) .Frayed seams
4) Air bubbles or wrinkles
5) Failure to neatly butt to walls and around door frames.
6) Poor pattem match
6.
Specification of Owner supplied carpet
a. Construction: Level loop woven/tufted
b. Pile Fiber: Nylon or equal
c. Tufted Pile Weight: 3602 I SY conforming to ASTM D 1335-98
tufted bind test
1/13
7700 min.
d.
Gauge:
Density:
e.
Carpet: - Owner Supplied - Contractor Installed
a. Manufacturer -
I) Collins & Aikman
a. Color as selected from Habitat sow modular tile line.
2.
Glue-Down Carpet Accessories:
a. Adhesive - Owner Supplied - Contractor Installed:
I) Peel and stick application
b. Plastic Trim Strips- Contractor Supplied and Installed
I) Resilient vinyl as manufactured by Mercer Plastic Co.
2) Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding. See Section 01
630.
3.
Floor Patching Compound - Contractor Supplied and Installed:
a. Ardex K-15 by Ardex Inc, Coraopolis (Pittsburgh), PA
b. Webpatch by Durabond Professional Products Company
c. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding. See Section 01 630.
Notify Architect in writing if sub floor base is not acceptable. Do not lay carpet
over unsuitable surface.
2.
Installation:
a. Seaming -
I) Minimize seams hy beginning pattem layout in center ofrooms.
b. Restrict use of small pieces of carpet to complete.
3.
Laying of Modular Carpet Tiles:
a. Seal concrete with a sealer recommcndcd by Carpet Manufacturer and
compatible with adhesive.
b. Snap a chalk lines to mark initial layout. Verify room dimensions will
not leave small strips at walls.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 works} IlIc. PS
I
4.
09900 PAINTING
GENERAL
I
c.
At columns and other penetrations, cut carpet with maximum possible
overage. Position seams made by these cuts first.
I
Salvage:
a. U sable pieces of carpet left over from installation are property of Owner.
Stack neatly and store in one location in building. Remove scraps and
trimmings from site.
I
I
END OF SECTION 09 680
I
1.
Division 09 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for finish of
interior and exterior surfaces and trim as indicated in the
Contract Documents.
2) Painting of fire-sprinkler piping in exposed locations should
they occur.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
I) Painting mechanical equipment specified in Division 15
2) Back-priming of siding, fascias and trims specified in Division
06.
I
I
I
b.
I
3.
Product Delivery & Storage:
a. Deliver specified products in original containcrs with seals unbroken and
labels intact.
b. Store materials in single place.
c. Keep storage arca clean and rectify damage thereto. Maintain storage
area temperature at 55 deg F minimum.
I
I
4.
Environmental Conditions:
a. Perform painting operations at tcmperature conditions recommended by
Manufacturer for each operation.
I
5.
I
Protection:
a. Remove all oily rags and waste from building each night. Take every
precaution to avoid danger of fire.
b. Protect finish work and adjacent matcrials during painting.
I
6.
Products:
a. Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, and other painting materials shall bc
pure, of highest quality, and bear idcntifying labels on containers.
b. Tinting color shall be best grade of type recommended by Manufacturer
of paint or stain used on job.
c. Approved Manufacturers -
1) PPG Industries, Pittsburgh, P A
2) Fuller O'Brien, South San Francisco, CA
3) Parker Paints, Tacoma, W A
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works, Inc. PS
I
I
I
d.
4) Benjamin Moore, Montvale, NJ
5) Pratt & Lambert, Buffalo, NY
6) The Sherwin-Williams Company, Cleveland, OH
7) Martin-Senour Paints, Clevland, OH
For the purpose of this specification, PPG Pittsburgh Paints has been
listed as the guide. Other approved manufactures shall submit
documentation with submittals to assure conformance with products
specified.
I
I
I
7. Execution:
a. Preparation -
I) Examine Contract Documents for painting requirements of other
trades. Become familiar with their painting provisions and the
painting of finish surfaces left unfinished by the requirements of
other Sections.
2) Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free ofloose dirt.
Clean and dust surfaces before painting or finishing.
3) Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt and
grease before applying materials. Where rust or scale is present,
use wire brush or sandpaper to clean before painting. Clean
shop coats of paint that have become marred and touch up with
proper type primer.
4) Treat galvanized metal and zinc surfaces as specified and in
accordance with Manufacturer's directions before applying first
paint coat. Perform adhesion test to ensure bonding.
5) Sand smooth, woodwork to be finished with enamel, stain, or
finish varnish. Clean surfaces before proceeding with first coat
application.
6) Fill holes and cracks in surfaces to receive paint or stain.
7) Backprime and endprime all exterior wood or other wood
subjected to moisture.
b. Workmanship -
I) Carefully follow Specifications and color schedule, painting
complete all surfaces to be painted.
2) Spread materials smoothly and evenly.
3) Do no exterior painting while surface is damp, unless
recommended by Manufacturer, nor during rainy or frosty
weather. Interior surfaccs shall be dry before painting.
4) Putty nail holes in wood aftcr first coat using natural colored
type to match wood finish. Bring putty flush with adjoining
surfaces.
5) Finished work shall be uniform, of approved color, smooth, and
free from runs, sags, dcfective brushing, rolling, clogging, and
excessive flooding.
6) Read color schedule for rooms before priming walls.
7) Touch up suction spots after application of first coat.
8) Use fine sandpapcr bctween coats to producc even, smooth
surfaces as needed to ensure adhesion.
9) Paint shall be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats
per manufacturer's instructions.
10) Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean,
sharp, and without overlapping.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations. Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~f1ic Desi(Jl1 Works} IlIc. PS
I
c.
d.
I
Protecting Other Surfaces -
Good painting practice excludes splattering, dripping or painting any
surfaces not intended to be painted. These items will not be spelled out
in detail but special attention must be paid to the following -
I) Do not paint finish copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel,
stainless steel, anodized aluminum, or metal except as explicitly
specified.
Adjustment & Cleaning -
I) At completion of job, touch up work to match specified finish.
Repaint areas damaged during construction to specified finish at
no cost to Owner.
2) Upon completion of the work, remove paint spots from floors,
walls, glass, or other surfaces and leave work clean, orderly,.and
in acceptable condition. Remove debris caused by work of this
Section from premises.
I
I
I
I
I
09910 EXTERIOR OPAQUE FINISHES
I
09 913 paint on plain iron & steel
I
GENERAL
I.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Steel structure, brackets, handrails, downspouts, and misc.
metals
I
Design Criteria:
a. Systems specified are in addition to prime coats provided by othcr
Sections.
I
I
PRODUCTS I. Flat:
a. Pittsburgh Paints -
I) First Coat - 6-208 or 6-212 Speed-hide Rust-inhibitive primer
2) Second Coat - 72-XXX Sunproof
3) Third Coat - 72-XXX Sunproof
2.
EXECUTION I.
I
Gloss
a. Pittsburgh Paints -
1) First Coat - 6-208 or 6-212 Speed-hide Rust-inhibitive primer
2) Second Coat - 90-XXX DTM Industrial Enamel
3) Third Coat - 90-XXX DTM Industrial Enamel
I
I
See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 900.
I
09914 paint on exterior galvanized metals
I
GENERAL
I.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Painting exposed exterior galvanized flashings.
2) Duct and cover for Tower ventilation unit.
3) Exposed ductwork in Pyramid vault.
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
ol~pic Desi!JII works, Il1c. PS
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I
I
I
I
Flat:
a. Pittsburgh Paints -
I) First Coat - 6-209 Speed-hide Galvanized Steel primer
2) Second Coat - 72-XXX Sunproof
2.
Gloss:
a.
Pittsburgh Paints -
I) First Coat - 6-209 Speed-hide Galvanized Steel primer
2) Second Coat - 90-XXX DTM Industrial Enamel
See applicable paragraphs of Section 09 900.
a. Treat galvanized metal and zinc surfaces prior to applying first coat of
paint.
b. Prime surface.
c. Apply finish coats.
09915 paint on exterior wood
PRODUCTS 1. Flat:
a. Pittsburgh Paints -
I) First Coat - 6-9 Speed-hide Exterior Wood Primer
2) Second Coat - 72-XXX Sunproof
Semi-Gloss:
a. Pittsburgh Paints-
1) First Coat - 6-9 Speed-hide Exterior Wood Primer
2) Second Coat - 78-XXX Sunproof 100% Acrylic
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Painting and baekpriming of exterior woods to include:
a) miscellaneous trim and moldings 60 025
b) exterior wood fascia and barges 06 206
c) wood siding 06 208
d) exposed exterior glulam beams
d) Miscellaneous as specified elsewhere
2.
See appropriate paragraphs in Section 09 900.
09920 INTERIOR OPAQUE FINISHES
09 923 paint on interior drywall
PRODUCTS I.
Rest Rooms:
a. Pittsburgh Paints -
I) First Coat - Pitt-Glaze Pigmented Sealer
2) Second Coat - Pitt-Glaze High Solids Acrylic Epoxy
2. Other Interior Drywall:
a. Pittsburgh Paints or as indicated below-
I) First Coat - 5-2 Speed-craft primer (Under Texturc)
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
I
November 2004
ol~pic Desi!JII Works, Il1c. PS
EXECUTION I.
2)
3)
I
I
Second Coat - 5-2 Speed-craft primer (Over Texture)
Third Coat - 6-411 Speed-hide Eggshell (std.) or
2-4191 Pratt & Lambert Aeolade Velvet
See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 900 General.
I
2. Primer Qnly:
a. On wall and ceiling surfaces designated as GWB to receive textured
finish, apply one coat of drywall primer from specified Paint
Manufacturer prior to application of texture.
I
I
I
I
I
09 925 paint on interior wood
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION I.
I.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Painting woodwork not requiring transparent finish.
2) Stripping and Re-finishing of (2) doors salvaged from the "D"
building.
a) Paint on interior side of exterior (salvage) doors
shall be of exterior grade.
Semi-Gloss:
a. Pittsburgh Paints or as indicated below -
I) First Coat - 6-6 Speed-hide Enamel Undercoater
2) Second Coat - 6-411 Speed-hide Eggshell (std.) or
2-4191 Pratt & Lambert Acolade
I
I
I
See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 900 General.
a. Softwood Components -
I) Coat interior surfaces of drawers with two coats of 65-492 Rudd
Lacquer Sanding Sealer.
I.
Scope:
a. Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Wood window sills, casework, and
2) Finishing softwoods not requiring painted finish.
I
I
I
09930 INTERIOR TRANSPARENT FINISHES
09 931 transparent finish on interior softwood
GENERAL
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION 1.
Approved Systems:
a. Pittsburgh Paints or as indicated below -
I) First Coat - 77-1 RE2 Sealcr Primer
2) Second Coat - 77-302 Intcrior Semi-transparent Stain
3) Third and Fourth Coats - 65-492 Rudd Sanding Sealer
4) Fifth and Sixth Coats - 65-1116.70 Rudd Watcrwhite 70% shccn
I
I
I
I
See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 900.
2.
Do not sand between Third and Fourth Coats.
Peninsula College Space Renovations. Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
Ol;gmpic Desi!JII Works, Il1c. PS
I
I
I
I
09 932 transparent finish on interior hardwood
GENERAL
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
09 933 exterior stains
GENERAL
PRODUCTS 1.
I
I
EXECUTION I.
I
I.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Interior Doors
2) Finishing hardwoods not requiring painted finish.
Approved Systems:
a. Pittsburgh Paints or as indicated below -
I) First Coat - 77 -1 REZ Sealer Primer
2) Second Coat - 77-302 Interior Semi-transparent Stain
3) Third and Fourth Coats - 65-492 Rudd Sanding Sealer
4) Fifth and Sixth Coats - 65-1116.70 Rudd Waterwhite 70% sheen
See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 900 General.
a. Hardwood Components -
I) Coat interior surfaces of drawers with two coats of 65-492 Rudd
Lacquer Sanding Sealer.
b. Finishing of Doors -
1) Surfaces shall be clean and dry.
2) Sand lightly to achieve smooth surface and clean before
applying finish. Sand again between fourth, fifth and sixth
coats.
3) Make certain surfaces are dry before applying next coat.
4) Apply finish as soon as door is fitted. Top and bottom edges
shall receive at least two coats of Pittsburgh 6-10 sealer after
door has been fitted and is ready to hang. Finish and refinish
doors with no hardware applied to doors.
5) A void finishing too soon after a rain or damp weather and
during periods of higher than average humidity. Allow ample
time for wood to dry before applying finish.
I.
Scope:
a. Includes but Not Limited To -
1) Staining underside Interior T &G Deckmg
Approved Svstems:
a. Pittsburgh Paints -
1) One Coat-77-XXX REZ Series Semi-Transparent Exterior
Stain
2) Color as selected by Architect from standard color line
See appropriate Sections in General 09 900.
END OF SECTION 09 900
END OF orVISION 09
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 09 - Finishes
November 2004
Ol;gmpic Desi!JII Works, Il1c. PS
I
I
I
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
GENERAL
I.
00 General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Division.
2.
Scope:
a.
I
b.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Furnish materials, labor, and equipment for completion of Work
unless indicated or noted otherwise.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
1) Required blocking in framed walls specified in Section 06100.
I
I
I
3. Product Storage:
a. Store materials where advised by Contractor to avoid hindering work of
other Sections and to avoid damage or soiling of materials.
10 400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES
I
I
GENERAL
I.
Division lO GENERAL applies to this Section.
2.
Scope:
a.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
1) Interior building pin-mounted signage.
2) ADA-compliant Room Identification Signage.
I
10430 SIGNAGE
I
GENERAL
I.
Scope:
a.
I
I
I
I
I
b
Includes but Not Limited To-
I) Fumish and install interior Pin-mounted Signage.
2) Fumish and install ADA-compliant Room Identification signage.
Rclated Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Installation specified in Section 06 200.
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Pin-mounted Signage -
1) Provide elevations and sections showing typical members,
anchors, layout, accessories and installation details for shadow
mounting \1," from gypsum wall board soffit surface.
2) For installation provide full-scale layout template.
I
I
I
3. Samples:
a. Pin-mounted Signage -
1) Provide full-size sample of letter type to be provided.
b. Room Identification Signage -
1) Provide 8Y2"X II" sample sign showing color, texture, pattern,
graphic image process, text style and Braille.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 10- Specialties
November 2004
ol~pic Desi!JII Works, Il1c. PS
PRODUCTS I.
EXECUTION I.
I
Interior Pin-mounted Signage:
a. Provide smooth flat faces, sharp edges, and precisely formed lines and
profiles, free from pits, scale sand holes or other defects. Cast lugs into
back and tap to receive threaded mounting studs.
b. Material: Cast aluminum
e. Finish: Brushed
d. Height: Per schedule below
e. Thickness: \1," min
f. Font: Times
g. Mounting: Provide mounting studs suitable for gypsum wall board
mounting, with \1," shadow relief, and recommendation for soffit wall
stud setting cement.
h. Signage Schedule:
l.
I
I
I
I
I
"CASHIER OFFICE"
(4")
2.
Room Identification Signage: (4) total (including (2) ADA Restroom signs)
a. Signage to be composed of engraved plastic, adhesive mounted.
b. Provide Braille text on each sign
c. Material: Cast acrylic sheet plastic
d. Size: 8!tS:"x 11"
e. Color: To be selected by Architect from standard color line.
f. Font: Arial
I
I
I
Locate signs where directed using mounting methods specified.
2.
Install signs square, plumb, level, true and at height as directed by Architect with
surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance or function.
I
3.
Install pin-mounted letters using methods recommended for letter form, type of
mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure. Use Manufacturer's full
size template to establish layout of holes in wall. Set studs in pre-drilled holes
using quick-setting cement.
I
I
4.
After installation, clean soiled surfaces. Protect units from damage until final
acceptance from Qwner.
I
5.
Install room occupancy signs at location indicated by Architect or Building
Qffieial.
I
END OF SECTION 10400
I
10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
GENERAL
I.
Division 10 GENERAL applies to this Section.
I
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To -
I) Supply and Install (2) Extinguishers with cabinets
I
3.
Coordinate with Sections involved for proper wall openings.
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 10 - Specialties
November 2004
ol~pic Desi!JII Works, Il1c. PS
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXECUTION I.
.'
I
.
Fire Extinguishers:
a. Units shall be 5 pound nominal capacity dry powder pressurized type
equipped with pressure gauge that indicates need for recharging.
b. Instructions for repairs, maintenance, and recharging shall be attached.
e. Unit shall be tested and approved by UL and have a minimum 2A: IOB:C
UL rating. UL rating shall appear on extinguisher labels and be attached
to and a part of fire extinguisher units.
2.
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets:
a. Cabinets shall be two-piece non-locking, semi-recessed type and have
steel tubs in shop prinie finish with return trim, and glass door. Supply
each cabinet with one fire extinguisher specified above.
b. Metal and finish: Enameled steel
e. Door Glazing: Fully tempered float glass complying with ASTM
C1048, condition A, Type I, Quality q3, Kind FT, and Class I (clear).
d. Identify cabinet with "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" silk-screen lettering
applied to door. Provide lettering to comply with authorities having local
jurisdiction for letter style, size, color spacing and location.
Prepare wall recesses for cabinets. as required by type and size of cabinets and
style of trim and follow Manufacturer's instructions for mounting.
2.
Mount where directed by authority having local jurisdiction.
3. Securely mount cabinets and hangers plumb with wall surfaces.
4.
Trim for cabinets shall be neat in appearance.
END OF SECTION 10520
I
10800 TOILET & BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
GENERAL
I
I
I
I
PRODUCTS I.
I
EXECUTION 1.
I
I.
Division 10 GENERAL applies to this Section.
2.
Scope:
a.
Includes but Not Limited To-
1) Furnish items listed on Interior Elevations.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere -
I) Installation specified in Section 06 200.
b.
3.
Submittals:
a. Submit schedule showing items used, location where installed, and
conformance with Contract Documents.
Approved Products:
a. See Interior Elevations for Fixture and Accessory List, sheet A-08.
Install items in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. Provide mounting
devices proper for base structure.
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 10- Specialties
November 2004
ol;gmpic Desi!JII works, Il1c. PS
I
,
I
2.
Locate as shown on Drawings if location is indicated or as specified below.
I
END OF SECTION 10 800
I
I
I
I
I
I
END OF DIVISION 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations -Building 'C'
Division 10 - Specialties
November 2004
ol~pic Desi!JII Works, Il1c. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 11 EOUIPMENT
__ GENERAL
I.
General Conditions and Division 0 I apply to this Division.
II 450 RESIDENTIAL EOUIPMENT
GENERAL
I.
Division II GENERAL applies to this Section.
11 452 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
GENERAL
I.
Scope:
a.
Includes But Not Limited To -
I) Microwave shall be furnished and installed by Contractor.
2) Dimensions and other basic information shown on Drawings
I
I
I
I
b. Related Work Specified Elsewhere-
I) Qutlets and service specified in Division 16
2) Installation specified in Section 06 200.
PRODUCTS I.
Microwave:
a. 600 watts maximum
b. Select from standard manufacturers line
c. Color: white
I
I
I
I
2.
Approved Manufacturers
a. Kenmore
b. GE
END OF SECTION 11 450
I
I
I
I
END OF DIVISION 11
I
I
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
Division 11 - Equipment
November 2004
ol;gmpic Desi!JII works, II1c. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
. NO REQUIREMENTS
,
END OF DIVISION 12
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
November 2004
ol;gmpic Desi!JII workS} II1c. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NO REQUIREMENTS
END OF DIVISION 13
Peninsula College Space Renovations - Building 'C'
November 2004
ol;gmpic Desi!JII works, IIIC. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 14 CONVEYANCE
NO REQUIREMENTS
END OF DIVISION 14
Peninsula College Space Renovations ~ Building 'C'
November 2004
ol;gmpic Desi!JII works, II1c. PS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ioivision /SectioifTitle'//......
""-""-".-.;,-.,;-',
.'>.;>
DMSION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050
15060
15071
15075
15080
15140
15145
15150
15155
15183
15410
15485
15738
15815
15820
15838
15855
15856
15880
15950
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
MECHANICAL VffiRA TION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
MECHANICAL INSULATION
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
DQMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PLUMBING FIXTURES
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
METAL DUCTS
DUCT ACCESSORIES
PQWER VENTILATQRS
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
!NT AKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS
LOUVERS
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
DIVISION 17 - SPECIAL SYSTEMS
17810 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (ODe) SYSTEMS
.././,page~
EXPIRES: 07-27-2005
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C November 2004
SECTION 17810 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEMS RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 1 of 1
8
6
3
3
13
6
4
6
6
4
8
4
5
8
6
3
3
4
6
II
II
:~ '.',.
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Escutcheons.
5. Mechanical demolition.
6. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
7. Painting and finishing.
8. Supports and anchorages.
1.3
. DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to yiew indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Btdg. C
SECTION t5050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 1 018
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERtNG
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. PE: Polyethyiene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
I
I
I
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.S OUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Eqnipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished proyided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, eqnipment shall comply with
requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
. storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves 111 poured-in-plaee
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5050 - BAStC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 2 of 8
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
2.2
2.3
A.
I
I
I
I
I
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the folloWing
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
PIPE. TUBE. AND FITTINGS
A.
Refer to indiyidual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
2.4
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME BI6.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1I8-inch maxImum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
2. A WW A ClIO, rubber, flat face, 118 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: A WS AS.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAgI, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
A WW A Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 3 of 8
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.
d. JCM Industries.
e. Smith-Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
B.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80
equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
I. Available Manufacturers:
a. Eslon Thermoplastics.
C.
Plastie-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR II equivalent
dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
I
I
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
I
I
I
I
I
c.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig rrummum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
c. Eclipse, Inc.
d. Epco Sales, Inc.
e. Hart Industries, International, Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
D.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1. Available Manufacturers:
I
a. Perfection Corp.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Vietaulic Co. of America.
I
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t 5050 - BASIC MECHANtCAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 4 of 8
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
2.6
ESCUTCHEONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
I. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
c.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
I. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D.
Qne-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
E.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-
plated finish.
F.
Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
I
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A.
Refer to Division I Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general
demolition requirements and procedures.
3.2
I
I
I
.
I
I
B.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated
to be removed.
I. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
4. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. .
5. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
c.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remoye damaged or unseryiceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and
quality.
I
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REOillREMENTS
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5050 - BAStC MECHANtCAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 5 of 8
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve seryieing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New and Existing Piping:
a. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
b. Insulated Piping: Qne-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel
type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.
e. Bare Piping in Unfmished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.
f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw
or spring clips.
g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.
M. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t 5050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 6 of 8
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.3
N.
I
I
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
o.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
I
I
I
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
3.4
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
I
I
c.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
D.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to A WS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with A WS A5.8.
I
E.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
I
I
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
I
I
.
I
I
I
F.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickPess for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
G.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
H.
Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
I
I
I. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANtCAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 7 of 8
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
I
I
3.6
A.
Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Section
"Painting."
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.
EOUlPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REOUlREMENTS
A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated. .
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
c.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate seryiee, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
PAINTING
B.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B.. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
I
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
wiJI receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
END QF SECTION 15050
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANtCAL MATERtALS AND METHODS
Page 8 of 8
I
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
.,~
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
I
I
A.
This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and
equipment:
1.3
I. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Metal framing systems.
3. Pipe positioning systems.
4. Equipment supports.
I
I
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for vibration isolation
devices.
2. Division 15 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
I
I
I
I
DEFINITIONS
A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
1.4
B.
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports. "
PERFORMANCE REOUlREMENTS
A.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
I
I
B.
Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
I
I
I
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECfION t 5060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 1 of 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Pipe positioning systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.
2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
5. Empire Industries, Inc.
6. ERICO/Miehigan Hanger Co.
7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
8. Grinnell Corp.
9. GS Metals Corp.
10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
I I. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
12. PHS Industries, Inc.
13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
14. Toleo Inc.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels
and other components.
B. Available Manufacturers:
Peninsula College Campus. Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERtNG
Page 2 of 6
2.4
I. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Tolco Inc.
7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyeo International, Ltd.
I
I
I
I
I
C.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A.
I
I
2.5
2.6
Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in
pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.
B.
A vai'able Manufacturers:
I.
2.
3.
C & S Mfg. Corp.
HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises.
Samco Stamping, Inc.
I
EOUIPMENT SUPPORTS
I
I
A.
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel
shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
I
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifYing piping systems
and equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
c.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
I
I
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON t 5060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 3 of 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
I
I
E.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type I): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Carbon- or A1loy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24, iflittle or no insulation is required. .
4. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-
center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
5. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
6. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
9. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type II): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
10. Extension Hinged or 2-Bo1t Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
II. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
F.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, insta1l the fo1lowing types:
1. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
2. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type II, split pipe rings.
G.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, insta1l the following types:
1. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the fo1lowing for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
2. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
a. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified
in piping
H.
Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and
waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Insta1lation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 4 of 6
3.3
3.4
B.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.
Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste
piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures"
for plumbing fixtures.
D.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
E.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
F.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to pennit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
G.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
H.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
I
I.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.I (for power piping) and ASME B3\.9 (for building
seryices piping) are not exceeded.
I
I
I
I
I
I
J.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
\. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
EOillPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
I
I
B.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
METAL FABRICATIONS
I
I
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.
Peninsula College Campus. Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t 5060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 5 of 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections'that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
3.6
A.
Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting offield welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2' inches
PAINTING
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 15060
I
Peninsula Cotlege Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Page 6 of 6
I
November 2004
RtCHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
SECTION 15071
.
I
I
I
I
MECHANICAL VffiRATION AND SEISMIC CQNTROLS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I
SUMMARY
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
This Section includes the following:
I. Requirements for equipment anchorage and duct restraint
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.4
A.
PERFORMANCE REOUlREMENTS
Seismic restraint to comply with Section 1621 of2oo3 International Building Code.
Design Seismic Response, S.: 0.36
Component Response Modification Factor, Rp: 2.5 (1.5 if attachment is made with shallow
anchors with an embedment length-to-<liameter ratio of less than 8). .
Importance Factor, I,,: 1.0
Component Amplification Factor, ap: 1.0 (2.5 for pressure vessels, furnace and boiler stacks
and vibration isolated equipment).
Seismic Design Category: D.
OUALITY ASSURANCE
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis performed
according to OSHPD and shall bear anchorage preapproval "R" number, from OSHPD or
another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-
restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on
calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing
are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-
restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Testing and
calculations must include both shear and tensile loads and I test or analysis at 45 degrees to the
weakest mode.
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Peninsula College Campus. Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C November 2004
SECTION 1507t - MECHANICAL VIBRATtON AND SEtSMIC CONTROLS RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 1013
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
2.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A.
Available Manufacturers:
I. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2. B-Line Systems, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corp.
4. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
5. Loos & Co., Inc.; Cableware Technology Division.
6. Mason Industries, Inc.
7. TOLCO Incorporated.
8. Unistrut Diversified Products Co.; Wayne Manufacturing Division.
9. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
10. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.
II. Vibration Mountings & ControlsIKorfund.
B.
Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor
bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.
C.
Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable
engagement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
I
I
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and equipment to receive seismie-control devices for compliance with
requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-plaee anchors to verifY actual locations
before installation.
c.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 1507t . MECHANtCAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
Page 2 01 3
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.3
A.
I
I
I
Install restra1l1111g cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor
locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of
adjacent equipment or building structure.
B.
Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to
hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping
to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.
I
I
I
I
c.
Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
INSTALLATION - SEISMIC RESTRAINT OF DUCTWORK
Restrain ductwork according to requirements of 2003 International Building Code.
3.4
A.
B.
Restraint is not required for ducts suspended from hangers 12 in. or less in length from the top
of the duct to the supporting structure or for ducts with a cross sectionsal area less than 6 SF.
c.
Equipment items installed in-line with the duct system weighing more than 75 Ibs shall be
supported and laterally braced independent of the duct system and shall meet the same force
requirements indicated below.
I
INST ALLA TION - SEISMIC ANCHORING OF EQUIPMENT
I
I
A.
All mechanical equipment must be seismically anchored. Unless engineered ground mounted
equipment shall be anchored as follows:
1.
Equipment shall be restrained for sheer for a total seismic load as indicated. Provide
sufficient anchors and anchor attachments to the equipment frame to develop this
restraint.
a. Equipment mounted on slab on grade: Shear load equals 0.2 times equipment
weight (0.4 for vibration isolated equipment).
b. Roof and attic mounted equipment: Shear load equals 0.5 times equipment weight
(1.2 for vibration isolated equipment).
Provide anchor against overturning only when the lateral loads indicated will result in a
positive overturning moment.
I
I
I
I
2.
END OF SECTION 15071
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C November 2004
SECTION 15071 - MECHANtCAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 3 of 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~ -.
'. .
:" ~.. ,,'
SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
I. Equipment nameplates.
2. Equipment markers.
3. Pipe markers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated
1.4 OUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME AI3.I, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices for piping.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUcrS
2.1 EOUlPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on
equipment.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 1 of 3
I.
Data:
I
I
I
I
a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
c. Labels of tested compliances.
2.
3.
Location: Accessible and visible.
Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
I. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
I
I
I
B.
Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
2. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for
equipment.
2.2
PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, eolor-coded, with lettering indicating service,
and showing direction of flow.
I. Colors: Comply with ASME AI3.1, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each
application length.
3. Pipes with QD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers
extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive
back.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS. GENERAL
A.
Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than
single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's
option.
3.2
EOUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
I
A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not
easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the
following general categories of equipment:
I. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
2. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
I
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON t 5075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
Page 2 of 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
A.
Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow
indication arrows showing direction of flow.
I. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers.
Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 1-1/2
inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
B.
Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical
equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if
both are indicated.
I. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
2. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general
categories of equipment:
a. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
b. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION
B.
Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior
noneoncealed locations as follows:
I. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
p'pmg.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce interyals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.
ADJUSTING
A.
Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
other work.
END OF SECTION 15075
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15075 - MECHAN/CAL tDENT/PICATION
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 3 of 3
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15080 - MECHANtCAL INSULATION
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for duct and pipe, including the following:
I. Insulation Materials:
a. Flexible elastomeric.
b. Mineral fiber.
2. Adhesives.
3. Mastics.
4. Sealants.
5. Factory-applied jackets.
6. Tapes.
7.. Securements.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ASJ: All-service jacket.
B. FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper.
C. FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene.
D. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride.
E. SSL: Self-sealing lap.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
Page 1 of 13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.5
1.6
I
I
I
I
I
1.7
~:". ~
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
I. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING
A.
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified 111
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
1.8
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
I
I
I
I
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
SCHEDULING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
I
I
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
I. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 2 of 13
2.2
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
D.
Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
I. Available Products:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; AeroceI.
b. Armaeell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul- Tube 180.
E.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK
jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
I. Available Products:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Mierolite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
F.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
I. Available Products:
a.
b.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
Johns Manville; Micro-Lolc.
Knauf Insulation; lOOO(Pipe Insulation.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
Qwens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
I
I
e.
d.
e.
2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied'ASJ-SSL. Faetory-
applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
I
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 3 of 13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Polyoletin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or
ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade I for tubular materials and Type II, Grade I for sheet materials.
1. Available Products:
a. Annacell LLC; Tubolit.
b. Nomaco Inc.; IMCOLOCK, IMCOSHEET, NOMALOCK, and NQMAPL Y.
e. RBX Corporation; Therma-cell.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24 I 79A, Type II, Class I.
1. Available Products:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armaeell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-33l6C, Class 2, Grade A.
I. Available Products:
a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
e. ITW T ACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Available Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
e. ITW T ACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5080 - MECHANICAL INSULATtON
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 4 of 13
a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
c. ITW TACC, Division oflllinois Tool Works; CB-50.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e. Mon-Eeo Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
f. Virnaseo Corporation; 749.
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
I. Available Products:
2. Water-Vapor Permeanee: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
3. Seryice Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
I
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 A WF ASJ.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
2.6
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Available Products:
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/ineh in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work ~ Bldg. C
SECTtON 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
Page 5 of 13
I
I
I
I
I
B.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Available Products:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.
c. Ideal Tape C~., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
d Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
I
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/ineh in width.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares ofFSK tape.
I
I
C.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed
I
1.
Available Products:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.
b. Compac Corp.; 120.
e. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 A WF.
d. Venture Tape; 3520 CWo
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 5 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 34 Ibf/inch in width.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
I
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15080. MECHANtCAL tNSULA TtON
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 6 of 13
I
3.3
I
COMMON INSTALLATION REOillREMENTS
I
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including
fittings, valyes, and specialties.
I
B.
I
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
I
c.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the seryiee. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
I
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
I
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
I
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
I
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
I
I. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-batrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
I
I
I
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
I
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
I.
2.
I
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5080 - MECHANtCAL tNSULATtON
Page 7 of 13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
Install insulation
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1- 1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient seryices, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on scams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
o.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
P. For above ambient seryices, do not install insulation to the following:
I.
2.
3.
4.
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Clean outs.
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations:
continuously through wall penetrations.
I. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (Tbat Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
c.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper
sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
I
Peninsula College Campus. Wide InfrJ.structure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t 5080 - MECHANICAL tNSULA TION
Page 8 of 13
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.5
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems."
I
I
I
I
I
D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated.
For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, tenninate insulation at fire damper sleeves
and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation.
Qverlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pms.
3.6
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
2. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
3. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
I
I
I
3.7 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL tNSULATtON
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page90f13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
3.8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
I. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
c.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
I. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
I. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
c.
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pms.
1.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
2.
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SEatON t 5080 - MECHANICAL tNSULA TION
Page 100113
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturers recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being
insulated.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from I edge and I end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with I/2-inch (I3-mm) outward-clinching
staples, I inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied
jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C)
at I8-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic
applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and
over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to
2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
4. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
5. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.9
POLYOLEFIN INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
c.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
I. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
1. Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Peninsula College Campus. Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t 5080 - MECHANtCAL INSULATION
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
3.10 FINISHES
Page 11 of 13
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
j
A.
Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting
Sections.
I. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE. GENERAL
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.12
A.
Concealed and exposed, rectangular, round and fIat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the
following:
I. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density, with a
minimum installed thermal resistance ofR-3.3.
I
I
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
I. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
3. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
B.
Items Not Insulated:
I. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code.
2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. . Vibration-control devices.
6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
INDOOR DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE
B.
Concealed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:
I. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 3 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density, with a
minimum installed thermal resistance ofR-7.
C.
Concealed, rectangular, exhaust-air duct insulation between isolation damper and penetration of
building exterior shall be the following:
I. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 3 inches thick and 0.75-lb/eu. ft. nominal density, with a
minimum installed thermal resistance of R-7.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON t 5080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 12 of 13
3.13
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE. GENERAL
I
I
I
'.
I
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Below-grade piping.
2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.14 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
3.15
A.
Domestic Cold Water:
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Insulation shall be any of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick.
b. Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: I inch thick.
e. Polyolefin: 1/2 inch thick.
B.
Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I: I inch thick.
c.
Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping and Flexible Tubing:
I. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: I inch thick.
OUTDOOR. ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping and Flexible Tubing:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
END OF SECTION 15080
I
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON 15080- MECHANICAL tNSULATION
Page 13 of 13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15140
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
B. PEX: Crosslinked polyethylene plastic.
C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REOUlREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with
125 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
1.5 SUBMITIALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
1.6 OUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections I
through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15t40- DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 1 016
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECfION t5t40 - DOMESTtC WATER PIPING
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERtNG
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
PART 2 - PRODUcrS
2.1 MANUFACfURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
\. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
\. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME BI6.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME BI6.22, wrought-
copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wroughH:opper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME BI6.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.
\. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME BI6.18, east-copper-alloy or ASME BI6.22, wrought-
copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME BI6.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-I23, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
4. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze
castings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
Page iof 6
I
I
I
3.2
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
3.3
I
I
I
I
.
I
3.4
I
I
I
PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratiIigs at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.
Under-Building-Slab, Domestic Water Piping, NPS 4 and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type L;
copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:
I. NPS 2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered
joints.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
I. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball for piping NPS 2 and smaller.
2. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B.
Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball for piping NPS 2 and smaller
C.
Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping.
I. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
B.
Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
c.
Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, inside the building at each domestic water service
entrance.
D.
Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON t 5 t40 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 3 of 6
3.6
I
A.
I
I
Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified m Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flUX; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
c.
I
I
I
I
Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating
stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanieal Vibration and
Seismic Controls."
3.7
B.
Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
Install the following:
I. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
I
I
I
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type I, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
C.
Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
D.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E.
Rod diameter may be reduced I. size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
I
I
I
J
I
F.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
I. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS I and NPS 1-114: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
G.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow seryiee and maintenance.
I
c.
Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-seryice piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D.
I
Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and
connect to the following:
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON t5140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPtNG
Page 4 of 6
I
I
I
.'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
3.8
A.
B.
I
3.9
ADJUSTING
I.
Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
2.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
I. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Test domestic water piping as follows:
I.
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
I
I
I. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Qpen shutoff valves to fully open position.
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON t5t40 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 5 of 6
3.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
.....
.,
I
I
4.
3.10
CLEANING
I) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm .
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200
ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
I. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or,
if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either A WW A C651 or
A WW A C652 or as described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
e. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
. procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
END OF SECTION 15140
1
I
I
I
,
I
B.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
I
Peninsula College Campus~ Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15 t40 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
November 2004
RtCHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
,
Page 6 of 6
1
I
I
i
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.'
I
.'
I
SECTION 15145
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1. Wall hydrants.
2. Drain valves.
3. Water hammer arresters.
4. Trap-seal primer valves.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REOUlREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 OUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections I
through 9."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2,1 WALL HYDRANTS
A. Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants:
Peninsula College Campus~ Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5t45 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECtALTtES
Page 1 014
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
2.2
I
1.
I
Ii
A vaijable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Smith, Jay. R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
c. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
I
I
2.
3.
4.
Standard: ASSE 1019, Type A or Type B.
Type: Freeze-resistant, automatic draining with integral air-inlet valve.
Classification: Type B, for automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached
and nozzle closed.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
Operation: Loose key.
Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall
clamp.
Inlet: NPS 3/4.
Outlet: Exposed with garden-hose thread complying with ASME BI.20.7.
I
I
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
A.
DRAIN VALVES
I
I
2.3
Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
I. Standard: MSS SP-1I 0 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.
2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.
3. Size: NPS 3/4.
4. Body: Copper alloy.
S. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B 1.20.7
and cap with brass chain.
I
I
I
I
I
I
WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A.
Water Hammer Arresters:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. AMTRQL, Inc.
b. Josam Company.
e. MIF AB, Inc.
d. PPP Inc.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
g. Tyler Pipe: Wade Div.
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5145 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPtNG SPECIALTIES
Page 2 of 4
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
II
II
II
2.4
TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES
II
II
II
II
II
II
A
'1.;: .
h. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
1. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Dnainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI- WH 201.
3. Type: Metal bellows.
4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. MIFAB, Inc.
b. PPP Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d Smith, Jay R Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Standard: ASSE 1018.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.
Body: Bronze.
Inlet and Qutlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, nnion, or solder joint.
Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used. with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
II
II
II
II
3.1
INSTALLATION
II
3.2
CONNECTIONS
II
II
II
A.
B.
C.
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of I percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for
proper flow.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division IS Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
Peninsula College Campus. Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t 5 t 45 - DOMESTIC WATER PtPING SPECtAL TIES
Page 3 of 4
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
END OF SECTION 15145
I
I
I
3.3
FIELD OUALITY CONTROL
A.
Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified
above.
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
Peninsula College Campus. Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5145 - DOMESTtC WATER PtPtNG SPECIALTtES
Page 4 of 4
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
II
II
II
;-.' ,
.:''\-.
'"
. 6:.
SECTION 15150
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
II
II
II
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
I
II
II
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
II
I
II
II
I
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:
I. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Special pipe fittings.
DEFINITIONS
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolyrner rubber.
LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REOUlREMENTS
I
I
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: IO-foot head of water.
B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable
of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum
Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON t 5150 - SANtT AR Y WASTE AND VENT PIPtNG
Page 1 016
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
1.5
SUBMIITALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
I
I
I
2.2
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
I) ANACO:
2) Femco, Inc.
3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.
4) Mission Rubber Co.
5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FIITINGS
A.
Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B.
Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant
fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
I. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated
shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
a. Available Manufacturers:
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Page 2 of 6
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-
steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Available Manufacturers:
I) ANACQ.
2) Clamp-All Corp.
3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.
4) Mission Rubber Co.
5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.
3.
Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M,. two-piece, cast-iron
housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
a. Available Manufacturers:
I) MG Piping Products Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
A.
Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfi1ling.
I
I
3.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
EXCAVATION
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller sha1l be the following:
I. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
B.
Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and sma1ler shall be the following:
1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coup ling joints.
C.
Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller sha1l be the following:
1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel heavy-duty
shielded, cast-iron couplings; and hubless-couplingjoints.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Sanitary sewer piping outside the building IS specified m Division 2 Section "Sanitary
Sewerage. "
B.
Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
C.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CIS PI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
D.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent plpmg usmg appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON 15150 - SANtTARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Page 3 of 6
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENG1NEERtNG
I
3.4
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to yertical. Use long-turn,
double Y -branch and 1I8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
I
I
I
I
E.
Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
I
I
F.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
I
Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; I percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
Vent Piping: I percent down toward vertical fixture yent or toward yent stack.
2.
3.
I
G.
Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-Qn-grade if slab
is without membrane waterproofing.
I
I
H.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
I
I
1
I
I
I
A.
Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified In Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.5
B.
Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A
Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install
the following:
I. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type I, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
c.
I
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced I size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
I
I
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON t5150. SANITARY WASTE AND YENT PtPtNG
Page 4 of 6
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
1
3.6
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
I
I
I
I
I
3.7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E.
Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
F.
Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
CONNECTIONS
B.
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitaiy sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1.
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
2.
3.
FIELD OUALITY CONTROL
A.
During installation, notifY authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for fmal inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
c.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures ofauthorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
Peninsula College Campus. Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5t50 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Page 5 of 6
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than IO-foot head of water. From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-
stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into
piping system equal to pressure of I-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap
of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
I
I
I
I
I
3.8
CLEANING
I
I
I
A.
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
I
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
I
END OF SECTIQN 15150
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION I StSO - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PtPING
Page 6 of 6
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
1
I
I
I
SECTION 15155
DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
I
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2 SUMMARY
I
I
I
A.
This Section includes the following drainage piping specialties:
I. Cleanouts.
2. Floor drains.
3. Roof flashing assemblies.
4. Miscellaneous drainage piping specialties.
5. Flashing materials.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
C. HOPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
E.
PP: Polypropylene plastic.
F.
PUR: Polyurethane plastic.
G.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
OUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
1.5 COORDINATION
I
I
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
Peninsula College Campus- Wide fnfrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15t55 - DRAINAGE PIPtNG SPECIALTIES
I
November 20M
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 1 016
I
B.
Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
I
2.1 CLEANOUTS
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:
I.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
I
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIF AB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
I
I
I
5.
6.
Standard: ASME AI12.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping
Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected
piping.
Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, brass plug.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
I
I
2.
3.
4.
B.
Metal Floor Cleanouts:
I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
I
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. Oatey.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Qperation.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
I
I
'1
I
2. Standard: ASME AI12.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.
3. Size: Same as connected branch.
4. Type: Adjustable housing.
5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
6. Clamping Device: Not required.
7. Outlet Connection: Inside calk.
8. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device.
I
I
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15t55 - DRAINAGE PIPING SPECtALTIES
Page 2 of 6
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Polished bronze.
II. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
12. Top Loading Classification: Light Duty.
13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Seryice class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
I
C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:
I
I
I
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
I
I
I
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M. Include wall access.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping. .
Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
Closure: , drilled-and-threaded brass plug.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than c1eanout size.
Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.
I
2.2
FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:
I
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIF AB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
I
I
I
I
2. Floor Drain is scheduled on Drawings.
2.3
ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
I
A.
Roof Flashing Assemblies:
I
I
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Peninsula CoJlege Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15 t 55 - DRAINAGE PtPtNG SPECIAL TtES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 3 016
I
2.4
2.5
a.
b.
Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.
Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.
I
I
B.
I
I
Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, lead flashing
collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement
and counterflashing fitting.
1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.
MISCELLANEOUS DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
I
A.
Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:
I
I
I
I. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.
FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51l21, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
I
1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-ineh thickness.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-ineh thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.
I
I
B.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
C.
Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
I
D.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
I
B.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
I
I. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger clean out is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 135 degrees.
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5t55 - DRAINAGE PIPtNG SPECIALTtES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 4 of 6
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Locate at minimum interyals of 100 feet.
c.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
fmished floor.
D.
For c1eanouts located in concealed plpmg, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
F.
Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
G.
Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.
I.
2.
Exception; Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.
Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
H.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
A.
Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
I
I
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
FLASHING INSTALLATION
I. Lead Sheets; Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.
B.
Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
c.
Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
D.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5t55 - DRAtNAGE PIPING SPECtALTlES
Page 5 of 6
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
E.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
I
I
END OF SECTION 15155
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5155 - DRAINAGE PlPtNG SPECtALTIES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGtNEERING
I
Page 6 01 6
I
I
I
I
I
<
SECTION 15183
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I
I
I
I
I
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-eonditioning applications.
1.3
I
I
1.4
COORDINATION
I
I
I
I
B.
Related Sections include the folloWing:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through exterior walls.
2. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports and installation
requirements.
A.
OUALITY ASSURANCE
ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
B.
ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."
A. Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system components with
other construction, including light fixtures, HV AC equipment, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
I
I
I
A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.
B.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME BI6.22.
C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME BI6.22.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15183 - REFRtGERANT PtPING
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 1014
D. Brazing Filler Metals: A WS AS.8, Classification
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Flexible Connectors: 500-psig (3450-kPa) minimum operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze
core, high-tensile bronze-braid covering, and solder-joint end connections; dehydrated, pressure
tested, minimum 7 inches long
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
PIPING APPLICATIONS
Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.
PIPING INSTALLATION
Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
I
I
Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
Arrange piping to allow inspection and seryiee of compressor and other equipment. Install
valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
I
Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit
installation of full-thickness insulation.
I
I
F.
Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanical injury.
G.
Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
I
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
I
I
H.
Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, and expansion
valves and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
I.
I
When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats,
and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near
expansion valve bulb.
I
J. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified m Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports. "
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5183 - REFRIGERANT PIPtNG
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 2 of 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
I
I
I
3.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
3.6
I
K.
Install the following pipe attachments:
I. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.
L.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
I. NPS 112: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 114 inch.
2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS I: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
M.
Support vertical runs at each floor.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Braze joints according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B.
Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent
scale formation.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
I.
Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,
evaporator, and safely devices from test pressure.
Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of the
design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of
system.
2.
a. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of
test.
b. Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine solution
over joint.
c. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig or higher as required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
CLEANING
A.
Before installing copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichloroethylene.
SYSTEM CHARGING
A.
Charge system using the following procedures:
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
Page 3 of 4
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I I',RCHOS ENGINEERING
1.
Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500 micrometers.
If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
I
I
2.
I
END OF SECTION 15183
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION I5t83 - REFRIGERANT PtPING
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
Page 4 of 4
I
I
I
I
I
'.'
SECTIQN 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
I
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:
I
I
I
I
I
1. Faucets for lavatories and sinks.
2. Flushometers.
3. Toilet seats.
4. Protective shielding guards.
5. Fixture supports.
6. Hot-water dispensers.
7 . Water closets.
8. Urinals.
9. Lavatories.
10. Commercial sinks.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for floor drains, and specialty fixtures not
included in this Section.
I
I
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B.
Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with
disabilities.
I
C. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings
specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub
spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are
included where indicated.
I
I
I
D. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
E. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.
F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 154tO - PLUMBtNG FtXTURES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 1 018
I
1.4
1.5
SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
A.
Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,
fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials
and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-<:ontrol rates.
B.
I
Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
c.
I
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.
I. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
I
I
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC AI17.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public
Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with
disabilities.
C.
I
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
D.
I
I
I
I
Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
E.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
I. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A1l2.19.2M.
2. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME AI12.19.5.
3. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
F.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
I. Faucets: ASMEAI12.18.l.
2. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 6l.
3. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.l.
4. Supply Fittings: ASME A1l2.18.l.
5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME AI12.18.2.
I
I
I
G.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
l. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME AI12.18.l.
2. Manual-Qperation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
3. Brass Waste Fittings:. ASME AI12.18.2.
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
Peninsula College Campus. Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 2 of 8
I
I
I
I
I
1.6
I
I
I
I
H.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
I. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME Al 12.18.6.
2. Floor Drains: ASME Al 12.6.3.
3. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499.
4. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20. I.
5. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI ZI24.5.
6. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC Al 17.1.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
I. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
2. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than I of each type.
3. Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS
I
I
I
2.2
I
I
I
2.3
A.
Flushometers, Insert drawing designation:
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. Sloan Valve Company.
I
I
2.4
Toilet Seats,:
I
I
A.
Lavatory Faucets,:
I. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings:
a. Moen, Ine..
SINK FAUCETS
A.
Sink Faucets,:
I. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings:
a. Chicago Faucets.
FLUSHOMETERS
TOILET SEATS
A.
Peninsula College Campus~Wide Inrra<;tructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 3 of 8
I
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Bemis Manufacturing Company.
b. Church Seats.
c. Kohler Co.
d. Olsonite Corp.
I
I
I
2.5 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A.
Protective Shielding Pipe Covers,:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.
b. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc.
e. TRUEBRO, Inc.
I
2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-
water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) requirements.
I
I
1. Description: Combination carrier designed for accessible mounting height of wall-
mounting, water-closet-type fixture. Include single or double, vertical or horizontal, hub-
and-spigot or hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement; faceplates;
couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include
additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.6
FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Josam Company.
.2. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc.
3. Smith, Jay R Mfg. Co.
4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.
6. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
B.
Water-Closet Supports,:
C.
Lavatory Supports,:
1.
Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for wall-
mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.
Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
I
2.
2.7
HOT-WATER DISPENSERS
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t54tO - PLUMBING FtXTURES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
Page 4 of 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.8
A.
Hot-Water Dispensers,:
I. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to' compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
b. In-Sink-Erator; a div. of Emerson Electric Co.
c. Just Manufacturing Company.
d. KitchenAid.
WATER CLOSETS
A.
Water Closets,:
I. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by the following:
a. Kohler Co.
2.9
LAVATORIES
A.
Lavatories,:
I. . Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by the following:
a. Kohler Co.
2.10
A.
Commercial Sinks,:
I. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by the following:
a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.
I
I
I
I
I
COMMERCIAL SINKS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
I
3.2
A.
Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
I
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verifY
actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON 15410. PLUMBtNG FIXTURES
Page 5 of 8
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
B.
I
Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.
I.
2.
3.
Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
I
c.
I
Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D.
Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
I
E.
Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
F.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
I
G.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
I
I.
Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.
Valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
I
H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
I
I. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage
system.
I
J. Install f1ushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with
disabilities to reach.
I
K. Install toilet seats on water closets.
L. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
I
M. Install faucet f1ow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
I
N. Install traps on fixture outlets.
I
I.
2.
Exception: Qmit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
I
o.
Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in eountertop with spout over sink.
I
P.
Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Escutcheons are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 6 of 8
I
I
I
I
Q.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and eountertops using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
I
I
I
3.4
I
.'
I
I
I
3.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.6
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
FIELD OUALITY CONTROL
A.
VerifY that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where
installed.
B.
Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
c.
Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D.
Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
ADJUSTING
Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings,
and controls.
Operate and adjust hot-water dispensers. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and
controls.
Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.
Replace washers and seals ofleaking and dripping faucets and stops.
CLEANING
Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
I. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 7 of 8
I
I
B.
After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
I
3.7
PROTECTION
'I
A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
I
B.
Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
I
END QF SECTIQN 15410
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
. Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
November 2004
RICHMOND / ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
Page 8 of 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
;'-,,,.
SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
l.l RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
I
1.2
A.
This Section includes the following electric water heaters:
I
I
I
1.3
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, fumished specialties, and accessories.
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
I
I
I
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
1. Household, smaIl-capacity electric water heaters.
2. Light-commercial electric water heaters.
3. Water heater accessories.
SUBMITTALS
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric water heaters to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
D.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
OUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of electric
water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division I Section
"Product Requirements."
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections I
through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C November 2004
SECTION t5485 - ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 1014
I
I
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal fmishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
I
I
I
I
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of electric water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
I. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
2.
Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:
a. Light-Commercial Electric Water Heaters:
I
I)
2)
Storage Tank: Three years.
Controls and Other Components: Two years.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
I
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
I
2.2
LIGHT-COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
I
I. Manufacturers:
a. Bradford White Corporation.
b. Rheem Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company.
c. Ruud Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company.
d. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.
e. State Industries, Inc.
,.
I
I
A.
Description: Comply with UL 174 for household, storage electric water heaters.
2.
Storage-Tank Construction: Steel, vertical arrangement.
I
a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
e. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending lining material into tappings.
I
I
3.
Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t 5485 - ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
Page 2 of 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
I
I
b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.
e. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005.
d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAElIESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.
e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
f. Heat Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-water
outlet.
g. Heating Elements: One; electric, screw-in immersion type; wired for simultaneous
operation, unless otherwise indicated.
h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
1. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
J. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3 for
combination temperature and pressure relief valves. Include relieving capacity at
least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater
working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into
storage tank.
A. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base
of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
3.1
A.
Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
I
I
I
I
I
I
WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
B.
Install seismic restraints for light-commercial water heaters. Anchor to substrate.
c.
Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commereial-water-heater
relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward
pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
D.
Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters
that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end
drain valves.
E.
Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters.
F.
Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting-type heat traps.
G.
Fill water heaters with water.
I
Peninsula College Campus~ Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
Page 3 of 4
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
CONNECTIONS
I
I
I
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of water heaters.
I
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
I
I
I
FIELD OUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Qperational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
I
I
B.
Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified
above.
END OF SECTION 15485
I
I
I
I
:.
I
I
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON t5485 - ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
Page 4 of 4
I
I
I
I
I
,..,
~ .~
,-:
SECTION 15738
SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
PART 1- GENERAL
I
I
1.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2 SUMMARY
I
I
I
I
I
A. This Section includes split-system heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and
compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and
may be connected to ducts.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
I
I
1.4
1.5
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete. "
I
I
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static
pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include m
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
D.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-
system units and are based on the specific system indicated Refer to Division I Section
"Product Requirements."
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
COORDINATION
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNtTS
Page 1 of 5
November 2004
RtCHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
1.6
WARRANTY
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.7
I. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
I
1. Filters: Qne set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
I
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
I. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation.
2. Trane Company (The); Unitary Products Group.
3. York Intemational Corp.
CONCEALED EV APORA TOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A.
Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on
back of panel.
1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
B.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fms, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C.
Electric Coil: Helical, niekel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory ceramic
support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-reset
thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent
protection.
D.
Fan: Forward-curyed, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor.
E. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
I
I
1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with intemal thermal protection and
permanent lubrication.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNtTS
Page 2 of 5
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
Disposable Filters: 2 inch thick, in fiberboard frames.
G.
Economizer Mixing Box: Manufactured mixing box with outside air and return air parallel
blade mixing dampers and shaft suitable for mounting packaged economizer control package.
Match to indoor unit size. Micro-Metl Corporation, Cannon Fabrication, Inc. or equivalent.
H.
Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
AIR-COOLED. COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A.
Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable
panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.
Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor,
relay, and contactor.
I. Compressor Type: Scroll.
2. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air eut-offthermostat.
Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thennal-overload protection.
ACCESSORIES
Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 17 Sections "Direct
Digital Control (ODe) Systems."
Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Install units level and plumb.
INSTALLATION
B.
Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure. Units to be hung from structure and not supported from below.
c.
Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- thick, reinforced
concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
Peninsula College Campus~ W,de lnfrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15738 - SPUT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 3015
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 4 of 5
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast.in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation
with concrete base.
D. Install seismic restraints.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Metal
Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts
to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors
are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
E. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls. .
3.3 FIELD OUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in
field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
I. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.4
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
I. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division I Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 15738
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 5015
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
I
I
I
I
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I
SUMMARY
I
I
I
I
I
A.
This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-{jistribution
systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-ineh wg. Metal ducts include the following:
1.3
I. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall, round spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
3. Duct liner.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
DEFINITIONS
NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines.
1.4
A.
I
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and _
distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of
duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. . Accompany requests for
layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original
design results without increasing system total pressure.
1.5
OUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NFP A Compliance:
I. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B.
Mockups:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5815 - METAL DUCTS
Page 1 of 8
I
I
I
I
2.1
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
I
I
2.2
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
I
I
I
I
I
I
MANUFACTURERS
I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.
c.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts.
D.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, II4-ineh minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 DUCT LINER
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.
I. Available Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group.
b. Johns Manville International, Inc.
c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
d. Owens Corning.
2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent
erosion of glass fibers and shall contain an EP A registered anti-microbial agent to reduce
the potential of microbial growth.
a. Thickness: 1 inch.
b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-
developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A orNFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.
e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON t 58 t 5 - METAL DUCTS
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 2 of 8
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.5
A.
2.6
when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
duct.
1
I
I
I) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load test
perpendicular to duct wall.
2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 118 inch into airstream.
3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard
classification of duct liner system.
I
I
I
I
I
SEALANT MATERIALS
Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when
cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFP A requirements for Class I ducts.
Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
I. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards-
Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
B.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
c.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and interyals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and interyals.
1.
I
Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity
class required for pressure class.
Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's
"HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
2.
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON 15815 - METAL DUCTS
Page 3 of 8
I
I
I
I
B.
Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using
manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint
reinforcement.
I. Available Manufacturers:
I
a.
b.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Nexus Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.
c.
I
I
c.
Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction
Standards-Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using comer, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
I. Available Manufacturers:
I
a.
b.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Lockformer.
I
I
I
2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D.
Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger
and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of non braced panel area unless ducts are
lined.
2.7
APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
I
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct
liner is prohibited.
I
B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges ofliner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
I
I
D. Fold and compress liner in comers of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at comers of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
I
I
F. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from comers and at interyals not exceeding 12
inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at interyals not exceeding 18 inches
longitudinally.
I
I
I
G. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either
channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the
following locations:
I. Fan discharges.
2. Interyals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t5815 - METAL DUCTS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 4 of B
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500
tpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.
I
I
I
H.
Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane
assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means
are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
I
I
2.8
ROUND DUCT AND FITIlNG FABRICATION
A.
Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a
circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
B.
Round, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel
according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible."
I
I.
Available Manufacturers:
I
I
a. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
b. SEMCO Incorporated.
C. Duct Joints:
I.
Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before
and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two
internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.
Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM
rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's
tolerances.
I
I
2.
3.
I) Duetmate Industries, Inc.
2) Lindab Inc.
I
I
a. Available Manufacturers:
D. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HV AC
Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for
longitudinal-seam straight ducts.
1
I
I
E. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess
material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
F. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-
formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow
construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t 58 t 5 - MET At. DUCTS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with
SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise
indicated.
Page 5 of 8
I
I
I
2.
Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:
I
I
I
a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 2- to lO-inch wg:
I
I
I
a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
4. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and
90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
5. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for
30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
6. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate
gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.
7. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch
thick with 2-piece welded construction.
8. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
9. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through lO-Inch
wg: 0.022 inch.
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
DUCT APPLICATIONS
A.
Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:
I
1. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg.
2. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): I-inch wg.
3. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): I-inch wg.
I
I
I
I
B.
All ducts shall be galvanized steel.
3.2
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards-
Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.
C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
I
D.
Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
I
I
Peninsula College Campus. Wide InlTastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTtON t58t5 - METAL DUCTS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 6 of 8
E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of
3 screws in each coupling.
I
I
F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
I
I
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of I inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I
I
I
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions
unless specifically indicated.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,
and similar finished work.
K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward
to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
I
I
I
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partItIOns and
exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts
or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings
on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
N.
Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment,
seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint
Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
I
I
I
I
I
o.
Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.
3.3
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A.
Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards-
Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
B.
Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A.
Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
I
B.
Support vertical ducts at maximum interyals of 16 feet and at each floor.
1
Peninsula College Campus. Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 158t5 - METAL DUGS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
Page 7 of 8
I
I
I
I
3.5
A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories. II
I
I
I
3.6
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.
Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
CONNECTIONS
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
FIELD OUALITY CONTROL
A.
Remake leaking joints.
END OF SECTION 15815
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg_ C
SECTtON t 5815 - METAL DUCTS
Page 8 of 8
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
SECTION 15820
I
I
DUCT ACCESSORIES
I
I
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I
I
I
I
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
I. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounting access doors.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Flexible ducts.
7. Duct accessory hardware.
I
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors.
2. Division 15 Section "HV AC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric damper actuators.
I
I
I
I
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
I. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct-mounting access doors.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Flexible ducts.
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFP A 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION t 5820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 1 016
I
I
I
2.1
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
I
I
I
I
2.2
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated.
I
I
I
I
2.3
A.
Available Manufacturers:
1. Greenheek.
2. Ruskin Company.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i:l
MANUFACTURERS
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.
C.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
D.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-ineh
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
B.
Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations. Basis for design is Greenheck
EM-30 counterbalanced baekdraft damper for horizontal flow applications.
c.
Performance: Blades start to open at 0.03" w.c. and 20 fPm. Blades fully open at 0.05" w.e.
and 906 fPm.
D.
Frame: 0..125-inch- thick extruded aluminum, with mounting flange.
E.
Blade" 0.063-inch- thick aluminum sheet.
F.
Blade Seals: Vinyl.
G.
Blade Axles: Nonferrous.
H.
Bearings: Synthetic sleeve type
I.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
J. Counterbalance weights: Adjustable.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15820. OUCT ACCESSORIES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 2 of 6
2.4
VOLUME DAMPERS
I
I
Available Manufacturers:
2.5
A.
I
I
I
I
I. Air Balance, Inc.
2. American Warming and Ventilating.
3. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
4. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
5. METALAIRE, Inc.
6. Nailor Industries Inc.
7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
8. Ruskin Company.
9. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B.
General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
I
C.
I
I
I
Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as
indicated, standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
I. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick,
with mitered and welded comers; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to
walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, [galvanized] [stainless] sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Bearings: Molded synthetic.
5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
6. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
I
D.
Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick
zinc-plated steel, and a 314-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper
operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
I
TURNING VANES
I
I
I
A.
Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and
Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
B.
Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, double-vane, curved blades of
galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches
o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
I. Available Manufacturers:
I
I
I
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Duro Dyne Corp.
c. MET ALAIRE, Inc.
d. Ward Industries, Inc.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 3 of 6
I
I
'I
I ,\
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.6 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS
A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where
indicated. Include I-by-I-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
I. Available Manufacturers:
a. American Warming and Ventilating.
b. CESCO Products.
c. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
e. Greenheck.
f. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
g. Nailor Industries Inc.
h. Ventfabrics, Inc.
1. Ward Industries, Inc.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:
a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks.
b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
C. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
--,of
2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Available Manufacturers:
I. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.
B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181, Class I.
C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to
two strips of 2-314-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick
aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.
D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
I. Minimum Weight: 26 oz.lsq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibflinch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 4 of 6
I
2.8
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
I
A.
Available Manufacturers:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. Hart & Cooley, Inc.
3. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
I
I
I
B.
Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class I, black polymer film supported by helically
wound, spring-steel wire.
I. Pressure Rating:4-inch wg positive and O.5-inch wg negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class I, black polymer film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.
I. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and O.5-inch wg negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.
D. Flexible Duct Clamps: Nylon strap, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.
2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HV AC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,
and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
I
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated. Provide access door at each damper for inspection and maintenance.
I
I
D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths
from branch takeoff.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15820. DUCT ACCESSORIES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
Page 5 of 6
I
I
I
I
F.
Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:
I. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
G.
Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
H.
Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
I
I.
Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped
or strapped in place.
I
J.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
I
3.2
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
I
B.
Final positioning of manual-volume dampers IS specified in Division 15 Section "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing."
I
I
END OF SECTION 15820
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 6 of 6
SECTION 15838
POWER VENTILATORS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Ceiling-mounting ventilators.
1.3
1.4
PERFORMANCE REOUlREMENTS
A.
Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
, product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Fan speed controllers.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.5 OUALITY ASSURANCE
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 1 of 3
.:"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
I
B.
AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
I
I
c.
NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D.
UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
I
I
I
1.6 DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS
I
I
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
I. Carnes Company HV AC.
2. Greenheck.
3. Loren Cook Company.
4. Penn Ventilation.
I
I
I
I
I
B. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line
applications.
C. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
D. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan
wheel shall be removable for service.
E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for
motor plug-in.
F. Accessories:
I
I
I
I. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50
percent.
2. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Peninsula College Campus-Wide infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 2 of 3
I
I
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
I
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
I
I
I
I
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts. and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section
. "Duct Accessories. "
I
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
I
I
I
I
C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.3 FIELD OUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
I. VerifY that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. VerifY that cleaning and adjusting are
complete.
2. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
3. VerifY lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
4. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
I
I
END OF SECTION 15838
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work ~ Bldg. C November 2004
SECTION 15838 - POWER VENTILATORS RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 3 of 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15855
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART I - GENERAL
I.I RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I. Division 15 Section "Louvers" for fixed louvers, whether or not they are connected to
ducts.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for volume-control dampers not integral to
diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:
I. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
I
I
I
I
2.2
GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one ofthe following:
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg_ C
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS. AND GRILLES
Page 1 of 3
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
2.3
I
1. Manufacturers:
a. Anemostat; a Mestek Company.
b. Carnes.
c. Krueger.
d. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
e. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
f. Price Industries.
g. Titus.
I
I
CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS
I
I
I
I
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
2.4
I. Manufacturers:
a. Anemostat; a Mestek Company.
b. Carnes.
c. Krueger.
d. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
e. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
f. Price Industries.
g. Titus.
I
I
I
I
SOURCE OUALITY CONTROL
A.
Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
I
I
I
I
A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
I
I
I
I
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
Page 2 of 3
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
panels, locate units in the center of paneL Where architectural features or other items conflict
with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
. .
C.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
I
I
I
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 15855
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS. REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
Page 3 of 3
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
SECTION 15856
I
I
INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
I
I
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of roof-mounting intake and relief ventilators:
I. Roof hoods.
1.3
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
I
I
A.
Structural Performance: Intake and relief ventilators shall be capable of withstanding the
effects of gravity loads, wind loads, seismic loads, and thermal movements without permanent
deformation of components, noise or metal fatigue, or permanent damage to fasteners and
anchors.
I
SUBMITIALS
I
1.5
1.6
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
I
I
I
Shop Drawings: For intake and relief ventilators. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and ventilator attachments to curbs and curb attachments to roof structure.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain ventilators through one source from a single manufacturer where
indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of intake and
relief ventilators and are based on the specific equipment indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
I
COORDINATION
I
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs and roof penetrations. These items are specified In
Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15856 -INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS
Page 1 0(4
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
I
I
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
MANUFACTURERS
MATERIALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as
otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/ A 653M, 090 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. [4] [6] finish.
Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
I. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
2.3 FABRICATION. GENERAL
A. Factory fabricate intake and relief ventilators to rmnnnIze field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units to the minimum extent as necessary for shipping and handling. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Fabricate units with closely fitted joints and exposed connections accurately located and
secured.
C. Fabricate supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
2.4 ROOF HOODS
I
I
I
I
A.
Manufacturers:
I. Carnes.
2. Greenheck.
3. Loren Cook Company.
4. Penn Ventilation.
B.
Factory or shop fabricate according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Figures 5-6 and 5-7.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15856 -INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS
Page 2 of 4
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
C. Materials: Aluminum sheet, minimum 0.063-inch- thick base and 0.050-inch- thick hood;
suitably reinforced.
I
D. Bird Screening: Galvanized-steel, II2-inch- square mesh, O.04I-inch wire.
I
2.5 FINISHES. GENERAL
I
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
I
B. Finish roof hoods after assembly.
I
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
I
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
I
B. Roof hoods to be furnished with High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42Rlx
(Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-
phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and
apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
I
I
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors
and glosses.
I
I
I
I
I. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat,
thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride
resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install intake and relief ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
I
B. Secure intake and relief ventilators to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Use concealed
anchorages where possible. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of
roof curbs.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15856 -INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS
Page 3 of 4
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
C. Install intake and relief ventilators with clearances for service and maintenance.
I
I
I
I
D.
Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as installation progresses.
Comply with Division 7 Section "Join! Sealants" for sealants applied during installation.
Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no
evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
E.
I
I
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.
I
I
END OF SECTION 15856
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work ~ Bldg. C
SECTION 15856 -INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS
Page 4 of 4
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
LOUVERS
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15880
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I
I
1.2 SUMMARY
I. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
I
I
I
I
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply
to this Section, unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B.
Standard Free Area: Free area of a louver 48 inches wide by 48 inches high, identical to that
provided.
I
I
I
I
C.
Maximum Standard Airflow: Airflow at point of beginning water penetration through a
louver 48 inches wide by 48 inches high, identical to that provided.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15880 - LOUVERS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
A. Structural Performance: Provide exterior metal louvers capable of withstanding the effects of
loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent
deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal
fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and
anchors.
Page 1 of 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.6
I
I
I
I. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or
outward.
2. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface ternperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, and other
detrimental effects:
a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material
surfaces.
B.
Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, and Air-Leakage Ratings: Provide louvers complying
with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock
units 48 inches wide by 48 inches high. Testunits according to AMCA 500.
I.
Perform testing on unpainted, cleaned, degreased units.
2. Perform water-penetration testing on louvers without screens.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B.
Shop Drawings: For louver units and accessories. Include plans; elevations; sections; and
details showing profiles, angles, and spacing of louver blades. Show unit dimensions related
to wall openings and construction; free area for each size indicated; profiles of frames at
jambs, heads, and sills; and anchorage details and locations.
C.
Product Certificates: . Signed by manufacturers of louvers certifYing that the products
furnished comply with requirements and are licensed to bear the AMCA seal based on tests
made according to AMCA 500 and complying with AMCA's Certified Ratings Program.
OUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations; Obtain louvers through one source from a single manufacturer where
alike in one or more respects regarding type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
B. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastmcture Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15880 - LOUVERS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 2 016
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
I
I. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without
field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
I
I
I
I
A.
Field Measurernents: VerifY louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
1.1 MANUFACTURERS
I
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
I
I. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.
2. Arrow United Industries.
3. NCA Manufacturing Co.
4. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
5. Ruskin Manufacturing; Tomkins Industries, Inc.
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or
as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
c.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy 319.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15880 - LOUVERS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
D. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel,
unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
I. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
2. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
Page 3 of 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4
I
I
I
2.5
I
I
E.
Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for loading and installation
indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior
installations and elsewhere as needed for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
FABRICATION. GENERAL
A.
Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.
C.
Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining materials' tolerances,
and perimeter sealant joints.
I. Frame Type: Channel type, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
E.
Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded
fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view; unless
otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame
members necessary.
FIXED. EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A.
Louver Construction: Provide fixed-blade louvers with extruded-aluminum frames and
blades.
B.
Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louvers: As follows:
I. Louver Depth: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Frame Thickness: 0.081 inch.
3. Blade Thickness: 0.081 inch.
4. Blade Angle and Spacing: 37 degrees and 4 inches o.c. for 4-inch- deep louvers.
FINISHES. GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Mal)ual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15880 - LOUVERS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 4 of 6
B. Finish louvers after assembly.
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Louvers to be furnished with High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-CI2C42Rlx
(Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical finish: acid-chromate-
fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare,
pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions.
I. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat,
thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and
fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2.
I
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of
colors and glosses.
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for
installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.
Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.1 PREPARATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15880 - LOUVERS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
Page 5 of 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'.
\.r
E. . Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no
evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to
the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by
applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with
concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation
progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.
3.3 ADJUSTING. CLEANING. AND PROTECTING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
LOUVER SCHEDULE
I
I
A.
Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary
covering to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period Do not let soil
accumulate until final cleaning.
B.
Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not
harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
c.
Protect louvers and vents from damage during construction. Use temporary protective
coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering
at the time of Substantial Completion.
D.
Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence
remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by
Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-<lried coating that matches
color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
A.
Louvers are scheduled on the drawings.
END OF SECTION 15880
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTJON 15880 - LOUVERS
Page 6 of 6
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
SECTION 15950
I
I
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
I
I
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
I
I.
Air Systems:
I
2.
3.
a, Constant-volume air systems.
HV AC equipment quantitative-performance settings.
Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
I
1.3 DEFINITIONS
I
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce'
fan speed or adjust a damper.
I
I
I
I
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high
air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn
from a person's skin than is normally dissipated
D. NC: Noise criteria.
E. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable
results.
G. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
I
I
F. RC: Room criteria.
H. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a
closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Page 1 of 11
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.
I
I
,,"'''-,.
J. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
I
K. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a
fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.
I
I
L. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
M. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.
I
N. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.
O. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting TAB procedures.
I
I
1.4
SUBMITIALS
A.
Qualification Data: Within 15 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of
evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
I
I
B.
Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies ofreports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.
I
I
I
I
I
B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and
Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems.", NEBB's "Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.", Or SMACNA's
"HV AC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
I
I
I
D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards
for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's
"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems,"
Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently
if required by instrument manufacturer.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide [nrrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15950 - TESTING. ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Page 2 of 11
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
1.6
I
I.
I
Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
A.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
I
1.7 COORDINATION
I
A.
Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HV AC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HV AC systerns and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
I
B.
Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1
EXAMINATION
I
A.
I
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirernents and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
I. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of
Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing
devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
I
I
I
B.
Examine approved submittal data ofHV AC systems and equipment.
c.
I
Examine Project Record Documents described in Division I Section "Project Record
Documents.1I
D.
Examine design data, including HV AC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HV AC system and equipment controls. -
I
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data
to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or
unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15950 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
Page 3 of 11
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
I
effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HV AC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,
"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HV AC Systems-Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F.
Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are cornplete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G.
Examine system and equipment test reports.
H.
Examine HV AC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
I.
Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J.
Examine HV AC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
K.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
L.
Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
M.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
PREPARATION
B.
Cornplete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
I. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance dampers are open.
5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15950 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
Page 4 of 11
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
3.4
I
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning Systerns", NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing" and this Section.
I
I
B.
I
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
I
C.
Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-
control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
I
D.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
I
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
I
D.
3.5
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
I
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
c.
I
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow rneasurements.
Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
I
E.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F.
I
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
G.
Check for airflow blockages.
I
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
I
1.
Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
I
a.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
I
b.
I
c.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15950. TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
Page 5 of 11
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
'",-~r '
I
d.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
I
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
3. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Cornpare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identiJy where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
4. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to
accommodate fan-speed changes.
5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
I
I
I
I
B.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
I
}.
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
I
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
I
I
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
c.
Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
I
I.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
I
D.
Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at air terminals.
I
I.
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
I
2.
I
3.6
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
I
I.
2.
Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
Motor horsepower rating.
I
Peninsula College Campus~ Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15950 - TESTING. ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Page 6 of 11
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
3.7
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
I
I
PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
I
I
I
A.
Verify proper rotation offans.
3.8
B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
c.
I
Record compressor data.
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
I
I
A.
Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
3.9
I. . Nameplate data.
2. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
3. Calculated kilowatt at full load.
4. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
I
I
TOLERANCES
A.
Set HV AC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
I
I
I
I
3.10
I. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
FINAL REPORT
A.
General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in
three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B.
Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
I.
I
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
c.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
I. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastlllcture Work ~ Bldg. C
SECTION 15950. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Page70f11
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report, as applicable:
I
I. Title page.
2. Name and address ofT AB firm.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
II. Summary of contents including the following:
I
a.
b.
Indicated versus final performance.
Notable characteristics of systems.
I
I
I
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated
values.
15. Test conditions for fan performance forms including the following:
I
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
d. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
I
I
I
I
I. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
3. Terminal units.
4. Balancing stations.
5. Position of balancing devices.
F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
I. Unit Data: Include the following:
I
I
I
I
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Number of filters, type, and size.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15950 - TESTING. ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Page 8 of 11
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Motor Data:
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Outside airflow in cfrn.
I. Return airflow in cfrn.
J. Outside-air damper position.
k. Return-air damper position.
I
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
I
I
I
G.
Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
I. Fan Data:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
I
I
I
I
2. Motor Data:
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
Total airflow rate in cfm.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
Suction static pressure in inches wg.
I
I
c.
d.
e.
H.
Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
I
I. Report Data:
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15950 - TESTING. ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Page 9 of 11
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
System and air-handling unit number.
Location and zone.
Traverse air temperature in deg F.
Duct static pressure in inches wg.
Duct size in inches.
Duct area in sq. ft..
Indicated airflow rate in din.
Indicated velocity in [pm.
Actual airflow rate in cfm.
Actual average velocity in fpm.
Barometric pressure in psig.
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.
J.
k.
I
I.
Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
I. Unit Data:
Compressor arid Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone
refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units, include
the following:
I
I
I
I
2.
I
I
I
J.
I
a.
b.
System and air-handling unit identification.
Location and zone.
Test apparatus used.
Area served.
Air-terminal-device make.
Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
Air-terminal-device type and model number.
Air-terminal-device size.
Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft..
c.
d
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.
Test Data (Indicated and A~tual Values):
a.
b.
Airflow rate in cfm.
Air velocity in fpm.
Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.
Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
Final airflow rate in cfm.
Final velocity in fpm.
Space temperature in deg F.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
I. Unit Data:
I
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Unit identification.
Location.
Unit make and model number.
Compressor make.
Compressor model and serial numbers.
I
K.
Instrument Calibration Reports:
I. Report Data:
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15950 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
Page 10 of 11
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
END OF SECTION 15950
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 15950 - TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND BALANCING
Page 11 of 11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
November 2004 I
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
SECTION 17810
I
I
I
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEMS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REOUlREMENTS
A. The "General Conditions" of the specification apply to work specified in this section; consult
them in detail for applicable instructions.
I
B. All components of the Direct Digital Control (DDC) system must integrate searnlessly with the
existing Siemens Building Technologies "Apogee™" campus building automation network in
place at Peninsula College.
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. The Direct Digital Control (DOC) system shall be able to be monitored for reporting alarms and
system troubleshooting via the existing DDC dedicated fiber-optic network from the Siemens
Building Technologies "Apogee™" graphic operator workstation located in the Maintenance
and Operations building T on campus. The DDC system shall tie seamlessly into the existing
Siemens "Apogee™" graphic software package without the need for additional software or
hardware, for point database and system graphic modifications, dynamic point trending, and
remote alarm reporting.
I.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install additions to the existing networked Direct Digital Control (DDC) system for
control and monitoring of the building heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems as
described in this specification.
I
I
I
I
B. System shall consist of stand-alone DDC panels, sensors, automatic valves, actuators, dampers,
operating software, operator training, installation labor, warranty and all other necessary
material and labor to provide a complete and workable system.
C. Work includes addition to of existing controls for buildings C.
D. Work in this contract must coordinate with these current and future projects to permit the entire
campus DDC system to function as an integrated unit.
I.3 INSTALLATION & QUALITY
I
I
I
A. The entire building control system shall be installed by skilled electricians and control
mechanics, all of whom are properly trained and qualified for this work. All wiring shall be
installed in accordance with Division 16 of these specifications and applicable national, state
and local codes.
B. Supervision and checkout of the system shall be by local branch engineers and technicians
directly employed by the Controls Contractor.
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 17810 - Direct Digital Control (DOC) Systems
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 1 of 11
1.4
SUBMITIALSmRA WINGS
A.
Submittals
I. The contractor shall submit, prior to installation, a set of installation drawings, equipment
data sheets and control strategies for review by the consultant and/or Owner's
representative.
2. These drawings shall include the physical location of all building control system panels
and controllers as well as a diagram indicating complete DDC system architecture.
3. The complete sequence of operation for the control system shall.be provided.
4. A complete list of monitored and controlled points shall be provided.
B.
Record Drawings (As-builts)
I. Upon completion of the installation and final system adjustment the contractor shall
provide and deliver to the Owner a full set of record drawings of the installation and the
control strategies including printouts of all system programs, system database and system
operating parameters.
2. Record drawings shall be submitted in II" x IT' bound format. At owner's request,
provide a copy of as-built drawings on CD ROM disks.
c.
Standards and Format
I. All submittals shall be generated on reproducible Autocad (Version 14 or later) schematic
diagrams.
1.5 SYSTEM TURN-OVER AND SERVICE
A.
Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall initiate operation of the control system
and perform all necessary testing and diagnostics to ensure proper operation. A formal
commissioning procedure shall be utilized to insure complete system integrity and conformance
to these specifications. This procedure shall be a completely documented procedure.
Contractor's recommended commissioning plan shall be submitted with the initial submittal for
approval by engineer. At a minimum, submittal shall include a step-by-step, written description
of the commissioning plan as well as the project specific commissioning forms that will be
utilized. Commissioning forms shall address all field devices, field controllers, software
statements and software points.
B.
An acceptance test in the presence of the owners representative, and/or the Project Manager
shall be performed. Deficiencies revealed by failed test(s) shall be repaired and corrected and
the test( s) repeated until successful.
c.
The graphical interface software revisions shall be installed prior to completion and all
modifications to reflect as-built conditions and changes shall be completed within fourteen (14)
days of the scheduled completion date.
1.6 TRAINING/OWNER'S INSTRUCTION
A. The contractor shall provide to the Owner two (2) copies of an operator's manual describing all
operating and routine maintenance service procedures to be used with the system.
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 17810 - Direct Digital Control (DOC) Systems
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 2 of 11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i, "_)~.:'
1.7 WARRANTY
Vi'
A. The building control system, including all hardware and software components shall be
warranted for a period of one year following owner's acceptance of system. For phased project
completion, the warranty shall also commence in phases. Any manufacturing defects arising
during this period shall be corrected without cost to the owner.
B. In addition to the hardware warranty, the Contractor shall correct any software sequences that
do not meet the specified sequence of operation. Modification or. repairs required due to
changes enacted by the owner's system operators during the warranty period will not be
considered warranty items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
I
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
The equipment as supplied must be of the same manufacture and fully compatible with the
existing Siemens Building Technologies "Apogee™" Energy Monitoring and Control System
Host Front End installed in the Maintenance and Operation building.
B.
Equipment shall be installed by Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 632 St. Helens, Tacoma,
WA 98402, (253) 274-4776.
I
2.2
DDC SYSTEM
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. General
I. The Direct Digital Control (DDq system shall possess a fully modular architecture,
permitting expansion through the addition of DDC controllers, slave panels, terminal
equipment controllers, operator terminals, personal computers and/or a general purpose
multi-tasking, multi-operator minicomputer.
I
I
B. DDC Controller
I. DDC controllers shall be stand-alone, microprocessor-based, with a minimum word size
of 16 bits. They shall be multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors
consisting of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication
controllers, power supplies and jnput/output point modules.. Controller size shall be
sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list
and with spare capacity and expandability features as described below.
2. Each DDC controller shall have sufficient memory (minimum I ME) to support its
operating system and databases including trending, dial-up communications, alarm
management and manual override monitoring.
3. Each DDC controller shall support monitoring and control of the following types of
points, without the addition of equipment outside the DDC controller cabinet:
a. Analog Inputs (AI):
I) 4-20 mA
2) 0-10 Vdc
3) Thermistors
4) 1000 ohm RTDs
Peninsula College CamplIs- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 17810 - Direct Digital Control (DOC) Systems
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 3 of 11
I
b. Digital Inputs (DI):
I) Dry Contact Closure
2) Pulse Accumulator
3) Voltage Sensing
c. Digital Outputs (DO):
I) Contact Closure (rnotor starters, sizes as required)
d. Analog Outputs (AO):
I) 0-20 psi
2) 4-20 mA
3) 0-10 Vdc
4. Each DDC controller shall have a minimum of one spare of each point type (analog
inputs, digital inputs, analog outputs, digital outputs) and no less than 10% expandability
within the controller enclosure. Provide all processors, power supplies and
communication controllers complete so that the irnplementation of a new point only
requires the addition of the appropriate point input/output termination module and wiring.
Provide sufficient internal rnemory for the specified control sequences and have at least
25% of the memory available for future use.
5. The operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed
commands at the DDC controller via local, point discrete, on-board hand/off/auto
operator override switches for digital control type points and gradual switches for analog
control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel
processor is operational or not. Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC
controller key-accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to
prevent unauthorized overrides. DDC controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides
and inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC controllers shall
also collect override activity information for reports. At a minimum, all digital outputs
(except terminal controllers) shall have supervised manual override switches.
6. DDC controllers shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input and
output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an
operator I/O device. Graduated intensity LEDs or analog indication of value shall also be
provided for each analog output.
7. DDC controllers shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for
operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals,
modems and portable laptop operator's terminals. DDC controllers shall allow temporary
use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently
connected modems, printers or terminals.
8. Each DDC controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication
diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC controller shall provide both
local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, low battery conditions
or repeated failure to establish communication.
9. DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform any or all the following energy
management routines:
a. Time-of-day scheduling
b. Calendar-based scheduling
c. Holiday scheduling
d. Temporary schedule overrides
e. Start-stop time optimization
f. Automatic Daylight Savings Time switchover
g. Night setback control
h. Enthalpy switchover (economizer)
I. Peak demand limiting
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 17810 - Direct Digital Control (DOC) Systems
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 4 of 11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
-,:'.'.;
10.
J. Temperature-compensated duty cycling
k. Fan speedlCfrn control
I. Heating/cooling interlock
m. Cold deck reset
n. Hot deck reset
o. Hot water reset
p. Chilled water reset
q. Condenser water reset
r. Chiller sequencing
s. Prioritize alarm signals in at least 3 levels of criticality
The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part of
DDC controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for
execution. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator
intervention and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be
applied to building equipment as described in the Sequence of Operations.
Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to operator
devices. Each DDC controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and
filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network
traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. Any critical alarms shall have the capability
of generating a user defined message and routing that message to any operator device or
printer At no time shall the DDC controllers ability to report alarms be affected by either .
operator or activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device or communications with other
panels on the network.
A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or
automatically sample, store and display system data for points. Each DDC controller
shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data storage and shall be capable of
storing a minimum of 10,000 data samples. Trend data shall be stored at the DDC
controllers and uploaded to the workstation (if provided) when retrieval is desired. For
systems with graphical workstation capabilities, uploads shall occur based upon either
user-defined interval, manual command or when the trend buffers are full. All trend data
shall be available for use in Microsoft Word or Excel applications.
II.
12.
Application Specific Controllers
I. General
a. Provide Application Specific Controllers (ASC's) as required for control of unitary
mechanical systems or pieces of equipment. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-
based DDC control unit and shall be capable of operating either as a standalone
controller or on a multi-drop communications network originating at the DDC
controller. Provide each ASC with sufficient rnernory to operate in a truly
independent manner; that is, each ASC shall support its own inputs and outputs,
operating systems, database and programs necessary to perform control sequences
and energy management routines.
b. Provide the following types of ASC's as necessary:
I) Unitary Controllers (De's)
2) Terminal Equipment Controllers (TEe's)
2. Unitary Controllers (UC's)
a. UC's shall include all point inputs and outputs necessary to perform the specified
control sequences. Provide a hand-off-automatic switch for each binary output for
manual override capability. Switches shall be mounted either within the
controller's key-accessed enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed
to prevent unauthorized overrides. In addition, each switch position shall be
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 17810 - Direct Digital Control (DOC) Systems
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 5 of 11
supervised in order to inform the system that automatic control has been
overridden. As a minimum, 50% of the point inputs and outputs shall be of the
universal type, allowing for additional system flexibility. In lieu of universal
inputs and outputs, provide a minimum of 50% spare points of each type.
b. Each UC shall support its own real-time operating system. Provide a time clock
with 72 hour battery backup to allow for stand alone operation and to insure
protection during power outages. Should the controller reside on a DDC controller
network, the clock operation shall be overridden by the DDC controller clock to
insure network continuity.
c. All databases and programs shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM or a
minimum of 100-hour battery back-up shall be provided. All programs shall be
field-customized to meet the user's exact control strategy requirements.
Controllers utilizing pre-packaged or canned programs shall not be acceptable.
d. Local alarming and trending capabilities shall be provided for convenient
troubleshooting and system diagnostics. Alarm limits and trend data information
shall be user-definable for any point.
e. Each UC shall have connection provisions for a portable laptop or similar
programming tool. This tool shall allow the user to display, generate or modify all
point databases and operating programs. All new values and problems shall then
be restored to EEPROM.
3. Terminal Equipment Controllers (TEC's)
a. Control of terminal units such as V A V boxes, heat pumps and reheat boxes shall
be accomplished by a microprocessor based stand-alone controller utilizing direct
digital control. The Terminal Equipment Controller (TEe) shall interface to the
building control system in a multi-drop communications network originating at the
DDC field panel. An individual controller shall be provided for each terminal unit.
The terminal controller must be listed by Underwriters Laboratory under UL 916
PAZX and UL 864 UDTZ.
b. Each TEC shall be accessible for purposes of control and monitoring from a
central or remote operator's terminals as specified herein.
c. TEC damper actuator shall be of the 24 Vac floating point type. Upon power loss,
the actuator maintains its current damper position. Position status is shown in
percentage open notation.
d. TEC room temperature sensor shall come complete with a terminal jack and
programmable override switch integral to the sensor assembly. The terminal jack
shall be used to connect the portable operators terminal to control and monitor all
hardware and software points associated with the terminal unit. A terminal jack
may be alternatively located on a stainless steel wall plate mounted adjacent to the
sensor. An override switch shall initiate override of the night setback or
unoccupied mode to normal operation when activated. A thumbwheel-type
temperature setpoint dial shall also be provided with I Deg F temperature
increments. Override switch and temperature setpoint functions may be locked
out, canceled or limited as to time or temperature via software.
e. TEC wiring terminal bars are to be detachable type allowing quick serviceability of
the electronic controller hardware without removal of the existing wiring.
D.
Central Operator Interface Console
I. Peninsula College has an existing Siemens Building Technologies "Apogee" centralized
Energy Management & Control System (EMCS) that is utilized to monitor and control
the HVAC equipment in (16) separate buildings on campus. The new systems installed
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 17810 - Direct Digital Control (DOC) Systems
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 6 of 11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"- '~.. ~~
I
I
for this project will be connected to this existing system and shall fully support all
functionality listed below.
a. Existing Host Equipment: One networked personal computer with Apogee™
Insight Server graphical software operating on Windows 2000 Platform. The
Apogee Insight Server workstation resides on Peninsula Colleges' dedicated
EMCS Network for communication with remote buildings.
2. Existing Host Functionality: The Host described above is utilized by Peninsula College
to perform the following functions:
a. Alarming: Alarms from field panels at each respective facility are sent to the host
server which displays these alarms both on the alarm manager screen for
acknowledgment and on a printer for hard copy record. The field panel in each
facility determines specific alarm limits and conditions based upon its custom
programmed database. Once an alarm state is identified, the local field panel
initiates a specific message to the Host.
b. Data Archiving: Specific data is trended by the individual field panels in each
facility as directed by the user. This data is then uploaded to the Host for
permanent storage and/or manipulation.
c. Equipment Scheduling: The Host is utilized to schedule the operation of
individual building equipment start and stop times. Optimization is executed
through the zones located in the individual field panel database.
d. Graphical Display and Command: The Host PC graphical workstation is utilized
by Peninsula College for graphical display and commanding of EMCS system
. points.
e. Database Modifications: Additions, deletions or modifications to points or
programming within the EMCS database can be made either directly at the field
panel, or via software at the central workstation. Field panel modifications are
performed via a portable laptop computer. Modifications performed at the central
workstation level utilize the functionality of the Apogee@ software editors to make
the changes.
f. Database Backup: The Server Host acts as the master database storage device and
calls all of the individual field panels on a daily basis to check for database
changes or loss of database. In the event a loss of database is detected, the master
database will be downloaded to the field panel. In the event that the Host detects
unreported database changes in a field panel, the database will be uploaded to the
Host with the modifications stored as 'disabled' pieces of data.
g. Database Transfer: If changes are made to the database at the Host level, a
download is manually initiated by the workstation to send the revised data to the
individual field panel. If changes are made in the field, an upload is manually
initiated to upload the revised data to the Host.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
FIELD DEVICES
A.
Temperature Sensors
I. All temperature sensors shall be solid state electronic, employing a resistance type output.
Room and zone temperature sensors may be thermistor type. All duct sensors shall be
rigid or flexible probe, averaging RTD-type sensors. All duct mixed air sensors shall be
flexible averaging RTD-type sensors with sensor element length suitable for complete
duct coverage. Pipe sensors shall be RTD-type. Provide outside air temperature sensors
with watertight inlet filling and sunlight shield. All single point sensors shall be accurate
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 17810 - Direct Digital Control (DOC) Systems
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCH OS ENGINEERING
Page 7 of 11
I
I
to a minimum of :!: 0.5 degrees F at 77 degrees F calibration point. Duct averaging .,
sensors shall be accurate to a minimum of:!: 1.0 degrees F.
B.
Control Dampers
I. Provide low leakage, galvanized steel control dampers with roll-formed steel frames and
blades and oil-impregnated bronze bearings. Dampers shall have blade seals and stops,
equal to Ruskin CD36.
2. Leakage shall be no greater than 10 CFM per square foot at 4 in. W.C. with 20 in.-lbs.
torque applied regardless of size.
3. Provide opposed blade type dampers unless indicated otherwise. Provide parallel blade
dampers for economizer mixing box applications. All multi-section dampers shall be
provided with factory linkage to allow for connection of actuator at one common point.
C. Damper Actuators
I. All modulating damper and valve actuators shall be 24vac electric motor type; floating
point, 0-IOVdc, 0-16Vdc or other industry standard input signal type. Actuators shall
function properly within the range of 85 to 110 percent of line voltage.
2. Provide actuators in sufficient size, quantity and type to match application. Provide a
minimum of one damper actuator for each 30 square feet of damper area.
3. Damper actuators shall be rotary action-type (90 degree) designed for direct connection
to damper shaft wherever possible. Provide position indication on exterior of actuator
body.
4. Actuators shall be spring return as indicated by Normally Closed or Normally Open
designation on drawings or in sequence of operation.
D. Low Temperature Detection Thermostats
I. Provide low temperature control thermostat, electric type manual reset, non-averaging 20
feet long sensing elements that switch whenever any 6 inch section or more of any
portion senses a temperature as low as the thermostat setpoint as specified in sequences.
2. Provide with two sets of contacts, one for hardwired fan shutdown and one for rernote
monitoring.
3. Powers ETI41 or approved equal.
E. Current Sensing Relays
I. Provide current sensing relays for status of fans or pumps as called out in sequences or
input/output summary. Provide with field adjustable current setpoint range.
2. Nielsen-Kuljian or approved equal.
F. Interposing Relays
I. Track mounted SPDT relays (or as required) for all interposing applications.
2. IDEC or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SEOUENCE OF OPERATION
A.
General: All setpoints, limits, etc. shall be adjustable through the central CPU or the laptop
computer connected to the system.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 17810 - Direct Digital Control (DOC) Systems
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 8 of 11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
A.
Contractor shall create additional graphics for each discrete mechanical system controlled by
the EMCS. These graphics shall include the following types of systems at a minimum:
I. Building Floor Plans Indicating Zone Temperatures
2. Fan Coils including Packaged and Split System Heat Pumps
3. Zone Coils, Convectors and Radiation Units
4. Main Exhaust Fans
I
I
I
3.3
A.
See attached at end of this section.
I
I
3.4
I
"
.'
B.
HOA Override/Status Panel: Provide HONstatus override panel including the following for all
mechanical equipment control e.xcluding application specific controllers.
\. Hand/Off! Auto selector switch for each binary output.
2. Hand/Auto variable positioner for each analog output.
3. Feedback to central panel for annunciation of hand position.
4. LED status for each binary output and input.
5. Variable intensity LED status for each analog output.
6. Lock cover to prevent unauthorized access to switches.
7. Cover to include clear tamperproof front for viewing switch position and LED indication.
c.
Heat Pumps with and without Economy Cooling
I. Systems operate during scheduled hours.
2. Units begin warm-up cycle with outside air dampers closed. Warm-up cycle IS
programmed to bring space to operating temperature at time of occupancy.
3. Upon occupancy, unit goes to minimum outside air position. Fan runs continuously.
4. Unit cycles in heating operation as required to maintain space temperature. Compression
heat is used as first stage. Auxiliary electric heat provides second stage heat.
5. Economy cooling capability provides outside air cooling prior to use of mechanical
cooling (Units with economy cooling only)
6. When outside air rises above return air temperature, unit returns to minimum outside air
and rnechanical cooling operates as required.
7. Units are off as scheduled and outside dampers closed. Units and unit fan cycle on in
heating to maintain scheduled unoccupied setback temperature.
D.
Heating Terminal Units including Convectors and Radiation Units.
I. Heaters operate on space temperature sensors. During occupied mode heaters cycle as
supplemental zone heat to maintain space set temperature. During unoccupied mode
heaters are off.
E.
Exhaust Fans
\. Toilet room exhaust fans run during occupied hours.
GRAPHICS SCREENS
INPUT/OUTPUT SUMMARY
INSTALLATION REOUlREMENTS
A.
Control Wiring
Peninsula College Campus~Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 17810 - Direct Digital Control (ODC) Systems
Page 9 of 11
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
1.
All line voltage wiring and low voltage wiring in exposed areas shall be run in EMT,
conduit or wiremold. Wiring run exposed in fmished areas shall be in wiremold.
Wiring shall be in accordance with the "Electrical" section of these specifications,
Section 16000, and all applicable codes. Wiring within concealed, accessible spaces may
be run with plenum-rated cable as allowed by local codes.
If utilized in lieu of conduit plenum-rated cables shall be run in an orderly manner, tied
and bundled every 3 feet on average.
2.
3.
B. Labels And Identification
1. Identity all equipment and panels. Identification shall be with labels describing
equipment and panel use and function.
2. Labels shall be engraved with contrasting text using bakelite, plastic or metal material.
Labels shall be permanently glued or mechanically fastened.
3. All wires and cables shall be identified with permanent markers at each end. The wire
designator shall match those on the shop and installation drawings.
C. General
1. Provide and install devices, relays, switches, thermostats, sensors, dampers, conduit,
wiring, and tubing to provide a complete temperature regulation and control operation
system. All wiring shall be run in concealed areas where possible. Where necessary to
be exposed it shall be installed in a workmanlike manner.
2. Contractor is responsible for providing a complete and operational system as called out in
the sequence of operation and/or in the input/output summary for this project. Any item
referenced in one part of the system documentation but not listed elsewhere shall be
covered under contractors pricing (i.e. damper called out in sequence but not indicated on
input/output summary).
3. Install equiprnent level and plumb.
4. Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of
programs to specified requirernents and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
5. Install project database and graphics in existing District Operator Workstation to permit
equivalent operator function to Operator Workstation located at project site.
6. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation
specified.
7. Verity location of thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room
details before installation.
a. Locate all thermostats and other exposed control sensors 44 inches above the floor.
8. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
. 9. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to
outdoor temperatures.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 17810 - Direct Digital Control (DOC) Systems
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 100f11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
INPUT/OUTPUT SUMMARY
I
I
Heat Pump w/o and w/
Economizer:
- Supply Fan Start/Stop
- Supply Fan Status
- Reversing Valve
- Compressor S/S
- Aux. Heat Enable
- OA 1 RA Dampers ·
- Relief Dampers ·
- Supply Air Temperature
- Mixed Air Temperature ·
- Space Temperature
- Space Temp Setpoint Adjust
- Night Setback Override
· Economizer operation only
I
I
I
I
I
I
Heater Control:
- Space Temperature
- Electric Heat On/Off
I
I
I
I
Exhaust Fan Control:
- Exhaust Fan SIS
- Exhaust Fan Status
AI - Analog Input
AO- Analog Output
DI - Digital Input
DO - Digital Output
I
I
I
I
~'..~""..'
~, -', ' ;., -~
,~ ...~.- 1" .
x
X.
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
BJZ~ .~~~ ..,?'~ ~()~j
- -
~- - ~. L'. "t?$ili"", till. ...!if it.,."" - >'!~'J'<<""~_~~~
X
X
X
X
END OF SECTION 17810
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 17810- Direct Digital Control (DDC) Systems
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 11 of 11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
:1'
I
I
I
I
I
\
,,' i vision&f;~i;SeCtion;;title'W;.'fi:~~<!j;j:~7Pf'i~~:~~1.'fN/!;?;,:Z'f!;;r4f;%1At~:'t1~j~t~?fjjJ!;}!fif!;/&;.~i';i;~?E:!'9~~;~fZt{;f/i~liJ~:~~';1::Jj:~f/liJ3.:M?i(i&:Y!!/~;$i:i,~'i.~:r(,1;ii_;i,.~i.:~'M)~~ig;~.}~~)t!J:.{~~::~tPa"g'
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050
16060
16080
16140
16155
16410
16442
16491
16511
16740
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
GROUNDING AND BONDING
ELECTRICAL TESTING
WIRING DEVICES
MOTOR STARTERS
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PANELBOARDS
FUSES
INTERIOR LIGHTING
COMMUNICATION AND DATA-PROCESSING EQUIPMENT
7
3
2
3
4
3
3
2
3
8
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Division 16-TableofContents
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
paga 1 of I
\
Section 16050
I
I
I
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1- GENERAL
I
I
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2
1.3
1.4
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Raceways.
2. Building wire and connectors.
3. Supporting devices for electrical components.
4. Electrical identification.
5. Electrical demolition.
6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
I
I
I
I
SUBMITI ALS
A.
Product Data: For raceways and building wire and connectors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
A.
Electrical Components, Devices. and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70.
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. and marked for
intended use.
B.
I
I
I
Comply with NFPA 70.
I
I
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate chases. slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings for electrical supports, raceways, and
cable with general construction work.
B.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment that requires positioning before
closing in the building.
I
I
c.
Coordinate electrical service connections to coinponents furnished by utility companies.
I. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services, including provision for service entrances and electricity-metering components.
D.
Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate
installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16050 - BASIC ELECfRlCAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page I of?
I
I
I
I
I
\
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
I
I
RACEWAYS
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing; ANSI C80.3, zinc-coated steel, with compression fittings.
FMC: Flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit; A,NSI C80.6, zinc-coated steel, with threaded fittings.
LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and
mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit; galvanized rigid steel; ANSI C80.1.
RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit; NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with NEMA TC3 fittings.
Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for raceway type with which used.
WIRES, CABLES, AND CONNECTIONS
Conductors, No. lOA WG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper.
Conductors, Larger Than No. lOA WG: Stranded copper.
Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated 600 V, 75 deg C minimum. Type THW, THHN-THWN, or
USE depending on application..
D.
Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable
for service indicated.
SUPPORTING DEVICES
\
I
A.
Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
B.
Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C.
Slotted-Steel Channel: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/I6-inch- diameter slotted holes
at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs. Strength rating to suit structural loading.
D.
Nonmetallic Slotted Channel and Angle: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin
channels and angles with 9/l6-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least
one surface. Strength rating to suit structural loading.
E. Slotted Channel Fittings and Accessories: Recommended by the manufacturer for use with the
type and size of channel with which used.
I. Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel.
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section] 6050 - BASIC ELEcrRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 2 of?
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
\
2.4
F. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-
clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or c1ick-
type hangers.
I
I
I
I
I
G. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
H. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have
number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body
constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
I. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
J.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
I
K.
Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.
I
I
I
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
\
A.
Identification Device Colors: Use those prescribed by ANSI AI3.I, NFPA 70, and these
Specifications.
B.
Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape,
not less than I inch wide by 3 mils thick.
c.
Tape Markers for Conductors: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with
preprinted numbers and letters.
I
I
D.
Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
E.
Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape
compounded for permanent direct-burial service, and with the following features:
I
I
I
I
1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.
2. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
3. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
F.
Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1116-inch minimum thickness for signs up
to 20 sq. in. and liS-inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters
on white background.
G.
Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted; comply with 29 CFR 1910.145, Chapter XVII. Colors,
legend, and size appropriate to each application.
I
I. Interior Units: Aluminum, baked-enamel-finish, punched or drilled for mechanical
fasteners.
2. Exterior Units: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate with
0.0396-inch, galvanized-steel backing. .1I4-inch grommets in comers for mounting.
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16050 - BASIC ELECIRICAL MATERIALS AND METIlODS
Page 3 of7
I
I
I
\
I
H.
Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-
steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Headroom Maintenance: If moun,ting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom.
B.
Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
D.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Outdoor Installations:
I. Exposed: RMC.
2. Concealed: IMe.
3. Underground, Single Run: RNC.
4. Underground, Grouped: RNC.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Indoor Installations:
i'
1. Exposed: EMT except in wet or damp locations, use IMC. !
2. Concealed in Walls or Ceilings: EMT.
3. In Concrete Slab: RMC.
4. Below Slab on Grade or in Crawlspace: RMC
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations: LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
Conceal raceways, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
B.
Keep legs of raceway bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel.
C.
Use RMC elbows where RNC turns out of slab.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16050 - BASIC ELEcrR1CAL MATERIALS AND METI10DS
Page 4 of7
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
"
F.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.5
3.6
3.7
I
D.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 A WG zinc-coated steel or woven
polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 2oo-lb tensile strength. Leave at
least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wires.
I
E.
Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a
maximum of 72-inches flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. Install
separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
I
I
I
Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface.
WIRING METHODS FOR POWER. LIGHTING. AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
I
I
Application: Use wiring methods specified below to the extent permitted by applicable codes as
interpreted by authorities having jurisdiction.
Exposed Feeders: Insulated single conductors in raceway.
Concealed Feeders in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions: Insulated single conductors in
raceway.
I
I
I
I
Exposed Branch Circuits Including in Crawlspaces: Insulated single conductors in raceway.
Concealed Branch Circuits in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions: Insulated single
conductors in raceway.
F.
Remote-Control Signaling and Power-Limited Circuits, Classes I, 2, and 3: Insulated
conductors in raceway unless otherwise indicated.
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
,
I
I
I
I
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A.
Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic. slotted channel
system components.
B.
Dry Locations: Steel materials.
I
c.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads. times a safety factor of at
least four with, 200-1b minimum design load for each support element.
I
I
I
I
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers. .
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16050 - BASIC ELECfRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Pag.Sof7
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Size supports for multiple raceway or cable runs so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
\
C.
Support individual horizontal single raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or
clamps except use spring-steel fasteners for 1-1I2-inch and smaller single raceways above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.
D.
Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled
holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated
gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during
erection of concrete and masonry walls.
E.
Secure electrical items and their supports to building structure, using the following methods
unless other fastening methods are indicated:
I. Wood: Wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Gypsum Board: Toggle bolts. Seal around sleeves with joint compound, both sides of
wall.
3. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow block and expansion bolts on solid block. Seal around
sleeves with mortar, both sides of wall.
4. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
5. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
6. Structural Steel: Spring-tension clamps.
a. Comply with A WS DI.I for field welding.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Light Steel Framing: Sheet metal screws.
Fasteners for Damp, Wet, or Weather-Exposed Locations: Stainless steel.
Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
Fasteners: Select so load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-
test load.
3.8
IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES
i'
I
A.
Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment.
B.
Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification
with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and
standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
c.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
D. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit
numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for
voltage and phase identification.
E. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR 1910.145,
Chapter XVII, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems
and of items to which they connect. Indoors install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16050 - BASIC ELECfRICAL MATERIALS AND METIlODS
Page 6 of 7
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
\
3.9
3.10
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install
metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
I
I
I
F.
Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background
with minimurn 3/8-inch- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load
shedding, and other emergency operations.
I
I
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Apply firestopping to cable and raceway sleeves and other penetrations of fire-rated floor and
wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire-resistance ratings of assemblies.
Firestopping installation is specified in Division 7.
I
I
DEMOLITION
A.
Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or
disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal
capacity, quality, and functionality.
I
I
B.
Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be
demolished, in their entirety.
C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in
place, 2 inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to
match existing finish.
I
I
D. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for
relocation.
3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING
I
I
I
I
\
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
pennit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair, refinish and touch up disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent
undisturbed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 16050
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16050 - BASIC ELECfRICAL MATERIALS AND METIlODS
Page 7 of7
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
Section 16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes grounding of.electrical systems and equipment. Requirements specified
in this Section may be supplemented by requirements of other Sections.
1.2 SUBMITIALS
A. Product Data: For ground rods.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled under UL 467 as defined
in NFP A 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground
construction, comply with IEEE C2.
C. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Chance/Hubbell.
2. Copperweld Corp.
3. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
4. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.
5. Korns, C. C. Co.; Division of Robroy Industries.
6. O-ZlGedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
7. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.
8. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
2.2
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 1 of 3
B.
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
I
I
\
C. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to
provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Bare, Solid-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 3.
G. Assernbly of Bare, Stranded-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 8.
H. Bare, Tinned-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 33.
I. Copper Bonding Conductor: No.4 or No.6 A WG, stranded copper conductor.
J. Copper Bonding Jurnper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1116 inch thick.
K. Tinned-Copper Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated
with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1116 inch thick.
I
L. Ground Conductor for Overhead Distribution: No.4 A WG minimum, soft-drawn copper.
I
I
I
I
I
M. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulated spacer.
N. Connectors: Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and
combinations of conductors and connected items. compression type or exothermic-welded type,
in kit form, selected per manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Use only copper grounding conductors.
B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and
quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more
conductors than required by NFP A 70 are indicated.
I
I. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors In all feeders and branch circuit
raceways (metallic and non-metallic).
2. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to
duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and
heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16060 - GRODNDlNG AND BONDING
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
I
Page 2 uf 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
3. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install an insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing, and antifrost
heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and
cornponents.
D.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated. A void obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to
strain, impact, or damage.
E.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation
hangers or supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded
connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a
bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
F.
Connections: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized.
Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact will be galvanically compatible.
I.
Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make
contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For NO.8 A WG and larger, use
pressure-type grounding lugs. No. lOA WG and smaller grounding conductors may be
terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.
Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal
housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit
with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor
to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at
entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless
otherwise indicated. ,
Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors \md terminals according
to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic cornpression tools to provide correct
circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended
by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard rnethod to
make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding
conductor.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
END OF SECTION 16060
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 3 of 3
\
I
I
SECTION 16080 - ELECTRICAL TESTING
I
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
I
I
I
A.
This Section includes general requi~ernents for electrical field testing and inspecting. Detailed
requirements are specified in each Section containing cornponents that require testing. General
requirements include the following:
I. Qualifications of testing agencies and their personnel.
2. Suitability of test equipment.
3. Calibration of test instruments.
4. Coordination requirements for testing and inspecting.
5. Reporting requirements for testing and inspecting.
I
I
I
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: As specified in each Section containing electrical testing
requirements and in subparagraph and associated subparagraph below.
B.
Test Equipment Suitability: Comply with NETA ATS, Section 5.2.
C. Test Equipment Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, Section 5.3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
\
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
3.1
GENERAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
If a group of tests are specified to be performed by an independent testing agency, prepare
systems, equipment, and components for tests and inspections, and perform preliminary tests to
ensure that systems, equipment, and components are ready for independent agency testing.
Include the following minimum preparations as appropriate:
I. Perform insulation-resistance tests.
2. Perform continuity tests.
3., Perform rotation test (for motors to be tested).
4. Provide a stable source of single-phase, 208/120- V electrical power for test
instrumentation at each test location.
B. Test and Inspection Reports: In addition to requirements specified elsewhere, report the
following:
I
I
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16080 - ELECl'RICAL TESTING
Page I of 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
I.
2.
Manufacturer's written testing and inspecting instructions.
Calibration and adjustment settings of adjustable and interchangeable devices involved in
tests.
Tabulation of expected measurement results made before measurements.
Tabulation of "as-found" and "as-left" measurement and observation results.
3.
4.
END OF SECTION 16080
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16080 - ELECTRICAL TESTING
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 2 of 2
\
I
I
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
I
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
I
I
I
A.
This Section includes:
I. Receptacles.
2. Connectors.
3. Switches.
4. Finish plates.
SUBMITIALS
I
I
I
I
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Field quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
I
I
I
I
B.
Comply with NEMA WD I.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
\
,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to cornpliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following
I
I. Wiring Devices:
a. Bryant Electric, Inc.
b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div.
d. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
e. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
f. Pass & SeymourlLegrand; Wiring Devices Div.
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastruclure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16140- WIRING DEVICES
Page I of 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
\
2.3
RECEPTACLES
A.
Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade.
B.
GFCI Receptacles: Feed-through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R
duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit.
Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- deep outlet box without an adapter.
SWITCHES
A.
Snap Switches: Heavy -duty, quiet type.
2.4 FINISH COLOR FOR RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES
2.5
A.
Color: White, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code.
WALL PLATES
A.
Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices.
I. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: O.04-inch- thick, Type 302, satin-finished stainless steel.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
INSTALLATION
Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.
\
,
Install waIl plates when painting is complete.
Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging as instructed by
manufacturer.
Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, rnount flush, with long dimension
vertical. and grounding tenninal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
F. Protect devices and assemblies during painting.
G. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets and telephone/power service poles are installed to
suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings..
Peninsula College Campus- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 2 of 3
3.2
\
3.3
I
RECEPTACLE AND SWITCH IDENTIFICATION
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Provide identification of all light switch and receptacle covers, consisting using a silk screening
process (or equal). The label shall include panel name and circuit number. In addition to the
identification on the cover plate, provide the same information inside the device/outlet box.
PANELBOARDSCHEDULES
A.
Provide updated panel schedules for the main switchboard and Panel T. These schedules shall
agree with the panel schedules indicated on the drawings.
3.4 FIELD OUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at least six
times.
I
I
I
B.
Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
C.
Replace damaged or defective components, and prepare written report of tests.
END OF SECTION 16140
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16140- WIRING DEVICES
Page 3 of 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
SECTION 16155 - MOTOR STARTERS
PART1- GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED:
A. Furnish and install, complete, motor starters for all electric motor driven equipment. Provide a
suitable starter for each motor that will perform the functions indicated. Provide correctly sized
starters for all motors.
B. Install all motor starters and interconnection for equipment furnished under other division.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. All motor starters of each type provided shall be the end product of one manufacturer.
B.
Codes and standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, standards and
specifications for manufacture and testing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified.
I. NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association)
2. ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
3. Local Code
4. National Electrical Code
,
,
e.
UL label: Provide motor starters bearing a vI.: label.
1.3
SUBMITI ALS:
A.
Submit Product Data for each item specified in accordance with Section 16050.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16155 - MOTOR STARTER
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page I of 4
\
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUAL MOTOR STARTER SWITCHES - FRACTIONAL HORSPOWER:
I
I
I
A.
Provide toggle type with a means of locking in the off position, thermal overload protection for
each ungrounded conductor, rated 1 horsepower at single phase voltages 115 or 230 volts.
I
B.
Enclosure: Galvanized cast malleable iron, or cast copper free aluminum, integral hubs and
external mounting ears, NEMA 3, 4, 12 compliances, suitable for damp or wet locations, Crouse
Hinds Type MC or MCC or equal.
I
I
e. Acceptable manufacturers:
I. Square D
2. General Electric
3. Allen Bradley
4. Cutler Hammer
5. Or approved equal
I
MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS:
I
I
I
A. Ratings: 10 horsepower maximum, 600 volts.
B.
Provide starters which are non-reversing with push-button or toggle operator, interchangeable
thermal units, two or three pole as required.
I
I
I
I
I
e.
Manual starters shall consist of a manually operated switch equipped with melting alloy type of
thermal overload relay. The starter shall be inoperable if a thermal oyerload is removed.
;
D.
Enclosure: NEMA 12 for dry locations. NEMA 4 or 4X for wet locations.
E.
Acceptable manufacturers:
I. Square D
2. Siemens
3. General Electric
4. Allen Bradley
5. Or approved equal
f,_~ :~~.....~....
I
SINGLE PHASE MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS:
I
I
A.
Provide per control diagram indicated on drawings.
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section \6\55 - MOTOR STARTER
Page 2 of 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
2.4 COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER:
A. For 3-phase motors, provide circllit breaker type combination starters consisting of a 3 pole fused
disconnect switch 3-phase full voltage non-reversing motor starter unless otherwise shown. Size
fuses at indicated on drawings.
B. Provide horsepower rating, voltage, with surface mounted NEMA I enclosure for indoor dry
locations or NEMA 4 enclosure for wet locations.
C. Provide three overload relays with one piece interchangeable thermal unit. The starter shall be
inoperable if the thermal unit is removed. A reset button shall be mounted in the cover and
operable from the outside without opening the door.
D. The disconnect handle shall control the switch with the door opened or closed and be clearly
marked to indicate the on or off position. The handle shall be lockable in the off position.
E. Where controls are not specifically shown or specified, provide "on" (RED), "off' (GREEN) full
voltage indicating lights and Hand-Off-Automatic switch mounted in the cover.
F. Provide 120 volt control transformer of sufficient capacity to handle operating coil and associated
controls. Fuse one side of the secondary winding and ground the other side.
G. Provide auxiliary contacts, 2 minimum, or more if shown.
H.
Acceptable manufacturers:
I. Square D
2. General Electric
3. Allen Bradley
4. Siemens
5. Or approved equal
i'
2.5
NAMEPLATES:
A.
Provide nameplates in a~c9rdance with Section 16050 for all motor starter units furnished and
installed per this specification. Inscribe nameplates with the name of the load served, the voltage,
phase and circuit number of supplying panel board.
2.6 FAN SHUTDOWN RELAYS:
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16155 - MOTOR STARTER
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page3 of 4
\
I
I
A.
Contractor shall provide fan shutdown relay wiring/raceway on all fans over 2000 cfm upon
activation of fire alarm. See Section 16700. See drawings for locations of air handling equipment
and associated duct type smoke detectors
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
I
3.1 INSTALLATION:
3.2
3.3
A. In industrial areas, surface mount starters in an accessible location near the equipment to be
served.
B.
Install thermal units according to full load current of motors provided and the National Electrical
Code.
I
I
I
I
e.
Secure to the mounting surface.
FAN SHUTDOWN WIRING:
A.
Provide wiring interlock connections for all (over 2000 cfm) fan starter control circuits via
Division 16 furnished fan shutdown relay to shutdown fans upon activation of the fire alarm.
Assume that duct type smoke detector will be provided with 120 volt rated auxiliary contacts.
Provide all wiring and raceway between duct type smoke detector and motor starter unit. Connect
per motor starter wiring diagram.
I
I
I
I
I
TESTS:
i
,
A.
For each motor, record the name of the load served, nameplate full load current, catalog number
and ampere rating off the corresponding thermal elernent and submit to Engineer at the cornpletion
of work.
END OF SECTION 16155
I
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16155 - MOTOR STARTER
Page 4 of 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
SECTION 16410 - SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
1.2
A.
B.
e.
D.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes individually ~ounted switches and circuit breakers, rated 600 V and less.
used for disconnecting and protection functions.
See Division 16 Section "Fuses" for fuses for fusible disconnect switches.
SUBMI'ITALS
Product Data: For each type of switch and circuit breaker indicated.
Shop Drawings: Include wiring diagrams for shunt-tripped circuit breakers.
Field quality-control test reports.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components. Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain switches and circuit breakers through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
equipment that
following:
Subject to compliance with requirements. AND compatibility with the
circuit breakers are being installed into, provide products by one of the
I.
2.
3.
4.
Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D Co.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page I of 3
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
2.2
\
2.3
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
I
I
A.
Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS I, Type HD, with lockable handle, interlocked with
cover.
I
B.
Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to
accommodate specified fuses, and lockable handle, interlocked with cover.
I
I
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB I, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
I
I. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
I
I
I
B.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and
number of poles.
I. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type HACR for heating, air-
conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
I
2.4 ENCLOSURES(for Switches)
A. Listed for environmental conditions of installed locations, including:
I
I
I
I
I. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2
A. Temporary Provisions: Remove temporary lifting provisions and blocking of rnoving parts.
B.
Identify components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
I
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
I
A.
Testing: After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuits
have been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
B. Inspections and Tests for Switches and Circuit Breakers:
inspections and perform tests, including the following:
Make internal and external
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 2 of 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
I. Inspect for freedom from physical damage, proper unit rating, mechanical condition,
enclosure integrity, cover operation, unit anchorage, clearances, and tightness of
electrical connections. If a loose electrical connection is observed on any unit, check
each electrical connection for each switch and circuit breaker with a torque wrench for
cornpliance with manufacturer's torquing instructions.
2. Test insulation resistance of each pole, phase-to-phase, and phase-to-ground, following
manufacturer's written instructions. Test insulation resistance of shunt trip circuits. Use
SOD-V minimum test voltage for units and circuits rated up to 250 V, l000-V minimum
test voltage for units rated more than 250 V. Measured insulation resistance must be 25
megohms, minimum, for switches rated up to 250 V, and 100 rnegohms, minimum, for
switches rated more than 250 V.
3. Test cover and other interlocks and interlock release devices for proper operation.
c.
Additional Inspections and Tests for Switches: Include the following:
I.
2.
3.
4.
Inspect for proper rating and fuse provisions.
Check adequacy and integrity of fuseholders by removing and installing fuses.
Check integrity of phase barriers.
Inspect blade alignment visually while operating switch to observe adequacy of blade
pressure.
D.
Additional Inspections and Tests for Circuit Breakers: Include the following:
I. Inspect for proper frame, trip, and fault current interrupting rating.
2. Test shunt trip devices, circuits, and actuating cornponents for proper operation.
E.
Correct defective and malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and reinspect and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 16410
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 3 of 3
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
\
SECTION 16442
PANELBOARDS
I
I
I
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
I
A.
This Section includes distribution and branch-circuit panelboards.
I
I
I
I
SUBMlTIALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, accessory, and
component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard, including the following:
I. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following data:
a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type I.
b. Bus configuration, and current, and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
d. . Listing for series rating of installed devices.
e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices.
I
I
2.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
I
C.
Panel board Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versIOns after load
balancing.
I
I
I
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
E.
Operation and maintenance data.
OUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiCtion, and marked for
intended use.
I
I
B.
Comply with NEMA PB I.
c.
Comply with NFPA 70.
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
November 2004 (RI)
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16442 - PANELBOARDS
Page I on
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
\
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
I. Square D Co. (No substitutions allowed)
2.2 FABRICATION AND FEATURES
A. Enclosures: Surface -mounted cab.inets. NEMA PB I, Type I, suitable for environmental
conditions at installed location.
B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box
dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or prirner coal.
D. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside panelboard
door.
E. Bus: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
F. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors;
bonded to box.
G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Rating:
I. Series rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.
H. Spaces for Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances
required for future installation of devices.
I. Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed
alike. Provide door in door style construction, both mounted on hinges. Door in Door
construction, both doors to be hinged.
2.3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB I, with interrupting capacity to rneet available fault
currents.
I. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads': 'and "i~~Umtaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip selling for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip sensitivity.
3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16442 - PANELBOARDS
November 2004 (R I)
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 20f3
3.1
\
A.
B.
e.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
e.
3.3
INSTALLATION
I
I
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB I. I.
I
Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts
unifonnly flush with wall finish.
I
Install filler plates in unused protective device spaces.
I
I
IDENTIFICATION
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
I
I
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic
nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant sc~ews.
Circuit Directory: Provide a copy of the panel schedule indicated on the drawings (as-built),
locate in clear pocket on backside of access door. Folded to fit as required.
I
I
FIELD OUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspection: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, demonstrate product capability and cornpliance with requirements.
I.
Procedures: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection indicated
in NET A A TS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers.
Test insulation resistance of panel board bus with a megohmrneter, and ground continuity
of cabinet and ground bus. Reject buses with insulation resistance less than 2 megohms.
Correct defective and malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
I
2.
3.
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 16442
... ......;..~::.......:.. r .~..~-'t-
I
November 2004 (RI)
RICHMOND/ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
I
Peninsula College Camplls- Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16442 - PANELBOARDS
Page 30f3
I
I
I
I
\
SECTION 16491 - FUSES
PART 1- GENERAL
I
1.1 SUMMARY
I
I
A.
This Section includes fuses rated 600 V and less.
1.2
SUBMITfALS
A. Product Data: For each fuse type indicated.
I
I
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
I
I
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from one source by a single rnanufacturer.
e.
Cornply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
I
I
I
I
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
I. -Spare Fuses: Furnish quantity equal to 20 percent of each fus~ type and size installed.
,
but not less than one set of each type and size. I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
I
--
A. _Avil\!nble__M."",faetilfers: Subject to cornpliance with requirements. manufacturers offering
- - - products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I
I
I
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; voltage rating consistent with
circuit voltage.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 16491 - FUSES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Page I of 2
"
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
\
3.1 FUSE APPLICATIONS
A. Main Feeders: Class RKI, time delay.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in fusible devices as indicated. Arrange fuses so fuse ratings are readable without
removing fuse.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION '
A. Install typewritten labels on inside door of each fused switch to indicate fuse replacement
information.
END OF SECTION 16491
. ""'.~"'-"'- ....,,----~ . -
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
SECTION 16491 : FUSES
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page20f 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building
surfaces lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture and lamp indicated. Include illustrations and
dimensions of fixtures, and showing photometric performance.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures
with ceiling system and other construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1
i
2.1
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A.
Description: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following:
1.
2.
Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. Lamp current crest factor:
less than 1.7.
Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category A I locations.
Sound Rating: A or better unless otherwise indicated.
Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Electronic type, unless otherwise indicated. Include the
following added features:
3.
4.
5.
a. Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.
b. Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound.
Peninsula College Campus -Wide Infrastructure Work- Bldg. C
Section 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 1 of 3
\
2.2
2.3
c.
Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light
output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps faiL
I
I
6.
7.
I
I
Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Energy saving type.
Electronic Ballast Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter I, Part 18, Subpart C for
limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer
equipment.
8.
Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: As follows:
I
I
a. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Above: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0
deg F starting temperature.
b. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Above: Electromagnetic type designed for use
with high-output lamps.
9. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR,
Chapter I, Part 18, Subpart C for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency
interference for consumer equipment.
I
I
I
I
I
LAMPS
A.
Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color-Rendering Index: 3500 K and 85 CRI,
unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Noncompact Fluorescent Lamp Life: Rated average shall be 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start
when used on rapid-start circuits.
FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
I
I
B.
i
Single-Stem Hangers: 112-inch steel tubing with swivel ball filling and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as fixture.
C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
D.
Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line connection and equipped with
threaded attachment cord and locking-type plug.
I
I
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
I
A.
Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Support fixture using grid plus
the following:
I
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Peninsula College Campus -Wide Infrastructure Work- Bldg. C
Section 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
Page20f 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
I. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate
not more than 6 inches from fixture corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid mernbers at or near each fIXture
corner.
3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Arrange as indicated on reflected ceiling plans
or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently of panel, with at least
two 314-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
B. Suspended Fixture Support:
I. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with two separate stem hangers.
2. Bracing for Pendants and Rods: If longer than 48 inches. brace to limit swinging.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Tests:
I. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.
2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
3. Report results in writing.
B. Defective and Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat
procedure until units are acceptable.
C. Report test results in writing.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
END OF SECTION 16511
\
,
Peninsula College Campus -Wide Infrastructure Work- Bldg. C
Section 16511 -INTERIOR LIGHTING
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 3 of 3
\
I
I
SECTIONI6753 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS
I
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
I
I
I
A.
Drawings and general provisi~ns of the Contract. including General and Supplernentary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY:
A.
This Section includes wire, cable, connecting devices, installation, and testing for wiring systems
to be used as signal pathways for voice and high-speed data transmission. This includes
voice/telephone cable systems/connectors, data cable systems/connectors, and associated patch
panels and equipment racks.
I
I
I
I
1.3 DEFINITIONS:
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
e. LAN: Local area network.
D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
E. STP: Shielded twisted pair.
F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. \
I
G. IDF: Intermediate Distribution Frame
H. MDF: Main Distribution Frame
1.4
APPLICABLE STANDARDS:
I
I
I
I
A.
ANSIITIAlEIA-568-B.I: Part I, General Requirements
I
B. ANSIITIA/EIA-568-B.2: Part 2, 100 ohm Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Standard.
C.
ANSIITIAlEIA-569-A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecomrnunications Pathways and
Spaces.
I
I
D.
ANSIITIAlEIA-607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16753 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Page I of8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
1.5
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
F.
1.6
1.7
E.
BICSI: Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual.
F.
BICSI: Cabling Installation Manual.
SUBMITIALS:
Product Data: Include data on features, ratings, and performance for each component specified.
Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components. Show access and
workspace requirements. Provide drawings in electronic format, AutoCAD 2000.
System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules, as specified in Part 3,
in software and format selected by Owner.
Samples: For workstation outlet connectors. jacks, jack assemblies, and faceplates for color
selection and evaluation of technical features.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of cables, connectors, and terminal equipment
certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. Provide
evidence of applicable registration or certification.
G.
Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
H.
Maintenance Data: For products to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division I.
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS:
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has a registerep communication distribution
designer certified by the Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B.
The Low Voltage cable system installer shall at a minimum be a firm normally employed in the
low voltage cabling industry with a reference list of (5) projects and contact names to confirm
successful Category 5E UTP cable plant projects.
e.
The Owner reserves the right to exercise it's discretion to require the contractor to remove from
the project any such employee of the contractor deemed by the Owner to be incompetent, careless,
or insubordinate.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
COORDINATION:
Peninsula College Campus. Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16753 - TELECOMMUNICA nONS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 2 of8
"
1.8
1.9
I
I
A.
Coordinate Work of this Section with Owner's telephone switch, telephone instrument,
workstation, and LAN equipment suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local
exchange carrier.
I
B.
Meet jointly with representatives of above organizations and Owner's representatives to exchange
information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.
I
I
I
C.
Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to other participants.
D.
Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, patch panels, and cross connects in
equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space
requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.
WARRANTY:
I
I
I
I
A.
Product Warranty for this Structured Cabling System shall be provided. Upon successful
completion of the installation and subsequent testing by the installer, Owner shall be provided with
a 20 year Warranty certificate registering the installation..
EXTRA MATERIALS:
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
Cable: 250 feet of each size and type used for Project. Furnish on reels.
Connecting Blocks: Ten
Outlet Assemblies: Ten
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2-PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Cable:
Berk- Tek, Inc.
A vaya Technologies
Belden Cable Corporation
Coming Cable Systems
Terminal and Connector Cornponents:
Ortronics
A vaya Technologies
Panduit Corporation
Corning Cable Systems
B.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS:
November 2(X)4
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16753 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Page 3 of 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
--
I. General: Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated
system. Match components and interconnections for optimum future performance. The
structured cabling system shall provide an end-to-end channel requirement that meets
Category 5e. To match these systems the copper cable, patch cords, and connectivity shall
be matched forming a Berk-TeklOrtronics, Avaya Systimax, or a Belden/Panduit integrated
component solution.
e.
MOUNTING ELEMENTS:
I. Raceways and Boxes: Comply with Sections 16050
2. Backboards: 48" x 96" x ~" interior-grade, flre-resistive-treated plywood. Provide in
quantities to adequately span the walls behind the patch racks in each room or space where
patch racks are required.
3. Racks: UL listed, wall mounted, modular-steel units designed for telecommunications
terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported. Chats worth or
approved equal. Baked-polyester powder coat. Final locations of in the
telecommunications closets to be as directed by the Owner's telecommunications
representative, prior to all rough-in of equipment or installation of cables. Provide racks in
sufficient quantities to terminate all cables and provide for 25% spare capacity.
D.
CABLE MANAGEMENT ELEMENTS:
I. Provide UL listed, vertical and horizontal cable management products suitable for fiber
optic and category 5e use shall be provided on all telecommunication patch racks. Vertical
cable management shall be located on both sides of each rack. Horizontal cable
management shall be provided on the top and bottom, and between each patch rack.
Provide additional cable managernent items as required to adequately support and train
cables in a neat, professional manner, that ensures that cable bending radii are not smaller
than manufacturer's tolerances.
E.
TWISTED-PAIR CABLES, CONNECTORS. AND TERMINAL EOUIPMENT:
,
I. Listed as complying with Category 5e of EIA/TIA-568-A
2. Conductors: Solid copper.
3. UTP Cable: Comply with EIAlTIA-568-A. Four thermoplastic-insulated, individually
twisted pairs of conductors; No. 24 A WG, color-coded; enclosed in non-plenum rated
jacket.
4.
UTP Cable Connecting Hardware:. Comply with EIA/TIA-568-A. !DC type, using
modules designed for punch-down caps or tools.
5.
IDC Terminal Block Modules: Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks.
Orthronics TracJack Modules, Category 5e, or equal.
6.
!DC Connecting Hardware: Consistent throughout Project.
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16753 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Page 4 of8
I
I
\
7.
Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple, numbered jack units with IDC-type
connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
Wiring to be connected per TIA 568B. Provide patch racks in sufficient quantities to
terminate all cables and provide for 25% spare capacity.
I
a. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group, plus spares and
blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria.
I
I
I
b. Mounting: Wall
8.
Jacks and Jack Assemblies for UTP Cable: Modular, color-coded, Category 5e, RJ-45
receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.
9. UTP Patch Cords: Four-pair cables in 48-inch lengths, terminated with RJ-45 plug at each
end. Category 5e minimum. Provide in sufficient quantities to cross-patch all outlets at the
patch panels, plus 10 percent spare capacity.
PART 3. EXECUTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10. Workstation Outlets: Dual jack-connector assemblies mounted in single gang faceplate.
a. Faceplate: High-impact plastic; color as selected by Architect.
b. Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated.
c. Legend: Label jacks with agreed upon identification scheme, using a silk-screening
or engraving process.
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements
for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and
other conditions affecting installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected. '
3.2 APPLICATION OF MEDIA:
A. Use UTP cable complying with Category 5e of EIAffIA-568-A for runs between wiring closets
and workstation outlets.
B. When workstation outlets (identified on the drawings as open trianbles) are shown on the plan
drawings, provide (2) Cat 5, 4pair telecommunications cables between the outlet location and the
nearest telecommunications closet. Provide outlet face plate and cable termination devices/jacks.
Attelecommunciation closet terminate the cables on the patch rack(s).
I
3.3
INSTALLATION:
I
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters.
In addition raceway is not required in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions,
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C November 2004
Section 16753 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 5 of8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
where code acceptable cable wiring methods may be used. Provide raceways when routed in
unfinished spaces and exterior locations. Use UL-listed non-plenum in all locations. Conceal
raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces. Route on exterior of building only is so noted on
the drawings. Route wiring above ceilings in consolidated runs, in a neat and orderly fashion,
running along walls and structural elements above the ceiling. All telecommunications wiring
shall be supported by the use of O-Rings, J-Hooks, or other devices specifically designed for such
use.
B.
Install cable using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 5e rating
of components and that ensure Category 5e performance of completed and linked signal paths, end
to end.
e.
Install cable without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket.
D.
Do not bend cable in handling or in installing to smaller radii than minimums recommended by
manufacturer.
E.
Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions.
I. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in the same raceway.
2. Use pulling compound or lubricant if necessary. Use compounds that will not damage
conductor or insulation.
3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wirelcable grips, that
will not damage media or raceway.
F.
Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
G.
Secure and support. cable at intervals not exceeding 36 inches and not more than 6 inches from
cabinets, boxes, fillings, outlets, racks, frames, and tenninals.
H.
Wiring within Wiring Closets and Enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors. Train
conductors to terminal points with no excess. Use lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent
straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smilller radii than minimums
,
recommended by manufacturer.
I.
Separation of Wires: Comply with EIA/TIA-569 rules for separating unshielded copper
communication and data-processing equipment cables from potential EM! sources, including
electrical power lines and equipment.
J.
Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and
patch panels. Wiring terminations at patch panels to be in accordance with TIA 568B.
K.
Use splice and tap connectors compatible with media types.
3.4 GROUNDING:
A.
Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding."
B. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize
ground loops, cornmon-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C November 2004
Section J 6753 . TELECOMMUNICATIONS RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 60f8
35
A.
B.
e.
D.
3.6
A.
B.
I
I
C. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.
D.
I
I
I
I
Signal Ground Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet. Isolate from power
system and equipment grounding.
E.
Signal Ground Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators.
F.
Signal Ground Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground terminal in each
wiring closet and equipment room.
INSTALLATION IN EQUIPMENT ROOMS AND WIRING CLOSETS:
Line walls with plywood backboards, floor to ceiling.
Mount patch panels, terminal strips, and other connecting hardware on freestanding racks, unless
otherwise indicated.
I
I
I
I
I
Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
Use patch panels to terminate cables entering the space, unless otherwise indicated.
IDENTIFICATION:
Identify system components complying with applicable requirements in Division 16 Section 16195
and the following Specifications.
System: Use an Owner accepted, unique, three-syllable alphanumeric designation for each cable,
and label cable and jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with the same
designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement.
I. First syllable identifies and locates wiring closet or equipment room where cable originates.
2. Second syllable identifies and locates cross-connect or patc~-panel field in which cable
tenninates. j
3. Third syllable designates type of media (copper or fiber) and position occupied by cable
pairs or fibers in the field.
I
I
I
c.
Workstation: Label cables within outlet boxes.
D. Distribution Racks and Frames: Label each unit and field within that unit.
E.
Within Connector Fields, in Wiring Closets and Equipment Rooms: Label each connector and
each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs
are used for both communication and data-processing equipment, use a different color for jacks
and plugs of each service.
I
I
I
F.
Cables, General: Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is
accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each wiring closet and equipment room. List
incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid
I
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16753 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Page 7 of 8
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
\
3.7
3.8
3.9
frame and clear plastic cover. Provide electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for
Project, in software and format selected by Owner.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A.
Testing: On installation of cable and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance
with requirements. Test each signal path (100% of all installed cables) for end-to-end
performance from each end of all. pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have
been satisfactorily completed.
B.
Copper Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for
continuity and shorts. Use Class 2 bidirectional Category 5e tester. Test for faulty connectors,
splices, and terminations. Test according to EIA/TIA-TSB 67, "Transmission Performance
Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems." Link performance
for UTP cables must rneet minimum criteria of EIAITIA-568-A.
e.
Correct malfunctioning units at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
CLEANING:
A.
After completing system installation, including outlet fillings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches,
and abrasions.
DEMONSTRATION:
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain systems.
I. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures andi schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.
2. Train designated personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing
signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and extending
wiring to establish new workstation outlets.
B.
Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division I Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data."
e.
Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 16753
November 2004
RICHMOND I ARCHOS ENGINEERING
Peninsula College Campus-Wide Infrastructure Work - Bldg. C
Section 16753 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Page 8 of8